Technical Manuals Water - Queensland Urban Utilities
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
QUEENSLAND URBAN UTILITIES
HUDDART STREET, ALDERLEY WATER BOOSTER PUMP STATION
WB002
________________________________
ELECTRICAL SWITCHBOARD OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Developed by:
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
J & P RICHARDSON INDUSTRIES CAMPBELL AVENUE WACOL QLD 4076 ABN 23 001 952 325 ACN 001 952 325 Ph. (07) 3271 2911 Fax. (07) 3271 3623
26/11/2012
Page 1 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
J & P Richardson Industries Pty Ltd
CONTENTS
1 Introduction 1.1 Operating Instructions
2 Description of Operation 2.1 Mode Selection 2.2 Manual Control 2.3 Automatic Control
3 Pumps 4 Electrical Equipment Technical Information
4.1 Circuit Breakers & Isolators 4.2 Surge Protection & Fuses 4.3 Control Devices 4.4 Instruments 4.5 Pushbuttons & Selector Switches 4.6 Terminals & Links 4.7 Telemetry & Power 4.8 Accessories 5 Switchboard Works Test Results 6 "As Constructed" Drawings 7 Service & Maintenance
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Revision 0
26/11/2012
Date: 2 July 2012
Page 2 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
J & P Richardson Industries Pty Ltd
1 INTRODUCTION
These operating instructions cover the Huddart Street, Alderley Pumping Station WB002 electrical equipment supplied by J & P Richardson Industries Pty Ltd in 2011, 2012.
1.1 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Normal operation of the pumping station is in the automatic mode with control by means of a Master Programmable Logic Controller (PLC), which receives level signals from the Level Measurement System in the wet well/Electronic Level Relays/Float Switches. Manual operation control of the station is available by means of selector switches on the motor control switchboard.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Revision 0
26/11/2012
Date: 2 July 2012
Page 3 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
J & P Richardson Industries Pty Ltd
2 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION
2.1 MODE SELECTION The station can be operated either automatically or manually with mode selection being made by means of the mode selector switches mounted on each pump section of the switchboard. These selector switches are designated with the following mode selections AUTO-OFFMAN.
2.2 MANUAL CONTROL Each pumping unit can be run in manual control from the motor control centre by: -
a) Selecting the "MAN" setting on the "MODE SELECTOR SWITCHES" as described in Clause 2.1
b) Starting by "START" pushbutton. c) Stopping by "STOP" pushbutton.
N.B. DO NOT LEAVE IN MANUAL WHILE STATION UNATTENDED
2.3 AUTOMATIC CONTROL For automatic control of the station: -
a) The "MODE SELECTOR SWITCHES" on the switchboard should be in the "AUTO" position.
b) The "DUTY SELECTOR SWITCH" should be set to provide the desired pump operation sequence. The "DUTY SELECTOR SWITCH" is marked: -
1-2 2-1
The pumps should be alternated at regular intervals to ensure that each pump unit has a reasonably equal running time. The total running hours of each pump unit is displayed on the hour meter located on each pump section of the switchboard. c) The automatic Duty Selection is done via the PLC software. Refer PLC SOFTWARE Section for details. The total running hours of each pump unit is displayed on the hour meter located on each pump section of the switchboard. d) The automatic starting and stopping of the pumps is controlled by signals from the Master PLC.
For NORMAL OPERATION, each of the pump selector switches should have "AUTO" mode selected.
In the AUTOMATIC mode the selected Duty Pump unit will start automatically as preset by the level in the wet well. In the event of the duty pump not being capable of supplying enough flow to continue draining the wet well and the well level rises to a second preset level, then the Standby Pump unit will automatically start, to provide additional pumping. The supplementary pump unit also takes over for the respective pump duty on the occurrence of one the Duty Pump unit failing.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Revision 0
26/11/2012
Date: 2 July 2012
Page 4 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual J & P Richardson Industries Pty Ltd
3 PUMPS
SUPPLIER:
MODEL: kW RATING:
Grundfos 30 Blanck Street Ormeau Qld 4208
Ph: (07) 5540 6700 Fax: (07) 5540 6710
Hydro MPC-E 4xCRE45-2
7.5
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Revision 0
26/11/2012
Date: 2 July 2012
Page 5 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
GRUNDFOS INSTRUCTIONS
BoosterpaQ Hydro MPC
Installation and operating instructions
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 6 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
LIMITED WARRANTY
Products manufactured by GRUNDFOS PUMPS CORPORATION (Grundfos) are warranted to the original user only to be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of 24 months from date of installation, but not more than 30 months from date of manufacture. Grundfos' liability under this warranty shall be limited to repairing or replacing at Grundfos' option, without charge, F.O.B. Grundfos' factory or authorized service station, any product of Grundfos' manufacture. Grundfos will not be liable for any costs of removal, installation, transportation, or any other charges which may arise in connection with a warranty claim. Products which are sold but not manufactured by Grundfos are subject to the warranty provided by the manufacturer of said products and not by Grundfos' warranty. Grundfos will not be liable for damage or wear to products caused by abnormal operating conditions, accident, abuse, misuse, unauthorized alteration or repair, or if the product was not installed in accordance with Grundfos' printed installation and operating instructions.
To obtain service under this warranty, the defective product must be returned to the distributor or dealer of Grundfos' products from which it was purchased together with proof of purchase and installation date, failure date, and supporting installation data. Unless otherwise provided, the distributor or dealer will contact Grundfos or an authorized service station for instructions. Any defective product to be returned to Grundfos or a service station must be sent freight prepaid; documentation supporting the warranty claim and/or a Return Material Authorization must be included if so instructed.
GRUNDFOS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSSES, OR EXPENSES ARISING FROM INSTALLATION, USE, OR ANY OTHER CAUSES. THERE ARE NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THOSE WARRANTIES DESCRIBED OR REFERRED TO ABOVE.
Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages and some jurisdictions do not allow limit actions on how long implied warranties may last. Therefore, the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
2 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 7 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
CONTENTS
1. Symbols used in this document
2. Scope of these instructions
3. Product description
4. Nameplate
5. Software label
6. Type key 6.1 Examples of control variants
7. 7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.4 7.1.5 7.2 7.3
Installation Mechanical installation Location Pipework Foundation Vibration dampers Expansion joints Electrical installation Start-up
8. Control panel 8.1 Display (pos. 1) 8.1.1 Menu line 8.1.2 Top line 8.1.3 Graphical illustration 8.1.4 Scroll bar 8.1.5 Bottom line 8.2 Buttons and indicator lights 8.2.1 Arrow to the right (pos. 2) 8.2.2 Help (pos. 3) 8.2.3 Up and down (pos. 4 and 5) 8.2.4 Plus and minus (pos. 6 and 7) 8.2.5 Esc (pos. 8) 8.2.6 Home (pos. 9) 8.2.7 Ok (pos. 10) 8.2.8 Indicator lights (pos. 11 and 12) 8.2.9 Contrast (pos. 13) 8.2.10 Back light
9. 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.4.1 9.4.2 9.4.3 9.4.4 9.4.5 9.4.6 9.4.7 9.4.8 9.5 9.5.1 9.5.2 9.5.3 9.5.4 9.5.5 9.5.6
9.6 9.6.1 9.6.2 9.6.3 9.7 9.7.1 9.7.2 9.7.3 9.7.4 9.7.5
Functions Tree of functions Overview Description of functions Status (1) Current alarms (3.1) System (1.2) Operating mode (1.2.1) Setpoint (1.2.2) Setpoint influence (1.2.3) Measured values (1.2.4) Analog inputs (1.2.5) Pump 1...6 (1.3 to 1.8) Operation (2) Operation (2) System operating mode (2.1.1) Control mode (2.1.2) Setpoints (2.1.3) Individual pump control (2.1.4) Setting of individual operating mode (2.1.4.1 to 2.1.4.6) Alarm (3) Alarm status (3) Current alarms (3.1) Alarm log (3.2) Settings (4) Primary controller (4.1) PI controller (4.1.1) Alternative setpoints (4.1.2) Alternative setpoints 2 to 7 (4.1.2.1 to 4.1.2.7) External setpoint influence (4.1.3)
Page
4
4
4
5
5
6 6
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 10 10
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 17 19 19 19 19 20 20 20 21 21 21 21 22 22 23 25 25
26 27 27 32 32 32 33 33 33 34 34
9.7.6 Setting of influence function (4.1.3.2)
35
9.7.7 Primary sensor (4.1.4)
35
9.7.8 Clock program (4.1.6)
36
9.7.9 Proportional pressure (4.1.7)
36
9.7.10 S-system configuration (4.1.8)
37
9.7.11 Pump cascade control (4.2)
37
9.7.12 Min. time between start/stop (4.2.1)
38
9.7.13 Max. number of starts/hour (4.2.1)
38
9.7.14 Standby pumps (4.2.3)
38
9.7.15 Forced pump changeover (4.2.4)
39
9.7.16 Pump test run (4.2.5)
39
9.7.17 Pilot pump (4.2.6)
40
9.7.18 Pump stop attempt (4.2.7)
40
9.7.19 Pump start and stop speed (4.2.8)
41
9.7.20 Min. performance (4.2.9)
41
9.7.21 Compensation for pump start-up time (4.2.10)
42
9.7.22 Secondary functions (4.3)
42
9.7.23 Stop function (4.3.1)
42
9.7.24 Soft pressure build-up (4.3.3)
44
9.7.25 Emergency run (4.3.5)
45
9.7.26 Digital inputs (4.3.7)
45
9.7.27 Functions of digital inputs (4.3.7.1)
46
9.7.28 Analog inputs (4.3.8)
46
9.7.29 Analog inputs (4.3.8.1 to 4.3.8.7)
47
9.7.30 Analog inputs and measured value
(4.3.8.1.1 to 4.3.8.7.1)
47
9.7.31 Digital outputs (4.3.9)
48
9.7.32 Functions of digital outputs (4.3.9.1 to 4.3.9.16)
48
9.7.33 Min., max. and user-defined duty (4.3.14)
49
9.7.34 Min. duty (4.3.14.1)
49
9.7.35 Max. duty (4.3.14.2)
49
9.7.36 User-defined duty (4.3.14.3)
50
9.7.37 Pump curve data (4.3.19)
50
9.7.38 Control source (4.3.20)
51
9.7.39 Fixed inlet pressure (4.3.22)
52
9.7.40 Flow estimation (4.3.23)
52
9.7.41 Monitoring functions (4.4)
52
9.7.42 Dry-running protection (4.4.1)
53
9.7.43 Dry-running protection with pressure/level switch
(4.4.1.1)
53
9.7.44 Dry-running protection with pressure transmitter
(4.4.1.2)
54
9.7.45 Dry-running protection with level transmitter (4.4.1.3) 54
9.7.46 Min. pressure (4.4.2)
55
9.7.47 Max. pressure (4.4.3)
55
9.7.48 External fault (4.4.4)
56
9.7.49 Limit 1 and 2 exceeded (4.4.5 and 4.4.6)
56
9.7.50 Pumps outside duty range (4.4.7)
57
9.7.51 Pressure relief (4.4.8)
57
9.7.52 Functions, CU 351 (4.5)
58
9.7.53 Display language (4.5.1)
58
9.7.54 Display units (4.5.2)
59
9.7.55 Date and time (4.5.3)
60
9.7.56 Passwords (4.5.4)
60
9.7.57 Ethernet (4.5.5)
60
9.7.58 GENIbus number (4.5.6)
61
9.7.59 Software status (4.5.9)
61
9.8 Data communication
62
9.8.1 Ethernet
62
9.8.2 GENIbus
64
10. External variable frequency drive
65
10.1 VLT 2800
65
10.2 Danfoss VLT 8000 factory settings
66
10.3 Danfoss VLT 8000 extended menu programming
66
10.4 Danfoss VLT 8000 factory settings
67
10.5 Danfoss VLT 8000 extended menu programming
67
10.6 Baldor Smart motor settings
68
10.7 VLT FC 202
69
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
3 Page 8 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
11. Fault finding chart
70
12. Maintenance
71
12.1 Pumps
71
12.2 Motor bearings
71
12.3 CU 351
71
13. Frost protection
71
14. Taking out of operation
71
15. Technical data
71
15.1 Pressure
71
15.2 Temperature
72
15.3 Relative humidity
72
15.4 Sound pressure
72
16. Electrical data
72
17. Related documents
72
18. Disposal
72
Warning
Prior to installation, read these installation and operating instructions. Installation and operation must comply with local regulations and accepted codes of good practice.
1. Symbols used in this document
Warning
If these safety instructions are not observed, it may result in personal injury!
If these safety instructions are not observed, it Caution may result in malfunction or damage to the
equipment!
Note
Notes or instructions that make the job easier and ensure safe operation.
2. Scope of these instructions
These installation and operating instructions apply to Grundfos Hydro MPC booster systems. Hydro MPC is a range of factory-assembled booster systems, ready for installation and operation.
3. Product description
As standard, Hydro MPC booster systems consist of two to six CR(E) pumps coupled in parallel and mounted on a common base frame with all the necessary fittings and a control panel.
Note
A diaphragm tank is required in most installations.
1
9
8 2
7 3
6
5
4
Fig. 1 Hydro MPC booster system
Pos.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Description
Control panel Nameplate Suction manifold (stainless steel) Isolating valve Base frame (stainless steel) Non-return valve Discharge manifold (stainless steel) Pressure transmitter/pressure gauge Pump
Quantity
1 1 1 2 per pump 1 1 per pump 1 12 2 - 6
TM03 1171 1205
4 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 9 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Hydro MPC booster systems are divided into seven groups based on control variant:
Control variant
Description
-E -ED -ES -EF -EDF
-F -S
Two to six CRE pumps
Two CRE pumps and up to four constant speed CR pumps
One CRE pump and up to five constant speed CR pumps
Two to six CR pumps connected to external variable frequency drives (VFD)
Two CR pumps connected to external variable frequency drives and up to four constant speed CR pumps
Up to six CR pumps connected to an external variable frequency drive. The speed-controlled operation alternates between the pumps.
Two to six constant speed CR pumps
See also section 6.1 Examples of control variants.
Hydro MPC booster systems always includes applicationoptimised software for setting the booster system to the application in question.
4. Nameplate
The nameplate of the booster system is fitted on the base frame. See position 2 in fig. 1.
Pos. Description
1 Type designation 2 Model 3 Serial number 4 Supply voltage 5 Maximum operating pressure in PSI 6 Liquid temperature in °F 7 Maximum flow rate in GPM 8 Minimum head in feet 9 Number of fixed speed and/or auxiliary pumps 10 Motor power in HP for fixed speed pumps 11 Nominal voltage in volts for fixed speed pumps 12 Number of E-pumps 13 Motor power in HP for E-pumps
14 Nominal voltage in volts for E-pumps
15 Number of pilot pumps
16 Motor power in HP for pilot pump
17 Nominal voltage in volts for pilot pump
18 Order number
1924
Options
25 Enclosure type
26 Weight in lbs
27 Approval marks
28 Production location & date code
5. Software label
The software label is placed on the back of the CU 351 controller.
1. Control MPC 1
2. C-MPC options 2
3. Hydro MPC 3
4. H-MPC options 4
5. Pump data 5
TM03 1741 3105 TM03 1742 3105
Fig. 2 Nameplate
CONFIGURATION STEPS - PLEASE FOLLOW THE NUMBERS
Fig. 3 Software label
96586126
Pos.
1 2 3 4 5
Description
Control MPC - GSC file number Control MPC options - GSC file numbers Hydro MPC - GSC file number Hydro MPC options - GSC file numbers Pump data - GSC file numbers
Note
A GSC (Grundfos Standard Configuration) file is a configuration data file.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
5 Page 10 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
6. Type key
Example
Hydro MPC -ED 2 CRE 5-10 1 CR 5-10
3x460 V, 60Hz
Type range
Subgroups: Pumps with integrated variable frequency drive: -E, -ED, -ES Pumps with external VFD: -EF, -EDF, -F Constant speed pumps (start/stop): -S Number of pumps with integrated variable frequency drive and pump type Number of constant speed pumps and pump type Supply voltage, frequency
6.1 Examples of control variants
Booster systems with motors that include an integrated variable frequency drive (CRE)
Hydro MPC-E
Hydro MPC booster system with three CRE pumps.
Hydro MPC-ED
Hydro MPC booster system with two CRE pumps and one constant speed CR pump.
Hydro MPC-ES
Hydro MPC booster system with one CRE pump and two constant speed CR pumps.
TM03 0996 0905
TM03 0994 0905
TM03 0993 0905
PT
PT
PT
One CRE pump in operation.
H
One CRE pump in operation.
H
One CRE pump in operation.
H
TM00 7995 2296
TM00 7995 2296
TM00 7995 2296
Hset
Hset
Hset
Three CRE pumps in operation.
H
Q
Q
Q
Two CRE pumps and one constant speed One CRE pump and two constant speed CR
CR pump in operation.
pumps in operation.
H
H
TM00 7998 2296
TM03 0814 0505
TM00 7996 2296
Hset
Hset
Hset
Q
Q
Q
· The MPC-E system maintains a constant · The MPC-ED system maintains a constant · The MPC-ES system maintains a constant
pressure through continuous adjustment pressure through continuous adjustment pressure through continuous adjustment
of the speed of the pumps.
of the speed of two CRE pumps, while the of the speed of the CRE pump. The other
· The system performance is adjusted to
CR pump is constant speed.
pumps are cut in/out according to demand
the demand through cutting in/out the
· One CRE pump always starts first. If the
to achieve a performance corresponding
required number of pumps and through
pressure cannot be maintained by the
to the consumption.
parallel control of the pumps in operation. pump, the second CRE pump will be cut · The CRE pump always starts first. If the
· Pump changeover is automatic and
in. If the two CRE pumps cannot maintain pressure cannot be maintained by the
depends on load, operating hours and
the pressure, the CR pump will be cut in. pump, one or both CR pumps will be cut
fault.
· Pump changeover is automatic and
in.
· All pumps in operation will run at equal
depends on load, operating hours and · Changeover among the constant speed
speed.
fault.
pumps is automatic and depends on load,
operating hours and fault.
6 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 11 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Booster systems with motors connected to external variable frequency drive (VFD)
Hydro MPC-EF
Hydro MPC booster system with three CR pumps connected to external variable frequency drives in the control panel.
Hydro MPC-EDF
Hydro MPC booster system with two CR pumps connected to external frequency converters in the control cabinet and one constant speed CR pump.
Hydro MPC-F
Hydro MPC booster system with three CR pumps connected to an external frequency converter in the control cabinet. The speed-controlled operation alternates between the pumps.
TM03 1265 1505
TM03 0997 0905
TM03 0995 0905
PT
PT
PT
One CR pump in operation.
H
One CR pump connected to an external variable frequency drive in operation.
H
One CR pump connected to an external variable frequency drive in operation.
H
TM00 7995 2296
TM00 7995 2296
TM00 7995 2296
Hset
Three CR pumps in operation.
H
Hset
Hset
Q
Q
Q
Two CR pumps connected to external
One CR pump connected to an external
variable frequency drives and one constant variable frequency drive and two constant
speed CR pump in operation.
speed CR pumps in operation.
H
H
TM00 7998 2296
TM03 0814 0505
TM00 7996 2296
Hset
Hset
Hset
Q
Q
Q
· The MPC-EF system maintains a constant · The MPC-EDF system maintains a
· The MPC-F system maintains a constant
pressure through continuous adjustment constant pressure through continuous
pressure through continuous adjustment
of the speed of the pumps.
adjustment of the speed of two CR pumps of the speed of the CR pump connected to
· The system performance is adjusted to the demand through cutting in/out the required number of pumps and through
connected to external variable frequency drives, while the third CR pump is constant speed.
the external variable frequency drive. The speed-controlled operation alternates between the pumps.
parallel control of the pumps in operation. · One CR pump connected to an external · One CR pump connected to the external
· Pump changeover is automatic and depends on load, operating hours and fault.
· All pumps in operation will run at equal speed.
variable frequency drive always starts
variable frequency drive always starts
first. If the pressure cannot be maintained first. If the pressure cannot be maintained
by the pump, the second CR pump
by the pump, one or two constant speed
connected to an external variable
CR pumps will be cut in.
frequency drive will be cut in. If the
· Pump changeover is automatic and
pressure cannot be maintained by the two depends on load, operating hours and
pumps, the constant speed CR pump will fault.
be cut in.
· Pump changeover is automatic and
depends on load, operating hours and
fault.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
7 Page 12 of 382
TM03 0999 0905
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Booster system with constant speed pumps (on/off) Hydro MPC-S
Hydro MPC booster system with three constant speed CR pumps.
PT
One constant speed CR pump in operation.
H
Hstop Hset
Q
Three constant speed CR pumps in operation.
H
Hstop Hset
Q
· Hydro MPC-S maintains a pressure differential through cutting in/out the required number of pumps.
· The operating range of the pumps will lie between Hset and Hstop (cut-out pressure).
· Pump changeover is automatic and depends on load, operating hours and fault.
TM03 9204 3607
TM03 9203 3607
8 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 13 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
7. Installation
Warning Installation and operation must comply with local regulations and accepted codes of good practice.
Before installation check that · the booster system corresponds to the one ordered. · no visible parts have been damaged.
7.1 Mechanical installation
7.1.1 Location The booster system must be installed in a well ventilated room to ensure sufficient cooling of the motors and control panel.
Note
Hydro MPC is not designed for outdoor installation unless protected and must not be exposed to direct sunlight.
The booster system must have a 3 feet clearance in front and on the two sides for inspection and dismantling.
7.1.2 Pipework
Arrows on the pump base show the direction of flow of water through the pump.
The pipework connected to the booster system must be of adequate size. The pipes are connected to the manifolds of the booster system. Either end can be used. Apply sealing compound to the unused end of the manifold and fit the screw cap. For manifolds with flanges, fit a blanking flange with gasket.
To achieve optimum operation and minimise noise and vibration, it may be necessary to consider vibration dampening of the booster system.
Noise and vibration are generated by the rotations in the motor and pump and by the flow in pipework and fittings. The effect on the environment is subjective and depends on correct installation and the state of the other parts of the system.
If booster system is to be installed where first customer on the line is close to the booster system, it is advisable to fit expansion joints on the suction and discharge pipes to prevent vibration being transmitted through the pipework.
All nuts should be checked and re-tightened if necessary prior to start-up. The pipes must be fastened to parts of the building to ensure that they cannot move or be twisted.
7.1.3 Foundation
The booster system should be positioned on an even and solid surface, for instance a concrete floor or foundation. If the booster system is not fitted with machine shoes, it must be bolted to the floor or foundation.
Note
As a rule the weight of a concrete foundation should be 1.5 x the weight of the booster system.
7.1.4 Vibration dampers
To prevent the transmission of vibrations to buildings, it imay be necessary to isolate the booster system foundation from building parts by means of vibration dampers.
The right damper varies from installation to installation, and a wrong damper may increase the vibration level. Vibration dampers should therefore be sized by the supplier of vibration dampers. If the booster system is installed on a base frame with vibration dampers, expansion joints should always be fitted on the manifolds. This is important to prevent the booster system from "hanging" in the pipework.
7.1.5 Expansion joints
Expansion joints are installed to · absorb expansions/contractions in the pipework caused by
changing liquid temperature · reduce mechanical strains in connection with pressure surges
in the pipework · isolate mechanical structure-borne noise in the pipework
(only rubber bellows expansion joints).
Note
Expansion joints must not be installed to compensate for inaccuracies in the pipework such as center displacement of flanges.
Fit expansion joints at a distance of minimum 1 to 1 1/2 times the nominal flange diameter from the manifold on the suction as well as on the discharge side. This prevents the development of turbulence in the expansion joints, resulting in better suction conditions and a minimum pressure loss on the pressure side. At high water velocities (> 10 ft/sec) it is advisable to install larger expansion joints corresponding to the pipework.
TM03 2154 3805 TM02 4981 1902 - TM02 4979 1902
1
1
2
2
Fig. 4
3
3
Sketch showing the position of expansion joints, pipe supports and machine shoes
Pos. Description
1 Expansion joint
2
Pipe support and good location for system isolation valve (not shown)
3 Machine shoe
Note
Expansion joints, pipe supports and machine shoes shown in the figure above are not supplied with a standard booster system.
Fig. 5 Examples of rubber bellows expansion joints without and with limit rods
Expansion joints with limit rods can be used to minimise the forces caused by the expansion joints. Expansion joints with limit rods are always recommended for flanges larger than 6 inches. The pipework should be anchored so that it does not stress the expansion joints and the pump. Follow the supplier's instructions and pass them on to advisers or pipe installers.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
9 Page 14 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
7.2 Electrical installation
Warning
The electrical installation should be carried out by an authorized person in accordance with local regulations and the relevant wiring diagram.
· The electrical installation of the booster system must comply with enclosure class IP54.
· Make sure that the booster system is suitable for the electricity supply to which it is connected.
· Make sure that the wire cross-section corresponds to the specifications in the wiring diagram.
The connection of the electrical supply, transmitters and external monitoring equipment must be carried out by an authorized electrician in accordance with the NEC, local regulations and the BoosterpaQ wiring diagram.
Ensure that the Hydro MPC controls and the pumps are suitable for the electricity supply on which they will be used (see Technical Data). Please read the wiring diagram carefully. According to the NEC, if the motors cannot be seen from the control panel, they must be fitted with a disconnect switch.
Any BoosterpaQ that utilizes a variable frequency drive (E, ED, ES, EF, EDF, F) should be connected to an electrical supply with all phase lines electrically symmetrical with respect to ground. A "four wire wye" electrical supply with line impedance between 0.5% - 3% is recommended. If a variable frequency drive is connected to a delta transformer or if line impedance is not within the recommended 0.5% - 3%, the drive may not operate correctly and may not provide optimum performance (excessive faults, erratic behavior, or complete failure). Ask your power company or electrician to determine what type of electrical supply is present. Generator supplied power must meet public utility power quality standards.
7.3 Start-up
1. Have a qualified person check for proper power supply and plumbing connections. Make sure the main power is off.
2. Check that the air pre-charge in the diaphragm tank is 0.7 times the required discharge pressure set-point (0.9 times for MPC-S systems). System pressure must not be applied to the tank connection during the tank precharge process. If water is supplied to the tank from the system, close the tank valve and bleed off the pressure in the tank before the pressurizing process.
Prime the system as follows
3. Suction pressure system (pumps are flooded at least as high as the highest part of the pumps)
close all discharge manifold pump isolation valves and open all inlet manifold pump isolation valves
open the vent plug on top of each pump. It is a small hex head screw in a large vent plug. Air and water will escape from the pump through a small hole in the large vent plug. When the air is out and water is flowing steadily, tighten the small hex head screw on the vent plug to stop the flow.
Note
If you are filling an empty piping system, do not allow the pumps to run with the discharge valves wide open as cavitation may occur.
4. Suction lift system (the water source is below the pumps or does not flood the pumps to the highest point on the pumps).
close all discharge manifold pump isolation valves and open all inlet manifold pump isolation valves
for suction lift applications, a foot valve must be placed on the inlet piping at the water source (tank, etc). If there is a fill point above the highest point of the pumps, you may fill the system from this point. If there is no fill point above the highest point of the pumps, remove the large vent plug on each pump. Fill each pump until the water is up to the vent plug, then replace the vent plugs.
5. Ensure all circuit breakers are in the "on" position.
6. Make sure the discharge manifold pump isolation valves are closed. Switch on main power.
Caution The pumps may start at this time.
7. At this time "Start-up wizard" may now be ran. Step 8 can be skipped upon completion of "Start-up wizard". If "Start-up wizard" could not be ran or already ran proceed to step 8.
8. Run the "Start-up wizard" again by performing the following: Move top line display to "Settings". If prompted for password enter "6814", next move down to "Functions, CU 351" and press the "OK" button. Now move down to "Run wizard again" and press the "OK" button.
9. Vent the system by opening the vent plug on each pump (as in Step 3, while the pump is running starting in step 18 of the "Start-up wizard".). Venting with the pumps running ensures all air is removed from the suction piping. Do not run the system with the discharge manifold pump isolation valves closed more than five minutes to prevent over-heating of the pump liquid.
10.As pumps stop, check pump rotation. Repeat as necessary. If the area is dark, a flashlight may be required, or remove a coupling guard on each pump for better visibility. Disconnect the main power when removing coupling guards. Warning
Do not touch the couplings while the pumps are turning as injury may result. Replace all coupling guards after the rotation check. Disconnect main power when removing and replacing coupling guards (or open service disconnect switches if this option was supplied).
If the rotation is incorrect on any 3 phase pumps, switch any 2 of the 3 power main wires supplied to the control panel (L1, L2, L3). If that doesn't correct the rotation, call your Grundfos representative.
Note
If you are filling an empty piping system, do not allow the pumps to run with the discharge valves wide open as cavitation may occur.
11.Upon completion of venting pumps and checking for correct rotation you are now ready to bring the BoosterpaQ into normal operation. With the discharge manifold isolation valves still closed, partially open each pump discharge isolation valve to allow water to enter into the discharge piping of the BoosterpaQ. Continue the process of filling the discharge piping until discharge piping pressure is approximately at the desired Setpoint pressure of the BoosterpaQ.
12.Open the discharge manifold isolation valves for each pump completely. System is now ready for operation.
It may be necessary to clear alarms in the fault log. Follow the steps in paragraph sections 9.6 to clear alarms.
10 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 15 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual INSTALLATION AND STARTUP NOTES
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
11 Page 16 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
8. Control panel
8.1 Display (pos. 1)
The control panel in the front cover of the control cabinet features
a display, a number of buttons and two indicator lights. The
A
control panel enables manual setting and monitoring of the
B
performance of the Hydro MPC.
2
CU 351
3
1
5
4
6
7 8 9
10
11
Fig. 6 Control panel
13
12
Key
Pos.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Description
Display Arrow to the right Help Up Down Plus Minus Esc Home Ok Indicator light, operation (green) Indicator light, fault (red) Contrast
TM03 1304 1705 TM03 8947 4807
D
C
Fig. 7 Display design
8.1.1 Menu line The menu line (A) is illustrated in fig. 7. The display has four main menus:
Status:
Indication of system status
Operation:
Change of operating parameters such as setpoint (password option)
Alarm:
Alarm log for fault finding
Settings: Change of settings (password option)
8.1.2 Top line The top line (B) is illustrated in fig. 7. The top line shows · the display number and title (left side) · the selected menu (left side) · the symbol in case of alarm (right side) · the symbol if the service language has been selected (right
side).
8.1.3 Graphical illustration The graphical illustration (D) may show a status, an indication or other elements, depending on the position in the menu structure. The illustration may show the entire system or part of it as well as various settings.
8.1.4 Scroll bar If the list of illustration elements exceeds the display, the symbols
and will appear in the scroll bar to the right. Use the and buttons to move up and down in the list.
8.1.5 Bottom line The bottom line (C) shows the date and time.
12 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 17 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
8.2 Buttons and indicator lights
The buttons (pos. 2 to 10 in fig. 6) on the CU 351 are active when they are illuminated.
8.2.1 Arrow to the right (pos. 2)
Press the button to move to the next menu in the menu structure. If you press when the Settings menu is highlighted, you go to the Status menu.
8.2.2 Help (pos. 3)
When the button is illuminated, a help text applying to the current display will appear if the button is pressed.
Close the text by pressing the button.
8.2.3 Up and down (pos. 4 and 5)
Press the and buttons to move up and down in lists.
A text can be selected when it is in a box.
If a text is marked and the button is pressed, the text above will be marked instead. If the button is pressed, the text below will be marked.
If the button is pressed in the last line in the list, the first line will be marked.
If the button is pressed in the first line in the list, the last line will be marked.
8.2.4 Plus and minus (pos. 6 and 7)
Use the
and buttons to increase and reduce values.
A value is activated when the button is pressed.
8.2.5 Esc (pos. 8)
Use the button to go one display back in the menu.
If a value has been changed and the button is pressed, the new value will not be saved. For further information, see section 8.2.7 Ok (pos. 10).
If the button is pressed before the button, the new value will be saved. For further information, see section 8.2.7 Ok (pos. 10).
8.2.6 Home (pos. 9)
Press the
button to return to the Status menu.
8.2.7 Ok (pos. 10)
Use the
button as an enter button.
The
button is also used to start the setting of a value.
If a value has been changed and the new value will be activated.
button is pressed, the
8.2.8 Indicator lights (pos. 11 and 12)
The Hydro MPC control panel incorporates a green and red indicator light.
The green indicator light is on when the Hydro MPC is in operation.It is flashing if the Hydro MPC has been set to stop.
The red indicator light is on if there is an alarm or a warning. The fault can be identified from the alarm list.
8.2.9 Contrast (pos. 13)
The contrast in the display can be changed by means of the button:
1. Press .
2. Adjust the contrast with
and .
8.2.10 Back light
If no button is touched for 15 minutes, the back light of the panel will be dimmed, and the first display in the Status menu will appear. Press any button to re-activate the back light.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
13 Page 18 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
9. Functions 9.1 Tree of functions
1. Status
1 Status 3.1 Current alarms 3.1.1 Current alarms 1.2 System 1.2.1 Operating mode 1.2.2 Setpoint 1.2.3 Setpoint influence 1.2.4 Measured values 1.2.5 Analog inputs 1.3 Pump 1 1.4 Pump 2 1.5 Pump 3 1.6 Pump 4 1.7 Pump 5 1.8 Pump 6
2. Operation
3. Alarm
2 Operation 2.1 Further settings 2.1.1 System operating mode 2.1.2 Control mode 2.1.3 Setpoints 2.1.4 Individual pump control 2.1.4. Pump 1...6
3 Alarm status
3.1 Current alarms 3.2 Alarm log
Continued on page 15
Key to the four main menus, Status, Operation, Alarm and Settings
Status
The Status menu shows alarms and the status of system and pumps. Note: No settings can be made in this menu.
Operation
In the Operation menu, the most basic parameters can be set, such as setpoint, operating mode, control mode and individual pump control.
Alarm
The Alarm menu gives an overview of alarms and warnings. Alarms and warnings can be reset in this menu.
Settings
In the Settings menu, it is possible to set various functions: · Primary controller
Setting of alternative setpoints, external setpoint influence, primary sensor, clock program, proportional pressure and S-system configuration. · Pump cascade control Setting of min. time between start/stop, max. number of starts/hour, number of standby pumps, forced pump changeover, pump test run, pilot pump, pump stop attempt, pump start and stop speed, min. performance and compensation for pump start-up time. · Secondary functions Setting of stop function, soft pressure build-up, digital and analog inputs, digital outputs, emergency run, min., max. and user-defined duty, pump curve data, flow estimation, control source and fixed inlet pressure. · Monitoring functions Setting of dry-running protection, min. and max. pressure, external fault, limit 1 and 2 exceeded, pumps outside duty range and pressure relief. · Functions, CU 351 Selection of service language, main language and units. Setting of date and time, passwords, Ethernet connection, GENIbus number and software status.
14 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 19 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Continued from page 16
4. Settings
4.1 Primary controller
4.1.1
PI controller
4.1.2
Alternative setpoints
4.1.3
4.1.2.1 Alternative setpoints 2...7 External setpoint influence
4.1.3.1 Set the influence function 4.1.3.2
Setting of influence function
4.1.4 4.1.6 4.1.7 4.1.8
Primary sensor Clock program Proportional pressure S-system configuration
4.2 Pump cascade control
4.2.1
Min. time between start/stop Max. number of starts/hour
4.2.3
Standby pumps
4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7
Forced pump changeover Pump test run Pilot pump Pump stop attempt
4.2.8
Pump start and stop speed
4.2.9
Min. performance
4.2.10 Compensation for pump start-up time
4.3 Secondary functions
4.3.1
Stop function
4.3.3 4.3.5 4.3.7
4.3.1.1
Stop parameters
Soft pressure build-up
Emergency run
Digital inputs
4.3.8
Function, DI1..DI3 (CU 351), [10, 12, 14] Function, DI1..DI9 (IO 351-41), [10...46] Function, DI1..DI9 (IO 351-42), [10...46] Analog inputs
Setting, analog input AI1..AI3 (CU 351), [51, 54, 57] Function, AI1...AI3 (CU 351), [51, 54, 57]
Setting, AI1..AI2 (IO 351-41), [57, 60]
Function, AI1..AI2 (IO 351-41), [57, 60]
Setting, AI1..AI2 (IO 351-42), [57, 60]
Function, AI1..A2 (IO 351-42), [57, 60]
4.3.9
Digital outputs
Function, DO1 and DO2 (CU 351), [71, 74]
Function, DO1...DO7 (IO 351-41), [77...88]
Function, DO1...DO7 (IO 351-42), [77...88]
4.3.14 Min., max. and user-defined duty
4.3.14.1
Min. duty
4.3.14.2
Max. duty
4.3.14.3
User-defined duty
4.3.19 Pump curve data
4.3.23
Flow estimation
4.3.20 Control source
4.3.22 Fixed inlet pressure
4.3.23 Flow estimation
4.4 Monitoring functions
4.4.1
Dry-running protection
4.4.1.1
Pressure/level switch
4.4.1.2
Measurement, inlet pressure
4.4.1.3
Measurement, tank level
4.4.2
Min. pressure
4.4.3
Max. pressure
4.4.4
External fault
4.4.5
Limit 1 exceeded
4.4.6
Limit 2 exceeded
4.4.7
Pumps outside duty range
4.4.8
Pressure relief
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
15 Page 20 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Continued from page 16
4. Settings
4.5 Functions, CU 351 Change language to service language (GB) Run wizard again
4.5.1 4.5.2
Display language Display units
4.5.2.1 4.5.2.2
Units for pressure Units for differential pressure
4.5.2.3 4.5.2.4 4.5.2.5 4.5.2.6
Units for head Units for level Units for flow rate Units for volume
4.5.2.7 4.5.2.8 4.5.2.9 4.5.2.10
Units for specific energy Units for temperature Units for power Units for energy
4.5.3 4.5.4 4.5.5 4.5.6 4.5.9
Date and time Password Ethernet GENIbus number Software status
16 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 21 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
9.2 Overview
Section Display and display number
9.4 Status (1)
9.4.1
Current alarms (3.1)
9.4.2
System (1.2)
9.4.3
Operating mode (1.2.1)
9.4.4
Setpoint (1.2.2)
9.4.5
Setpoint influence (1.2.3)
9.4.6
Measured values (1.2.4)
9.4.7
Analog inputs (1.2.5)
9.4.8
Pump 1...6 (1.3 to 1.8)
9.5 Operation (2)
9.5.1
Operation (2)
9.5.2
System operating mode (2.1.1)
9.5.3
Control mode (2.1.2)
9.5.4
Setpoints (2.1.3)
9.5.5
Individual pump control (2.1.4)
9.5.6
Setting of individual operating mode (2.1.4.1 to 2.1.4.6)
9.6 Alarm (3)
9.6.1
Alarm status (3)
9.6.2
Current alarms (3.1)
9.6.3
Alarm log (3.2)
9.7 Settings (4)
9.7.1
Primary controller (4.1)
9.7.2
PI controller (4.1.1)
9.7.3
Alternative setpoints (4.1.2)
9.7.4
Alternative setpoints 2 to 7 (4.1.2.1 to 4.1.2.7)
9.7.5
External setpoint influence (4.1.3)
9.7.6
Setting of influence function (4.1.3.2)
9.7.7
Primary sensor (4.1.4)
9.7.8
Clock program (4.1.6)
9.7.9
Proportional pressure (4.1.7)
9.7.10
S-system configuration (4.1.8)
9.7.11
Pump cascade control (4.2)
9.7.12
Min. time between start/stop (4.2.1)
9.7.13
Max. number of starts/hour (4.2.1)
9.7.14
Standby pumps (4.2.3)
9.7.15
Forced pump changeover (4.2.4)
9.7.16
Pump test run (4.2.5)
9.7.17
Pilot pump (4.2.6)
9.7.18
Pump stop attempt (4.2.7)
9.7.19
Pump start and stop speed (4.2.8)
9.7.20
Min. performance (4.2.9)
9.7.21
Compensation for pump start-up time (4.2.10)
9.7.22
Secondary functions (4.3)
9.7.23
Stop function (4.3.1)
9.7.24
Soft pressure build-up (4.3.3)
9.7.25
Emergency run (4.3.5)
9.7.26
Digital inputs (4.3.7)
9.7.27
Functions of digital inputs (4.3.7.1)
9.7.28
Analog inputs (4.3.8)
9.7.29
Analog inputs (4.3.8.1 to 4.3.8.7)
9.7.30
Analog inputs and measured value (4.3.8.1.1 to 4.3.8.7.1)
9.7.31
Digital outputs (4.3.9)
9.7.32
Functions of digital outputs (4.3.9.1 to 4.3.9.16)
9.7.33
Min., max. and user-defined duty (4.3.14)
9.7.34
Min. duty (4.3.14.1)
See page
19 19 19 20 20 20 21 21 21 21 22 22 23 25 25 26 27 27 32 32 32 33 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 42 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
17 Page 22 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Section
9.7.35 9.7.36 9.7.37 9.7.38 9.7.39 9.7.40 9.7.41 9.7.42 9.7.43 9.7.44 9.7.45 9.7.46 9.7.47 9.7.48 9.7.49 9.7.51 9.7.52 9.7.53 9.7.54 9.7.55 9.7.56 9.7.57 9.7.58 9.7.59
Display and display number
Max. duty (4.3.14.2) User-defined duty (4.3.14.3) Pump curve data (4.3.19) Control source (4.3.20) Fixed inlet pressure (4.3.22) Flow estimation (4.3.23) Monitoring functions (4.4) Dry-running protection (4.4.1) Dry-running protection with pressure/level switch (4.4.1.1) Dry-running protection with pressure transmitter (4.4.1.2) Dry-running protection with level transmitter (4.4.1.3) Min. pressure (4.4.2) Max. pressure (4.4.3) External fault (4.4.4) Limit 1 and 2 exceeded (4.4.5 and 4.4.6) Pressure relief (4.4.8) Functions, CU 351 (4.5) Display language (4.5.1) Display units (4.5.2) Date and time (4.5.3) Passwords (4.5.4) Ethernet (4.5.5) GENIbus number (4.5.6) Software status (4.5.9)
See page
49 50 50 51 52 52 52 53 53 54 54 55 55 56 56 57 58 58 59 60 60 60 61 61
18 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 23 of 382
TM03 2293 4807
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
9.3 Description of functions
The description of functions is based on the four main menus of the CU 351 control unit: Status, Operation, Alarm and Settings. The functions apply to all control variants unless otherwise stated.
9.4 Status (1)
The first status display is shown below. This display is shown when the Hydro MPC is switched on, and it appears when the buttons of the control panel have not been touched for 15 minutes.
F
G H
9.4.1 Current alarms (3.1)
E
A
Fig. 9 Current alarms
Description I
In this display, current unreset alarms and warnings are shown.
C
For further information, see sections 9.6.2 Current alarms (3.1)
D
B
and 9.6.3 Alarm log (3.2).
9.4.2 System (1.2)
TM03 8947 4807
Fig. 8 Status
Description
No settings can be made in this menu.
The current value (process value, PV) of the control parameter, usually the discharge pressure, is shown in the upper right corner (G) together with the selected setpoint (SP) (H).
The upper half of the display (A) shows a graphic illustration of the Hydro MPC booster system and part of the system. The selected measuring parameters are shown with sensor symbol and current value.
In the middle of the display, an information field (I) is shown if any incidents occur.
The lower display half (B) shows
· the latest current alarm, if any, and the fault cause together with the fault code in brackets
· system status with current operating mode and control source
· pump status with current operating mode and manual/auto.
Note
If a fault has occurred, the symbol will be shown in the alarm line (C) together with the cause and fault code, for instance Limit 2 exceeded (191).
If the fault is related to one of the pumps, the symbol will also be shown in front of the status line (D) of the pump in question. At the same time, the symbol will be flashing instead of the pump symbol (E). The symbol will be shown to the right in the top line of the display (F). As long as a fault is present, this symbol will be shown in the top line of all displays.
To open a menu line, mark the line with .
or , and press
The display makes it possible to open status displays showing
· current alarms
· system status
· status of each pump.
Fig. 10 System
Description This display shows the current operational state of the Hydro MPC booster system. It is possible to go to subdisplays showing details. The display makes it possible to open specific displays about · operating mode · setpoint · setpoint influence · measured values · analog inputs.
TM03 8946 4807
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
19 Page 24 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
9.4.3 Operating mode (1.2.1)
9.4.4 Setpoint (1.2.2)
TM03 2272 4807
TM03 2273 4807
Fig. 11 Operating mode
Description Here the operating mode of the Hydro MPC booster system is shown as well as from where the Hydro MPC is controlled.
Operating modes Hydro MPC has six operating modes: 1. Normal
The booster system adapts its performance to the requirement. 2. Max. The pumps run at a constant high speed. Normally, all pumps run at maximum speed. 3. User-defined The pumps run at a constant speed set by the user. Usually it is a performance between Max. and Min. 4. Min. The pumps run at a constant low speed. Normally, one pump is running at a speed of 70 %. 5. Stop All pumps have been stopped. 6. Emergency run The pumps run according to the setting made in the display Emergency run (4.3.5). The performance required in the operating modes Max., Min., User-defined and Emergency run can be set in the Settings menu. See sections 9.7.33 Min., max. and user-defined duty (4.3.14) and 9.7.25 Emergency run (4.3.5). The current operating mode can be controlled from four different sources: Fault, External signal, CU 351 and Bus.
Control source Hydro MPC can be set to remote control via an external bus (option). In this case, a setpoint and an operating mode must be set via the bus. In the Settings menu, it is possible to select whether the CU 351 or the external bus is to be the control source. The status of this setting is shown in the display Operating mode.
Fig. 12 Setpoint Description This display shows the selected setpoint and whether it comes from the CU 351 or an external bus. The display also shows all seven possible setpoints from CU 351 (for closed- and open-loop control). At the same time, the selected setpoint is shown. As it is a status display, no settings can be made. Setpoints can be changed in the Operation menu. 9.4.5 Setpoint influence (1.2.3)
Fig. 13 Setpoint influence Description The selected setpoint can be influenced by parameters. The parameters are shown as percentage from 0 to 100 % or as a pressure measured in bar. They can only reduce the setpoint, as the influence in percentage divided with 100 is multiplied with the selected setpoint:
Setpointcurrent(SP) = Setpointselected × Infl.(1) × Infl.(2) × ...
The display shows the parameters influencing the selected setpoint and the percentage or value of influence. Some of the possible parameters can be set in the display External setpoint influence (4.1.3). The parameter low flow boost is set as an on/off band as a percentage of the setpoint set in the display Stop function (4.3.1). The parameter is set as a percentage in the display Proportional pressure (4.1.7). Finally the resulting current setpoint (SP) is shown.
TM03 8948 4807
20 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 25 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
9.4.6 Measured values (1.2.4)
9.4.8 Pump 1...6 (1.3 to 1.8)
TM03 2268 4807
TM03 2270 4807
Fig. 14 Measured values
Description
This display gives a general status of all measured and calculated parameters.
Note
The lines "Power consumption" and "Energy consumption" are only shown in Hydro MPC-E booster systems.
9.4.7 Analog inputs (1.2.5)
TM03 8949 4807
Fig. 15 Analog inputs
Description The display shows an overview of the analog inputs and the current measured values of each input. See sections 9.7.28 Analog inputs (4.3.8), 9.7.29 Analog inputs (4.3.8.1 to 4.3.8.7) and 9.7.30 Analog inputs and measured value (4.3.8.1.1 to 4.3.8.7.1).
Fig. 16 Pump 1
Description This display shows the operational state of the individual pumps. The pumps may have different operating modes: · Auto
Together with the other pumps in automatic operation, the pump is controlled by the PI controller which ensures that the booster system delivers the required performance (pressure). · Manual The pump is not controlled by the PI controller. In manual operation, the pump has one of the following operating modes: Max.
The pump runs at a set maximum speed. (This operating mode can only be selected for variable-speed pumps.) Normal The pump runs at a set speed. Min. The pump runs at a set minimum speed. (This operating mode can only be selected for variable-speed pumps.) Stop The pump has been forced to stop. Besides information about the operating mode, it is possible to read various parameters in the status display, such as these: · speed (only 0 or 100 % are shown for mains-operated pumps) · power consumption (only CR(I)E pumps) · energy consumption (only CR(I)E pumps) · operating hours.
9.5 Operation (2)
In this menu, the most basic parameters can be set, such as setpoint, operating mode, control mode and forced control of pumps.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
21 Page 26 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
9.5.1 Operation (2)
Factory setting The setpoint is a value suitable for the Hydro MPC booster system in question. The factory setting may have been changed in the start-up menu.
9.5.2 System operating mode (2.1.1)
A
B
C
TM03 8950 4807 TM03 8951 4807
Fig. 17 Operation
Description
The column shows the setting range. In closed-loop control, it corresponds to the range of the primary sensor, here 0-16 bar. In open-loop control, the setting range is 0-100 %.
At the left hand of the column, the selected setpoint 1 (A) is shown, i.e. the value set in the display. At the right hand of the column, the current setpoint (B) is shown, i.e. the setpoint acting as reference for the PI controller. If no kind of external setpoint influence has been selected, the two values will be identical. The current measured value (discharge pressure) is shown as the grey part of the column (C). See sections 9.7.5 External setpoint influence (4.1.3) and 9.7.6 Setting of influence function (4.1.3.2).
Below the display is a menu line for setting of setpoint 1 and selection of operating mode, including the operating modes Normal and Stop. It is possible to select further settings: system operating mode, control mode, setpoints for closed and open loop as well as individual pump control.
Setting range
Setpoint:
Closed-loop control: Open-loop control:
Measuring range of the primary sensor 0-100 %
Setting via control panel
Setpoint:
1. Mark the Operation menu with .
2. Mark Setpoint 1 with or . Set the value with or .
3. Save with .
Operating mode:
1. Mark the Operation menu with .
2. Mark operating mode Normal or Stop with or . Save
with .
Further settings:
1. Mark the Operation menu with .
2. Mark Further settings with
or
, and press
.
3. Select one of the settings below with :
or , and press
· system operating mode (see section 9.5.2)
· control mode (see section 9.5.3)
· setpoints (see section 9.5.4)
· individual pump control (see section 9.5.6).
Fig. 18 System operating mode
Description
Hydro MPC can be set to six different operating modes. Normal is the typical setting. See section 9.4.3 Operating mode (1.2.1).
The performance of the operating modes Max., Min., Userdefined and Emergency run can be set in the Settings menu.
In the display shown, it is possible to go directly to the Settings menu in order to set the pump performance or the setpoint.
Setting range
It is possible to select the operating modes Normal, Max., Min., User-defined, Stop and Emergency run.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Operation menu with .
2. Mark Further settings with
or
, and press
.
3. Mark System operating mode with .
or , and press
4. Select the desired operating mode by marking one of the lines
with check boxes with or , and press .
5. In order to set the performance in min., max., user-defined duty or emergency run, mark the desired line at the bottom of the display, and press . See sections 9.7.33 Min., max. and user-defined duty (4.3.14) and 9.7.25 Emergency run (4.3.5).
Factory setting Normal.
22 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 27 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
9.5.3 Control mode (2.1.2)
Open loop
In open-loop control, the pumps run at a fixed speed. The pump speed is calculated from the performance set by the user (0-100 %). The pump performance in percentage is proportional with the flow rate.
Open-loop control is usually used when the booster system is controlled by an external controller which controls the performance via an external signal. The external controller could for instance be a building management system connected to the Hydro MPC. In such cases, the Hydro MPC is like an actuator. See figs 22 and 23.
TM03 2283 4807
TM03 2232 3905
Fig. 19 Control mode
Description There are two control modes, namely closed and open loop. Examples:
Closed loop The typical control mode is closed loop where the built-in PI controller ensures that the booster system delivers the discharge pressure required (setpoint). The performance is based on the setpoint set for closed loop. See figs 20 and 21.
Fig. 22 Booster system with external controller (open loop) Flow rate [gpm]
TM03 2391 3607
Fig. 20 Booster system controlled by built-in PI controller (closed loop)
P [bar]
Setpoint
Time [sec]
Fig. 21 Regulation curve for closed loop
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Operation menu with .
2. Mark Further settings with
or
, and press
.
3. Mark Control mode with
or
, and press
.
4. Select Closed loop with or , and press .
5. Set the setpoint. See sections 9.5.4 Setpoints (2.1.3) and 9.5.1 Operation (2).
TM03 2390 4105
TM03 2231 3905
0 5
Input [%] from external controller
Fig. 23 Regulation curve for open loop
Flow rate [gpm]
100
75
Flow rate
Pump 1
50
Pump 2
Pump 3
Pump 4
25
5
50 70.7 86.6 100 Input [%] from
external controller
Fig. 24 Regulation curve for Hydro MPC-E in open loop
TM03 9977 4807
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
23 Page 28 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Flow rate [gpm]
100 75 50 25
Flow rate Pump 1 Pump 2 Pump 3 Pump 4
5
50 70.7 86.6 100 Input [%] from
external controller
Fig. 25 Regulation curve for Hydro MPC-ED in open loop
Flow rate [gpm]
100
75
Flow rate
Pump 1
50
Pump 2
Pump 3
Pump 4
25
5
50 70.7 86.6 100 Input [%] from
external controller
Fig. 26 Regulation curve for Hydro MPC-ES in open loop
Flow rate [gpm]
100
75
Flow rate
50
Pump 1
Pump 2
Pump 3
25
Pump 4
Input [%] from
5
50 70.7 86.6 100
external controller
Fig. 27 Regulation curve for Hydro MPC-S in open loop
TM03 9974 4807
TM03 9975 4807
TM03 9976 4807
Correlating open loop input setpoint percentage with number of pumps in operation. Example: MPC system with (4) pumps
· Setpoint 0% to 5% = All pumps stopped One pump operation from setpoint from 5% to (1-pump/4pumps) = 50% · Two pump operation from 50% to (2-pump/4-pumps) =
70.7% · Three pump operation from 70.7% to (3-pumps/4-pumps) =
86.6%
· Four pump operation from 86.6% to 100%
For staging pumps off the cut-out is 2% less then cut-in. Example: staging from 4-pump to 3-pump operation will occur at 84.6% reference signal.
Setting range These settings must be made in connection with open loop: · stop of the Hydro MPC booster system · selection of control mode Open loop · setting of setpoint 1, open loop · setting of external setpoint influence · selection of operating mode Normal.
Setting via control panel
To set an external control source to control the Hydro MPC booster system, proceed as follows:
1. Mark the Operation menu with .
2. Mark the operating mode Stop with or , and press . The check mark in the right box shows that the operation
has been stopped.
3. Mark Further settings with or , and press .
4. Mark Control mode with or , and press .
5. Select Open loop with or , and press .
6. Return by pressing
twice.
7. Mark Set setpoint 1, open loop with or .
8. Set the setpoint to 100 % with , and save with .
9. Mark the Settings menu with .
10.Mark Primary controller with or , and press .
11.Mark External setpoint influence with .
or , and press
12.Mark Go to setting of analog input with press .
or , and
13.Select the analog input with or , and press .
14.Select the range of the analog input with or , and press . The selection is indicated by a check mark.
15.Mark Measured input value with or , and press . Now the display 4.3.8.1.1 appears.
16.Select 0-100 % signal with or , and press .
17.Press
to return to display 4.3.8.1.
18.Set the minimum sensor value with .
or , and save with
19.Set the maximum sensor value with .
or , and save with
20.Return by pressing
twice.
21.Mark Input value to be influenced by with press .
or , and
22.Mark 0-100 % signal with or , and press .
23.Return with .
24.Mark Set the influence function with or , and press . For details, see section 9.7.6 Setting of influence
function (4.1.3.2).
25.Mark the menu line for number of points with press .
or , and
24 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 29 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
26.Select the required number of points with save with .
or , and
27.Mark External input value (point 1) with or .
28.Set the value of the external input value with save with .
or , and
29.Mark Reduce setpoint to (point 1) with or .
30.Set the value as a percentage with .
or , and save with
31.Repeat 27 to 31 for all chosen points.
32.Return with .
33.Mark Filter time with or , set the time in seconds with or , and save with .
34.Mark Activated with or , and press . The check mark in the right box shows that the function has been activated.
35.Return by pressing
twice.
36.Mark the Operation menu with .
37.Mark the operating mode Normal with or , and press . The check mark in the right box shows that the operation
is normal. The booster system can now be controlled by an external controller.
Factory setting Closed-loop control.
9.5.4 Setpoints (2.1.3)
Fig. 28 Setpoints
Description In addition to the primary setpoint 1 (shown in the display 2 in the Operation menu), six alternative setpoints can be set for closedloop control. It is furthermore possible to set seven setpoints for open-loop control. As described in sections 9.7.3 Alternative setpoints (4.1.2) and 9.7.4 Alternative setpoints 2 to 7 (4.1.2.1 to 4.1.2.7), it is possible to activate one of the alternative setpoints by means of external contacts.
Setting range The setting range of setpoints for closed-loop control depends on the range of the primary sensor. See section 9.7.7 Primary sensor (4.1.4). In open loop control, the setting range is 0 - 100 %.
Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Operation menu with . 2. Mark Further settings with or , and press . 3. Mark Setpoints with or , and press . 4. Select the setpoint with or .
TM03 8952 4807 TM03 8953 4807
5. Set the setpoint with
or , and press .
Factory setting Setpoint 1 for closed-loop control is a value suitable for the Hydro MPC in question. The alternative setpoints for closed-loop control are 3 bar. All setpoints for open-loop control are 70 %.
9.5.5 Individual pump control (2.1.4)
Fig. 29 Individual pump control
Description It is possible to change the operating mode from automatic operation to one of the manual operating modes. Auto The pumps are controlled by the PI controller, ensuring that the booster system delivers the required performance (pressure). Manual The pump is not controlled by the PI controller, but set to one of the following manual operating modes: · Max.
The pump runs at a set maximum speed. (This operating mode can only be selected for variable-speed pumps.) · Normal The pump runs at a set speed. · Min. The pump runs at a set minimum speed. (This operating mode can only be selected for variable-speed pumps.) · Stop The pump has been forced to stop. Pumps in manual operation are not part of the normal pump cascade and speed control. The manual pumps are a "disturbance" of the normal control of Hydro MPC. If one or more pumps are in manual operation, Hydro MPC may not be able to deliver the set performance. There are two displays for the function. In the first display, the pump to be set is selected, and in the next display, the operating mode is selected.
Setting range All pumps can be selected.
Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Operation menu with . 2. Mark Further settings with or , and press . 3. Mark Individual pump control with or , and press
. 4. Select the pump with or , and press .
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
25 Page 30 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual 9.5.6 Setting of individual operating mode (2.1.4.1 to 2.1.4.6)
TM03 8954 4807
Fig. 30 Setting of individual operating mode
Description
This display is shown for the individual pumps and makes it possible to set an operating mode.
Setting range
It is possible to select Auto or Manual as well as the operating mode of the pump for manual operation - Max., Normal, Min. or Stop. For mains-operated pumps only Normal or Stop can be selected.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Operation menu with .
2. Mark Individual pump control with or , and press
.
3. Select the pump with or , and press .
4. Mark Auto or Manual with or , and press .
5. Manual: Select the operating mode with press .
or , and
6. Normal: Mark Setpoint with
or
.
Set the speed of the variable-speed pump with
and press .
or ,
Factory setting Auto.
26 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 31 of 382
TM03 2291 4807
Warning( )/alarm( ) Change of operating mode to Reset of alarm Restart Set in the Settings menu Alarm code
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
9.6 Alarm (3)
The Alarm menu gives an overview of alarms and warnings. In this menu, it is possible to reset alarms and to see the alarm log.
9.6.1 Alarm status (3)
Fault
Fig. 31 Alarm status
Description
A fault in the Hydro MPC booster system or one of the components monitored can cause an alarm or a warning . Besides the fault signal via the alarm/warning signal relay and the red indicator light on the CU 351, an alarm can also cause a change of operating mode, for instance from Normal to Stop. A warning only causes a fault indication.
The table shows the possible causes of fault together with an alarm code number, and whether they result in an alarm or a warning. It also shows to what operating mode the booster system changes in case of alarm, and whether restart of the booster system and reset of the alarm is manual or automatic.
The table also shows that the reaction to some of the fault causes mentioned can be set in the Settings menu. See sections 9.7.24 Soft pressure build-up (4.3.3) and 9.7.41 Monitoring functions (4.4) to 9.7.51 Pressure relief (4.4.8).
Water shortage Water shortage Pressure high
Pressure low
Pressure relief Alarm, all pumps
External fault
Dissimilar sensor signals Fault, primary sensor Fault, sensor Communication fault Phase failure Undervoltage, pump Overvoltage, pump
Overload, pump
Overtemperature, pump Other fault, pump
Internal fault, CU 351
Internal fault, IO 351 VFD not ready Fault, Ethernet Limit 1 exceeded Limit 2 exceeded Pressure build-up fault Pumps outside duty range Pilot pump fault
Auto
206
Stop Man/auto X 214
Stop Auto
210
Stop
Auto Man
X 211
Auto X 219
Stop Auto
203
Auto
X
3
Stop Man
Auto
204
Stop Auto
89
Auto
88
Auto
10
Auto
2
Auto
7, 40, 42, 73
Auto
32
Auto Auto
48, 50, 51, 54
64, 65, 67
Auto
76, 83
72,
Auto
83,
157
Stop Auto
83, 157
Auto
213
Auto
231, 232
Man/auto X 190
Man/auto X 191
Man/auto X 215
Man/auto X 208
Auto
216
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
27 Page 32 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Alarm (3) continued
MPC alarm indication "Protocol description" 1. Phase failure, pump
2. Undervoltage
Alarm code
2
7
3. Undervoltage, pump
40
4. Undervoltage, pump 42
5. Undervoltage, pump 73
6. Overvoltage, pump
32
7. Overload, associated
device
48
8. Overload, associated device
50
9. Overload, associated
device
51
10. Overload, associated device 54
11. Over temperature, pump 65
12. Over temperature, pump
67
Associated device and device no. Pump 1-6
Pump 1-6
Pump 1-6 Pump 1-6 Pump 1-6 Pump 1-6 Pump 1-6
Pump 1-6
Pump 1-6 Pump 1-6 Pump 1-6 Pump 1-6
Description/cause
Remedy
-
1. Check that all three
power supply phases are
within a 15 V window.
HSD = hardware shutdown.
There has been a fault,
and the permissible
number of restarts for the 1. Restore power supply.
fault type has been
exceeded.
2. Replace terminal box.
a) Fault in power supply.
a) Terminal box defective.
a) Power supply voltage 1. Bring voltage back to
is too low at start.
prescribed level.
a)
Faulty power supply at the time of staging on a pump.
1. Restore proper power supply.
a) Low supply voltage.
b) Power supply failure 1. Restore proper power
while motor is
supply.
running.
a) Supply voltage is too 1. Bring voltage back to
high at start.
prescribed level.
a) Heavy overload has caused software shutdown (SSD).
1. Check and possibly reduce load.
a) MPF = motor
protection function.
The built-in motor 1. Check and possibly
protection has
reduce load/improve
detected a sustained cooling.
overload (MPF 60
sec. limit)>
a) Heavy overload (Imax. very high). Pump blocked at start.
1. Unblock the pump.
a) The built-in motor
protection has
1. Check and possibly
detected a transitory reduce load/improve
overload (MPF 3 sec. cooling
limit).
a) PTC sensor in the motor has signalled over temperature.
1. Check and possibly reduce load/improve cooling.
a) Terminal box has indicated over temperature.
1. Check and possibly reduce load/improve cooling. (Temperature during operation can be read via PC Tool Eproducts.)
Reset Alarm/warning type1 Action type2
Auto
Warning
Auto
Warning
Auto Auto
Warning Warning
Auto
Warning
Auto Auto
Warning Warning
Auto
Warning
Auto
Warning
Auto
Warning
Auto
Warning
Auto
Warning
28 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 33 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
MPC alarm indication "Protocol description" 13. Other fault, associated
device
14. Limit 1 exceeded
15. Limit 2 exceeded
16. Pressure relief 17. Pressure build-up fault
18. Pumps outside duty range
19. Pilot pump fault
Alarm code
76
190 191 219 215 208 216
Associated device and device no.
Pump 1-6
Measured parameter Measured parameter
System
System
System Pilot pump
Description/cause
Remedy
Reset Alarm/warning type1 Action type2
Try to reset the fault:
1. Switch off the supply power.
a) Internal communication error has occurred in the pump.
2. Wait until all diodes are out.
3. Switch on the supply power.
If this does not remedy the fault, replace the terminal box.
a) The measured parameter has exceeded the limit set.
1. Remove the cause of the fault.
a) The measured parameter has exceeded the limit set.
1. Remove the cause of the fault.
a)
The monitored pressure could not be reduced sufficiently.
1. Reduce the pressure to below the limit.
a) The pressure set
cannot be reached within the configured
1. Check limit and pipes.
time.
a) The pump is running outside the defined 1. Check the system. range.
a) Pilot pump fault
1. Check wires. 2. Check the pump.
Auto
Auto/ manual
Auto/ manual
Auto
Auto/ manual Auto/ manual
Auto
Warning
Alarm/warning Stop/
unchanged
Alarm/warning Stop/
unchanged
Warning Unchanged
Alarm/warning Stop/
unchanged
Warning Unchanged
Warning
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
29 Page 34 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
MPC alarm indication "Protocol description"
Alarm code
Associated device and device no.
Description/cause
Remedy
Reset Alarm/warning type1 Action type2
20. Water shortage, level 1 *Water shortage, level 1 206
a) The pre-pressure (or the level in the feed tank) is below its programmable warning limit.
Auto
Warning Unchanged
21. Water shortage, level 2 *Water shortage, level 2
214
a) The pre-pressure (or
the level in the feed
tank) is below its
1. Check the actual and the
programmable
corresponding settings. Auto/
warning limit.
2. Check the sensor/switch, Manual
b) The pre-pressure
wiring and input
switch detect water
according to the wiring
shortage.
diagram.
Alarm Stop
Warning Unchanged
22. Discharge pressure high
*Pressure above max.
210
pressure
23. Discharge pressure low
*Pressure below min.
211
pressure
System
a) The system pressure 3. Check the sensor/switch.
Alarm
is above the
Auto/ Fast stop (over
programmable highpressure alarm limit.
Manual rule min. seq. time)
a) The system pressure is below the programmable lowpressure alarm limit.
Auto/ Manual
Alarm/Warning Stop/
Unchanged
24. All pumps in alarm *All pumps in alarm
203
a) All pumps, set to Auto, is stopped on account of pump alarm
Troubleshoot according to the alarm message/code: 1. System
2. Pumps installed Use fault fault finding for the pump.
Auto
Alarm Stop
b) Pumps are not indicating alarm
Check the Genibus wires eg. connection, polarisation.
25. External fault signal *External fault signal
003
a) External fault digital input activated.
1. Check the external signal source.
2. Check the digital input according to the wiring diagram
Auto/ Manual
Alarm/Warning Stop/
Unchanged
26. Inconsistency between sensors *Inconsistency between sensors
a) Primary feedback 1. Check the wiring and
Primary
sensor value
input according to the
204
sensor and/or redundant
(pressure) is inconsistent with
wiring diagram. 2. Check the sensor output
sensor
redundant feedback
according to the
sensor value.
measured value.
Auto
Warning Unchanged
27. Primary sensor *Closed loop feedback sensor signal fault
089
Primary sensor
a) A fault in the sensor assigned to the feed back control is detected.
1. Check the wiring and input according to the wiring diagram.
2. Check the sensor output according to the measured value.
Alarm Stop
b) Error in the settings Check the primary sensor of the sensor which is settings assigned to the regulator.
Auto
28. Sensor fault *General (measurement) sensor signal fault 088
CU 351 IO 351 as IO module
a) The signal
1. Check the wiring and
(ex. 4-20 mA) from
input according to the
one of the analog
wiring diagram.
sensors is outside the 2. Check the sensor output
selected signal
according to the
range.
measured value
Warning Unchanged
30 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 35 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
MPC alarm indication "Protocol description"
Alarm code
29. CU 351 internal fault *Real time clock out of 157 order
30. Ethernet fault
*Ethernet: No address
231
from DHCP server
31. Ethernet fault *Ethernet: Auto disabled 232 due to misuse
32. FLASH parameter
verification error *FLASH parameter
083
verification error
33. IO 351 internal fault *Hardware fault type 2 080
34. VFD not ready *VFD not ready 213
35. Communication fault *Pump communication fault
010
36. Device alarms
From device
Associated device and device no.
CU 351
IO 351 Pump 1-6 CU 351
Pump 1-6 IO 351
Pump 1-6
Description/cause
Remedy
a) The real-time clock in Replace the CU 351 CU 351 is out of order.
a) No address from DHCP server
1. Communication error.
2. Please contact the
a) Auto-disabled due to misuse
system integrator.
a) Verification error in CU 351 FLASH memory
Replace the CU 351
a) IO 351 pump module See current alarms and
hardware fault
identify the faulty IO 351
b) IO 351 I/O module hardware fault
module from the alarm message and replace the module.
1. Check for VFD alarm
a) The VFD signal relay
do not release the 2. Check the wiring and
VFD for operation
input according to the
wiring diagram.
See actual alarms and
identify the faulty device
from the alarm message.
a) No GeniBus
1. Check power supply
communication with a device connected to CU 351
2.
Check GeniBus cable connection
3. Check, with R100, that
the device GeniBus no. is
correct.
See actual alarms and
identify the faulty device
a)
The device is in alarm
from the alarm message. 1. Fault find according to
the service instruction for
the device.
Reset type1
Auto
Alarm/warning Action type2
Warning Unchanged
1) Reset type is either fixed as "Auto acknowledge" (Auto) or can be programmed to be Auto or manual ackknowledge (Auto/Man)*. 2) Programmable action types:
- Go to operating mode "Stop" (no delay (<0.5 s) between pump disconnections). - Go to operating mode "Min". - Go to operating mode "User-defined". - Go to operating mode "Max". - Set pumps in source mode "Local". - No action (warning only)
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
31 Page 36 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
9.6.2 Current alarms (3.1)
Description Here warnings and alarms are shown. For every warning or alarm, the following is shown: · Whether it is a warning or an alarm . · Where the fault occurred. System, Pump 1, Pump 2, etc. · In case of input-related faults, the input is shown. · What the cause of the fault is, and the alarm code in brackets:
Water shortage (214), Max. pressure (210), etc. · When the fault occurred: Date and time. · When the fault disappeared: Date and time. If the fault still
exists, date and time are shown as --...--. The latest warning/alarm is shown at the top of the display.
9.7 Settings (4)
TM03 2293 4807 TM03 2294 4807
Fig. 32 Current alarms Description This submenu shows the following: · Warnings caused by faults that still exist. · Warnings caused by faults that have disappeared, but the
warning requires manual reset. · Alarms caused by faults that still exist. · Alarms caused by faults that have disappeared, but the
alarm requires manual reset. All warnings and alarms with automatic reset are automatically removed from the menu when the fault has disappeared. Alarms requiring manual reset are reset in this display by pressing . An alarm cannot be reset until the fault has disappeared. For every warning or alarm, the following is shown: · Whether it is a warning or an alarm . · Where the fault occurred: System, Pump 1, Pump 2, etc. · In case of input-related faults, the input is shown. · What the cause of the fault is, and the alarm code in brackets:
Water shortage (214), Max. pressure (210), etc. · When the fault occurred: Date and time. · When the fault disappeared: Date and time. If the fault still
exists, date and time are shown as --...--. The latest warning/alarm is shown at the top of the display. 9.6.3 Alarm log (3.2) The alarm log can store up to 24 warnings and alarms.
Fig. 33 Alarm log
TM03 2292 4807
Fig. 34 Settings
In the Settings menu, it is possible to set the following functions:
· Primary controller Setting of PI controller, alternative setpoints, external setpoint influence, primary sensor, clock program, proportional pressure and S-system configuration.
· Pump cascade control Setting of min. time between start/stop, max. number of starts/ hour, number of standby pumps, forced pump changeover, pump test run, pilot pump, pump stop attempt, pump start and stop speed, min. performance and compensation for pump start-up time.
· Secondary functions Setting of stop function, soft pressure build-up, digital and analog inputs, digital outputs, emergency run, min., max. and user-defined duty, pump curve data, flow estimation, control source and fixed inlet pressure.
· Monitoring functions Setting of dry-running protection, min. and max. pressure, external fault, limit 1 and 2 exceeded, pumps outside duty range and pressure relief.
· Functions, CU 351 Selection of service language, main language and units. Setting of time and date, passwords, Ethernet connection, GENIbus number and software status.
Usually, all these functions are set correctly when the Hydro MPC is switched on. It is only necessary to make settings in this menu if the functionality is to be expanded with for instance alternative setpoints or setpoint influence, or if the settings of the CU 351 are to be adjusted.
32 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 37 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
9.7.1 Primary controller (4.1)
Fig. 35 Primary controller Description In this menu section, it is possible to set the functions related to the primary controller. It is only necessary to make settings in this menu if the functionality is to be expanded with for instance alternative setpoints, external setpoint influence, clock program or proportional pressure. The following menus can be selected: · PI controller · Alternative setpoints · External setpoint influence · Primary sensor · Clock program · Proportional pressure · S-system configuration. 9.7.2 PI controller (4.1.1)
TM03 8955 4807
Setting range
· Gain Kp: 30 to 30. Note: For inverse control, set Kp to a negative value.
· Integral time Ti: 0.1 to 3600 seconds.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Primary controller with or , and press .
3. Mark PI controller with or , and press .
4. Select the gain (Kp) with or . Set the value with or , and save with .
Note: Usually it is not necessary to adjust Kp.
5. Select the integral time (Ti) with or , and press .
or . Set the time with
Factory setting · Kp: 0.5 · Ti: 1 second
9.7.3 Alternative setpoints (4.1.2)
TM03 2383 4807
Fig. 37 Alternative setpoints
Description This function makes it possible to select up to six setpoints (No 2 to 7) as alternatives to the primary setpoint (No 1). The primary setpoint (No 1) is set in the Operation menu. Every alternative setpoint can be addressed manually to a separate digital input (DI). When the contact of the input is closed, the alternative setpoint applies. If more than one alternative setpoint has been selected and they are activated at the same time, the CU 351 selects the setpoint with the lowest number.
Setting range · Six setpoints, No 2 to 7.
TM03 2387 4807
Fig. 36 PI controller
Description Hydro MPC includes a standard PI controller which ensures that the pressure is stable and corresponds to the setpoint. It is possible to adjust the PI controller if a faster or slower reaction to changes of consumption is required. A faster reaction is obtained if Kp is increased and Ti is reduced. A slower reaction is obtained if Kp is reduced and Ti is increased.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
33 Page 38 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Factory setting No alternative setpoints have been selected. 9.7.4 Alternative setpoints 2 to 7 (4.1.2.1 to 4.1.2.7)
TM03 2384 4807
Fig. 38 Alternative setpoints 2 to 7
For each alternative setpoint, select the digital input to activate the setpoint.
It is possible to set a setpoint for closed loop and for open loop.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Primary controller with or , and press .
3. Mark Alternative setpoints with or , and press .
4. Select the alternative setpoint with .
or , and press
5. Mark Go to setting of digital input with or , and press . Now the display Digital inputs (4.3.7) appears. Set the input and return with .
6. Mark the menu line of the setpoint (closed or open loop) with or .
7. Set the required setpoint with
or , and save with .
Set both setpoints if Hydro MPC is to be controlled both in
open and closed loop.
Factory setting No alternative setpoints have been set.
9.7.5 External setpoint influence (4.1.3)
TM03 8956 4807
Fig. 39 External setpoint influence
Description
This function makes it possible to adapt the setpoint by letting measuring parameters influence the setpoint. Typically an analog signal from a flow or temperature transmitter, or a similar transmitter.
As an example, the setpoint can be adapted to parameters that can influence the discharge pressure or temperature of the system. The parameters which influence the performance of the booster system are shown as a percentage from 0 to 100 %. They can only reduce the setpoint, as the influence as a percentage divided with 100 is multiplied with the setpoint:
Setpointcurrent(SP) = Setpointselected × Infl.(1) × Infl.(2) × ...
The influence values can be set individually.
A low-pass filter ensures smoothing of the measured value which influences the setpoint. This results in stable setpoint changes.
Setting range The following parameters can be selected. · 0-100 % signal · Inlet pressure · Discharge pressure · External pressure · Differential pressure, pump · Differential pressure, external · Flow rate · Tank level, discharge side · Tank level, suction side · Flow pipe temperature · Return pipe temperature · Ambient temperature · Return pipe temperature, external · Differential temperature.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Primary controller with or , and press .
3. Mark External setpoint influence with .
or , and press
4. Mark Input value to be influenced by with press . Now a list of available parameters appear.
or , and
5. Mark the parameter which is to influence the setpoint with or , and press .
6. Return with .
7. Mark Set the influence function with or , and press . For details, see section 9.7.6 Setting of influence
function (4.1.3.2).
8. Mark the menu line for number of points with press .
or , and
9. Select the required number of points with save with .
or , and
10.Mark External input value (point 1) with or .
11.Set the value of the external input value with save with .
or , and
12.Mark Reduce setpoint to (point 1) with or .
13.Set the value as a percentage with .
or , and save with
14.Repeat points 8 to 13 for all desired parameters.
15.Return with .
16.Mark Filter time with or , set the time in seconds with or , and save with .
34 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 39 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
17.Mark Activated with or , and press . The check mark in the right box shows that the function has been activated.
Factory setting Setpoint influence is not activated.
9.7.6 Setting of influence function (4.1.3.2)
5. Mark the menu line for number of points with press .
or , and
6. Select the required number of points with save with .
or , and
7. Mark External input value (point 1) with or .
8. Set the value of the external input value with save with .
or , and
9. Mark Reduce setpoint to (point 1) with or .
10.Set the value as a percentage with
or , and save with
.
11.Repeat points 7 to 10 for all desired parameters.
Factory setting External setpoint influence is not activated.
9.7.7 Primary sensor (4.1.4)
TM03 2389 4807
Fig. 40 Setting of influence function
Description In this menu, you select the relation between the measuring parameter which is to influence the setpoint and the desired influence as a percentage. The relation is set by entering values in a table with maximum eight points by means of the control panel. Example with four points:
Setpoint influence [%]
TM03 1691 4807
4 100
80
60
3
2
40
20
1
Q [m³/h] 50
Fig. 41 Relation between setpoint influence and flow rate
The control unit of the Hydro MPC draws straight lines between
the points. A horizontal line is drawn from the minimum value of the relevant sensor (0 m3/h in the example) to the first point. This
is also the case from the last point to the sensor's maximum value (example 50 m3/h).
Setting range
Two to eight points can be selected. Each point contains the relation between the value of the parameter which is to influence the setpoint and the influence of the value.
Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with . 2. Mark Primary controller with or 3. Mark External setpoint influence with
. 4. Mark Set the influence function with
.
, and press . or , and press
or , and press
Fig. 42 Primary sensor
Description In this display, select the control parameter of Hydro MPC and the sensor to measure the value. Usually, the control parameter is the discharge pressure which is measured by a sensor fitted on the discharge manifold and connected to analog input AI1 of the CU 351. If another control parameter is selected, the sensor must be connected to AI3 (CU 351) which is then set to one of the chosen parameters listed below.
Setting range · Discharge pressure (factory setting) · Differential pressure, external · Differential pressure, pump · Series 2000, differential pressure · External pressure · Differential pressure, inlet · Differential pressure, outlet · Flow rate · Series 2000, flow rate · Flow pipe temperature · Return pipe temperature · Differential temperature · Ambient temperature · Return pipe temperature, external · 0-100 % signal · Not used.
TM03 8958 4807
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
35 Page 40 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
From factory the discharge pressure sensor is connected to AI1 (CU 351). If one of the above parameters is selected, the sensor in question must be connected to AI3 (CU 351) and set in order to function as the primary sensor.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Primary controller with or , and press .
3. Mark Primary sensor with or , and press .
4. Mark Go to setting of analog input with or , and press . Now the display Analog inputs (4.3.8) appears. Select the analog input (AI) for the primary sensor, and set the parameters for this sensor. Return to display Primary sensor (4.1.4) with .
5. Select the control parameter for the primary sensor with or , and press .
Note
If the primary parameter is discharge pressure, AI1 (CU 351) must be set to this parameter.
If the primary parameter is external pressure or flow rate, AI3 (CU 351) must be set to this parameter.
Factory setting
The primary parameter is discharge pressure. The sensor is connected to AI1 (CU 351).
9.7.8 Clock program (4.1.6)
5. Mark operating mode Normal or Stop with or , and
press
. (If Stop is selected, point 7 is skipped.)
6. Mark Setpoint, closed loop with or
pressure with
or , and save with
. Set the .
7. Mark Time (hours, minutes) with or .
8. Set the time with
or , and save with .
9. Mark day of week on which the settings are to be activated
with or , and press
.
10.Mark Activated with or , and press
.
11.Return with .
12.Mark Activated with or , and press
. The check
mark in the right box shows that the function has been
activated.
13.Repeat points 4 to 11 if several events are to be activated. Note: Up to ten events can be set.
Factory setting The function is deactivated.
9.7.9 Proportional pressure (4.1.7)
TM03 8959 4807
TM03 8990 4807
Fig. 43 Clock program
Description With this function, it is possible to set setpoints and day and time for their activation. It is also possible to set day and time for stop of the Hydro MPC system. If the clock program is deactivated, the setpoint of the program will remain active.
Setting range · Activation of the function. · Activation and setting of event.
Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with . 2. Mark Primary controller with or , and press . 3. Mark Clock program with or , and press . 4. Mark event 1 with or , and press .
Fig. 44 Proportional pressure
Description The function can only be activated in pressure-controlled systems and automatically adapts the setpoint set to the current flow rate. The adaptation can be linear or square. See fig. 45.
TM03 8960 4807
36 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 41 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Hset
Pump curve Setpoint Resultant setpoint, linear Resultant setpoint, square
Starting point of proportional pressure control (Influence at 0 flow = x % of Hset)
Fig. 45 Proportional pressure
The function has these purposes: · to compensate for pressure losses · to reduce the energy consumption · to increase the comfort for the user.
Setting range · Activation of the function. · Selection of control mode. · Setting of setpoint influence.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Primary controller with or , and press .
3. Mark Proportional pressure with or , and press .
4. Mark Activated with or , and press
. The check
mark in the right box shows that the function has been
activated.
5. Mark Adaptation, linear or square with press .
or , and
6. Mark Influence at 0 flow with or or , and save with .
. Set the value with
Factory setting The function is deactivated.
9.7.10 S-system configuration (4.1.8)
TM03 8524 1807 TM03 9205 3607 - TM03 9205 3607
Description
The function makes it possible to invert the control of mainsoperated pumps (Hydro MPC-S). That is to set whether pumps are to be started or stopped depending on the current value.
A start/stop band must be set in order to use this function. See fig. 47.
Normal control: A pump is stopped when the current value becomes higher than Hset + start/stop band. And a pump is started when the current value becomes lower than Hset. See fig. 47.
Inverse control: A pump is started when the current value becomes higher than Hset + start/stop band. And a pump is stopped when the current value becomes lower than Hset. See fig. 47.
Normal control H [m]
Inverse control H [m]
Pump stops
Pump starts
Start/stop band
Hset Pump starts
Start/stop band
Hset Pump stops
Time [sec]
Time [sec]
Fig. 47 Normal and inverse control
Setting range · Selection of configuration (normal or inverse control). · Setting of start/stop band.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Primary controller with or , and press .
3. Mark S-system configuration with .
or , and press
4. Mark Inverse with or , and press .
5. Mark Start/stop band with or . Set the value with or , and save with .
Factory setting Normal.
9.7.11 Pump cascade control (4.2)
TM03 8961 4807 TM03 8962 4807
Fig. 46 S-system configuration Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Fig. 48 Pump cascade control 26/11/2012
37 Page 42 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
In this menu section, it is possible to set the functions connected to pump cascade control. The following menus can be selected: · Min. time between start/stop · Max. number of starts/hour · Standby pumps · Forced pump changeover · Pump test run · Pilot pump · Pump stop attempt · Pump start and stop speed · Min. performance · Compensation for pump start-up time.
9.7.12 Min. time between start/stop (4.2.1)
9.7.13 Max. number of starts/hour (4.2.1)
TM03 2367 4807 TM03 2367 4807
Fig. 49 Min. time between start/stop
Description
This function ensures a delay between the starting/stopping of one pump and the starting/stopping of another pump.
The purpose is to prevent hunting when pumps start and stop continuously.
Setting range From 1 to 3600 seconds.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Pump cascade control with or .
3. Mark Min. time between start/stop with press .
4. Mark Min. time between start/stop with press .
5. Set the required minimum time with or .
, and press or , and or , and , and save with
Factory setting Minimum time between start/stop of pumps:
Hydro MPC-E and -EF: 1 second
Other variants:
5 seconds
Fig. 50 Max. number of starts/hour
Description
This function limits the number of pump starts and stops per hour for the complete system. It reduces noise emission and improves the comfort of booster systems with mains-operated pumps.
Each time a pump starts or stops, the CU 351 calculates when the next pump is allowed to start/stop in order not to exceed the permissible number of starts per hour.
The function always allows pumps to be started to meet the requirement, but pump stops will be delayed, if needed, in order not to exceed the permissible number of starts per hour.
The time between pump starts must be between the minimum time between start/stop, see section 9.7.12, and 3600/n, n being the set number of starts per hour.
Setting range 1 to 1000 starts per hour.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Pump cascade control with .
or , and press
3. Mark Max. number of starts/hour with .
or , and press
4. Mark Max. number of starts/hour with or , and press
.
5. Set the permissible number of starts per hour with and save with .
or ,
Factory setting
Hydro MPC-E and -EF: 200 starts per hour
Other variants:
100 starts per hour
Note
This function has no influence on Stop function (4.3.1).
9.7.14 Standby pumps (4.2.3)
38 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 43 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fig. 51 Standby pumps
Description
This function makes it possible to limit the maximum performance of the Hydro MPC, by selecting one or more pumps as standby pumps.
If a three-pump system has one standby pump, maximum two pumps are allowed to be in operation at a time.
If one of the two pumps in operation has a fault and is stopped, the standby pump will be started. The performance of the booster system is thus not reduced.
The status as standby pump alternates between all pumps.
Setting range
The number of possible standby pumps in a Hydro MPC booster system is equal to the total number of pumps in the system minus 1.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Pump cascade control with .
or , and press
3. Mark Standby pumps with or , and press .
4. Select the number of standby pumps with save with .
or , and
Factory setting
The number of standby pumps is set to 0, i.e. function is deactivated.
9.7.15 Forced pump changeover (4.2.4)
TM03 2366 4807
Description
This function ensures that the pumps run for the same number of operating hours.
In certain applications, the requirement remains constant for long periods and does not require all pumps to run. In such situations, pump changeover does not take place naturally, and forced pump changeover may thus be required.
Once every 24 hours, the CU 351 checks if any pump running has a larger number of operating hours than pumps that are stopped. If this is the case, the pump will be stopped and replaced by a pump with a lower number of operating hours.
Setting range
The function can be activated/deactivated. The hour of the day at which the changeover is to take place can be set.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Pump cascade control with .
or , and press
3. Mark Forced pump changeover with .
or , and press
4. Mark Activated with or , and press . The check mark in the right box shows that the function has been activated.
5. Mark Time for changeover with , and press .
6. Set the time with
or , and save with .
Factory setting The function is activated. The time is set to 03:00.
9.7.16 Pump test run (4.2.5)
TM03 2365 4807 TM03 2364 4807
Fig. 52 Forced pump changeover
Fig. 53 Pump test run
Description This function is primarily used in situations where the forced pump changeover is deactivated, and/or if the Hydro MPC is set to operating mode Stop, for instance in a period when the system is not needed. In such situations, it is important to test the pumps regularly. The function ensures that · pumps do not seize up during a long standstill due to deposits
from the pumped liquid. · the pumped liquid does not decay in the pump. · trapped air is removed from the pump. The pumps start automatically one by one and run for five seconds.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
39 Page 44 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Note
Pumps in the operating mode Manual are not included in the test run. If there is an alarm, the test run will not be carried out.
Setting range · Not used. · Once every 24 hours. · Once every 48 hours. · Once a week.
Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with . 2. Mark Pump cascade control with
. 3. Mark Pump test run with or 4. Select the interval with or . 5. Activate the function with .
or , and press , and press .
Factory setting Test runs are set to once every 24 hours.
9.7.17 Pilot pump (4.2.6)
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Pump cascade control with .
or , and press
3. Mark Pilot pump with or , and press .
4. Mark Go to setting of digital output with press .
or , and
5. Select a digital output with or , and press .
6. Mark Pilot pump control with .
or , and save with
7. Return by pressing
twice.
8. Mark Go to setting of digital input with press .
or , and
9. Select a digital input or , and press .
10.Mark Pilot pump fault with or , and save with .
Factory setting The function is deactivated.
9.7.18 Pump stop attempt (4.2.7)
TM03 8963 4807 TM03 8964 4807
Fig. 54 Pilot pump
Description
The function controls a pilot pump via a digital output. The pilot pump takes over the operation from the main pumps in periods when the consumption is so small that the stop function of the main pumps is activated. See section 9.7.23 Stop function (4.3.1).
Via a digital input, the operational state of the pilot pump is monitored, i.e. whether it is operational or in a fault condition.
The purpose is to
· save energy
· reduce the number of operating hours of the main pumps.
If the pilot pump cannot keep the pressure by itself, one or more main pumps are started. If only one main pump is started and runs on/off operation, the pilot pump remains cut in. If one or more main pumps run continuously, the pilot pump is cut out.
Note
If the setpoint of the main pumps is changed, the setpoint of the pilot pump must be changed too.
Setting range · See section 9.7.31 Digital outputs (4.3.9). · See section 9.7.26 Digital inputs (4.3.7).
Fig. 55 Pump stop attempt
Description
The function makes it possible to set automatic stop attempts of a pump when several pumps are running. It ensures that the optimum number of pumps is always running, in terms of energy consumption. At the same time, the purpose is to avoid disturbances in connection with automatic stop of pumps.
Stop attempts can either take place with a fixed interval set under Interval between stop attempts or by self learning. If self learning is selected, the interval between stop attempts will be increased if repeated attempts to stop the pump fail.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Pump cascade control with .
or , and press
3. Mark Pump stop attempt with or , and press .
4. Mark Self learning or Fixed interval with
or
, and
press .
5. If Fixed interval is selected:
6. Mark Interval between stop attempts with or .
7. Set the interval with
or , and save with .
8. Mark Activated with or , and press
. The check
mark in the right box shows that the function has been
activated.
Factory setting The function is activated.
40 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 45 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
9.7.19 Pump start and stop speed (4.2.8)
Description
The function controls the starting and stopping of pumps. There are two options:
1. Use calculated speed This function ensures that the optimum number of pumps is always running at a desired duty point, in terms of energy consumption. The CU 351 calculates the required number of pumps and their speed. This requires that the differential pressure of the pump is measured by a differential pressure sensor or separate pressure sensors on the inlet and discharge side. When calculated speed has been selected, the CU 351 ignores the percentages set.
2. Use fixed speed The pumps are started and stopped at speeds set by the user.
1. Use calculated speed
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Pump cascade control with .
or , and press
3. Mark Pump start and stop speed with .
or , and press
4. Mark Use fixed speed with or , and press .
5. Mark Start of next pump at: 1->2 with or , and press
.
6. Set the speed as percentage with
or , and save with
. Set the other pumps in the same way.
7. Mark Instant pump stop at: 1->0 with .
or , and press
8. Set the speed as percentage with
or , and save with
. Set the other pumps in the same way.
Factory setting The function is set to calculated speed.
9.7.20 Min. performance (4.2.9)
TM03 8966 4807
TM03 8967 4807
Fig. 56 Calculated pump start and stop speed
Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with . 2. Mark Pump cascade control with or
. 3. Mark Pump start and stop speed with
. 4. Mark Use calculated speed with or
, and press or , and press
, and press .
2. Use fixed speed
Fig. 58 Min. performance
Description
This function ensures circulation in a system. Note that the stop function, if activated, can influence this function. See section 9.7.23 Stop function (4.3.1). Examples:
· If 0 or 1 pump has been selected as a minimum, the stop function can stop the pump if there is no or a very small consumption.
· If two or more pumps have been selected as a minimum, the stop function is not active.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Pump cascade control with .
or , and press
3. Mark Min. performance with or , and press .
4. Set Number of pumps with
or , and save with .
5. Mark Speed with or and save with .
. Set the speed with
or ,
Factory setting
The number of pumps is set to 1. The speed in closed loop is set to 25 %.
TM03 8965 4807
Fig. 57 Fixed pump start and stop speed
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
41 Page 46 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
9.7.21 Compensation for pump start-up time (4.2.10)
The display makes it possible to open specific displays regarding: · Stop function (4.3.1) · Soft pressure build-up (4.3.3) · Digital inputs (4.3.7) · Analog inputs (4.3.8) · Digital outputs (4.3.9) · Emergency run (4.3.5) · Min., max. and user-defined duty (4.3.14) · Pump curve data (4.3.19) · Flow estimation (4.3.23) · Control source (4.3.20) · Fixed inlet pressure (4.3.22).
9.7.23 Stop function (4.3.1)
TM03 8968 4807
Fig. 59 Compensation for pump start-up time
Description
The function is used for the system types -ES, -ED, -F and -EDF.
The purpose is to avoid disturbances when a mains-operated pump with fixed speed is started. The function compensates for the time it takes a mains-operated pump to reach its full performance after start. The start-up time of the mains-operated pump must be known.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Pump cascade control with or , and press
.
3. Mark Compensation for pump start-up time with or , and press .
4. Set the start-up time with
or , and save with .
Factory setting The start-up time is set to 0 seconds.
9.7.22 Secondary functions (4.3)
Fig. 61 Stop function
Description This function makes it possible to stop the last pump if there is no or a very small consumption. The purpose is to · save energy · prevent heating of shaft seal faces due to increased
mechanical friction as a result of reduced cooling by the pumped liquid · prevent heating of the pumped liquid. The description of the stop function applies to all Hydro MPC booster systems with variable-speed pumps. Hydro MPC-S will have on/off control of all pumps as described in section 6.1 Examples of control variants.
H
TM03 2355 4807
TM03 8969 4807
TM03 1692 2705
Hset
On/off band
Fig. 60 Secondary functions
Description
Qmin
Q
Functions that are secondary in relation to the normal operation of the Hydro MPC booster system can be set in this display.
On/off Normal operation control
Secondary functions are functions that offer additional functionality.
Fig. 62 On/off band
42 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 47 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
When the stop function is activated, the operation of Hydro MPC is continuously monitored to detect a low flow rate. When the CU 351 detects no or a low flow rate (Q < Qmin), it changes from constant-pressure operation to on/off control of the last pump in operation.
Before stopping, the pump increases the pressure to a value corresponding to Hset + 0.5 x on/off band. The pump is restarted when the pressure is Hset 0.5 x on/off band. See fig. 63.
[psi]
Stop
A
B
A: Normal operation B: Pressure boosting C: Stop
C
B
C
Start
Stop = Hset + 0.5 x on/off band Start = Hset 0.5 x on/off band
Time [sec]
Fig. 63 On/off operation
The flow rate is estimated by the CU 351 when the pump is in the stop period. As long as the flow rate is lower than Qmin, the pump will run on/off. If the flow rate is increased to above Qmin, the pump returns to normal operation, Hset. Hset is equal to the current setpoint. See section 9.4.4 Setpoint (1.2.2).
Detection of low flow rate
Low flow rate can be detected by means of
· direct flow measurement with a flowmeter or flow switch
· estimation of flow rate by measurement of current pressure and speed.
If the booster system is not connected to a flowmeter or flow switch, the stop function will use the estimating function.
If the detection of low flow rate is based on flow estimation, a diaphragm tank of a certain size and with a certain precharge pressure is required.
Diaphragm tank size
Pump type
CR(E) 3 CR(E) 5 CR(E) 10 CR(E) 15 CR(E) 20 CR(E) 32 CR(E) 45 CR(E) 64 CR 90
Recommended diaphragm tank size [gallons]
-E
4.4 4.4 10.2 34 34 44 86 132
-
-ED
4.4 4.4 10.2 34 34 44 86 132
-
-ES
4.4 4.4 10.2 34 34 44 86 132
-
-EF
4.4 4.4 10.2 34 34 44 86 132 132
-EDF
4.4 4.4 10.2 34 34 44 86 132 132
-F
4.4 4.4 10.2 34 34 44 86 132 132
-S
20 34 62 211 211 317 528 1056 1056
Precharge pressure Hydro MPC-E, -ED, -ES, -EF, -EDF and -F: 0.7 x setpoint. Hydro MPC-S: 0.9 x setpoint.
TM03 9292 4807 TM03 9966 4807
During each flow estimation (every 2 minutes), the estimating function will disturb the discharge pressure by ±10 % of the setpoint. If this disturbance is not acceptable, the stop function must be based on direct flow measurement with a flowmeter or flow switch.
The minimum flow rate can be set, i.e. the flow rate at which the booster system changes to on/off control of the last pump in operation.
If both a flowmeter and a flow switch are connected, the changeover to on/off control is determined by the unit first indicating low flow rate.
Setting range
On/off band: Min. flow rate:
5 to 30 %
2 to 50 % of the nominal flow rate (Qnom) of one of the pumps. (Can only be set if direct flow measurement by means of flowmeter has been selected.)
Setting via control panel
System without flow switch or flowmeter
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Secondary functions with or , and press .
3. Mark Stop function with or , and press .
4. Mark Activated with or , and press . The activation is indicated by a check mark in the box.
5. Mark On/off band with or .
6. Set the on/off band with
or , and save with .
7. Mark Go to setting of flow stop parameters with and press . Now the display below is shown.
or ,
Fig. 64 Stop parameters
8. Select one of the stop parameters with or , and save with . If Customised settings are selected, the parameters shown in fig. 65 must be set. See examples below.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
43 Page 48 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
1. Mark Go to setting of analog input with or , and press . Now the display Analog inputs (4.3.8) appears.
2. Select the analog input where the flowmeter is connected, and set up the input for the flowmeter by selecting Flow rate.
3. Return to Stop function by pressing twice.
4. Mark Stop limit with or .
5. Set the value with
or , and save with .
Factory setting
The function is activated.
On/off band: 25 % Min. flow rate: 30 % of the nominal flow rate of one pump
9.7.24 Soft pressure build-up (4.3.3)
TM03 8957 4807 TM03 8970 4807
Fig. 65 Customised settings
Note
Rule of thumb: Speed reduction = 2 x delta pressure for gradient.
Example 1: Increasing the stop limit, Qmin (high flow limit) · Increase the delta pressure for gradient. · Reduce the delta time for gradient (pump stopped). · Reduce the delta time for gradient (pump running). · Increase the speed reduction.
Example of increased stop limit
Parameter
Delta pressure for gradient Delta time for gradient (pump stopped) Delta time for gradient (pump running) Speed reduction
Value
6 % 1.5 sec 2.0 sec 10 %
Example 2: Reducing the stop limit, Qmin (low flow limit) · Reduce the delta pressure for gradient. · Increase the delta time for gradient (pump stopped). · Increase the delta time for gradient (pump running). · Reduce the speed reduction.
Example of reduced flow limit
Parameter
Delta pressure for gradient Delta time for gradient (pump stopped) Delta time for gradient (pump running) Speed reduction
Value
3 % 15.0 sec 25.0 sec 6 %
Note The stop limit depends on the tank size.
System with flow switch
Make the following additional settings:
1. Mark Go to setting of digital input with or , and press . Now the display Digital inputs (4.3.7) appears.
2. Select the digital input where the flow switch is connected with or , and press .
3. Mark Flow switch with or , press
and return with
.
Note An open contact indicates low flow.
System with flowmeter Make the following additional settings:
Fig. 66 Soft pressure build-up
Description The function ensures a smooth start-up of systems with for instance empty pipes. Start-up takes place in two phases. See fig. 67. 1. Filling phase.
The pipework is slowly filled with water. When the pressure sensor of the system detects that the pipework has been filled, phase two begins. 2. Pressure build-up phase. The system pressure is increased until the setpoint is reached. The pressure build-up takes place over a ramp time. If the setpoint is not reached within a given time, a warning or an alarm can be given, and the pumps can be stopped at the same time.
H [psi]
1. Filling phase
2. Pressure build-up phase
Filling time
Time [sec] Ramp time
Fig. 67 Filling and pressure build-up phases
44 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 49 of 382
TM03 9037 3207
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Setting range · Activation of the function. · Setting of pump speed. · Setting of number of pumps. · Setting of filling pressure. · Setting of maximum filling time. · Setting of warning or alarm + stop. · Setting of ramp time for the pressure build-up phase.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with
2. Mark Secondary functions with or , and press .
3. Mark Soft pressure build-up with .
or , and press
4. Mark Speed with or .
5. Set the value with
or , and save with .
6. Mark Number of pumps with or .
7. Set the value with
or , and save with .
8. Mark Filling pressure with or .
9. Set the value with
or , and save with .
10.Mark Max. time with or .
11.Set the value with
or , and save with .
12.Mark Warning or Alarm + stop with .
or , and press
13.Mark Ramp time with or .
14.Set the value with
or , and save with .
15.Mark Activated, and press .
Factory setting The function is deactivated.
9.7.25 Emergency run (4.3.5)
2. Mark Secondary functions with or , and press .
3. Mark Emergency run with or , and press .
4. Mark Go to setting of digital input with press .
or , and
5. Select a digital input with or , and press .
6. Mark Emergency run with or , and save with .
7. Return by pressing
twice.
8. Mark Go to setting of digital output with press .
or , and
9. Select a digital output with or , and press .
10.Mark Emergency run with or , and save with .
11.Return by pressing
twice.
12.Mark Setpoint, emergency run with or .
13.Set the value with
or , and save with .
Note
When this function has been set as described above, it can also be activated via the display System operating mode (2.1.1).
9.7.26 Digital inputs (4.3.7)
TM03 8971 4807 TM03 2359 4807
Fig. 68 Emergency run
Description When this function has been activated, the pumps will keep running regardless of warnings or alarms. The pumps will run according to a setpoint set specifically for this function.
In case of sensor fault, both main and standby Caution pumps will run at 100 % speed! Setting range · Setting of digital input (9.7.26 Digital inputs (4.3.7)). · Setting of digital output (9.7.31 Digital outputs (4.3.9)). · Setting of setpoint for emergency run. Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with
Fig. 69 Digital inputs
Description In this menu, the digital inputs of the CU 351 can be set. Each input, except DI1, can be activated and related to a certain function. As standard, the Hydro MPC has three digital inputs. If the Hydro MPC incorporates an IO 351B module (option), the number of digital inputs is 12. In the display, all digital inputs are shown so that their physical position in the Hydro MPC can be identified.
Example DI1 (IO 351-41), [10]:
DI1: (IO 351-41): [10]:
Digital input No 1 IO 351, GENIbus number 41 Terminal No 10
For further information on the connection of various digital inputs, see the wiring diagram supplied with the control cabinet.
Setting range
The digital input to be set is selected in the display Digital inputs (4.3.7).
Note DI1 (CU 351) cannot be selected.
Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with .
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
45 Page 50 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
2. Mark Secondary functions with or , and press . 3. Mark Digital inputs or , and press . 4. Select the digital input with or , and press .
9.7.27 Functions of digital inputs (4.3.7.1)
Fig. 70 Functions of digital inputs
Description In the displays 4.3.7.1, a function can be related to the digital inputs. Setting range It is possible to select one function in each display:
Function
Contact activated
Not used
Min. duty
= Operating mode Min.
Max. duty User-defined duty External fault
= Operating mode Max.
= Operating mode Userdefined
= External fault
Dry-running protection Flow switch Reset of alarm Emergency run Pilot pump fault
= Water shortage
= Flow rate > Set switch value
= Reset alarms = Operating mode
Emergency run
= Pilot pump fault
Alternative setpoint 2
= Setpoint 2 selected
Alternative setpoint 3
= Setpoint 3 selected
Alternative setpoint 4
= Setpoint 4 selected
Alternative setpoint 5
= Setpoint 5 selected
Alternative setpoint 6
= Setpoint 6 selected
Alternative setpoint 7
= Setpoint 7 selected
See the relevant sections for further information about the functions.
Generally, a closed contact activates the function selected.
TM03 8972 4807 TM03 2356 4807
Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with . 2. Mark Secondary functions with or , and press . 3. Mark Digital inputs with or , and press . 4. Select the digital input with or , and press . 5. Select the desired function with or , and activate it
with . The activation is indicated by a check mark in the box.
Factory setting
Digital input
Function
DI1 (CU 351) [10] DI2 (CU 351) [12]
External start/stop. Open contact = stop. Note: Input No 1 cannot be changed.
Monitoring of water shortage (dry-running protection). Open contact = water shortage (if the Hydro MPC is supplied with this option).
Note
Monitoring of water shortage requires a pressure switch connected to the Hydro MPC.
9.7.28 Analog inputs (4.3.8)
Fig. 71 Analog inputs
Description
In this display, the analog inputs of the Hydro MPC can be set.
Each input can be activated and related to a certain function.
As standard, the Hydro MPC has three analog inputs. If the Hydro MPC incorporates an IO 351B module (option), the number of analog inputs is 5.
In the display, all analog inputs are shown so that their physical position in the Hydro MPC can be identified. A redundant primary sensor can be fitted as back-up for the primary sensor in order to increase reliability and prevent stop of operation.
Note
If two sensors are to be redundant, each must have a separate analog input.
Example AI1 (CU 351) [51]:
AI1: (CU 351): [51]:
Analog input No 1 CU 351 Terminal No 51
46 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 51 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Setting range In the display Analog inputs (4.3.8), the analog input to be set is selected.
Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with . 2. Mark Secondary functions with or , and press . 3. Mark Analog inputs with or , and press . 4. Select the analog input with or , and press .
9.7.29 Analog inputs (4.3.8.1 to 4.3.8.7)
Factory setting
Analog input
Function
AI1 (CU 351) [51] AI2 (CU 351) [54] AI3 (CU 351) [57]
Discharge pressure
Tank precharge pressure (if Hydro MPC is supplied with measurement of tank precharge pressure)
Redundant primary sensor (if Hydro MPC is supplied with this option)
9.7.30 Analog inputs and measured value (4.3.8.1.1 to 4.3.8.7.1)
TM03 2357 4807 TM03 8973 4807
Fig. 72 Analog inputs
Description In the displays 4.3.8.1 to 4.3.8.7, analog inputs can be set. Each display is divided into three parts: · Setting of input signal, for instance 4-20 mA · Measured input value, for instance discharge pressure · Measuring range of the sensor/signal transmitter, for instance
0-16 bar.
Setting range It is possible to set the following parameters in each display: · Not used · Range of input signal, 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-10 V · Measured input value · Sensor range.
Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with . 2. Mark Secondary functions with or , and press . 3. Mark Analog inputs with or , and press . 4. Select the analog input with or , and press . 5. Mark the setting of the analog input with or , and
activate it with . The activation is indicated by a check mark in the box.
Note
If an analog input is deactivated, the display will only show the top part, i.e. the setting of the analog input. If the input is activated, the middle part, "Measured input value", is shown. This makes it possible to relate a function to the analog input in another display. When the analog input has been related to a function, CU 351 will return to the display for setting of analog inputs.
Fig. 73 Analog inputs and measured value
Description In the display Analog inputs and measured value (4.3.8.1.1 to 4.3.8.7.1), a function can be related to the individual analog inputs.
Setting range It is possible to select one function per analog input. · Not used · 0-100 % signal · Inlet pressure · Discharge pressure · External pressure · Differential pressure, pump · Flow rate · Tank level, discharge side · Tank level, suction side · System pressure · Differential pressure, external · Tank precharge pressure · Differential pressure, inlet · Differential pressure, outlet · Return pipe temperature, external · Flow pipe temperature · Return pipe temperature · Differential temperature · Ambient temperature · Power, pump 1 to 6 · Power, VFD.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
47 Page 52 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Secondary functions with or , and press .
3. Mark Analog inputs with or , and press .
4. Select the analog input with or , and press .
5. Set the range of the analog input with or .
The activation is indicated by a check mark.
, and press
6. Mark Measured input value with or , and press .
Now the display 4.3.8.1.1 appears.
7. Select the input with or , and press .
8. Press
to return to display 4.3.8.1.
9. Set the minimum sensor value with .
or , and save with
10.Set the maximum sensor value with .
or , and save with
9.7.31 Digital outputs (4.3.9)
Fig. 74 Digital outputs
Description In this display, the digital relay outputs of the Hydro MPC can be set. Each output can be activated and related to a certain function. As standard, the Hydro MPC has two digital outputs. If the Hydro MPC incorporates an IO 351B module (option), the number of digital outputs is 9. In the display, all digital outputs are shown so that their physical position in the Hydro MPC can be identified.
Example DO1 (IO 351-41) [71]:
DO1 (IO 351-41) [71]
Digital output No 1 IO 351B, GENIbus number 41 Terminal No 71
For further information on the connection of various digital outputs, see the wiring diagram supplied with the CU 351.
Setting range In the display Digital outputs (4.3.9), the digital output to be used is selected.
TM03 2333 4807 TM03 8974 4807
9.7.32 Functions of digital outputs (4.3.9.1 to 4.3.9.16)
Fig. 75 Functions of digital outputs
Description In the displays Functions of digital outputs (4.3.9.1 to 4.3.9.16), a function can be related to the individual outputs.
Setting range It is possible to select one function in each display: · No function · Operation, system · Alarm, system · Warning, system · Ready, system · Water shortage · Min. pressure · Max. pressure · Emergency run · Pilot pump control · Pressure relief valve · Operation, pump 1 to 6 · Alarm, pump 1 to 6 · Alarm, limit 1 exceeded · Warning, limit 1 exceeded · Alarm, limit 2 exceeded · Warning, limit 2 exceeded.
Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with . 2. Mark Secondary functions with or , and press . 3. Mark Digital outputs with or , and press . 4. Select the digital output with or , and press . 5. Mark the desired function with or , and activate it with
. The activation is indicated by a check mark in the box.
Factory setting
Digital output DO1 (CU 351) [71] DO2 (CU 351) [74]
Function Alarm, system Operation, system
48 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 53 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
9.7.33 Min., max. and user-defined duty (4.3.14)
TM03 2351 4807
Fig. 76 Min., max. and user-defined duty
Description Hydro MPC is usually controlled in a closed loop to maintain a discharge pressure. In certain periods, it may be necessary to let the booster system run in open loop at a set pump performance.
Setting range The CU 351 makes it possible to change between three operating modes: 1. Min. duty (4.3.14.1). 2. Max. duty (4.3.14.2). 3. User-defined duty (4.3.14.3).
Note
For each of these modes, the number of operating pumps and the pump performance (speed) can be set.
9.7.34 Min. duty (4.3.14.1)
TM03 2354 4807
Fig. 77 Min. duty
Description In all booster systems apart from Hydro MPC-S, minimum duty is only possible for variable-speed pumps. In Hydro MPC-S systems, only the number of pumps running at 100 % speed can be set.
Setting range · Number of pumps in operation. · Speed as percentage (25 to 100 %) for variable-speed pumps.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Secondary functions with or , and press .
3. Mark Min., max. and user-defined duty with press .
or , and
4. Mark Min. duty with or , and press .
5. Mark Number of pumps in operation, min. duty with or .
6. Set the number with
or , and save with .
7. Mark Speed with or .
8. Set the value with
or , and save with .
Factory setting
Number of pumps in operation during min. duty:
1
Speed as percentage for variable-speed pumps:
70
9.7.35 Max. duty (4.3.14.2)
TM03 2353 4807
Fig. 78 Max. duty
Description
The function makes it possible for a set number of pumps to run at maximum performance when the function is activated.
Setting range
In this display, the number of pumps to run in the operating mode Max. can be set. All pumps run at 100 % speed.
Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Secondary functions with or , and press .
3. Mark Min., max. and user-defined duty with press .
or , and
4. Mark Max. duty with or , and press .
5. Mark Number of pumps in operation at 100 % speed, max. duty with or .
6. Set the number with
or , and save with .
Factory setting
Number of pumps in operation during max. duty:
All pumps (except standby pumps)
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
49 Page 54 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
9.7.36 User-defined duty (4.3.14.3)
9.7.37 Pump curve data (4.3.19)
TM03 2352 4807 TM03 8975 4807
Fig. 79 User-defined duty
Description
In this display, it is possible to set a user-defined performance, typically a performance between min. and max. duty.
The function makes it possible to set a pump performance by selecting the number of pumps to run and the speed of variablespeed pumps.
This function primarily selects the variable-speed pumps. If the number of selected pumps exceeds the number of variable-speed pumps, mains-operated pumps are started too.
Setting range
· Number of pumps in operation.
· Speed as percentage for variable-speed pumps. Note: In Hydro MPC booster systems with only variable-speed pumps, the speed can be set between 25 and 100 %; in booster systems with both variable-speed pumps and mainsoperated pumps the speed can be set between 70 and 100 %.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Secondary functions with or , and press .
3. Mark Min., max. and user-defined duty with press .
or , and
4. Mark User-defined duty with or , and press .
5. Mark Number of pumps in operation, user-defined duty with or .
6. Set the number with
or , and save with .
7. Mark Speed with or .
8. Set the value with
or , and save with .
Factory setting The function is not activated, as the following has been set:
Number of pumps in operation during user-defined duty: 0
Fig. 80 Pump curve data
Description
The CU 351 has a number of functions using these pump data: · Nominal flow rate, Qnom, in m3/h · Nominal head, Hnom, in metres · Max. head, Hmax, in metres · Max. flow rate, Qmax, in m3/h · Power, Q0, 100 % speed, in kW · Power, Q0, 50 % speed, in kW · Nominal power, Pnom, in kW.
Note
Grundfos can supply hydraulic data for CR, CRI, CRE and CRIE pumps where GSC files can be downloaded directly to the CU 351.
Note
The electrical data, "Power, Q0, 100 % speed" and "Power, Q0, 50 % speed" must be entered manually.
For Grundfos E-pumps, the data of input power (P1) must be entered.
The data are read by means of the pump performance curves which can be found in WebCAPS on Grundfos' homepage, www.grundfos.com. See examples in figs 81 to 84.
If WebCAPS is not accessible, try to bring a pump into the three duty points: Power, Q0, 100 % speed, Power, Q0, 50 % speed and Nominal power, Pnom. Read the power values in displays 1.3 to 1.8, depending on the pump. See section 9.4.8 Pump 1...6 (1.3 to 1.8).
Hmax Hnom
Nominal duty point
TM03 9993 4807
50 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Qnom
Qmax
Fig. 81 Reading of Qnom, Hnom, Hmax and Qmax (WebCAPS)
26/11/2012
Page 55 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Duty point, Q0, 100 % speed
Power, Q0, 100 % speed
Fig. 82 Reading of Power, Q0, 100 % speed (WebCAPS)
TM03 9994 4807
Note
Qnom and Hnom are the rated duty point of the pumps and usually the duty point with the
highest efficiency.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Secondary functions with or , and press .
3. Mark Pump curve data with or , and press .
4. Mark Nominal flow rate Qnom with
or .
5. Set the value with
or , and save with .
6. Mark Nominal head Hnom with or .
7. Set the value with
or , and save with .
8. Mark Max. head Hmax with
or .
9. Set the value with
or , and save with .
10.Mark Max. flow rate Qmax with or .
11.Set the value with
or , and save with .
12.Mark Power, Q0, 100 % speed with or .
13.Set the value with
or , and save with .
14.Mark Power, Q0, 50 % speed with or .
15.Set the value with
or , and save with .
16.Mark Nominal power Pnom with or .
17.Set the value with
or , and save with .
9.7.38 Control source (4.3.20)
Duty point, Q0, 50 % speed
TM03 9995 4807
Power, Q0, 50 % speed
TM03 2342 4807
Fig. 83 Reading of Power, Q0, 50 % speed (WebCAPS)
Duty point, Nominal power, Pnom
Nominal power, Pnom
Fig. 84 Reading of Nominal power, Pnom (WebCAPS)
TM03 9996 4807
Fig. 85 Control source
Description
Hydro MPC can be remote-controlled via an external bus connection (option). See section 9.8.2 GENIbus. Control of the Hydro MPC can also take place via the bus connection. For further information, see section 9.8 Data communication.
In this display, the control source, CU 351 or the external bus connection, is selected.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Secondary functions with or , and press .
3. Mark Control source with or , and press .
4. Select the desired control source with with .
or , and save
Factory setting The control source is CU 351.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
51 Page 56 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
9.7.39 Fixed inlet pressure (4.3.22)
TM03 8975 4807
Fig. 86 Fixed inlet pressure
Description
If the Hydro MPC has a fixed inlet pressure, it can be entered in this display so that the CU 351 can optimise the performance and control of the booster system.
Setting range
A fixed inlet pressure can be set, and the function can be activated/deactivated.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Secondary functions with or , and press .
3. Mark Fixed inlet pressure with or , and press .
4. Set the inlet pressure with
or , and save with .
5. Mark Activated with or , and press
. The
activation is indicated by a check mark in the box.
Factory setting The function is deactivated.
9.7.40 Flow estimation (4.3.23)
The loss is caused by non-return valves and pipe bends. To improve the flow estimation of the system, it is necessary to compensate for the difference between the measured and the actual differential pressure across the pump. This is done by entering the head loss in non-return valves and pipe bends at the rated flow rate of one pump.
Setting range · 2nd order QH polynomial · 5th order QH polynomial · Power polynomial, QP · Head loss.
Note
It is possible to select several curve types, as the CU 351 makes a priority based on the data available.
Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with . 2. Mark Secondary functions with or , and press . 3. Mark Flow estimation with or , and press . 4. Select the curve type by marking one of the lines at the
selection box with or , and press .
Factory setting All polynomials are selected.
9.7.41 Monitoring functions (4.4)
TM03 8978 4807
Fig. 87 Flow estimation
Description As described in section 9.7.37 Pump curve data (4.3.19), the CU 351 can optimise operation according to performance curves and motor data. In this display, curve types are selected which the CU 351 will use for the optimisation if they are available. At large flow rates, there may be a considerable head loss between the pump discharge flange and the pressure sensor.
TM03 8977 4807
Fig. 88 Monitoring functions
Description Hydro MPC has a series of functions that constantly monitor the operation of the booster system. The primary purpose of the monitoring functions is to ensure that faults do not damage pumps or the system.
Setting range The following functions can be selected: · Dry-running protection (4.4.1) · Min. pressure (4.4.2) · Max. pressure (4.4.3) · External fault (4.4.4) · Limit 1 and 2 exceeded (4.4.5 and 4.4.6) · Pumps outside duty range (4.4.7) · Pressure relief (4.4.8).
Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with . 2. Mark Monitoring functions with or , and press . 3. Select the function with or , and press .
52 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 57 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
9.7.42 Dry-running protection (4.4.1)
9.7.43 Dry-running protection with pressure/level switch (4.4.1.1)
TM03 2320 4807 TM03 2329 4807
Fig. 89 Dry-running protection
Description
Dry-running protection is one of the most important monitoring functions, as bearings and shaft seal may be damaged if the pumps run dry. Grundfos thus always recommends dry-running protection in connection with Hydro MPC booster systems.
The function is based on monitoring of the inlet pressure or the level in a possible tank or pit on the suction side.
Level switches, pressure switches or analog sensors signalling water shortage at a set level can be used.
There are three different methods for detection of water shortage:
· Pressure switch on suction manifold or float switch/electrode relay in the supply tank. See section 9.7.43 Dry-running protection with pressure/level switch (4.4.1.1).
· Measurement of inlet pressure in the suction manifold by means of an analog pressure transmitter. See section 9.7.44 Dry-running protection with pressure transmitter (4.4.1.2).
· Measurement of level in the supply tank by means of an analog level transmitter. See section 9.7.45 Dry-running protection with level transmitter (4.4.1.3).
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Monitoring functions with or , and press .
3. Mark Dry-running protection with .
or , and press
4. Select the method with or , and press .
Fig. 90 Dry-running protection with pressure/level switch
Description
Dry-running protection can take place by means of a pressure switch on the suction manifold or a level switch in a tank on the suction side.
When the contact is open, the CU 351 will register water shortage after a time delay of approx. 5 sec. It is possible to set whether the indication is to be just a warning or an alarm stopping the pumps.
In the display, it is possible to set whether restart and reset of the alarm is to be automatic or manual.
Setting range · Selection of digital input for the function. · Reaction in case of water shortage: Warning or alarm + stop. · Restart: Manual or automatic.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Monitoring functions with or , and press .
3. Mark Dry-running protection with .
or , and press
4. Mark Pressure/level switch with or , and press .
5. Mark Go to setting of digital input, and press . Now the
display Digital inputs (4.3.7) appears. Set the input to dryrunning protection. Return with .
6. Mark Warning or Alarm + stop with with .
or , and save
7. Mark Manual or Auto with or , and save with .
Factory setting
If the booster system is equipped with a pressure switch for dryrunning protection, it is set to alarm + stop in case of water shortage.
Restart: Manual.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
53 Page 58 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
9.7.44 Dry-running protection with pressure transmitter (4.4.1.2)
9.7.45 Dry-running protection with level transmitter (4.4.1.3)
TM03 8979 4807 TM03 8980 4807
Fig. 91 Dry-running protection with pressure transmitter
Description
Dry-running protection can take place by means of a pressure transmitter measuring the inlet pressure.
It is possible to set two levels of inlet pressure: Warning and alarm + stop.
In the display, it is possible to set whether restart and reset of the alarm is to be automatic or manual.
Setting range · Selection of analog input for the function. · Activation of the function. · Inlet pressure level for warning. · Inlet pressure level for alarm + stop. · Restart: Manual or automatic.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Monitoring functions with or , and press .
3. Mark Dry-running protection with .
or , and press
4. Mark Measurement, inlet pressure with press .
or , and
5. Mark Go to setting of analog input, and press . Now the display Analog inputs (4.3.8) appears. Set the input to Inlet pressure, and save with . Return with .
6. Mark Activated with or , and press .
7. Mark Warning with or . Set the level with and save with .
or ,
8. Mark Alarm + stop with
or . Set the level with
or
, and save with .
9. Mark Manual or Auto with or , and save with .
Note
If one of the levels is not required, the level value must be the minimum value of the inlet pressure transmitter. This deactivates the function.
Factory setting If the booster system is supplied with a pressure transmitter on the suction side, the transmitter has been set. The warning level is 0.5 bar and the alarm level 0.2 bar. The function is activated. Restart: Manual.
Fig. 92 Dry-running protection with level transmitter
Description Dry-running protection can take place by means of a level transmitter measuring the level in a tank on the suction side. It is possible to set two levels: Warning and alarm + stop. In the display, it is possible to set whether restart and reset of alarms is to be automatic or manual.
Setting range · Selection of analog input for the function. · Activation of the function. · Tank level for warning. · Tank level for alarm + stop. · Restart: Manual or automatic.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Monitoring functions with or , and press .
3. Mark Dry-running protection with .
or , and press
4. Mark Measurement, tank level with .
or , and press
5. Mark Go to setting of analog input, and press . Now the display Analog inputs (4.3.8) appears. Set the input to Tank level, suction side. Return with .
6. Mark Activated with or , and press .
7. Mark Warning with or . Set the level with and save with .
or ,
8. Mark Alarm + stop with or . Set the level with or , and save with .
9. Mark Manual or Auto with or , and save with .
Factory setting The function is deactivated.
54 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 59 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
9.7.46 Min. pressure (4.4.2)
Factory setting The function is deactivated. 9.7.47 Max. pressure (4.4.3)
TM03 8981 4807 TM03 8982 4807
Fig. 93 Min. pressure
Description
The discharge pressure can be monitored so that the CU 351 can react if the pressure becomes lower than a set minimum level for an adjustable time.
The minimum pressure can be monitored if a fault indication is required in situations where the discharge pressure becomes lower than the set minimum pressure.
It is possible to set whether the indication is to be just a warning or an alarm stopping the pumps. This may be desirable if Hydro MPC is used for an irrigation system where a very low discharge pressure may be due to pipe fracture and thus an extraordinarily high consumption and a very low counterpressure. In such situations, it is desirable that the booster system stops and indicates alarm. This situation will require a manual reset of alarms.
It is possible to set a start-up delay ensuring that the Hydro MPC can build up pressure before the function is activated. It is also possible to set a time delay, i.e. for how long time the discharge pressure may be lower than the set minimum pressure before the alarm is activated.
Setting range · Activation of the function. · Minimum pressure level within the range of the primary
sensor. · Activation of stop when the pressure falls below the minimum
pressure. · Time delay at start-up. · Time delay during operation.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Monitoring functions with or , and press .
3. Mark Min. pressure with or , and press .
4. Mark Activated with or deactivate the function.
, and press
to activate/
5. Mark Min. pressure with or or , and save with .
. Set the pressure with
6. Mark Stop at min. pressure with or to activate/deactivate the function.
, and press
7. Mark Time delay of function at start-up with
the time with
or , and save with .
or . Set
8. Mark Time delay of function during operation with or
. Set the time with
or , and save with .
Fig. 94 Max. pressure
Description
The discharge pressure can be monitored so that the CU 351 can react if the pressure becomes higher than a set maximum level.
In certain installations, a too high discharge pressure may cause damage. It may therefore be necessary to stop all pumps for a short period if the pressure is too high.
It is possible to set whether the Hydro MPC is to restart automatically after the pressure has dropped below the maximum level, or if the system must be reset manually. Restart will be delayed by an adjustable time. See section 9.7.12 Min. time between start/stop (4.2.1).
Setting range · Activation of the function. · Maximum pressure level within the range of the primary
sensor. · Manual or automatic restart after fault.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Monitoring functions with or , and press .
3. Mark Max. pressure with or , and press .
4. Mark Activated with or deactivate the function.
, and press
to activate/
5. Mark Max. pressure with or or , and save with .
. Set the pressure with
6. Mark Manual or Auto with or . Activate the function with .
Factory setting The function is deactivated.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
55 Page 60 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
9.7.48 External fault (4.4.4)
9.7.49 Limit 1 and 2 exceeded (4.4.5 and 4.4.6)
TM03 2313 4807 TM03 8983 4807
Fig. 95 External fault
Description
The function is used when the CU 351 is to be able to receive a fault signal from an external contact. In case of external fault, the CU 351 indicates warning or alarm. In case of alarm, the booster system changes to another manual operating mode, for instance Stop.
Setting range · Selection of digital input for the function. · Setting of time delay from closing of the contact until the
CU 351 reacts. · Reaction in case of external fault: Warning or alarm and
change of operating mode. · Restart after alarm: Manual or automatic.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Monitoring functions with or , and press .
3. Mark External fault with or , and press .
4. Mark Go to setting of digital input with or , and press . Now the display Digital inputs (4.3.7) appears. Set the input to External fault. Return with .
5. Mark Time delay, fault indication with or
time with
or , and save with .
. Set the
6. Mark Warning with or if only a warning is required in case of external fault. Activate the function with .
7. Select operating mode with or if the booster system is to give alarm and change operating mode in case of external fault. Activate the function with .
8. Mark Manual or Auto with with .
or . Activate the function
Factory setting The function is deactivated. If the function is activated, the following values have been set from factory: · Time delay: 5 seconds. · Operating mode in case of alarm: Stop. · Restart: Manual.
Fig. 96 Limit 1 exceeded
Description With this function, the CU 351 can monitor set limits of analog values. It will react if the values exceed the limits. Each limit can be set as a maximum or minimum value. For each of the monitored values, a warning limit and an alarm limit must be defined. The function makes it possible to monitor two different locations in a pump system at the same time. For instance the pressure at a consumer and the pump discharge pressure. This ensures that the discharge pressure does not reach a critical value. If the value exceeds the warning limit, a warning is given. If the value exceeds the alarm limit, the pumps are stopped. A delay can be set between the detection of an exceeded limit and the activation of a warning or an alarm. A delay can also be set for resetting a warning or an alarm. A warning can be reset automatically or manually. It is possible to set whether the system is to restart automatically after an alarm, or if the alarm must be reset manually. Restart can be delayed by an adjustable time. It is also possible to set a startup delay ensuring that the system reaches a steady state before the function becomes active.
Setting range · Activation of an analog input for the function. · Selection of the measured value to be monitored. · Setting of limit type (min./max.). · Setting of warning limit. · Setting of alarm limit.
Setting via control panel
Note
Analog inputs must be correctly set before the function is activated. See section 9.7.28 Analog inputs (4.3.8).
1. Mark the Settings menu with
2. Mark Monitoring functions with or , and press
3. Mark Limit 1 exceeded or Limit 2 exceeded with and press .
or ,
4. Mark Go to setting of analog input with press .
or , and
5. Select the analog input with or , and press .
6. Mark the setting of the analog input with or , and activate it with . The activation is indicated by a check mark in the box.
56 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 61 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
7. Mark Measured value with or the display 4.3.8.1.1 appears.
, and press
. Now
8. Select the input with or , and press .
9. Press
to return to display 4.3.8.1.
10.Set the minimum sensor value with .
or , and save with
11.Set the maximum sensor value with .
or , and save with
12.Return by pressing
twice.
13.Mark Measured value to be monitored with or ., and press . Select the input with or , and press .
14.Return with .
15.Mark Min. limit or Max. limit with .
or ., and press
16.Mark Set delays with or , and press
17.Mark Time delay of function at start-up with
the time with
or , and save with .
or . Set
18.Mark Time delay of function during operation with or
. Set the time with
or , and save with .
19.Mark Time delay of function at reset with or
the time with
or , and save with .
. Set
20.Return with .
21.Mark Set warning limit with or , and press .
22.Mark Activated with or , and press .
23.Mark Warning limit with or or , and save with .
. Set the value with
24.Mark Manual or Auto with with .
or . Activate the function
25.Return with .
26.Mark Set alarm limit with or , and press .
27.Mark Activated with or , and press .
28.Mark Alarm limit with
or . Set the value with
or
, and save with .
29.Mark Manual or Auto with with .
or . Activate the function
30.Return with .
31.Mark Activated with the function.
or , and press
to activate
Factory setting The function is deactivated.
9.7.50 Pumps outside duty range (4.4.7)
Description
The function gives a warning if the duty point of the pumps moves outside the defined range. For instance, if the inlet pressure becomes lower than a minimum permissible value, thus causing a risk of cavitation for some pump types.
The warning is given with a set time delay. It is possible to set whether the warning is to be reset automatically or manually when the duty point comes within the defined duty range. It is also possible to set a relay output to be activated when the warning is given, and to be deactivated when the warning is reset.
This function requires that the discharge pressure and the inlet pressure (either measured or configured) or the differential pressure of the pumps is monitored, and that CU 351 contains valid pump data from either a GSC file or from manual input. See section 9.7.37 Pump curve data (4.3.19).
Setting range · Activation of the function. · Setting of manual or automatic reset. · Setting of warning delay.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with
2. Mark Monitoring functions with or , and press .
3. Mark Pumps outside duty range with .
or , and press
4. Mark Manual or Auto with function with .
or , and activate the
5. Mark Warning delay with or . Set the time with or , and save with .
6. Mark Activated with the function.
or , and press
to activate
Factory setting The function is deactivated.
9.7.51 Pressure relief (4.4.8)
TM03 8984 4807 TM03 8986 4807
Fig. 97 Pumps outside duty range Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Fig. 98 Pressure relief
26/11/2012
57 Page 62 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Description
The purpose of the function is to reduce the pressure in the pipework by opening a solenoid valve if it exceeds a set limit. If the pressure is not reduced within a given time, the solenoid valve will be closed, and a warning can be given.
P [psi]
1: Solenoid valve opens. 2: Solenoid valve closes. 3: Solenoid valve opens. 4: Warning is activated. 5: Solenoid valve closes, and warning is reset.
1
23
45
Valve opening pressure
Band
Valve opening pressure minus band
Fig. 99 Pressure relief
Warning Time [sec] delay
Setting range · Setting of digital output. · Setting of pressure to be monitored. · Setting of valve opening pressure. · Setting of band for valve opening pressure. · Setting of warning or alarm. · Activation of the function.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with
2. Mark Monitoring functions with or , and press .
3. Mark Pressure relief with or , and press .
4. Mark Go to setting of digital output with press .
or , and
5. Select a digital output with or , and press .
6. Mark Pressure relief with or , and save with .
7. Return by pressing
twice.
8. Mark Pressure to be monitored with .
or , and press
9. Mark Discharge pressure, System pressure or External pressure with or , and save with .
10.Return with .
11.Mark Valve opening pressure with or . Set the
pressure with
or , and save with .
12.Mark Band, valve opening pressure with or
pressure with
or , and save with .
. Set the
13.Mark Warning, Deactivated or Activated with and press .
or ,
14.Mark Delay with
or . Set the time with
or ,
and save with . (Only to be set if warning has been
activated.)
15.Mark Activated with function.
or , and press
activate the
Factory setting The function is deactivated.
TM03 9206 3607 TM03 2295 4807
9.7.52 Functions, CU 351 (4.5)
Fig. 100 Functions, CU 351
Description
In this submenu, it is possible to make the basic settings of the CU 351.
CU 351 comes with most of these settings, or they are made at start-up and normally not to be changed.
The service language, English, can be activated for service purposes. If no buttons are touched for 15 minutes, the display will return to the language selected at start-up or to the language set in section 9.7.53 Display language (4.5.1).
Note
If the service language is selected, the symbol will be shown to the right of the top line of all displays.
Setting range · Activation of service language, British English. · Re-activation of start-up wizard.
(After start-up, the wizard is inactive.) · Selection of display language. · Selection of display units. · Setting date and time. · Selection of password for the menus Operation and Settings. · Setting of Ethernet communication. · Setting of GENIbus number. · Reading of software status.
9.7.53 Display language (4.5.1)
TM03 8987 4807
Fig. 101 Display language
58 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 63 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Description Here the language for the CU 351 display is selected.
Setting range · British English · German · Danish · Spanish · Finnish · French · Greek · Italian · Dutch · Polish · Portuguese · Russian · Swedish · Chinese · Korean · Japanese · Czech · Turkish.
Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with . 2. Mark Functions, CU 351 with or , and press . 3. Mark Display language with or , and press . 4. Select language with or , and save with .
Factory setting The display language is English. It can be changed at start-up.
9.7.54 Display units (4.5.2)
Setting range
Parameter
Basic setting
Possible units
SI
US
Pressure
Differential pressure Head Level Flow rate Volume
Specific energy
Temperature Differential temperature Power Energy
bar
psi
kPa, MPa, mbar, bar, m, psi
m
psi
kPa, MPa, mbar, bar, m, psi
m
ft m, cm, ft, in
m
ft m, cm, ft, in
m3/h
gpm
m3/s, m3/h, l/s, gpm, yd3/s, yd3/min, yd3/h
m3
gal l, m3, gal, yd3
kWh/m3, Wh/gal, kWh/m3 Wh/gal Wh/kgal, BTU/gal,
HPh/gal
°C
°F K, °C, °F
K
KK
kW
HP W, kW, MW, HP
kWh
kWh
kWh, MWh, BTU, HPh
Note
If units are changed from SI to US or vice versa, all individually set parameters will be changed to the basic setting in question.
Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with . 2. Mark Functions, CU 351 with or , and press . 3. Mark Units with or , and press . 4. Select the unit with or , and save with .
A check mark shows that the unit has been selected. 5. Select the measuring parameter with or , and press
to open the display for the measuring parameter. See the example.
TM03 8988 4807 TM03 2310 4807
Fig. 102 Display units
Description In this display, it is possible to select units for the various parameters. As basic setting, it is possible to select between SI and US units. It is also possible to select other units for the individual parameters.
Fig. 103 Example of selection of display units
6. Select the unit with or , and save with . A check mark shows that the unit has been selected.
Factory setting CU 351 has been set to US units from factory.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
59 Page 64 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
9.7.55 Date and time (4.5.3)
9.7.56 Passwords (4.5.4)
TM03 8989 4807 TM03 2899 4807
Fig. 104 Date and time
Description In this display, date and time are set as well as how they are to be shown in the display. The clock has a built-in rechargeable voltage supply which can supply the clock for up to 20 days if the voltage supply to the Hydro MPC is interrupted. If the clock is without voltage for more than 20 days, it must be set again.
Setting range The date can be set as day, month and year. The time can be set as a 24-hour clock showing hours and minutes. There are three formats.
Examples of format
2005-09-27 13:49 27-09-2005 13:49 9/27/2005 1:49pm
It is also possible to select if Sunday or Monday is to be the first day of week.
Setting via control panel
1. Mark the Settings menu with .
2. Mark Functions, CU 351 with or , and press .
3. Mark Date and time with or , and press .
4. Mark Day, Month and Year with or , and set the date with or . Save with .
5. Mark Hours and Minutes with or with or . Save with .
, and set the time
6. Select the format with or , and save with .
7. Mark First day of week, Sunday or Monday with or ,
and save with
Factory setting Local time.
Note
If the booster has been without voltage for more than 20 days since it left the factory, the clock may have returned to the original setting: 01-012005 0:00.
Date and time may have been changed during the setting of Hydro MPC.
There is no automatic changeover to/from daylight-saving time.
Fig. 105 Passwords
Description
In this display it is possible to limit the access to the Operation and Settings menus by means of a password. If the access is limited, it is not possible to view or set any parameters in the menus.
The password must consist of four digits and may be used for both menus.
Note
If you have forgotten the password(s), contact Grundfos.
Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with . 2. Mark Functions, CU 351 with or , and press . 3. Mark Password with or , and press . 4. Mark the password to be activated, and press . 5. Mark Enter password, and press .
Now the first digit of the password is flashing. 6. Select the digit with or , and save with .
Now the second digit of the password is flashing. 7. Repeat points 4 to 6 if it is necessary to activate the other
password.
Factory setting
Both passwords are deactivated. If a password is activated, the factory setting will be "6814".
9.7.57 Ethernet (4.5.5)
Fig. 106 Ethernet
TM03 2298 4807
60 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 65 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Description The CU 351 is equipped with an Ethernet connection for communication with a computer, either directly or via Internet. For further information, see section 9.8.1 Ethernet.
9.7.58 GENIbus number (4.5.6)
9.7.59 Software status (4.5.9)
TM03 2297 4807 TM03 2296 4807
Fig. 107 GENIbus number
Description
CU 351 can communicate with external units via an RS-485 interface (option). For further information, see fig. 109 and section 9.8.2 GENIbus.
Communication is carried out according to the Grundfos bus protocol, GENIbus, and enables connection to a building management system or another external control system.
Operating parameters, such as setpoint and operating mode, can be set via the bus signal. Furthermore, status about important parameters, such as current value and input power, and fault indications can be read from the CU 351.
Contact Grundfos for further information.
Setting range The number can be set between 1 and 64.
Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with 2. Mark Functions, CU 351 with 3. Mark GENIbus number with 4. Select the number with or
. or , and press .
or , and press . , and save with .
Factory setting No number is set ("").
Fig. 108 Software status
Description This display shows the status of the software installed in the CU 351. Furthermore, the version code and the product numbers of configuration files (GSC) read into the unit are shown. As it is a status display, no settings can be made.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
61 Page 66 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
9.8 Data communication
CU 351 is equipped with a hardware enabling communication with external units, such as a computer, via an external GENIbus or Ethernet connection.
Third-party gateway
Grundfos G100 gateway
Intranet
External GENIbus connection
External GENIbus module (factory option)
Ethernet connection
Internet
TM03 2044 3505
Fig. 109 Data communication via external GENIbus and Ethernet connection
9.8.1 Ethernet
Ethernet is the most widely used standard for local networks (LAN). The standardisation of this technology has created some of the easiest and cheapest ways of creating communication between electrical units, for instance between computers or between computers and control units.
The web server of the CU 351 makes it possible to connect a computer to the CU 351 via an Ethernet connection. The user interface can thus be exported from the CU 351 to a computer so that the CU 351 and consequently the Hydro MPC booster system can be monitored and controlled externally.
Note
Grundfos recommends that you protect the connection to the CU 351 according to your safety requirements in consultation with the system administrator.
In order to use the web server, you must know the IP address of the CU 351. All network units must have a unique IP address in order to communicate with each other. The IP address of the CU 351 from factory is 192.168.0.102.
Alternatively to the factory-set IP address, it is possible to use a dynamic assignment of IP address. This is possible by activating a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) either directly in the CU 351 or via the web server. See the example in fig. 110.
Fig. 110 Example of setting of Ethernet
Dynamic assignment of an IP address for the CU 351 requires a DHCP server in the network. The DHCP server assigns a number of IP addresses to the electrical units and makes sure that two units do not receive the same IP address. A traditional Internet browser is used for connection to the web server of the CU 351. If you want to use the factory-set IP address, no changes are required in the display. Open the Internet browser and enter the IP address of the CU 351.
TM03 2298 4807
62 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 67 of 382
TM03 2047 3505
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
In order to use dynamic assignment, the function must be
activated. Click
Use DHCP in the menu line. A check mark
next to the menu line shows that activation has been made.
After activation in the display, open the Internet and enter the
host name of the CU 351 instead of the IP address. The Internet
browser will now try to connect to the CU 351. The host name can
be read in the display, but can only be changed by either a GSC-
file (configuration file) or via a web server. See Change of
network setting on page 63.
Note To use DHCP, a host name is required. This is the first display shown when connecting to the CU 351.
Fig. 113 Network setting
Change of network setting When connection to the web server of the CU 351 has been established, it is possible to change the network setting.
TM03 2048 3505
Fig. 111 Connection to CU 351
Factory setting User name: admin Password: admin When user name and password have been entered, a Java Runtime Environment application starts up in the CU 351, provided that it has been installed on the computer in question. If this is not the case, but the computer is connected to Internet, then use the link on the screen to download and install the Java Runtime Environment application.
Fig. 114 Change of network setting
1. Press the icon >Network admin. 2. Enter the changes. 3. Press Submit to activate the changes.
TM03 2050 3505
TM03 2049 3505
Fig. 112 Display with link to the JavaScript® program
The Java Runtime Environment application will then export the CU 351 user interface (including display and operating panel) to the computer screen. It is now possible to monitor and control the CU 351 from the computer.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
63 Page 68 of 382
TM03 2051 3505
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual Change of password
Fig. 115 Change of password 1. Press the icon >Change password. 2. Enter the new password. 3. Press Submit to activate the new password. 9.8.2 GENIbus By installing a GENIbus module it is possible to connect a CU 351 to an external network. The connection can take place via a GENIbus-based network or a network based on another protocol via a gateway. See fig. 109. For further information, contact Grundfos. The gateway may be a Grundfos G100 gateway or a third party gateway. For further information on the G100 gateway, see the G100 data booklet (publication number V7139522).
64 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 69 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
10. External variable frequency drive
External variable frequency drives used in Hydro MPC booster system variants -F, -EF and -EDF come with the manufacturer's factory settings. See tables below.
At start-up, the factory settings must be changed to the Grundfos settings in the tables below.
In order not to affect the functions of the CU 351 at optimum operation, only the parameters shown should be adjusted. Other parameters should be as set from factory.
10.1 VLT 2800
Press [QUICK MENU] + [+] to access all parameters.
Parameter Function
Factory setting
Value or number in the display of VLT
2
Local/remote operation
3
Local reference
101 Torque characteristics
102 Motor power
103 Motor voltage
104 Motor frequency
105 Motor current
106 Rated motor speed
107 Automatic motor adaptation
128 Thermal motor protection
204 Minimum reference
205 Maximum reference
206 Ramp type
207 Ramp up time
208 Ramp down time
214 Reference function
215 Preset reference
302 Digital input
304 Digital input
305 Digital input6
323 Relay output
406 Automatic restart time
411 Switching frequency
* Thermistor function used for thermal protection of LC filter.
** For information about languages available, see relevant documentation.
*** Use data from the Hydro MPC booster set.
Factory setting of VLT 2800 To recall the factory settings of all parameters, follow one of the procedures below: 1. Set the parameter 620 to (3). 2. Disconnect the power supply. 3. Re-connect the power supply. 4. All parameters are now factory-set except from the fault log. or 1. Disconnect the power supply. 2. Press and hold [QUICK MENU] + [+] + [CHANGE DATA] and
re-connect the power supply. All parameters are now factory-set, including the fault log.
Grundfos setting
Function
Value or number in the display of VLT
Local/remote operation
0
Local reference
Default
Torque characteristics
2
Motor power
Motor nameplate in kW
Motor voltage
Motor nameplate
Motor frequency
Motor nameplate, Hz
Motor current
Motor nameplate, SFA
Rated motor speed
Motor nameplate RPM
Automatic motor adaptation 2
Thermal motor protection 4
Minimum reference
20 Hz
Maximum reference
60 Hz
Ramp type
2
Ramp up time
1.5 sec
Ramp down time
3 sec
Reference function
2
Preset reference
100
Digital input
7
Digital input
0
Digital input6
24
Relay output
1
Automatic restart time Switching frequency
10 sec 4500
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
65 Page 70 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
10.2 Danfoss VLT 8000 factory settings
Press [EXTEND MENU] to access all parameters.
Parameter
001 002 003 004 005 006 201 202 207 208 323 326
Function
Language Motor power Motor voltage Motor frequency Motor current Motor speed Minimum frequency Maximum frequency Ramp up time Ramp down time Relay 1 function Relay 2 function
Grundfos setting
Value
English
0
Motor nameplate
Motor nameplate
Motor nameplate
Motor nameplate (SFA)
Motor nameplate (RPM)
20 Hz
60 Hz
1.5 sec
3 sec
Ready signal
1
Running
3
10.3 Danfoss VLT 8000 extended menu programming
Parameter Function
Grundfos setting Value
007
Large readout
Frequency [Hz]
3
008
Small display readout
Motor voltage [V]
16
009
Small display readout
Motor current
5
010
Small display readout
Power [Hp]
6
101
Torque characteristics
VT low
2
113
Motor Preheater DC Current
0%
117
Motor Thermal Protection
ETR Trip 1
4
208
Automatic ramp-down
Disable
0
210
Reference type
External/preset
2
302
Pin 18
Start
1
303
Pin 19
Reverse and start
2
304
Pin 27
Safety interlock
3
308
Pin 53
Reference
1
309
Term. 53, min. scaling
0.0 V
310
Term. 53, max. scaling
10 V
325
Relay 01, off delay
1 sec.
400
Reset function
Automatic reset x 10
6
401
Automatic restart time
5 sec.
407
Switching frequency
4500
408
Interference reduction method
Fixed switching freq.
0
016
Lock for data change
Locked
1
66 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 71 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
10.4 Danfoss VLT 8000 factory settings
Press [EXTEND MENU] to access all parameters.
Parameter
001 002 003 004 005 006 201 202 207 208 323 326
Function
Language Motor power Motor voltage Motor frequency Motor current Motor speed Minimum frequency Maximum frequency Ramp up time Ramp down time Relay 1 function Relay 2 function
Grundfos setting
Value
English
0
Motor nameplate
Motor nameplate
Motor nameplate
Motor nameplate (SFA)
Motor nameplate (RPM)
20 Hz
60 Hz
1.5 sec
3 sec
Ready signal
1
Running
3
10.5 Danfoss VLT 8000 extended menu programming
Parameter Function
Grundfos setting Value
007
Large readout
Frequency [Hz]
3
008
Small display readout
Motor voltage [V]
16
009
Small display readout
Motor current
5
010
Small display readout
Power [Hp]
6
101
Torque characteristics
VT low
2
113
Motor Preheater DC Current
0%
117
Motor Thermal Protection
ETR Trip 1
4
208
Automatic ramp-down
Disable
0
210
Reference type
External/preset
2
302
Pin 18
Start
1
303
Pin 19
Reverse and start
2
304
Pin 27
Safety interlock
3
308
Pin 53
Reference
1
309
Term. 53, min. scaling
0.0 V
310
Term. 53, max. scaling
10 V
325
Relay 01, off delay
1 sec.
400
Reset function
Automatic reset x 10
6
401
Automatic restart time
5 sec.
407
Switching frequency
4500
408
Interference reduction method
Fixed switching freq.
0
016
Lock for data change
Locked
1
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
67 Page 72 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
10.6 Baldor Smart motor settings
Section
Parameter
Level 2 blocks Output limts Output limts Output limts Output limts
Miscellaneous Motor data Motor data
Level 1 blocks Preset speed
Accel
Min. output frequency Max. output PK current limit PWM frequency Restart aut/man Motor voltage Motor rated amps
Preset speed #1 Accel #1
Decel rate
Decel #1
Output Input Input V/Hz and Boost
Opto output #1 Operating mode ANA CMD select V/Hz profile
Grundfos setting Value
12 Hz 60 Hz Max. of drive 6 kHz Auto 230 V SFA on nameplate
60 Hz CR 3 - CR 10 CR 15 - CR 90 CR 3 - CR 10 CR 15 - CR 90 Ready #1 2 wire / 7 spd Pot. / 0-10 V 67% sqr. law
1.5 sec. 2.0 sec. 3.0 sec. 4.0 sec.
68 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 73 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
10.7 VLT FC 202
Press [EXTEND MENU] to access all parameters.
Parameter Function
Grundfos setting Value
001 002 003 020 021 022 023 024 100 103 121 122 123 124 125 190 302 303 304 310 313 341 342 412 414 419 511 513 540.0 542.0 610 611 614 615 1400 1401
Language Motor Speed Unit Regional Settings Display Line 1.1 Display Line 1.2 Display Line 1.3 Display Line 2 Large Display Line 3 Large Configuration Mode Torque Characteristics Motor Power [HP] Motor Voltage Motor Frequency Motor Current Motor Nominal Speed Motor Thermal Protection Minimum Reference Maximum Reference Reference Function Preset Reference Reference Site Ramp 1 Ramp up Time Ramp 1 Ramp down Time Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] Max Output Frequency Terminal 19 Digital Input Terminal 29 Digital Input Function Relay Off Delay, Relay Terminal 53 Low Voltage Terminal 53 High Voltage Terminal 53 Low Ref. / Feedb. Terminal 53 High Ref. / Feedb. Switching Pattern Switching Frequency
English Hz North America Small Power [hp] Small Motor Voltage Small Motor Current Frequency Speed [RMP] Open Loop Variable Torque Nameplate Nameplate Nameplate Nameplate Nameplate ETR trip 1 0.000 Hz 60.000 Hz Sum 100.00% Remote 1.50 s 3.00 s 0.0 Hz 60.0 Hz 65.0 Hz Start reversing Preset reference on Drive ready 2.00 s 0.00 V 10.00 V 20.000 Hz 60.000 Hz 60 AVM 5.0 kHz
0 1 1 1611 1612 1614 1615 1617 0 1
4
0 1
11 15 2
0 7
Factory setting of VLT FC 100 To recall the factory settings of all parameters, follow one of the procedures below: 1. Select parameter 14-22. 2. Press [OK]. 3. Select "Initialisation" (for NLCP select "2"). 4. Press [OK]. 5. Disconnect the power supply. 6. Reconnect the power supply. 7. All parameters are now factory-set, except RFI 1, protocol,
address, baud rate, minimum response delay, maximum response delay, maximum inter-char delay, operating data, historic log and fault log.
or 1. Disconnect the power supply. 2. Press and hold [STATUS] + [MAIN MENU] + [OK] and
reconnect the power supply. 3. All parameters are now factory-set, except operating hours,
the number of power-ups and overtemp's and overvolt's.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
69 Page 74 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
11. Fault finding chart
Warning
Before making any connections in pumps, terminal boxes or breaker cabinet, make sure that the electricity supply has been switched off for at least 5 minutes and that it cannot be accidentally switched on.
Fault
Possible cause
Remedy
Current pressure is higher than or equal to the setpoint.
Wait until the pressure has dropped, or lower the pressure on the discharge side of the Hydro MPC, and check that the pumps start.
Electricity supply disconnected.
Connect the electricity supply.
Main switch cut out.
Cut in the main switch.
Pumps do not run when started.
Main switch is defective. Motor protection is activated.
Replace the main switch. Contact Grundfos.
Motor is defective.
Repair or replace the motor.
Pressure transmitter fault - Pressure transmitter is defective.
Replace the pressure transmitter. Transmitters with 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA output signals are monitored by the Hydro MPC.
- Cable is broken or short-circuited.
Repair or replace the cable.
The pumps start, but stop immediately. The operating pressure Dry running or no inlet pressure. is not reached.
Re-establish the supply of water to the Hydro MPC. When the inlet pressure has been re-established, the pumps will restart after 15 seconds.
The Hydro MPC is stopped and cannot restart.
Pressure transmitter fault - Pressure transmitter is defective.
- Cable is broken or short-circuited. CU 351 fault - Electricity supply disconnected.
Replace the pressure transmitter. Transmitters with 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA output signals are monitored by the Hydro MPC. Repair or replace the cable.
Connect the electricity supply.
- CU 351 defective.
Contact Grundfos.
Inlet pressure is too low.
Unstable water delivery from
Suction pipe or pumps partly blocked by
Hydro MPC (applies to unstable water impurities.
supply).
Pumps suck air.
Check the suction pipe and possible suction strainer.
Clean the suction pipes, strainer or pumps.
Check the suction pipe for leakages.
Pressure transmitter defective.
Replace the transmitter.
The valves are closed.
Open the valves.
Suction pipe or pumps blocked by impurities.
Clean the suction pipe or pumps.
Pumps are running, but deliver no water.
Non-return valve blocked in closed position.
Clean the non-return valve. The non-return valve must move freely.
Suction pipe leaky.
Check the suction pipe for leakages.
Air in suction pipe or pumps.
Vent and prime the pumps. Check the suction pipe for leakages.
The Hydro MPC is unable to reach the setpoint.
Too high consumption. Too many standby pumps selected. Pipe fracture or leakage in the system.
- Reduce consumption (if possible). - Install a bigger Hydro MPC booster system.
Reduce the number of standby pumps.
Check the system, and repair damages, if necessary.
Leakage from the shaft seal.
Shaft seal is defective.
Replace the shaft seal.
Height adjustment of pump shaft inaccurate. Readjust the shaft height.
The pumps are cavitating.
Clean the suction pipe/pumps and possibly the suction strainer.
Noise.
The pumps do not rotate freely (friction resistance) due to inaccurate height adjustment of the pump shaft.
Readjust the shaft height.
Very frequent starts and stops.
Wrong diaphragm tank precharge pressure. Set correct precharge pressure.
70 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 75 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
12. Maintenance
Warning Before starting work on the pumps, make sure that the electricity supply has been switched off. Lock the main switch with a padlock to ensure that it cannot be accidentally switched on.
12.1 Pumps
Pump bearings and shaft seal are maintenance-free.
12.2 Motor bearings
Motors without grease nipples are maintenance-free. Motors with grease nipples should be lubricated with a hightemperature lithium-based grease. See the instructions on the fan cover of Grundfos motors. In the case of seasonal operation (motor is idle for more than 6 months of the year), it is recommended to grease the motor when the pump is taken out of operation.
12.3 CU 351
The CU 351 is maintenance-free. It must be kept clean and dry. Protect it against direct sunlight. Furthermore, the CU 351 must not be outside the ambient temperature range. See section 15. Technical data.
13. Frost protection
Pumps which are not being used during periods of frost should be drained to avoid damage. Drain the pump by loosening the vent screw in the pump head and by removing the drain plug from the base.
Warning Care must be taken to ensure that the escaping water does not cause injury to persons or damage to the motor or other components. In hot water installations, special attention should be paid to the risk of injury caused by scalding hot water. Do not tighten the vent screw and replace the drain plug until the pump is to be used again.
14. Taking out of operation
Switch off the main switch to take the booster system out of operation.
Warning The conductors in front of the main switch are still energised. Lock the main switch with a padlock to ensure that it cannot be accidentally switched on. Individual pumps are taken out of operation by switching off the corresponding motor-protective circuit breaker, automatic circuit breaker or fuse.
15. Technical data
15.1 Pressure
Inlet pressure Hydro MPC booster sets can operate with a positive inlet pressure (precharged pressure system) or with a negative inlet pressure (i.e vacuum at the inlet manifold). Calculation of the inlet pressure is recommended when · water is drawn through long pipes, · water is drawn from depths, · inlet conditions are poor.
Note
In this installation and operating instruction the term `inlet pressure' is defined as the pressure/ vacuum which can be measured immediately before the booster set.
To avoid cavitation, make sure that there is a minimum inlet pressure on the suction side of the booster set. The minimum inlet pressure in bar can be calculated as follows:
H = Pb NPSH Hf Hv Hs
Pb = Barometric pressure in feet (33.9 feet at sea level). In closed systems, Pb indicates system pressure in feet.
Hf = Friction loss in suction piping in feet. (At the highest flow the pump will be delivering).
Hv = Vapor pressure in feet. NPSH = Net Positive Suction Head in feet.
NPSH can be read from the NPSH curve at the maximum capacity at which the pump will run. (See installation and operating instructions for CR, CRI, CRN).
HS = Safety margin = minimum 2 feet. If "H" is calculated as positive, the pump can operate at a suction
of maximum "H" feet. If "H" is calculated as negative, an inlet pressure (psia) of minimum "H" feet is required.
Maximum inlet pressure
Pump
60 Hz CR(E) 5-7 CR(E) 10-3 CR(E) 15-3 CR(E) 20-3 CR(E) 32-2 CR(E) 45-2-1 CR(E) 64-2-1 CR 90-2-1
Maximum inlet pressure [psi]
145 116 145 145 58 145 145 218
Note
The maximum inlet pressure is determined by the construction of the pump, such as bearing pressure. For information about other CR pump sizes, see WebCAPS on www.grundfos.com.
Operating pressure As standard the maximum operating pressure is 230 psi [16 bar]. On request, Grundfos offers Hydro MPC booster systems with a maximum operating pressure higher than 230 psi [16 bar].
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
71 Page 76 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
15.2 Temperature
Liquid temperature: Ambient temperature:
32 °F to +158 °F 32 °F to +104 °F
15.3 Relative humidity
Max. relative humidity: 95 %
15.4 Sound pressure
For sound pressure level, see the installation and operating instructions for the CR pumps.
The sound pressure level for a number of pumps can be calculated as follows:
Lmax = Lmax = Lpump = n=
Lpump + (n 1) x 3 Maximum sound pressure level. Sound pressure level for one pump. Number of pumps.
16. Electrical data
Supply voltage See nameplate of the Hydro MPC. Backup fuse See the wiring diagram supplied with the Hydro MPC. Digital inputs
Open circuit voltage: Closed circuit current: Frequency range:
24 VDC 5 mA, DC 0-4 Hz
Note
All digital inputs are supplied with PELV voltage (Protective Extra-Low Voltage).
Analog inputs
Input current and voltage:
Tolerance: Repetitive accuracy: Input resistance, current: Input resistance, voltage, CU 351: Input resistance, voltage, IO 351:
Supply to sensor:
0-20 mA 4-20 mA 0-10 V ±3.3 % of full scale ±1% of full scale < 250 10 k ±10 % > 50 k ± 10 % 24 V, maximum 50 mA, short-circuit protected
Note
All analog inputs are supplied with PELV voltage (Protective Extra-Low Voltage).
Digital outputs (relay outputs)
Maximum contact load: Minimum contact load:
240 VAC, 2 A 5 VDC, 10 mA
All digital outputs are potential-free relay contacts.
Note
Some outputs have a common C terminal. For further information, see the wiring diagram supplied with the Hydro MPC.
Inputs for PTC sensor/thermal switch
For PTC sensors to DIN 44082. Thermal switches can also be connected.
Open circuit voltage: Closed circuit current:
12 VDC ±15 % 2.6 mA, DC
Note
Inputs for PTC sensors are electrically separated from the other inputs and outputs of the Hydro MPC.
17. Related documents
Further product information about Hydro MPC booster systems can be found in the following documents. All documents are available in WebCAPS on Grundfos' homepage, www.grundfos.com.
Title
Frequency
Publication number
Product Guide
Grundfos Hydro MPC Grundfos CR,CRI,CRN
60 Hz 60 Hz
Installation and operating instructions
CR, CRI, CRN
CRE, CRIE, CRNE, CRKE, SPKE, MTRE, CHIE *
60 Hz 60 Hz
Service documentation
Service instructions Service kit catalog
50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Other documentation
Wiring diagram**
-
L-BPQ-PG-01 L-CR-PG-001
L-CP-TL-003 L-MLE-TL-02
96646712 96488862
-
* Only relevant for Hydro MPC-E, -ED and -ES booster systems. ** A wiring diagram is supplied with the booster system.
18. Disposal
This product or parts of it must be disposed of in an environmentally sound way: 1. Use the public or private waste collection service. 2. If this is not possible, contact the nearest Grundfos company
or service workshop.
72 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Subject to alterations. Page 77 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
J & P Richardson Industries Pty Ltd
4 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL INFORMATION
4.1 Circuit Breakers & Isolators 4.2 Surge Protection & Fuses 4.3 Control Devices 4.4 Variable Frequency Drive 4.5 Instruments 4.6 Pushbuttons & Selector Switches 4.7 Telemetry & Power 4.8 Accessories
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Revision 0
26/11/2012
Date: 2 July 2012
Page 78 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual J & P Richardson Industries Pty Ltd
4.1 CIRCUIT BREAKERS & ISOLATORS Terasaki DINTMS1003 100A Metering Isolator Terasaki E125NJ100 3P 100A Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Terasaki DTCB15332C + DTLDC 3P 32A Circuit Breaker + Captive Lock Dog Terasaki DTCB10306C 3P 6A Circuit Breaker Terasaki DTCB10106C 1P 6A Circuit Breaker Terasaki DTCB10104C 1P 4A Circuit Breaker Terasaki DSRCBH-16-30A 1P 16A Residual Circuit Breaker Overload Terasaki DSRCBH-06-30A 1P 6A Residual Circuit Breaker Overload
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Revision 0
26/11/2012
Date: 2 July 2012
Page 79 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
1
Innovators in Protection Technology
Miniature circuit breakers
Din-TMS main switches 63 100 amps
M6tsaoi3Tid6neC3-cDhs1m&awa0Duossi08xtiisundc0iinAlseh-i.tTaastmrmrAoacydlohnpliNsuag,raweCnseccsitcDtitesci.hnpt-
n AS/NZS 60947-3 n Double break contacts n Dual function terminals busbar and cable n Padlockable handle n Handle sealable: On and Off position n Terminal protection degree IP 20 n Used as main switch (isolator) in loadcentres and distribution boards n Suits NC or CD type chassis
Rating In (A)
63
No. of Poles
1
No. of Modules
1
Contacts
Cat. No. 1) DINTMS631
2
2
DINTMS632
3
3
DINTMS633
80
1
1
DINTMS801
2
2
DINTMS802
3
3
DINTMS803
100
1
1
DINTMS1001
2
2
DINTMS1002
3
3
DINTMS1003
DINTMS 3 pole DINTMS 1 pole
Technical data Nominal rated current
Usable as mains disconnect switch Nominal breaking capacity at 415 V, cos ø = 0.95 Nominal breaking capacity at 415 V, cos ø = 0.65 Nominal voltage single pole devices Nominal voltage multipole devices Maximum allowed current during less than 1 s. Mechanical service life (complete on-off-cycle) Electrical service life, cos ø = 0.95, Un and In Short-circuit resistance with upfront fuses Short-circuit resistance without upfront fuses Protection degree Screws Terminal capacity: min.
max. Making capacity 1.05 x 4, cos ø0.65
63-80-100 A
yes 3 x In 3 x In 240 / 415 V 240 / 415 V 2 kA >20000 >1500 16 kA (nominal) 7 kA (peak) IP 20 Pozidrive 2 1 x 6 mm2 1 x 50 mm2 3 x Ie
Accessories Auxiliary contacts Padlock attachment
Page 1 - 32 to 35 1 - 45
Notes: 1) DINTMS Main switches will accept side mounting auxiliary switches only. Front mounting and terminal devices can also be fitted.
1 - 30 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 80 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
MCCB's
Thermal magnetic type
E125NJ
25kA
Current rating:
12.5 125A
Approvals and Tests: Standards AS/NZS 3947-2, and IEC60947-2
Interrupting capacity:
Voltage AC use 380/415 DC use 250V
Icu
Ics
25
19
25
19
Trip unit: Adjustable thermal (0.63 Ir to 100% Ir) and adjustable magnetic (6 Im to 12 Im)
Dimensions (mm) Poles H W D (less toggle) Toggle cut-out
3 155 90 68 Standard DIN
Ampere Rating NRC
Adj. Ir 1) Min - Max.
Adj. Im 1) Min - Max.
20
12.5 - 20
120 - 240
32
20 - 32
192 - 384
50
32 - 50
300 - 600
63
40 - 63
378 - 756
100
63 - 100
600 - 1200
125
80 - 125
750 - 1500
1)
NRC:
Adj. Ir:
Adj. Im:
Nominal rated current Adjustable thermal setting Adjustable magnetic setting
Cat. No.
E125 NJ 3 20 E125 NJ 3 32 E125 NJ 3 50 E125 NJ 3 63 E125 NJ 3 100 E125 NJ 3 125
Replaces: XS125CJ, Note: check exact ratings or dimenions to suit your application requirement Price Schedule T2
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
6
Page 81 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Innovators in Protection Technology
TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs
OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
THERMAL MAGNETIC PROTECTION
Adjustment Dials
SECTION 3
1. IR is the thermal element adjustment dial and is used to set the rated current to match the conductor rating.
IR can be set between 0.63 and 1.0 times In.
2. Ii is the magnetic element adjustment dial and is used to set the short circuit tripping threshold to suit the application.
Ii can be set between 6 and 12 times In on 125A and 400A frame models.
Ii can be set between 6 and 13 times In on 250A frame models with ratings of 160A, 200A and 250A.
Ii can be set between 6 and 12 times In on 250A frame models with ratings of 125A and less.
Models, Types and Rated Currents of Thermal Elements
Model S125 E125 S125 S125 H125 L125 S160 S160 S160 H160 L160 E250 S250 S250 H250 L250 E400 S400 S400 S400 H400 L400
Type -NF -NJ -NJ -GJ -NJ -NJ -NF -NJ -GJ -NJ -NJ -NJ -NJ -GJ -NJ -NJ -NJ -CJ -NJ -GJ -NJ -NJ
Current Rating In (A) 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125 20, 32, 50, 63, 100, 125 20, 32, 50, 63, 100, 125 20, 32, 50, 63, 100, 125 20, 32, 50, 63, 100, 125 20, 32, 50, 63, 100, 125 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160 20, 32, 50, 63, 100, 125, 160 50, 63, 100, 125, 160 160 160 20, 32, 50, 63, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250 160, 200, 250 160, 200, 250 160, 250 160, 250 250, 400 250, 400 250, 400 250, 400 250, 400 250, 400
Beyond the StandardTM
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
page 23
Page 82 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Innovators in Protection Technology
TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs
OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
THERMAL MAGNETIC CHARACTERISTICS
125A Frame MCCBs
SECTION 3
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Beyond the StandardTM
26/11/2012
page 25
Page 83 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Innovators in Protection Technology
TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs
APPLICATION DATA
SELECTIVITY (DISCRIMINATION) AND CASCADE
Selectivity The principle of Selectivity (Discrimination) is based upon an analysis of several circuit breaker characteristics. These include time-current (tripping) curves, peak-let-through current (Ipeak) and energy let-through (I2t).
The figures stated give the maximum selectivity level with the two nominated breakers in series under short-circuit conditions. For an indication on selectivity under overloads refer to the circuit breaker tripping/characteristic curves, or use the NHP TemCurve selectivity analysis software package. Selectivity can be enhanced beyond the breaking capacity of the downstream breaker provided it is backed up by an appropriately selected upstream breaker, which should not trip (unlatch) under the stated short circuit current. Cascade Cascading is achieved by using an upstream device to assist (back-up) a downstream device in clearing a fault current. This principal is necessary should the downstream device be required to clear a prospective short circuit current greater than the devices' breaking capacity. In most cascading applications it is generally necessary for the upstream breaker to trip (unlatch), as well as the downstream breaker to give adequate back-up protection. As such, cascade is commonly used in feeding and protecting non-essential loads, such as basic lighting. For more information on selectivity and cascading please refer to the latest NHP Part C catalogue.
SECTION 4
page 44
Beyond the StandardTM
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 84 of 382
page 45
Page 85 of 382
Beyond the StandardTM
26/11/2012
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
S250PE H250NE S400NE S400GE H400NE L400NE E630NE S630CE S630GE TL630NE XS800SE XH800SE TL800NE XS1250SE TL1250NE XS1600SE XS2000NE XS2500NE
Selectivity & Cascade Tables @ 400 / 415 V
Upstream MCCBs
Downstream kA
MCCBs
(RMS) 70 125 50
E125NJ
25 25/25 25/65 25/36
S125NJ
36 36/36 36/85 36/50
S125GJ
65 65/65 65/125 50/50
H125NJ
125 70/70 125/125 50/50
S160NJ
36
36/50
S160GJ
65
50/50
H160NJ
125
E250NJ
25
S250NJ
36
S250GJ
65
S250PE
70
H250NJ
125
H250PE
125
E400NJ
25
S400CJ
36
S400NE
50
S400NJ
50
S400GJ
70
H400NJ
125
H400NE
125
E630NE
36
E630CE
50
S630GE
70
XS630CJ 45
XS630NJ 65
XS630PJ
85
XS630SE 50
XH630SE 65
XH630PE 65
XS800NJ 65
XS800SE 50
XJ800PJ
85
XH800SE 65
XH800PE 65
XS1250SE 65
XS1600SE 85
70 125 200 36 25/50 25/65 25/85 25/36 36/65 36/85 36/125 36/36 65/70 65/125 65/150 36/36 70/70 125/125 125/200 36/36 36/65 36/85 36/125 36/36 65/70 65/125 65/150 36/36
125/125 125/200 36/36 25/65 25/85 25/36 36/85 36/125 36/36 65/125 65/150 36/36 40/125 70/150 36/36
125/125 125/200 36/36 125/125 125/200 36/36
10/25 10/36 10/36 10/36 10/36 10/36 10/36
50 25/25 36/36 50/50 50/50 36/50 50/50 50/50 25/25 36/36 50/50 50/50 50/50 50/50 10/25 10/36 10/50 10/36 10/50 10/50 10/50
SECTION 4
XX / YY Selectivity/ Cascade
70 25/50 36/65 65/70 70/70 36/50 65/70 70/70 25/50 36/65 65/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 10/50 10/65 10/50 10/70 10/70 10/70 10/70
125 25/25 36/36 65/65 70/70 36/36 65/65 70/70 25/25 36/36 65/65 70/70 70/70 70/70 10/36 10/50 10/50 10/65 10/70 10/70 10/70
50 25/36 36/50 65/50 50/50 36/36 50/50 50/50 25/25 36/36 50/50 50/50 50/50 50/50 25/25 25/36 25/50 25/50 25/50 25/50 25/50 25/36 25/50
65 25/36 36/36 65/65 65/65 36/65 50/65 50/65 25/50 36/36 50/65 50/65 50/65 50/65 25/25 25/36 25/50 25/50 25/50 25/65 25/65 25/36 25/50
125 85 125 100 85 85 25/65 25/25 25/25 25/25 25/25 25/25 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 65/65 65/65 65/65 65/65 65/65 65/65 65/65 85/50 85/50 100/100 85/85 85/85 36/65 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 50/65 65/65 65/65 65/65 65/65 65/65 50/65 85/65 85/65 100/100 85/85 85/85 25/50 25/25 25/25 25/25 25/25 25/25 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 50/65 65/65 65/65 65/65 65/65 65/65 50/65 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 50/65 85/85 85/85 100/100 85/85 85/85 50/65 85/85 85/85 100/100 85/85 85/85 25/36 25/25 25/25 25/36 25/25 25/25 25/50 36/36 36/36 36/50 36/36 36/36 25/50 50/50 50/50 50/50 50/50 50/50 25/65 50/50 50/50 50/65 50/50 50/50 25/65 70/36 70/36 70/85 70/70 70/70 25/65 125/85 125/85 125/100 125/85 125/85 25/65 125/85 125/85 125/100 125/85 125/85 25/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 25/50 50/50 50/50 50/50 50/50 50/50
70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 30/45 30/45 30/45 35/45 35/45 30/65 30/65 30/65 35/65 36/65 30/85 30/85 30/85 35/85 35/85 30/65 30/65 30/85 30/85 30/85 30/65 30/65 30/85 30/85 30/85 30/65 30/65 30/85 30/85 30/85 15/65 15/65 20/65 35/65 35/65 15/50 15/50 20/50 35/50 35/50 15/85 15/85 20/85 35/85 35/85 15/65 15/65 20/65 35/65 35/65 15/65 15/65 20/65 35/65 35/65
20/65 35/65 35/65 35/85 35/85
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Innovators in Protection Technology
TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs
APPLICATION DATA
SELECTIVITY TABLES
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Innovators in Protection Technology
TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs
APPLICATION DATA
CASCADE TABLES
L250NJ H250NE H250NJ S250PE S250GJ S250NJ E250NJ L160NJ H160NJ S160GJ S160NJ L125NJ H125NJ S125GJ S125NJ E125NJ
SECTION 4
CASCADE @ 380 415 V AC 1)
Downstream kA MCCBs (RMS) 25 36 65 125 200 36 65 125 200 25 36 65 70 125 125 200
E125NJ S125NJ S125GJ H125NJ S160NJ S160GJ H160NJ S250NJ S250GJ S250PE H250NJ E400NJ S400CJ S400NJ S400GJ H400NJ
25
36 36 65 85 36 36 65 85
36 36
65 65 85
36
50 85 125 50 85 125
85 85 125
65
125 150
125 150
65 125 125 150
125
200
- 200
65
200
36
65
65 85 125
65 65 85 85 125
65
125 150
70 125 125 150
125
200
-
200
36
65
65 85 85 125
65
70 125 125 150
70
125 125 150
125
200
25
36 65 65
36
50 70 70
50
50 65 85 85
70
50 125 125
125
Note: 1) Ratings have not been verified where a dash "" is shown.
All pick-up and time delay settings are to be set at a maximum for upstream MCCB's
Upstream MCCBs
XS1600SE
XS1250SE
TL800NE
XH800SE
XS800NJ
XS800SE
TL630NE
S630GE
S630CE
E630NE
L400NE
L400NJ H400NJ H400NE S400GE S400GJ S400NE S400NJ S400CJ
CASCADE @ 380 415 V AC 1)
Downstream kA MCCBs (RMS) 36 50 70 125 200 200 36 50 70 125 65 65 65 200 65 85
E125NJ S125NJ S125GJ H125NJ S160NJ S160GJ H160NJ E250NJ S250NJ S250GJ S250PE H250NJ E400NJ S400CJ S400NJ S400GJ H400NJ
25 36 36 50 65 85 85 36
- 50 36 36 36
36 50 65 85 125 125
- 65 50 50
65
70 125 150 150 50 70
65
125
200 200
-
65 50
36 50 65 85 125 125 50 50
65 65
65
70 125 150 150
70
125
200 200
65 65
25 36 36 50 65 85 85 36 50
36 50
36 50 65 85 125 125
65
65
65
70 125 150 150
70
70
125 150 150
125
200 200 -
25 36 36 50 65 85 85 36 50 36
36 36
36 50 65 70 100 100
65 50
50 50
50
70 85 125 125 36 70 65
50 65 65
70
125 150 150 36
50 36 85
125
200 200
Note: 1) Ratings have not been verified where a dash "" is shown.
All pick-up and time delay settings are to be set at a maximum for upstream MCCBs
page 46
Beyond the StandardTM
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 86 of 382
SECTION 4
H400NJ S400GE S400GJ S400CJ S250GJ S250NJ H125NJ S125GJ S125NJ E125NJ
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Innovators in Protection Technology
TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs
APPLICATION DATA
SELECTIVITY AND CASCADE TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs AND DIN-T / SAFE-T MCBs
Upstream MCCB
SELECTIVITY / CASCADE @ 415 V AC
Downstream MCB
DTCB6
DTCB10
DSRCBH / DSRCD Din-T10H DTCH15
Safe-T SRCB
Amp rating 2 20 25 63 0.5 32 40 63 0.5 32
40 80 125 0.5 32 40 63 16 20 16 20
kA (RMS) 25 36 65 36 65 36 70 125
6 18/18 25/25 35/35 35/35 35/35 6 18/18 20/25 20/25 30/30 30/30 10 18/18 30/30 30/50 35/35 40/50 35/35 40/50 40/50 10 18/18 20/25 25/25 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 10 18/18 30/30 30/50 35/35 40/50 35/35 40/50 40/50 10 18/18 20/25 25/25 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 10 4/18 4/25 4/25 15/15 15/15 10/10 10/10 15 18/18 30 30/50 35/35 40/50 35/35 40/50 40/50 15 18/18 20 25/25 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 6 3/10 3/10 3/10 6 3/10 3/10 3/10
Guide XX / YY
Selectivity
Cascade
Notes: All figures stated are at 400/415 V AC.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Beyond the StandardTM
26/11/2012
page 47
Page 87 of 382
SECTION 4
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Innovators in Protection Technology
TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs
APPLICATION DATA
MOTOR STARTING TYPE 1 CO-ORDINATION TABLES
Short-Circuit Co-Ordination Motor Starting Table
Type `1' Terasaki MCCB's & Sprecher + Schuh KT7's DOL starting 50/65 kA @ 400/415 V to AS/NZS 60947.4.1
TYPE 1 50/65 kA
Motor Size (kW) 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 5 0 10 32 60 00
Approx. amps @ 400/415 V (A) 1.1 1.5 1.8 2.6 3.4 4.8 6.5 8.2 11 14 21 28 34 40 55 66 80 100 130 155 200 225 270 361
Terasaki Combinations
MCCB
Contactor
XM30PB/1.4 XM30PB/2 XM30PB/2.6 XM30PB/4.0 XM30PB/5 XM30PB/8 XM30PB/10 XM30PB/12 S125GJ/20 S125GJ/20 S125GJ/32 S125GJ/50 S125GJ/50 S125GJ/63 S125GJ/100 S125GJ/100 S125GJ/125 S125GJ/125 S250PE/250 S250PE/250 S250PE/250 S400GE/400 S400GE/400 S400GE/400
CA7-9 CA7-9 CA7-9 CA7-9 CA7-9 CA7-9 CA7-9 CA7-9 CA7-12 CA7-16 CA7-23 CA7-30 CA7-37 CA7-43 CA7-60 CA7-72 CA7-85 CA6-110 CA6-140 CA6-180 CA6-210 CA6-210 CA6-300 CA6-420
Notes: · Thermal or electronic overload relays may be used. · XM30PB MCCB's can be replaced with S125GJ/20 if required. · Combinations based on the thermal overload relay tripping before the circuit. breaker at overload currents up to the motor locked rotor current.
Terasaki Combinations
Overload Relay CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-45 CT 7-45 CT 7-45 CT 7-75 CT 7-75 CT 7-100 CEF 1-11/12 CEF 1-11/12 CEF 1-11/12 CEF 1-41/42 CEF 1-41/42 CEF 1-41/42 CEF 1-41/42
Thermal Setting (A) 1.0 - 1.6 1.0 - 1.6 1.6 - 2.4 2.4 - 4.0 2.4 - 4.0 4.0 - 6.0 6.0 - 10 6.0 - 10 10 - 16 10 - 16 16 - 24 18 - 30 30 - 45 30 - 45 45 - 60 60 - 75 70 - 90 20 - 180 20 - 180 20 - 180 160 - 400 160 - 400 160 - 400 160 - 400
Sprecher + Schuh Combinations
KT7 Circuit Breaker KTA7-25S-1.0A KTA7-25S-1.6A KTA7-25S-2.5A KTA7-25S-2.5A KTA7-25S-4.0A KTA7-25S-6.3A KTA7-25S-6.3A KTA7-25S-10A KTA7-25H-16A KTA7-25H-16A KTA7-45H-20A KTA7-45H-32A KTA7-45H-45A KTA7-45H-45A KTA3-100-63A KTA3-100-90A KTA3-100-90A KTA3-160S-100A KTA3-160S-160A KTA3-160S-160A KTA3-250S-200A KTA3-250S-250A KTA3-400S-320A KTA3-400S-400A
Contactor
CA7-9 CA7-9 CA7-9 CA7-9 CA7-9 CA7-9 CA7-9 CA7-9 CA7-12 CA7-16 CA7-23 CA7-30 CA7-37 CA7-43 CA7-60 CA7-72 CA7-85 CA6-110 CA6-140 CA6-180 CA6-210 CA6-250 CA6-300 CA6-420
page 48
Beyond the StandardTM
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 88 of 382
SECTION 4
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Innovators in Protection Technology
TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs
APPLICATION DATA
MOTOR STARTING TYPE 2 CO-ORDINATION TABLES
Short-Circuit Co-Ordination DOL Motor Starting Table
Type `2' Terasaki MCCB's & Sprecher + Schuh KT7's DOL starting 50/65 kA @ 400/415 V to AS/NZS 60947.4.1
TYPE 2 50/65 kA
Motor Size (kW) 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200
Approx. amps @ 400/415 V (A) 1.1 1.5 1.8 2.6 3.4 4.8 6.5 8.2 11 14 21 28 34 40 55 66 80 100 130 155 200 225 270 361
Terasaki Combinations
MCCB
Contactor
XM30PB/1.4 XM30PB/2 XM30PB/2.6 XM30PB/4.0 XM30PB/5 XM30PB/8 XM30PB/10 XM30PB/12 S125GJ/20 S125GJ/20 S125GJ/32 S125GJ/50 S125GJ/50 S125GJ/63 S125GJ/100 S125GJ/100 S125GJ/125 S250PE/160 S250PE/250 S250PE/250 S250PE/250 S400PE/400 S400PE/400 S400PE/400
CA7-9 CA7-9 CA7-9 CA7-16 CA7-16 CA7-16 CA7-30 CA7-30 CA7-30 CA7-30 CA7-30 CA7-43 CA7-43 CA7-43 CA7-72 CA7-72 CA6-105 CA6-105 CA6-140 CA6-170 CA6-210 CA6-210 CA6-300 CA6-420
Notes: · Thermal or electronic overload relays may be used. · XM30PB combinations can be replaced with S125GJ/20 and CA7-30 if required. · Combinations based on the thermal overload relay tripping before the circuit breaker at overload currents up to the motor locked rotor current.
Terasaki Combinations
Overload Relay CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-45 CT 7-45 CT 7-45 CT 7-75 CT 7-75 CT 7-100 CEF 1-11/12 CEF 1-11/12 CEF 1-11/12 CEF 1-41/42 CEF 1-41/42 CEF 1-41/42 CEF 1-41/42
Thermal Setting (A) 1.0 - 1.6 1.0 - 1.6 1.6 - 2.4 2.4 - 4.0 2.4 - 4.0 4.0 - 6.0 6.0 - 10 6.0 - 10 10 - 16 10 - 16 16 - 24 18 - 30 30 - 45 30 - 45 45 - 60 60 - 75 70 - 90 20 - 180 20 - 180 20 - 180 160 - 400 160 - 400 160 - 400 160 - 400
Sprecher + Schuh Combinations
KT7 Circuit Breaker KTA7-25S-1A KTA7-25S-1.6A KTA7-25S-2.5A KTA7-25S-2.5A KTA7-25S-4A KTA7-25S-6.3A KTA7-25S-6.3A KTA7-25S-10A KTA7-25H-16A KTA7-25H-16A KTA7-45H-20A KTA7-45H-32A KTA7-45H-45A KTA7-45H-45A KTA3-100-63A KTA3-100-90A KTA3-100-90A KTA3-160S-100A KTA3-160S-160A KTA3-160S-160A KTA3-250S-200A KTA3-250S-250A KTA3-400S-320A KTA3-400S-400A
Contactor
CA7-9 CA7-9 CA7-9 CA7-9 CA7-9 CA7-9 CA7-9 CA7-9 CA7-12 CA7-16 CA7-23 CA7-30 CA7-37 CA7-43 CA7-60 CA7-72 CA7-85 CA6-110 CA6-140 CA6-180 CA6-210 CA6-250 CA6-300 CA6-420
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Beyond the StandardTM
26/11/2012
page 49
Page 89 of 382
SECTION 4
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Innovators in Protection Technology
TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs
APPLICATION DATA
MOTOR STARTING TYPE 2 CO-ORDINATION
Short-Circuit Co-Ordination DOL Motor Starting Table
Type `2' Terasaki MCCB's & Sprecher + Schuh KT7's DOL starting 85 kA @ 400/415 V to AS/NZS 60947.4.1
TYPE 2 85 kA
Motor Size (kW) 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200
Approx. amps @ 400/415 V (A) 1.1 1.5 1.8 2.6 3.4 4.8 6.5 8.2 11 14 21 28 34 40 55 66 80 100 130 155 200 225 270 361
Terasaki Combinations
MCCB
Contactor
XM30PB/1.4 XM30PB/2 XM30PB/2.6 XM30PB/4.0 XM30PB/5 XM30PB/8 XM30PB/10 XM30PB/12 H125NJ/20 H125NJ/20 H125NJ/32 H125NJ/50 H125NJ/50 H125NJ/63 H125NJ/100 H125NJ/100 H125NJ/160 H160NJ/160 H250PE/250 H250PE/250 H250PE/250 H400NE/400 H400NE/400 H400NE/400
CA 7-9 CA 7-9 CA 7-9 CA 7-16 CA 7-16 CA 7-30 CA 7-30 CA 7-30 CA 7-30 CA 7-30 CA 7-30 CA 7-43 CA 7-43 CA 7-43 CA 7-72 CA 7-72 CA 6-105 CA 6-105 CA 6-210 CA 6-210 CA 6-210 CA 6-210 CA 6-300 CA 6-420
Notes: · Thermal or electronic overload relays may be used. · XM30PB combinations can be replaced with H125GJ/20 and CA7-30 if required. · Combinations based on the thermal overload relay tripping before the circuit breaker at overload currents up to the motor locked rotor current.
Terasaki Combinations
Overload Relay CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-45 CT 7-45 CT 7-45 CT 7-75 CT 7-75 CT 7-100 CEF 1-11/12 CEF 1-11/12 CEF 1-11/12 CEF 1-41/42 CEF 1-41/42 CEF 1-41/42 CEF 1-41/42
Thermal Setting (A) 1.0 - 1.6 1.0 - 1.6 1.6 - 2.4 2.4 - 4.0 2.4 - 4.0 4.0 - 6.0 6.0 - 10 6.0 - 10 10 - 16 10 - 16 16 - 24 18 - 30 30 - 45 30 - 45 45 - 60 60 - 75 70 - 90 20 - 180 20 - 180 20 - 180 160 - 400 160 - 400 160 - 400 160 - 400
Sprecher + Schuh Combinations
KT7 Circuit Breaker KTA7-25S-1A KTA7-25S-1.6A KTA7-25S-2.5A KTA7-25H-2.5A KTA7-25H-4A KTA7-25H-6.3A KTA7-25H-6.3A KTA7-25H-10A KTA7-45H-16A KTA7-45H-16A KTA7-45H-20A KTA7-45H-32A KTA7-45H-45A KTA7-45H-45A KTA3-100-63A KTA3-100-90A KTA3-100-90A -
Contactor
CA 7-9 CA 7-9 CA 7-9 CA 7-9 CA 7-9 CA 7-9 CA 7-9 CA 7-9 CA 7-12 CA 7-16 CA 7-23 CA 7-30 CA 7-37 CA 7-43 CA7-60 CA7-72 CA7-85 -
page 50
Beyond the StandardTM
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 90 of 382
SECTION 4
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Innovators in Protection Technology
TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs
APPLICATION DATA
MOTOR STARTING TYPE 2 CO-ORDINATION
Short-Circuit Co-Ordination DOL Motor Starting Table
Type `2' Terasaki MCCB's & Sprecher + Schuh KT7's DOL starting 100 kA @ 400/415 V to AS/NZS 60947.4.1
TYPE 2 100 kA
Motor Size (kW) 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200
Approx. amps @ 400/415 V (A) 1.1 1.5 1.8 2.6 3.4 4.8 6.5 8.2 11 14 21 28 34 40 55 66 80 100 130 155 200 225 270 361
Terasaki Combinations
MCCB
Contactor
H125NJ/20 H125NJ/20 H125NJ/20 H125NJ/20 H125NJ/20 H125NJ/20 H125NJ/20 H125NJ/20 H125NJ/20 H125NJ/20 H125NJ/32 H125NJ/50 H125NJ/50 H125NJ/63 H125-NJ/100 H125-NJ/100 H125-NJ/125 H250-NE/160 H250-NE/250 H250-NE/250 H250-NE/250 H400-NE/400 H400-NE/400 H400-NE/400
CA 7-30 CA 7-30 CA 7-30 CA 7-30 CA 7-30 CA 7-30 CA 7-30 CA 7-30 CA 7-30 CA 7-30 CA 7-30 CA 7-43 CA 7-43 CA 7-43 CA 7-60 CA 7-72 CA 7-85 CA 6-95 CA 6-140 CA 6-140 CA 6-180 CA 6-420 CA 6-420 CA 6-420
Notes: · Thermal or electronic overload relays may be used. · Combinations based on the thermal overload relay tripping before the circuit breaker at overload currents up to the motor locked rotor current.
Terasaki Combinations
Overload Relay CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-24 CT 7-45 CT 7-45 CT 7-45 CT 7-75 CT 7-75 CT 7-100 CEF 1-11/12 CEF 1-11/12 CEF 1-11/12 CEF 1-41/42 CEF 1-41/42 CEF 1-41/42 CEF 1-41/42
Thermal Setting (A) 1.0 - 1.6 1.0 - 1.6 1.6 - 2.4 2.4 - 4.0 2.4 - 4.0 4.0 - 6.0 6.0 - 10 6.0 - 10 10 - 16 10 - 16 16 - 24 18 - 30 30 - 45 30 - 45 45 - 60 60 - 75 70 - 90 20 - 180 20 - 180 20 - 180 160 - 400 160 - 400 160 - 400 160 - 400
Sprecher + Schuh Combinations
KT7 Circuit Breaker KTA7-25S-1A KTA7-25S-1.6A KTA7-25S-2.5A KTA7-25H-2.5A KTA7-25H-4A KTA7-25H-6.3A KTA7-25H-6.3A KTA7-25H-10A KTA7-45H-16A KTA7-45H-16A KTA7-45H-20A KTA7-45H-32A KTA7-45H-45A KTA7-45H-45A -
Contactor
CA 7-9 CA 7-9 CA 7-9 CA 7-9 CA 7-9 CA 7-9 CA 7-9 CA 7-9 CA 7-12 CA 7-16 CA 7-23 CA 7-30 CA 7-37 CA 7-43 -
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Beyond the StandardTM
26/11/2012
page 51
Page 91 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Innovators in Protection Technology
TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs
INSTALLATION
INSULATION DISTANCE IN mm (AT 440V AC MAXIMUM)
Model
E125 S125 S125 S125 H125 L125 S160 S160 S160 H160 L160 E250 S250 S250 S250 H250 H250 L250 E400 S400 S400 S400 S400 H400 H400 L400 L400 E630 S630 S630
Type A
B1
B2
C
NJ
50
10
10
0
NF
50
10
10
0
NJ
50
10
10
0
GJ
75
45
25
0
NJ
100 80
60
0
NJ
100 80
60
0
NF
50
40
30
0
NJ
50
40
30
0
GJ
100 80
60
0
NJ
100 80
60
0
NJ
100 80
60
0
NJ
50
40
30
0
NJ
50
40
30
0
GJ
100 80
30
0
PE
100 80
60
0
NJ
100 80
60
0
NE
100 80
60
0
NJ
100 80
60
0
NJ
100 80
40
0
CJ
100 80
40
0
NJ
100 80
40
0
GJ
100 80
40
0
GE
100 80
40
0
NJ
120 120
80
0
NE
120 120
80
0
NJ
120 120
80
0
NE
120 120
80
0
NE
120 100
80
0
CE
120 100
80
0
GE
120 100
80
0
D
E
25
*(1)
25
*(1)
25
*(1)
25
*(1)
50
*(1)
50
*(1)
25
*(1)
25
*(1)
50
*(1)
50
*(1)
50
*(1)
25
*(1)
25
*(1)
25
*(1)
50
*(1)
50
*(1)
50
*(1)
50
*(1)
30
*(1)
30
*(1)
30
*(1)
30
*(1)
30
*(1)
80
*(1)
80
*(1)
80
*(1)
80
*(1)
80
*(1)
80
*(1)
80
*(1)
*Note: (1) Insulate the exposed conductor until it overlaps the moulded case at the terminal, or the terminal cover.
SECTION 6
page 78
Beyond the StandardTM
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 92 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Innovators in Protection Technology
TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs
INSTALLATION
TEMPERATURE RATINGS & DERATINGS
Calibration Temperature: 45°C
MCCB Type
E125-NJ S125-NJ S125-GJ
Connection Type
Front Rear Plug-in
H125-NJ L125-NJ
Front Rear Plug-in
S160-NJ S160-GJ
Front Rear Plug-in
H160-NJ L160-NJ
E250-NJ
Front Rear Plug-in Front Rear Plug-in
E250-NJ S250-NJ S250-GJ H250-NJ L250-NJ
E400-NJ S400-CJ S400-NJ S400-GJ H400-NJ L400-NJ
Front Rear Plug-in Front Rear Plug-in Front Rear Front Rear Plug-in
Front Rear Plug-in
Rating at calibration temperature (50°C)
20A 32A 50A 63A 100A 125A 20A 32A 50A 63A 100A 125A 20A 32A 50A 63A 100A 125A 160A
160A
20A 32A 50A 63A 100A 125A 160A 250A
160A
250A
250A 400A
250A 400A 250A 400A
Calibration Temperature: 30°C
MCCB Type
H250-NJ L250-NJ
Connection Type
Plug-in Conn.
Rating at calibration temperature (30°C)
250A
Rated Current (A)
50°C 55°C 60°C
19
18.5
18
31
30.5
30
48
45
43
60
57
55
97
94
90
121
117
113
19
18.5
18
31
30
29
48
47
45
61
59
57
97
95
92
121
118
114
19
18.5
18
31
30
29
48
46
44
61
59
57
97
94
91
121
117
113
156
151
146
156
151
147
19
18.5
18
31
30
29
48
46
44
61
59
57
97
94
91
121
117
113
156
151
146
243
235
227
65°C 17.5 29 41 52 87 109 17.5 28 44 55 89 111 17.5 28 42 55 88 109 141
143
17.5 28 42 55 88 109 141 219
156
151
147
143
244
237
230
223
244
237
230
223
390
380
369
358
243
237
230
223
390
381
371
361
243
237
231
224
392
384
376
368
Rated Current (A) 35°C 40°C 45°C
244
236
225
50°C 55°C 219 209
60°C 65°C 200 190
SECTION 6
MCCB Type
S250-PE H250-NE
S400-NE S400-GE
H400-NE L400-NE
Connection Type Front Rear
Plug-in Front Rear Plug-in Front Rear Plug-in
E630-NE S630-CE S630-GE
Front Rear*
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Rating
250A
250A 250A 400A
250A 400A 250A 400A 630A
30°C 250
35°C 250
40°C 250
Rated Current (A)
45°C 50°C
55°C
250
237.5
225
250 237.5 225 225
200
200
250
250
250 250
250
250
400
400
400 400
400
380
250
250
250 250
400
400
400 400
250
250
250 250
400
400
400 400
630
630
630 630
250 400 250 400 598.5
250 380 250 380 598.5
60°C 200
157.5 225 360
225 360 225 360 567
65°C 200
157.5 200 320
200 320 200 320 504
Beyond the StandardTM
26/11/2012
page 81
Page 93 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Innovators in Protection Technology
TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs
DIMENSIONS
E125-NJ, S125-NJ, S125-GJ
SECTION 7
8.5(max.) 132
17 8.5
154±1
3P
4P
Interpole barrier
(removable)
Mounting hole
47
HL
HL
Operating knob CL
154
Front panel t2 24
M8 screw
Preparation of conductor ø9
17(max.) max.t5
Drilling plan
3P
4P
HL
HL
155
134
60
14.5 21.5
90
90
30 30 30
45
75
10
Connector plug
45 8 61
45
106
5.5
164.5
28(max.)
M4x0.7 Mounting screw
30
30
M4x0.7 Tapped hole
Panel hinge position (hatching area) bottom view
HL
100 150 200
100 150 200
90
86
HL 154
Operating knob
Front panel t2
Mounting plate (max. t3.2)
Drilling plan
3P
4P
HL
HL
103.5
Panel cutout (Front view)
4P 3P HL
5
132 134
R1 155
8 61
134
155 148
CL
15 Conductor
CL
overlap max.
16
Pad lock Connector plug
45
ø8.5 15
15
61
52
106
102
30 30 30 Stud can be turned 45°or 90°
M4X0.7 Mounting screw
30 60
5.5
164.5
28(max.)
CL
30 30 30 30
ø18
M4X0.7 Tapped hole
45 90
Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.5mm around the handle escutcheon.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Beyond the StandardTM
26/11/2012
page 85
Page 94 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Miniature circuit breakers
Din-T15 series 15 kA, 20 kA, 25 kA MCBs
Innovators in Protection Technology
1
n Standards AS/NZS 60947-2 n Current range 6-63 Amp 1, 2, 3 and 4 pole n Sealable and lockable handle n Modular design n Mounts on NC or CD chassis n Industrial applications
1 pole 1 module 1) In (A) Icu (kA)
C - Curve 5 - 10 In
6
25
DTCB15106C
10
25
DTCB15110C
13
25
i DTCB15113C
16
25
DTCB15116C
20
25
DTCB15120C
25
25
DTCB15125C
32
20
DTCB15132C
40
20
DTCB15140C
50
15
DTCB15150C
63
15
DTCB15163C
2 pole 2 modules 1) C - Curve
In (A) Icu (kA) 5 - 10 In
6
25
i DTCB15206C
10
25
DTCB15210C
13
25
i DTCB15213C
16
25
DTCB15216C
20
25
DTCB15220C
25
25
i DTCB15225C
32
20
i DTCB15232C
40
20
50
15
63
15
i DTCB15240C i DTCB15250C i DTCB15263C
3 pole 3 modules 1)
6
25
10
25
13
25
16
25
20
25
25
25
32
20
40
20
50
15
63
15
DTCB15306C DTCB15310C i DTCB15313C DTCB15316C DTCB15320C DTCB15325C DTCB15332C DTCB15340C DTCB15350C DTCB15363C
4 pole 4 modules 1) 2)
6
25
10
25
13
25
16
25
20
25
25
25
32
20
40
20
50
15
63
15
i DTCB15406C i DTCB15410C i DTCB15413C i DTCB15416C i DTCB15420C i DTCB15425C i DTCB15432C i DTCB15440C i DTCB15450C i DTCB15463C
DTCB15 1 pole
In (A) 1 P 2 P 3 P 4 P
6 - 63 240 V AC 240/415 V AC 240/415 V AC 240/415 V AC
Shock resistance (in x, y, z direction) 20 g with shock duration of 10 ms (minimum 18 shocks) 40 g with shock duration of 5 ms (minimum 18 shocks)
Vibration resistance (in x, y, z direction) 3 g in frequency range 10 to 55 Hz (operating time at least 30 mins) according to IEC 60068-2-6
Storage temperature from -55 °C to +55 °C according to VDE 0664 parts 1 and 2
Operating temperature from -25 °C to +55 °C according to VDE 0664 Parts 1 and 2.
Use at 400 Hz At 400 Hz the magnetic tripping current is approximately 50 % higher than at AC 50/60 Hz
Notes: 1) Refer Section 3 for kA ratings at 240/415 V. The above ratings are at 415 V AC. 2) All poles include overcurrent and short circuit protection. i Available on indent only.
The LINE-side is the OFF or bottom of the MCB and connects to CD chassis tee-offs.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Accessories
Page
Add-on RCD
1 - 28 to 1 - 29
Shunt trip
1 - 36 to 1 - 38
UVT
1 - 39 to 1 - 40
Auxiliary/alarm
1 - 32 to 1 - 35
Padlock bracket
1 - 45
Link bars and terminals 1 - 44 to 1 - 45
Enclosures
Section 2
Busbar chassis
2 - 52
Technical data
Page
Technical data
Section 3
Tripping characteristics 3 - 6, 3 - 8
Dimensions
3 - 24
1 - 21 Page 95 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Din-T MCBs + RCDs Technical data
Din-T 15 15 kA C curve
Innovators in Protection Technology
3
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
3 - 15 Page 96 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Din-T MCBs + RCDs Technical data
Text for specifiers
Innovators in Protection Technology
MCB Series Din-T 6 and 10
n According to AS/NZS 60898 standard n For DIN rail mounting
(top hat rail 35 mm) n Grid distance 35 mm n Working ambient temperature from -25 °C up to +50 °C n Approved by CEBEC, VDE, KEMA, IMQ n Lloyd listed n 1 pole is a module of 18 mm wide n Nominal rated currents are:
0.5/1/2/3/4/6/10/13/16/20/25/32/40/50/63 A n Tripping characteristics: B,C,D (B curve Din-T 10 only) n Number of poles: 1 P, 2 P, 3 P, 4 P n The short-circuit breaking capacity is: 6/10 kA, energy
limiting class 3 n Terminal capacity from 1 up to 35 mm2 rigid wire or 1.5 up
to 25 mm2 flexible wire n Screw head suitable for flat or Pozidrive screwdriver n Can be connected by means of both pin or fork busbars n The toggle can be sealed in the ON or OFF position n Captive locking option n Rapid closing n Both incoming and outgoing terminals have a protection
degree of IP 20 and they are sealable n Isolator function thanks to Red/Green printing on the
toggle n Maximum voltage between two phases; 440 V~ n Maximum voltage for utilisation in DC current: 48 V 1 P and
110 V 2 P n Two position rail clip n Mechanical shock resistance 40 g (direction x, y, z)
minimum 18 shocks 5 ms half-sinusoidal acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 n Vibration resistance: 3 g (direction x, y, z) minimum 30 min. according to IEC 60068-2-6 n Extensions can be added on both left or right hand side
Auxiliary contact
Shunt trip
Undervoltage release
Motor operator
Panelboard switch n Add-on RCD can be coupled
MCB Series Din-T 15
n According to AS/NZS 60947.2 standard
n For DIN rail mounting (top hat rail 35 mm)
3
n Working ambient temperature from -25 °C up to +50 °C
n 1 pole is a module of 18 mm wide
n Nominal rated currents are: 6/10/13/16/20/25/32/40/50/63 A
n Tripping characteristic: C n Number of poles: 1 P, 2 P, 3 P, 4 P n Short-circuit capacity is: 15 kA n Terminal capacity from 1 up to 35 mm2 rigid wire or
1.5 up to 25 mm2 flexible wire
n Screw head suitable for flat or Pozidrive screwdriver n Can be connected by means of both pin or fork busbars n The toggle can be sealed in the ON or OFF position n Captive locking option n Rapid closing n Both incoming and outgoing terminals have a protection
degree of IP 20 and they are sealable
n Isolator function thanks to Red/Green printing on the toggle
n Maximum voltage between two phases; 440 V~
n Maximum voltage for utilisation in DC current: 48 V 1 P and 110 V 2 P
n Two position rail clip
n Mechanical shock resistance 40 g (direction x, y, z) minimum 18 shocks 5 ms half-sinusoidal acc. to IEC 60068-2-27
n Vibration resistance: 3 g (direction x, y, z) minimum 30 min. according to IEC 60068-2-6
n Extensions can be added on both left or right hand side
Auxiliary contact
Shunt trip
Undervoltage release
Motor operator
Panelboard switch
n Add-on RCD can be coupled
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
3 - 19 Page 97 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Din-T MCBs + RCDs Technical data
Series
Standards (Aust / NZ / International)
Tripping characteristics
Nominal current
A
Calibration temperature
°C
Number of poles (# mod)
Neutral pole protected
Nominal voltage Un AC 1 P
V
3 P/4 P
V
DC 1 P
V DC
2 P
V DC
Frequency
Hz
Hz
Hz
Maximum service voltage Ubmax between two wires
V
Minimum service voltage Ubmin
V
Selectivity class (IEC 60898)
Isolator application
IEC 60947-2
Rated insulation voltage Pollution degree 2 Pollution degree 3
Impulse withstand test voltage Insulation resistance
V V kV mOhm
Dielectric rigidity
kV
Vibration resistance (in x, y, z direction) (IEC 77/16.3)
Endurance
Electrical at Un, In
mechanical
Utilisation category (IEC 60947-2)
Protection degree (outside / inside, in enclosure with door)
Self-extinguish degree (according to UL94)
Tropicalisation (according to IEC 60068-2 / DIN 40046) °C/RH
Operating temperature
°C
Storage temperature
°C
Terminal capacity Rigid cable min/max (top)
mm2
Flexible cable min*/max (top)
mm2
Rigid cable min/max (bottom)
mm2
Flexible cable min*/max (bottom)
mm2
(* Flexible cable 0.75/1/1.5 mm2 with cable lug)
Torque
Nm
Add-on devices (side add-on)
Busbar systems Accessories
Auxiliary contacts UVT Shunt trip Motor operator Panelboard switch Pin (top/bottom) Fork (top/bottom)
Dimensions, weights, packaging (HxDxW) 86x68xW Weight/mod. Package
mm/mod. g
mod.
Short-circuit capacity AC
(kA)
IEC 60898
Icn
Ics (service) Icu (ultimate)
1 P 2 P 3 P/4 P
1 P
2 P
IEC 60947-2
3 P, 4 P
Ics (service)
NEMA AB1 (120/240V)
Short-circuit capacity DC (kA)
Icu (ultimate)
1 P
230/400 V 230/400 V 230/400 V
127 V 240 V 415 V 127 V 240 V 415 V 240 V 415 V 440 V
60 V
IEC 60947-2
2 P Ics (service)
220 V 125 V 440 V
Notes:
Refer page 3 - 25 for information on Safe-T MCBs.
1) Poles in series 2) 0.5-4 A/6-25 A/32-40 A/50-63 A 3) 10 (125 V DC)
Din-T10 AS/NZS 60898
IEC 60898 B, C, D
B6 -63 , C/D 0.5 - 63 30
1/2/3/4 yes
240/415 415 48 110 1) 50/60
DC: mag.trip +40 % 400: mag.trip +50 %
250/440; 53/120 12; 12 3 yes 500 440 6 10,000 2.5 3 g 10,000 20,000 A
IP 20/IP 40 V2
+55 °C/95 % RH -25/+55 -55/+55 1/35 0.75/25 1/35 0.75/25
4.5 yes yes yes yes yes yes/yes -/yes yes
18 120 12 AS/NZS 60898 10 10 10 75 % Icn 30 15
4 40 30 15
30 15 10 50 % Icu 30
25 30 100 % Icu
Din-T10H AS/NZS 60947-2
IEC 60947-2 C, D
80 up to 125 40
1/2/3/4 Yes
240/415 415 48 110 1) 50/60
DC: mag.trip +40 % 400: mag.trip +50 %
250/440; 53/120 12; 12 yes 500 440 6 10,000 2.5 3 g 4000 20,000 A
IP 20/IP 40 V2
+55 °C/95 % RH -25/+55 -55/+55 70 70 -
5 yes yes -
27 210 8 AS/NZS 60947-2
-
C 10; D 7.5 4.5 C 15
C 10; D 7.5 B/C 15
C 10; D 7.5 -
100 % Icu -
10 15 100 % Icu
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Innovators in Protection Technology
Din-T15 AS/NZS 60947-2
IEC 60947-2 C
0.5-63 40
1/2/3/4 Yes
240/415 415 48 110 1) 50/60
DC: mag.trip +40 % 400: mag.trip +50 %
250/440; 53/120 12; 12 yes 500 440 6 10,000 2.5 3 g 4000 20,000 A
IP 20/IP 40 V2
+55 °C/95 % RH -25/+55 -55/+55 1/35 0.75/25 1/35 0.75/25
4.5 yes yes yes yes yes yes/yes -/yes yes
18 120 12 AS/NZS 60947-2 50 50/25/20/15 2) 50/50/40/30 2) 50/25/20/15 2) 50/50/40/30 2) 50/25/20/15 2) 50/20/15/10 2) 75 % Icu -
25 30 100 % Icu
3
3 - 23 Page 98 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Innovators in Protection Technology
Din-T MCBs + RCDs Technical data
Miniature circuit breakers - Din-T 6, 10, 15 / Easy-fit
Dimensions in mm.
3
Miniature circuit breakers - Din-T 10H
Miniature circuit breakers - Din-T DC
3 - 24 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 99 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
1 Miniature circuit breakers Din-T10 series 10 kA MCB
Standard AS/NZS 4898 1) Approval No. N17481 Short circuit breaking capacity - 10000 Amps Current range 0.5 - 63 Amps 1, 2, 3 and 4 pole Sealable and lockable handle Modular design Available in curve type B, C and D Mounts on CD chassis (250 A and 355 A)
1 pole 1 module
DTCB10 1 pole
In (A)
0.5 1 2 3 4 6 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
C Curve 5-10 In DTCB10105C DTCB10101C DTCB10102C DTCB10103C DTCB10104C DTCB10106C DTCB10110C DTCB10113C DTCB10116C DTCB10120C DTCB10125C DTCB10132C DTCB10140C DTCB10150C DTCB10163C
Short circuit capacity 10 kA
In (A)
0.5 - 63
1 P
240 V AC
2 P
240/415 V AC
3 P
240/415 V AC
4 P
240/415 V AC
Use at DC
Short circuit Max voltage
1 P 25 kA 48 V DC
2 P 2) 30 kA 110 V DC
2 pole 2 modules 0.5 1 2 4 6 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
DTCB10205C DTCB10201C DTCB10202C DTCB10204C DTCB10206C DTCB10210C DTCB10213C DTCB10216C DTCB10220C DTCB10225C DTCB10232C DTCB10240C DTCB10250C DTCB10263C
Notes: 1) A range of UL standard MCBs is available on indent. (ref DTCBUL1O_ _ _ C). 2) 2 pole MCB connected in series. The line side is the "OFF" (bottom) side of the MCB, and connects to CD chassis tee-offs.
i Available on indent only.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 100 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
1
Miniature circuit breakers
Din-T10 series 10 kA MCB (cont.)
3 pole 3 modules
In (A)
0.5 1 2 4 6 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
C Curve 5-10 In i DTCB10305C i DTCB10301C
DTCB10302C DTCB10304C DTCB10306C DTCB10310C i DTCB10313C DTCB10316C DTCB10320C DTCB10325C DTCB10332C DTCB10340C DTCB10350C DTCB10363C
DTCB10 1 - 4 pole types
4 pole 4 modules 1)
6
DTCB10406C
10
DTCB10410C
13
i DTCB10413C
16
DTCB10416C
20
DTCB10420C
25
DTCB10425C
32
DTCB10432C
40
DTCB10440C
50
DTCB10450C
63
DTCB10463C
Notes: 1) All poles include overcurrent and short circuit protection.
i Available on indent only.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 101 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Innovators in Protection Technology
Din-T MCBs Technical data
Characteristics according to BS EN 60898
Miniature Circuit Breakers are intended for the protection of wiring installations against both overloads and short-circuits in domestic or commercial wiring installations where operation is possible by uninstructed people
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (Icn) Is the value of the short-circuit that the MCB is capable of withstanding in the following test of sequence of operations: O-t-CO.
3 Tripping characteristic curves
After the test the MCB is capable, without maintenance, to withstand a dielectric strength test at a test voltage of 900 V. Moreover, the MCB shall be capable of tripping when loaded with 2.8 In within the time corresponding to 2.55 In but greater than 0.1s.
Service short-circuit breaking capacity (Ics) Is the value of the short-circuit that the MCB is capable of withstanding in the following test of sequence of operations: O-t-CO-t-CO.
After the test the MCB is capable, without maintenance, to withstand a dielectric strength test at a test voltage of 1500 V. Moreover, the MCB shall not trip at a current of 0.96 In. The MCB shall trip within 1h when current is 1.6 In.
Magnetic release
An electromagnet with plunger ensures instantaneous tripping in the event of short-circuit. The NHP Din-T range has 3 different types, following the current for instantaneous release: types B, C and D curve.
Icn Test (A) current
Tripping time
Applications
B 3 x In 5 x In
0.1<t<45 s (In32 A) 0.1<t<90 s (In>32 A)
t<0.1 s
Only for resistive loads eg: · electrical heating · water heater · stoves.
C 5 x In 0.1<t<15 s (In32 A) Usual loads such as:
10 x In
0.1<t<30 s (In>32 A)
· lighting · socket outlets
t<0.1 s
· small motors
D 10 x In 0.1<t<4 s(**) (In32 A) Control and protection of
20 x In 0.1<t<8 s (In>32 A) circuits having important
transient inrush currents
t<0.1 s
(large motors)
Thermal release
The release is initiated by a bimetal strip in the event of overload. The standard defines the range of releases for specific overload values. Reference ambient temperature is 30 °C.
O - Represents an opening operation
C - Represents a closing operation followed by an automatic opening.
t - Represents the time interval between two successive short-circuit operations: 3 minutes.
The relation between the rated short-circuit capacity (Icn) and the rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (Ics) shall be as follows:
Icn (A)
6000 > 6000 10000 > 10000
Ics (A) 6000
0.75 Icn min. 6000
0.75 Icn min. 7500
In both sequences all MCBs are tested for emission of ionized gases during short-circuit (grid distance), in a safety distance between two MCBs of 35 mm when devices are installed in two different rows in the enclosure. This performance allows the use of any NHP/Terasaki enclosure.
Test current 1.13 x In
1.45 x In
2.55 x In
Tripping time
t 1 h (In 63 A) t 2 h (In > 63 A)
t < 1 h (In 63 A) t < 2 h (In > 63 A)
1 s < t < 60 s (In 32 A) 1 s < t < 120 s (In >32 A)
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 102 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Innovators in Protection Technology
Din-T MCBs Technical data
Tripping curves according to EN 60898
The following tables show the average tripping curves of the Terasaki Din-T MCBs based on the thermal and magnetic characteristics. Curve C
3
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 103 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Din-T MCBs Technical data
Din-T 10 10 kA C curve
Innovators in Protection Technology
3
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 104 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Innovators in Protection Technology
Din-T MCBs Technical data
Influence of ambient air temperature on the rated current
The maximum value of the current which can flow through an MCB depends on the nominal current of the MCB, the conductor cross-section and the ambient air temperature.
The values shown in the table below are for devices in free air.
3 For devices installed with other modular devices in the same switchboard, a correction factor (K) shall be applied relative to the mounting situation of the MCB, the ambient temperature and the number of main circuits in the installation.
The thermal calibration of the MCBs was carried out at an ambient temperature of 30 °C. Ambient temperatures different from 30 °C influence the bimetal and this results in earlier or later thermal tripping.
No of devices
K 1)
2 or 3
0.9
4 or 5
0.8
6 or 9
0.7
> 10
0.6
Calculation example
Within a distribution board consisting of eight 2 Pole, 16 A, `C' curve type MCBs, with an operating ambient temperature of 45 °C, which is the highest temperature the MCB can operate at without unwanted tripping?
Calculation
The correction factor K = 0.7, for use in an eight circuit installation: 16 A x 0.7 = 11.2 A
As the MCB is working at 45 °C it shall be given another factor (90 % = 0.9): In at 45 °C = In at 30 °C x 0.9 = 11.2 A x 0.9 = 10.1 A.
Note: 1) Applicable for MCBs working at maximum rated currents.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
: 1P (single pole) : mP (multi-pole)
Page 105 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Din-T MCBs Technical data
Innovators in Protection Technology
Effects of frequency on the tripping characteristic
All the MCBs are designed to work at frequencies of 50-60 Hz, therefore to work at different values, consideration must be given to the variation of the tripping characteristics. The thermal tripping does not change with variation of the frequency but the magnetic tripping values can be up to 50 % higher than the ones at 50-60 Hz.
Limitation curves
Let-through energy I2t
The limitation capacity of an MCB in short-circuit conditions, is
its capacity to reduce the value of the let-through energy that
the short-circuit would be generating.
Peak current Ip Is the value of the maximum peak of the short-circuit current
3
limited by the MCB.
Tripping current variation
60 Hz 1
100 Hz 1.1
200 Hz 1.2
300 Hz 1.4
400 Hz 1.5
Power losses
The power losses are calculated by measuring the voltage drop between the incoming and the outgoing terminals of the device at rated current.
Power loss per pole
In Voltage drop Energy loss
(A)
(V)
(W)
0.5
2.230
1.115
1
1.270
1.272
2
0.620
1.240
3
0.520
1.557
4
0.370
1.488
6
0.260
1.570
8
0.160
1.242
10
0.160
1.560
13
0.155
2.011
16
0.162
2.586
20
0.138
2.760
25
0.128
3.188
32
0.096
3.072
40
0.100
4.000
50
0.090
4.500
63
0.082
5.160
80
0.075
6.000
100
0.075
7.500
125
0.076
9.500
Resistance (mOhm) 4458.00 1272.00 310.00 173.00
93.00 43.60 19.40 15.60 11.90 10.10 6.90 5.10 3.00 2.50 1.80 1.30 0.90 0.75 0.60
See following pages
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 106 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Innovators in Protection Technology
Din-T MCBs Technical data
Use of standard MCB for DC use
For MCBs designed to be used in alternating current but used in installations in direct current, the following should be taken into consideration:
For protection against overloads it is necessary to connect
3
the two poles to the MCB. In these conditions the tripping characteristic of the MCB in direct current is similar to
alternating current.
Use in DC selection table
For protection against short-circuits it is necessary to connect the two poles to the MCB. In these conditions the tripping characteristic of the MCB in direct current is 40% higher than the one in alternating current.
Use of special MCB Din-T DC for DC use.
(UC = Universal current)
For MCBs designed to work in both alternating and direct current, it is necessary to respect the polarity of the terminals since the device is equipped with a permanent magnet.
Series Din-T 10
Rated current (A)
0.5....63 A
48 V 1 pole Icu (kA)
25
110 V 2 poles in series Icu (kA)
30
250 V 1 pole Icu (kA)
-
440 V 2 poles in series Icu (kA)
-
Installation of Din-T DC MCBs in direct current
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 107 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Din-T MCBs Technical data
Text for specifiers
MCB Series Din-T 10 According to EN 60898 standard For DIN rail mounting according to DIN EN 50022;
EN 50022; future EN 60715; IEC 60715 (top hat rail 35 mm) Grid distance 35 mm Working ambient temperature from -25 °C up to +50 °C Approved by CEBEC, VDE, KEMA, IMQ. 1 pole is a module of 18 mm wide Nominal rated currents are: 0.5/1/2/3/4/6/10/13/16/20/25/32/40/50/63 A Tripping characteristics: B,C,D (B curve Din-T 10 only). Number of poles: 1 P, 1 P+N, 2 P, 3 P, 3 P+N, 4 P The short-circuit breaking capacity is: 6/10k A, energy limiting class 3 Terminal capacity from 1 up to 35 mm2 rigid wire or 1.5 up to 25 mm2 flexible wire. Screw head suitable for flat or Pozidrive screwdriver Can be connected by means of both pin or fork busbars The toggle can be sealed in the ON or OFF position Rapid closing Both incoming and outgoing terminals have a protection degree of IP 20 and they are sealable Isolator function thanks to Red/Green printing on the toggle. Maximum voltage between two phases; 440 V~ Maximum voltage for utilisation in DC current: 48 V 1 P and 110 V 2 P Two position rail clip Mechanical shock resistance 40 g (direction x, y, z) minimum 18 shocks 5 ms half-sinusoidal acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 Vibration resistance: 3 g (direction x, y, z) minimum 30 min. according to IEC 60068-2-6 Extensions can be added on both left or right hand side Auxiliary contact Shunt trip Undervoltage release Motor operator Panelboard switch
Add-on RCD can be coupled.
Innovators in Protection Technology
3
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 108 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Notes
Din-T MCBs Technical data
Series
Din-T10 AS/NZS 4898
Standards (Aust / NZ / International)
IEC 60898
Tripping characteristics
B, C, D
Nominal current
A B(6-63), C/D(0.5-63)
Calibration temperature
°C
30
Number of poles (# mod) Neutral pole protected
1/2/3/4 yes
Nominal voltage Un AC 1 P
V
240/415
Frequency
3 P/4 P DC 1 P 1)
2 P (in series) 1)
V
415
V DC
48
V DC
110
Hz
50/60
Hz DC: magn.trip +40%
Hz 400: magn.trip +50%
Maximum service voltage Ubmax between two wires
V 250/440; 53/120
Minimum service voltage Ubmin
Selectivity class (IEC 60898)
Isolator application
IEC 60947-2
V
12; 12
3
yes
Rated insulation voltage Pollution degree 2
V
500
Pollution degree 3
V
440
Impulse withstand test voltage
kV
6
Insulation resistance
mOhm
10,000
Dielectric rigidity
kV
2.5
Vibration resistance (in x, y, z direction) (IEC 77/16.3)
3 g
Endurance
Electrical at Un, In
10,000
mechanical
20,000
Utilisation category (IEC 60947-2)
A
Protection degree (outside / inside, in enclosure with door)
Self-extinguish degree (according to UL94)
Tropicalisation (according to IEC 60068-2 / DIN 40046) °C/RH
Operating temperature
°C
Storage temperature
°C
IP 20/IP 40 V2
+55 °C/95 % RH -25/+55 -55/+55
Terminal capacity Rigid cable min/max (top)
mm2
1/35
Flexible cable min*/max (top) Rigid cable min/max (bottom)
mm2
0.75/25
mm2
1/35
Flexible cable min*/max (bottom)
mm2
0.75/25
(* Flexible cable 0.75/1/1.5 mm2 with cable lug)
Torque
Nm
4.5
Add-on devices Auxiliary contacts
yes
(side add-on) UVT
yes
Shunt trip
yes
Motor operator
yes
Panelboard switch
yes
Busbar systems Pin (top/bottom)
yes/yes
Fork (top/bottom)
-/yes
Accessories
yes
Dimensions, weights, packaging (HxDxW) 86x68xW
mm/mod.
18
Weight/mod.
g
120
Package
mod.
12
Short-circuit capacity AC
(kA)
AS/NZS 4898
IEC 60898
Icn Ics (service)
1 P 2 P 3 P/4 P
230/400 V 230/400 V 230/400 V
10 10 10 75 % Icn
Icu (ultimate)
1 P
127 V
30
240 V
15
IEC 60947-2
415 V
4
2 P
127 V
40
240 V
30
415 V
15
3 P, 4 P
240 V
30
415 V
15
440 V
10
Ics (service)
50 % Icu
NEMA AB1 (120/240V)
30
Short-circuit capacity DC
(kA)
Icu (ultimate)
1 P
60 V
25
IEC 60947-2
220 V
-
2 P
125 V
30
Ics (service)
440 V
100 % Icu
Refer pages 3 - 23, 24 for information on SAFE-T MCBs. 1) Preferred values of rated control supply voltage (IEC 60947 - 2): 24 V, 48 V, 110 V, 125 V, 250 V
2) 0.5-4 A/6-25 A/32-40 A/50-63 A 3) 10 (125 V DC)
Innovators in Protection Technology
3
4) 10 (250 V DC) 5) On request.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 109 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Innovators in Protection Technology
Din-T MCBs + RCDs Technical data
Miniature circuit breakers - Din-T 10
Dimensions in mm.
3
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 110 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Miniature circuit breakers
Din-Safe single pole width residual current circuit breaker (RCBO) 10 kA
Innovators in Protection Technology
1
n Standards AS/NZS 61009 n Approval N17482 n One module wide (18 mm) n Short circuit, overcurrent and earth leakage protection n Short circuit protection, 10 kA n Sensitivity 30 mA, 10 mA n DIN rail mount n Suits NC or CD chassis n Type `A' residual current device n 240 V AC
Trip sensitivity 10 mA
30 mA
Amp rating (A)
6 10 16 20 25 32 40 6 10 16 20 25 32 40
Cat. No 1)2)
i DSRCBH0610A DSRCBH1010A DSRCBH1610A DSRCBH2010A
i DSRCBH2510A i DSRCBH3210A i DSRCBH4010A
DSRCBH0630A DSRCBH1030A DSRCBH1630A DSRCBH2030A DSRCBH2530A DSRCBH3230A DSRCBH4030A
Application The Din-Safe single pole width residual current circuit breaker will fit the standard Din-T chassis for use in NHP panelboards. The design makes it possible to provide an MCB complete with earth leakage protection in an 18 mm wide module, which allows a greater number of devices to be fitted into a distribution board.
Connection diagram
Operation This unit combines the overload and short circuit protection of an MCB with earth leakage protection of an RCD. The unit occupies one, sub- circuit (one pole) of the distribution board and provides single phase protection against overload, short circuit and earth leakage current.
The MCB element provides thermal and magnetic tripping protection which is rated to 6 kA prospective fault current.
The RCD element of the device provides core-balance detection of the difference between the active and neutral currents and amplification to provide high sensitivity. The rated residual operating current (In) is 30 mA.
The white earth reference cable, in case of loss of supply neutral, ensures the device will continue to provide earth leakage protection and will operate normally upon detection of an earth leakage current.
Dimensions (mm)
Accessories Padlock bracket Link bars and terminals Enclosures
Page
1 - 45 1 - 44 to 1 - 45 Section 2
Technical data Tripping characteristics Technical data / wiring
Page Section 3 Section 3
Notes:
1) Neutral not switched. 2) Will not accept Din-T side mounting accessories. 30 mA tripping characteristics: 0.5 x IDn = no tripping, 1 x IDn = T <300 mS
2 x IDn = T <150 mS, 5 x IDn = T <40 mS Nuisance tripping may be experienced in VFD and motor starting applications refer NHP. i Available on indent only.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
1 - 25 Page 111 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual J & P Richardson Industries Pty Ltd
4.2 SURGE PROTECTION & FUSES Critec TDS-180-4S-277 Surge Diverter Critec TDF-10A-240V Surge Reduction Filter Polyphaser Corp IS-50NX-C2 Surge Protection Unit NHP 63A Fuse + 100A Fuse Holder
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Revision 0
26/11/2012
Date: 2 July 2012
Page 112 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Detailed Specifications for ERICO's
TDS-DINLINE SURGE DIVERTER TDS180-4S
Applications
Features
Lightning transients and surges are a major cause of expensive electronic equip- · Robust against abnormal over-voltage
ment failure and business disruption. Damage may result in loss of computers,
data and communications, loss of revenue, and loss of profits. The new TDSDINLINE family of surge diverters and filters offer economical and reliable
· UL1449 Edition 2 compliant
protection from power transients in even the most strenuous applications.
· Single phase primary protection for
Transient Discriminating Technology (TDS) introduces the first quantum leap in transient suppression technology for mains powered equipment. It offers a new
medium exposure sites or secondary protection applications
level of safety and reliability, yet retains optimum protection levels critical for electronic equipment. TDS is an active frequency based device that discriminates between the slower mains voltages and the higher speed transients. When
· Single mode protection, configurable to Ph-N, Ph-E or N-E protection
transient frequencies are detected the patented TDS "Quick-Switch" technology "switches in" robust protection devices to limit the transient to safe levels. The frequency discrimination circuit controlling the TDS "Quick-Switch" ensures that
· 35mm DIN rail mount, DIN 43 880 profile matches common MCBs
the device is virtually immune to the effects of the 50/60Hz sustained overvoltages, allowing fault voltages of up to 480Vrms without degradation, and
· 72mm width compact design fits into
providing over-voltage robustness in excess of the demanding new and emerging
most switch and distribution boards
standards.
TDS technology is essential for any site where abnormal over-voltages can occur or where the possible catastrophic failure of traditional technologies due to over-
· Electronic status indicator ideal for poorly illuminated locations
voltage events can not be tolerated.
· Long Service life
The TDS180-4S unit provides this technology in a single mode shunt-only, 72mm
width module. Its unique design allows it to be configured for Ph-N or Ph-E or
· Optional retrofittable TDS Alarm
N-E applications.
Relay for remote alarms
Rated to a surge capacity of 80kA (8/20µs), internally 160kA of surge material is provided for additional robustness and to provide long service life. The unit is designed for sites with a medium risk of transients or for secondary protection applications. For the protection of high exposure sites or critical equipment higher surge rated TDS DINLINE units, or TDS MOVTECTM should be installed.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 113 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Detailed specifications for ERICO's
TRANSIENT DISCRIMINATING FILTER, TDF-10A SERIES
Applications
Features
Lightning transients and surges are a major cause of expensive electronic · Compact design fits into most distribution
equipment failure and business disruption. Damage may result in loss of
boards and motor control centres
computers, data commmunications, loss of revenue, and loss of profits.
The new Transient Discriminating FilterTM family of TVSS devices offer · High efficiency filtering - ideal for the
economical and reliable protection from power transients with the conven- protection of switched mode power
ience of easy installation on 35mm DIN rail mountings.
supplies from large dv/dt and di/dt transients
· Three modes of protection L-N, L-G, N-G
The TDF series has been specifically designed for process control applica-
tions to protect the switched mode power supply units on devices such as · 35mm DIN rail mount - DIN 43 880
PLC controllers, SCADA systems and motor controllers. Units are avail-
profile matches common MCB's
able for 3A, 10A and 20A loads and in a range of clamping voltages including 30V, 150V, 275V. The range is intended for use in conjunction · LED indication and opto-isolated output with ERICO's Universal Transient Barrier UTB's to provide a coordinated for remote status monitoring
approach to protection of both the power and data control circuits.
· Transient Discriminating Technology
ensures safe operation during abnormal
The TDF is a series connected single phase surge filter providing an aggregate surge capacity of 50kA (8/20µs) - 20kA L-N & L-G and 10kA N-G. The space efficient low pass filter, provides some 65dB of attenua-
over-voltage events · UL1449 Edition 2 recognized
tion to voltage transients. Not only does this reduce the residual let through voltage, but it helps further reduce the steep rates of rise of voltage and current providing superior protection for sensitive electronic equipment.
· Large 50kA surge capacity provides a high level of protection and long operational life
· 5 year limited warranty
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 114 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
PROCESS CONTROL TVSS PROTECTION
SPECIFICATIONS
Operation: Models available
Nominal line voltage
Max Continuous Operating Voltage MCOV
Max Load Current
Input frequency
Earth leakage current
Protection:
Max aggregate surge rating
Protection modes
Max surge current/mode L-N
L-G
N-G
SPD circuit description
Filter: Inductor Capacitor type
Attenuation @100kHz L-N Performance:
UL1449 SVR L-N ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Cat B3 - 500A ringwave
Cat C1 - 3kA, 8/20µs Alarms and Indicators: Protection status indication
Physical Data: Dimensions(W x D x H)
Weight Enclosure material Connection means
Wire size Mounting method
Enclosure style Environmental rating Opearting temperature
Humidity Surface finish
Warranty Test standards:
Approvals
Surge rated to meet
TDF-10A-120V 120VAC/125VDC 170Vrms 10A 50/60Hz <0.2mA
TDF-10A-240V 240VAC 340Vrms
50kA 8/20µs L-N, L-G and N-G 20kA 8/20µs 20kA 8/20µs 10kA 8/20µs Series low pass LC filter
Transient Discriminating Technology
Thermal fusing
Ferrite cored X & Y grade interference suppression polypropylene film 65dB
500V 22V 262V
700V 28V 481V
Red LED, On = OK. Opto-isolated output
144mm x 88mm x x70mm 750g (approx) Flame Retardant UL94V-O Screw terminals 1.0mm2 - 6.0mm2 DIN T35 Rail DIN 43880 IP20 -30oC to +55oC 0-90% Spark eroded finish 5 years
UL1449 Ed 2, UL1283 recognised, CSA22.2 C-Tick AS3260 ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Cat A, Cat B, Cat C AS/NZS 1768-1991 Cat A, B, C
Part Number Description TDF-10A-120V 120V 1 phase, 50kA 8/20µs, 10A series TVSS protector TDF-10A-240V 240V 1 phase, 50kA 8/20µs, 10A series TVSS protector
tdf10a.pm5
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 115 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 116 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 117 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
TDS-DINLINE SURGE DIVERTER TDS180-4S
SPECIFICATIONS
100
Operation: Nominal input voltage
Input frequency Max. permissible abnormal over-voltage
Power systems Earth leakage current
Protection: Modes
Let through voltage @ 3kA 8/20µs Let through voltage @ 20kA 8/20µs
Surge rating 8/20µs Surge rating 10/350µs
Energy rating MultipulseTM capability Aggregate surge material Alarms and Indicators: Protection status indication
Alarm contacts Physicals:
Environmental rating Operating conditions
Enclosure style Dimensions (W x D x H)
Weight Encapsulation Enclosure material Surface finish Wiring terminals
Warranty Test standards:
Approvals
10
Surge rated to meet 1
0.1 1
20
1000
Number of Impulses
10000
220 -277 Vrms 50/60 Hz 480 Vrms TN-C, TN-S, TN-C-S (MEN), TT <2mA
Ph-N, Ph-E or N-E <720V <910V 80kA 16kA 3840J Yes 160kA 8/20µs
Two, electronic. On = OK User configurable, with optional TDS-AR
IP20 -35 to +55°C, 0-90% humidity DIN 43880 72 x 88 x 70mm 350g (approx.) Shockguard Flame Retardent UL94V-0 Spark eroded finish Accepts up to 6mm² 5 years
UL1449 Edition 2 AS 3260, IEC 950 Certificate of suitability, Electricity Regulator ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991 Cat A, Cat B, Cat C. ANSI/IEEE C62.45-1987 Life cycle testing. AS/NZS 1768-1991 Cat A, Cat.B, Cat C. BS 6651:1992 Cat A, Cat B. IEC801-5 Installation Class 5. IEC 61643-1
Note: Other operating voltages and frequencies are available on application. For specifications on other DINLINE products, refer to relevant Specifications Sheet. Exceeding nominal operating voltage while transient events occur may affect product life.
TDS, MULTIPULSE, PROLINE, CRITEC, MOVTEC, DINLINE and SURGE REDUCTION FILTER are trademarks of ERICO.
Due to a policy of continual product development, specifications are subject to change without notice. © Copyright 1998
Model Number TDS180-4S-277
Description TDS 277V 80KA SURGE SUPPRESSOR
Impulse Magnitude (kA 8/20µs) TDS180.PM5 ISSUE 2.0
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 118 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual J & P Richardson Industries Pty Ltd
4.3 CONTROL DEVICES Critec DAR-275V Surge Diverter Relay Crompton Instruments 252-PSGW Phase Failure Relay Finder - 38.51 24VDC Pump Run Relay Sprecher & Schuh CS7C-40E24V Pump Relay
c/w CS7-PV-22 Pump Relay Auxiliary Sprecher & Schuh CS7C-22E24V Pump Relay Multitrode MTR Level Relay Multitrode 0.2/1-`x' Level Probe
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Revision 0
26/11/2012
Date: 2 July 2012
Page 119 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
ÝÎ×ÌÛÝ ÌÜÍñÌÜÍëðñÜßÎñÌÜÍ ÍÝ
Ì®¿²-·»²¬ Ü·-½®·³·²¿¬·²¹ Í«°°®»--±® ¿²¼ Ü×ÒÔ×ÒÛ ß´¿®³ λ´¿§ ú Í«®¹» ݱ«²¬»®
ß-·¿ñß«-¬®¿´·¿ Û«®±°»
Ô¿¬·² ß³»®·½¿ Ò±®¬¸ ß³»®·½¿
ÌÜÍñÌÜÍëð -»®·»- ±ºº»®- ½±³°¿½¬ ÌÊÍÍ ©·¬¸ ÌÜ Ì»½¸²±´±¹§ ·² Ü×Ò »²½´±-«®»-
̸» Ü×ÒÔ×ÒÛ ß´¿®³ λ´¿§ øÜßÎ÷ ·- «-»¼ ©·¬¸ ¬¸» ¿¾±ª» ©¸»®» ¿´¿®³ ½±²¬¿½¬- ¿®» ®»¯«·®»¼ º±® ®»³±¬» -·¹²¿´·²¹
̸» ÌÜÍóÍÝ Í«®¹» ݱ«²¬»® °®±ª·¼»- ¿ ²±²ó®»-»¬¬¿¾´» ®»½±®¼ ±º ¬¸» ²«³¾»® ±º -«®¹»- ¼·ª»®¬»¼
̸» ÌÜÍ «²·¬- ¿®» ½±³°¿½¬ íë³³ Ü×Ò ³±«²¬·²¹ ÌÊÍÍ ¼»ª·½»-ô ·¼»¿´ º±® ·²-¬¿´´¿¬·±² ·²¬± »´»½¬®·½¿´ °¿²»´- ±® »¯«·°³»²¬ò ̸» ÌÜÍ «²·¬ °®±¬»½¬- ¿ -·²¹´» ³±¼» ©¸·´» ¬¸» ÌÜÍëð °®±¬»½¬- ÔóÒô ÔóÙ ¿²¼ ÒóÙ -·³«´¬¿²»±«-´§ò
̸» ÜßÎ øÜ×ÒÔ×ÒÛ ß´¿®³ λ´¿§÷ ½¿² ¾» ½±²²»½¬»¼ ¬± ¬¸» ÌÜÍ ±® ÌÜÚ «²·¬- ¬± °®±ª·¼» °±¬»²¬·¿´ º®»» ½¸¿²¹»ó±ª»® ¿´¿®³ ½±²¬¿½¬-ò
Ó±¼»´ ׬»³ Ò«³¾»® º±® Û«®±°» Ò±³·²¿´ ʱ´¬¿¹» ˲ Ó¿¨ò ݱ²¬ò Ñ°»®¿¬·²¹ ʱ´¬¿¹» ˽ ͬ¿²¼ó±ºº ʱ´¬¿¹» Ú®»¯«»²½§ Ñ°»®¿¬·²¹ Ý«®®»²¬ à ˲ Ó¿¨ò Ü·-½¸¿®¹» Ý«®®»²¬ ׳¿¨
׳°«´-» Ý«®®»²¬ ×·³° ß¹¹®»¹¿¬» Í«®¹» ο¬·²¹ Ю±¬»½¬·±² Ó±¼» Ì»½¸²±´±¹§ ʱ´¬¿¹» Ю±¬»½¬·±² Ô»ª»´ Ë° à ëððß èñîðk- øËÔ ÍÊÎ÷ à Ý¿¬ Þíô íµß èñîðkà îðµß èñîðkͬ¿¬«-
Ü·³»²-·±²-
É»·¹¸¬ Û²½´±-«®» ݱ²²»½¬·±² Ó±«²¬·²¹ Þ¿½µó«° Ѫ»®½«®®»²¬ Ю±¬»½¬·±² Ì»³°»®¿¬«®» Ø«³·¼·¬§ É¿®®¿²¬§ ß°°®±ª¿´-
Í«®¹» כּ¼ ¬± Ó»»¬
Í»» °¿¹» ëê º±® -½¸»³¿¬·½ ¼·¿¹®¿³-ò
ÌÜÍïìð îÍ îéé
ÌÜÍïèð ìÍ îéé
ÌÜÍëð îìð
ÜßÎîéëÊ
éððíðð
éððéïð
éððíðë
éððçðð
îìðÊ
îìðÊ
îìðÊ øïи îÉõÙ÷ ïïðÊ ¿²¼ îìðÊ
íìðÊ
íìðÊ
íìðÊ
îéëÊ
ìèðÊ
ìèðÊ
ìèðÊ
îéëÊ
ëðñêðئ
ëðñêðئ
ëðñêðئ
ëðñêðئ
î³ß
ì³ß
î³ß
îð³ß
ìðµß èñîðk
èðµß èñîðk
îðµß èñîðk ÔóÙ
îðµß èñîðk- ÔóÒ
ïðµß èñîðk- ÒóÙ
èµß ïðñíëðk
ïêµß ïðñíëðk
èðµß èñîðk
ïêðµß èñîðk
Í·²¹´»
Í·²¹´»
ÔóÒô ÔóÙ ú ÒóÙ
ÌÜ Ì»½¸²±´±¹§
ÔóÒ
èððÊ
èððÊ
êððÊ
äéëðÊ
äéîðÊ
äéððÊ
äçêðÊ
äçïðÊ
Ù®»»² ÔÛÜò ѲãÑÕò ×-±´¿¬»¼ ±°¬±ó½±«°´»® ±«¬°«¬øï÷
λ¼ñÙ®»»² ÔÛÜ-ò
ݸ¿²¹»ó±ª»® ½±²¬¿½¬øî÷
îÓò
ìÓò
îÓò
çð³³ ¨ êè³³ ¨ íê³³ çð³³ ¨ êè³³ ¨ éî³³ çð³³ ¨ êè³³ ¨ íê³³
øíòë ¨ îòê ¨ ïòì÷ øíòë ¨ îòê ¨ îòè÷ øíòë ¨ îòê ¨ ïòì÷ ø»¨½´«¼·²¹ ÝÌ÷
ðòîµ¹ øðòìì´¾÷
ðòíëµ¹ øðòéé´¾÷
ðòîµ¹ øðòìì´¾÷
Ü×Ò ìí èèðô ËÔçìÊó𠬸»®³±°´¿-¬·½ô ×Ð îð øÒÛÓßóï÷
ï³³î ¬± ê³³î øýïèßÉÙ ¬± ýïð÷
íë³³ ¬±° ¸¿¬ Ü×Ò ®¿·´
ïêóíîßò λº»® ¬± ·²¬¿´´¿¬·±² ·²¬®«½¬·±²
óíëpÝ ¬± õëëpÝ øóíïpÚ ¬± õïíïpÚ÷
ðû ¬± çðû
ë §»¿®-
ËÔ ïììçô ÝóÌ·½µ
ËÔ ïììçô ÝÍßîîòî ÝÍßîîòî
ßÍ íîêðô ×ÛÝ çëð
ÝÛô ÝóÌ·½µô ÒÑÓ
ÝóÌ·½µô ßÍ íîêðô ÝÛ
ßÒÍ×ñ×ÛÛÛ Ýêîòìïóïççï Ý¿¬ ßô Ý¿¬ Þô Ý¿¬ Ý ßÒÍ×ñ×ÛÛÛ Ýêîòìïóïççï
ÌÜÝ ÍÝ éðîïëð
Ó¿¨·³«³ ½±«²¬ çççç Ò±²ó®»-»¬¬¿¾´»
øï÷ Ñ°¬±ó½±«°´»® ±«¬°«¬ ½¿² ¾» ½±²²»½¬»¼ ¬± ÜßÎîéëÊ ¬± °®±ª·¼» Ú±®³ Ý ¼®§ ½±²¬¿½¬øî÷ Ú±®³ Ý ã ݸ¿²¹»ó±ª»® ½±²¬¿½¬ øÚ±®³ Ý ¼®§ ½±²¬¿½¬÷ô ìððÊ¢ñíß ï³³î ¬± ê³³î øýïèßÉÙ ¬± ýïðßÉÙ÷ ½±²²»½¬·²¹ ©·®»
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
íè 26/11/2012
Page 120 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Refer catalogue F1
Relay interface module
DIN rail mount
Interface module with 34 series relay Ultra-slim profile, only 6.2 mm wide Integral LED and diode Simple removal of relay for replacement DIN rail mounting
Contact specifications Contact configuration Rated current Rated voltage Rated load in AC 1 Rated load in AC 15 (230 V AC) Breaking capacity in DC 1 : 30/110/220 V Maximum peak current Maximum switching voltage Minimum switching load
Cat. No. 38.51...V DC 38.51...V AC/DC
The power in relays since
1954
TSECRRMEIWNLAELSSS
Cat. No. 38.61...V DC 38.61...V AC/DC
1 C/O 6 A 250 V AC 1,500 VA 300 VA 6/0.2/0.15 A 10 A 400 V AC 500 mW
Coil specifications Nominal voltage (UN)
Rated power AC/DC
Operation range
Holding voltage AC/DC Must drop-out voltage AC/DC
(50/60 Hz) AC/DC DC
(50/60 Hz) AC/DC DC
(50/60 Hz) AC/DC DC
24, 110, 240 6 , 12, 48 , 60
(0.2...0.9)W 0.3W
(0.83...1.1) UN (0.83...1.2) UN 0.6 UN/0.6 UN 0.1 UN/0.1 UN
Technical data Mechanical life AC/DC Electrical life @ rated load AC 1 Insulation between coil and contacts Ambient temperature range Protection rating Connection diagram
-/10.106
60.103
6 kV -40 °C...+55 °C
9
IP 20
12 14
Accessories
11
A1 A2
93.01 Isolating plate 93.20 Jumperlink 20 way 93.64 Identification labels
Notes:
The equipment on this page is rated 230/400 V and is suitable for use on 240/415 V systems as per AS 60038:2000. Available on indent only.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 121 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Refer catalogue F1
Relay interface module
Accessories
The power in relays since
1954
Isolates varying voltages mounted in the same row. One isolating plate every four relays is recommended
Reduced wiring and installation costs
Cat. No. 93.01 Description Isolating plate
Relay to suit 38.51, 38.61
93.20 Jumperlink 20 way 36 A, 250 V rating 38.51, 38.61
Easy identification for maintenance
93.64 Identification labels (64 tags in a pack) 38.51, 38.61
Relay dimensions (mm)
38 Series
Cat. No. 38.51
Cat. No. 38.61
9
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 122 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Low CS7 Profile DC Coil
CS7E Industrial Control Relays with 24V DC Electronic Coil
Same size as AC coil relays
Draws less than 1.5W/60mA
More energy efficient
Standard, Master & Bifurcated models
Reversible Line or Load Side Coil Terminations
DIN Rail or Screw Mount
Accepts most standard CS7 accessories
3-pole and 4-pole designs including Reversing
Only 45mm wide (1-3/4")
24V DC Electronic Coil with integrated (built-in) diode
Low Consumption DC Coils Sprecher+Schuh has expanded its line of CS7 industrial Control Relays with a new low consumption electronic coil. The 24V DC coil with low power consumption is integrated in a small relay body and draws less than 1.5 W/60mA holding power. The new design results in a shorter and more energy efficient relay, eases wiring and promotes a uniform panel appearance.
Direct Control from PLC The low power consumption relay designed to control motors and other loads is especially aligned to the specific requirement of electronic control circuits. The low power consumption allows direct control through PLC's without the need for interposing relays. This means smaller power supplies which reduce panel space and cost.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 123 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
CS7
with 24V DC Electronic Coil
Contact Arrangement and Numbering
A1 13 21 31 43
A2 14 22 32 44 A1 13 21 33 43
A2 14 22 34 44 A1 13 23 33 43
A2 14 24 34 44 A1 11 21 31 41
A2 12 22 32 42
Contacts Standard Relay Also Available
Catalog
NO NC
Number Bifurcated Master
2
2 CS7E-22E-24E
3
1 CS7E-31E-24E
4
0 CS7E-40E-24E
0
4 CS7E-04E-24E
ød
Three Types of Relays · Standard relay for typical control applications · Bifurcated relay for low voltage applications · Master relay for high ampere control circuits
Extremely Low Inrush Lower inrush means a smaller power supply may be used, resulting in: · Easier wiring · Uniform panel appearance · Smaller panels mean less cost
Complete Accessory Compatibility Fits most standard CS7 accessories
Mechanical Interlock
4-Pole Aux.
d1 b b+
d2
c1
+
a
+
c
Dimension Comparison to True DC Relays
a
b
c
c1
c2
NEW! 24V DC Electronic Relay
CS7E -...
45
81
80.5
75.5
6
(1-25/32) (3-3/16) (3-11/64 (3-3/32)
(1/4)
True DC Relays
CS7C-...
45
81
106.5 101.5
6
(1-25/32) (3-3/16) (4-3/16)
(4)
(1/4)
c+
1 & 2-Pole
Aux.
Mechanical
Latch
ød
d1
d2
2 screws 4.5
(3/16)
60 (2-23/64)
35 (1-25/64)
26mm Shorter
than True DC
CS7E vs. CS7C
2 screws 4.5
(3/16)
60 (2-23/64)
35 (1-25/64)
2-Pole Aux.
Pneumatic Timer
Coil Consumption Data Comparison
Electronic DC Coil CS7E
Pickup [W]
10
Holdin [W]
1.5
True DC Coil CS7C
6.5
6.5
Two Winding DC Coil CS7D
120
1.1
Smaller space requirement + lower inrush = LESS COST!
4x Less Power
to Maintain
CS7E vs. CS7C
Electronic DC True DC
12x Less Inrush
CS7E vs. CS7D
Sprecher + Schuh US Division Headquarters 15910 International Plaza Dr., Houston, TX 77032 Tel: (281) 442-9000; Fax: (800) 739-7370 www.sprecherschuh.com
Publication No: F-CS7E_108 Jan-2008
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Sprecher + Schuh Canadian Division 3610 Nashua Dr., Unit 10, Mississauga, Ontario L4V 1L2 Tel: (905) 677-7514; Fax: (905) 677-7663
26/11/2012
Page 124 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
MTR/MTRA Installation & Troubleshooting
1 Introduction
The MultiTrode level control relay is a solid-state electronic module in a hi-impact plastic case with a DIN rail attachment on the back, making a snap-on-snap-off installation. Any number of relays can be easily added to the DIN metal rail then wired together to form a complex pumping system that other wise may have to be controlled and operated by a programmed PLC.
The relay is normally matched with the MultiTrode probe which works in conjunction with the relay and uses the conductivity of the liquid to complete an electrical circuit.
2 Electrical Overview
There are 10 screw terminals on the unit. Facing the relay as shown, we look at the bottom terminals (left to right):
· Lo (Charge mode). This is the point when the probe is dry
the relay will turn on.
· Lo (Discharge mode). This is the point when the probe in the
tank is dry the relay will turn off.
· Hi (Charge mode). This is the point when the probe in the
tank is wet a relay will turn off
· Hi (Discharge mode). This is the point when the probe in the
tank is wet a relay will turn on.
· C - is common earth. All earth bonding must be terminated
here for correct operation.
· " L " is "live" (240V AC)
· " N " is "neutral" (240V AC)
If the tank is plastic, or if you are conducting tests in a plastic bucket, or the vessel has no earth point inside, you must install an earth rod within the tank, vessel or bucket and make sure that it is bonded back to C on the relay unit.
3 DIP Switches
3.1 DIP Switches
(See Wiring Diagram for full program functions.)
3.1.1 DIP 1 & 2 DIP 1 and 2 control the Sensitivity, in other words the cleaner the liquid the higher the sensitivity setting must be. Concentrated acids, minerals are by their own chemical composition highly conductive, so a low level of sensitivity is required, purified water is almost an insulator against electrical current flow so a higher sensitivity inside the relay is required.
3.1.2 DIP 3, 4 & 5 DIP switches 3, 4 and 5, control delay on activation. For example, in discharge mode with DIP switches 3, 4 and 5 set to 10 seconds, when the Hi point becomes wet it will activate the motor and it will take 10 seconds of continual coverage of the probe sensor to make the relay close and start the pump. This is invaluable when the probe is in a turbulent part of a well where fluid is splashing around touching the sensors momentarily, and false activation cannot be tolerated.
3.1.3 DIP 6 DIP switch 6 controls the charge/discharge function. Set "ON" for charge, and "OFF" for discharge
MTR_Installation_AU+US_v1-0-0.doc Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
13-May-2005 26/11/2012
Page 1 of 4 Page 125 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
MTR/MTRA Installation & Troubleshooting
3.2 Relay Contacts & their Applications
3.2.1 Contacts 15, 16 & 18 Contacts 15, 16, and 18 are used for electronic or visual notification of a change in state at the pump itself. Contacts 15, 16, and 18 are used for more advanced applications because they are a changeover relay, their state may be the same as contacts 25, 28 or the opposite. Both sets of contactors are triggered simultaneously. An example is when in discharge mode, (see Figure 1). You have a gravity flow coming in so the fluid reaches the lower sensor PB1, contacts 15 and 18 are open (15 being common to both contact 16 and 18) contacts 25 and 28 are also normally open but contacts 15 16 in this current situation are closed, whether PB1 is wet or dry is of no concern all will stay the same. The level now rises to PB2 and both relays change state, contacts 25 and 28 close to turn on the pump, contacts 15 and 16 are open, with 15 and 18 closed. In advanced applications this state change may be fed into a logic device to indicate the pump is running or the pump has stopped and perhaps light an LED or incandescent light source for visual confirmation that a change has occurred in the relay.
3.2.2 Contacts 25 & 28 Contacts 25 and 28 are used to control pump states. Contacts 25 and 28 are mostly used for turning on motors via a starting relay or solenoid, so, these sets of contacts react to the rising or falling levels of the fluid inside the tank, they will operate to turn on a pump in discharge mode when the top sensor is wet and in charge mode turn on the pump when the bottom sensor is dry.
4 Practical Overview
4.1 Discharge Mode DIP switch 6 set to "OFF"
Figure 1 Discharge Mode
Figure 1 shows two probes, (PB1 connected to Lo and PB2 connected to Hi). The pit is mostly underground and there is a gravity-fed inlet at the top left-hand side. The pit is empty with PB1 completely dry. Dipswitch 6 is set to "OFF."
The relay operation depends on the electrical conductivity of liquid in the pit, i.e. no liquid = no current flow. The level starts to rise and covers PB1.
This is a discharge operation so we do not want the relay to close and start a pump until the well is full so as the water rises it reaches PB2, the relay closes and the pump starts. The level now drops below PB2 but the pump still continues to run, the level continues to drop below PB1 the relay opens the pump stops.
MTR_Installation_AU+US_v1-0-0.doc Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
13-May-2005 26/11/2012
Page 2 of 4 Page 126 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
MTR/MTRA Installation & Troubleshooting
4.2 Charge Mode DIP switch 6 set to "On"
Figure 2 Charge Mode
Note: "C" is connected to common bonded earth. The unit will not operate correctly if not earthed. Let's look at the same relay but in a tank that is charging (DIP 6 is now on). See Figure 3, where liquid is being pumped into a tank, and discharging through a gravity feed, the tank is on steel stands "x" metres above the ground. With the tank full, PB1 and PB2 will be wet, the relay is off, and the pump has stopped. Water is slowly fed out from the bottom, and now as PB2 (HI) becomes dry nothing happens; the water now drops to below PB1 (Lo), and the pumps restarts to fill the tank. The pump will continue to fill the tank until PB2 (HI), becomes wet again.
4.3 MTRA Relay with Alarm (Discharge Applications Only)
Figure 3 - MTRA Operation
MTR_Installation_AU+US_v1-0-0.doc Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
13-May-2005 26/11/2012
Page 3 of 4 Page 127 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
MTR/MTRA Installation & Troubleshooting
The MTRA relay works in the same way as the MTR relay except the MTRA has a separate alarm output, and does not have a charge mode. The planned application is to close a contact to illuminate a warning alarm light. . Various other applications have included introducing a third probe to latch another relay.
In Figure 2 we see three probes in a pit that is plastic, note the steel rod in the tank. (In a plastic vessel a steel rod must be used to create an earth return in the liquid so probes can function.) PB1, PB2, and PB3 are dry, and the relay power LED is on. When water enters the pit and wets PB1, nothing happens, water now reaches PB2 causing contacts 13 and 14 to close, the pump LED to light, and the water to drop.
If, for example, the pump has its inlet partially blocked, the level continues to rise and wets PB3. This closes a separate relay that can activate a red flashing light, an audible fog horn or send a 5 volt pulse into another device with the common cause to warn human beings that a spill is due to occur. If the pumps become unclogged and PB3 becomes dry the alarm opens again and breaks the circuit that stops the light from flashing or the foghorn from sounding.
5 Most Common Installation Problems
The relay requires a path between the probes to earth through the liquid. If you are testing in a plastic bucket, have installed the probe in a plastic tank or have no good earthing in the vessel you will need to install a separate earth and make sure all earth bonding comes back to the C terminal. Most problems like these are traced back to a lack of or poor earthing, or open circuits in the probe wiring.
Now is the time to check the relay by using "the bridge testing line technique" remember you must simulate a fluid flow to correctly ascertain a good relay or a bad one. (All DIPswitch settings from 1 to 6 should be off.)
Cut two pieces of insulated flexible copper wire one black one red 250 mm long, strip both ends back 10 mm on both cables, and join one black end and one red end. Insert the joined ends into C on the relay box, observing all safe electrical practises. You should have one black wire and one red wire free.
Set your relay for discharge mode (DIP switch 6 is off) with no sensors connected to the unit, connect the red wire to Lo nothing should happen (if it does return the relay for replacement or repair*). Now connect the black wire to the Hi terminal the relay activated LED should light instantly (if it does not, the relay should be returned for repair*).
6 Troubleshooting
I have checked all the DIPswitches and settings but in discharge mode as soon as the bottom sensor gets wet the pump turns on then turns off almost straight away.
The installation went fine but now and again the pump will not turn on even though I am sure the probe is wet.
All wiring is complete and all DIPswitches have been checked but the pump will not turn on at all.
· This is the most common problem encountered with relay set up
and commissioning, the probe in the bottom of the tank is wired into the Hi terminal instead of the Lo terminal.
· Check the sensitivity level set on the relay, some times the level is
set for foul water but due to changes in the flow the water becomes grey or clear, try changing the setting from 20K to 80K and monitor the results carefully.
· If you have completed the test schedule for the relay and it passed
then check the wiring to the sensors for this is now where the problem lies or in the earthing arrangements. If possible check the resistance between the sensor cable and the steel sensor on the probe to prove a solid connection.
* Please contact your distributor or agent before returning any product for repair or warranty claim.
MultiTrode Pty Ltd--Australia Ph: +61 7 3340 7000 Fx: +61 7 3340 7077
E-mail: sales@multitrode.com.au
Sydney--Australia Ph: +61 2 9533 7735 Fx: +61 2 9533 7790 Visit www.multitrode.com.au for the latest information
MTR_Installation_AU+US_v1-0-0.doc Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
13-May-2005 26/11/2012
MultiTrode Inc--USA Ph: +1 561 994 8090 Fx: +1 561 994 6282 E-mail: sales@multitrode.net
Page 4 of 4 Page 128 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
ͽ¸»³¿¬·½ Ü·¿¹®¿³-
ÌÍÙóÍÎÚ
L1
T L2
L I N L3 E
N
T T
T
L1
T
L2
L
E
I
Q
T
N
U
I
E
L3 P
M
T
E
N
T
N
ÌÜÚ
E
Status Sense
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
ÜÍÜíìðñíèð öÔ
PEN
TNC Configuration
*Only present in "L" low leakage models
PE
TNS Configuration
*Only present in "L" low leakage models
ÌÜÍ ïìð
PE
TT Configuration
*Only present in "L" low leakage models
ÌÜÍ ëð
ÌÜÍ ïèð
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
ëê 26/11/2012
©©©ò»®·½±ò½±³ Page 129 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 130 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual J & P Richardson Industries Pty Ltd
4.4 INSTRUMENTS Endres & Hauser Promatic 50 - Flowmeter
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Revision 0
26/11/2012
Date: 2 July 2012
Page 131 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Brief Operating Instructions
Proline Promag 50
Electromagnetic Flow Measuring System
6 8
These Brief Operating Instructions are not intended to replace the Operating Instructions provided in the scope of supply. Detailed information is provided in the Operating Instructions and the additional documentation on the CD-ROM supplied.
The complete device documentation consists of: · These Brief Operating Instructions · Depending on the device version:
Operating Instructions and the Description of Device Functions Approvals and safety certificates Special safety instructions in accordance with the approvals for
the device (e.g. explosion protection, pressure equipment directive etc.) Additional device-specific information
KA00026D/06/EN/14.11 71154524
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 132 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual Proline Promag 50
Table of contents
1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.2 Installation, commissioning and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.3 Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.4 Safety conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.1 Transporting to the measuring point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 2.2 Installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2.3 Installing the Promag L sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.4 Installing the W sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 2.5 Installing the Promag P sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 2.6 Installing the Promag H sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 2.7 Installing the transmitter housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 2.8 Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3 Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.1 Connecting the various housing types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 3.2 Connecting the remote version connecting cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 3.3 Potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 3.4 Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 3.5 Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4 Hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4.1 Device address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 4.2 Terminating resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
5.1 Switching on the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 5.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 5.3 Navigating within the function matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 5.4 Calling the Commissioning Quick Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 5.5 Software settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 5.6 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Endress+Hauser Page 133 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Proline Promag 50
Safety instructions
1 Safety instructions
1.1 Designated use
· The measuring device is to be used only for measuring the flow of conductive liquids in closed pipes. A minimum conductivity of 20 S/cm is required for measuring demineralized water. Most liquids can be measured as of a minimum conductivity of 5 S/cm.
· Any use other than that described here compromises the safety of persons and the entire measuring system and is, therefore, not permitted.
· The manufacturer is not liable for damage caused by improper or non-designated use.
1.2 Installation, commissioning and operation
· The measuring device must only be installed, connected, commissioned and maintained by qualified and authorized specialists (e.g. electrical technicians) in full compliance with the instructions in these Brief Operating Instructions, the applicable norms, legal regulations and certificates (depending on the application).
· The specialists must have read and understood these Brief Operating Instructions and must follow the instructions they contain. If you are unclear on anything in these Brief Operating Instructions, you must read the Operating Instructions (on the CD-ROM). The Operating Instructions provide detailed information on the measuring device.
· The measuring device should only installed in a de-energized state free from outside loads or strain.
· The measuring device may only be modified if such work is expressly permitted in the Operating Instructions (on the CD-ROM).
· Repairs may only be performed if a genuine spare parts kit is available and this repair work is expressly permitted.
· If performing welding work on the piping, the welding unit may not be grounded by means of the measuring device.
1.3 Operational safety
· The measuring device is designed to meet state-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested, and left the factory in a condition in which it is safe to operate. Relevant regulations and European standards have been observed.
· The manufacturer reserves the right to modify technical data without prior notice. Your Endress+Hauser distributor will supply you with current information and updates to these Operating Instructions.
· The information on the warning notices, nameplates and connection diagrams affixed to the device must be observed. These contain important data on the permitted operating conditions, the range of application of the device and information on the materials used.
· If the device is not used at atmospheric temperatures, compliance with the relevant marginal conditions as specified in the device documentation supplied (on CD-ROM) is mandatory.
· The device must be wired as specified in the wiring and connection diagrams. Interconnection must be permitted.
Endress+Hauser Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
3
Page 134 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Safety instructions
Proline Promag 50
· All parts of the device must be included in the potential equalization of the system. · Cables, certified cable glands and certified dummy plugs must be suitable to withstand the
prevailing operating conditions, such as the temperature range of the process. Housing apertures that are not used must be sealed with dummy plugs. · The device should only be used for fluids to which all the wetted parts of the device are sufficiently resistant. With regard to special fluids, including fluids used for cleaning, Endress+Hauser will be happy to assist in clarifying the corrosion-resistant properties of wetted materials. However, minor changes in temperature, concentration or in the degree of contamination in the process may result in variations in corrosion resistance. For this reason, Endress+Hauser does not accept any responsibility with regard to the corrosion resistance of wetted materials in a specific application. The user is responsible for the choice of suitable wetted materials in the process. · When hot fluid passes through the measuring tube, the surface temperature of the housing increases. In the case of the sensor, in particular, users should expect temperatures that can be close to the fluid temperature. If the temperature of the fluid is high, implement sufficient measures to prevent burning or scalding. · Hazardous areas Measuring devices for use in hazardous areas are labeled accordingly on the nameplate. Relevant national regulations must be observed when operating the device in hazardous areas. The Ex documentation on the CD-ROM is an integral part of the entire device documentation. The installation regulations, connection data and safety instructions provided in the Ex documentation must be observed. The symbol and name on the front page provides information on the approval and certification (e.g. 0 Europe, 2 USA, 1 Canada). The nameplate also bears the documentation number of this Ex documentation (XA***D/../..). · For measuring systems used in SIL 2 applications, the separate manual on functional safety (on the CD-ROM) must be observed. · Hygienic applications Measuring devices for hygienic applications have their own special labeling. Relevant national regulations must be observed when using these devices. · Pressure instruments Measuring devices for use in systems that need to be monitored are labeled accordingly on the nameplate. Relevant national regulations must be observed when using these devices. The documentation on the CD-ROM for pressure instruments in systems that need to be monitored is an integral part of the entire device documentation. The installation regulations, connection data and safety instructions provided in the Ex documentation must be observed. · Endress+Hauser will be happy to assist in clarifying any questions on approvals, their application and implementation.
4
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Endress+Hauser Page 135 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Proline Promag 50
Safety instructions
1.4 Safety conventions
# Warning! "Warning" indicates an action or procedure which, if not performed correctly, can result in injury or a safety hazard. Comply strictly with the instructions and proceed with care. " Caution! "Caution" indicates an action or procedure which, if not performed correctly, can result in incorrect operation or destruction of the device. Comply strictly with the instructions.
! Note! "Note" indicates an action or procedure which, if not performed correctly, can have an indirect effect on operation or trigger an unexpected response on the part of the device.
Endress+Hauser Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
5
Page 136 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Installation
Proline Promag 50
2 Installation
2.1 Transporting to the measuring point
· Transport the measuring device to the measuring point in the original packaging. · Do not remove the covers or caps until immediately before installation. 2.1.1 Transporting flanged devices DN 300 ( 12")
To transport the unit, use slings slung around the process connections or use lugs (if available).
#
Warning!
Risk of injury! The device can slip.
The center of gravity of the measuring device may be
higher than the holding points of the slings.
Always ensure that the device cannot slip or turn around
its axis.
A0007408
Do not lift measuring devices by the transmitter housing or the connection housing in the case of the remote version. Do not use chains as they could damage the housing.
A0007409
2.1.2 Transporting flanged devices DN > 300 (> 12") Use only the metal eyes provided on the flanges to transport, lift or position the sensor in the piping.
" Caution! Do not attempt to lift the sensor with the tines of a fork-lift truck beneath the metal casing! This would buckle the casing and damage the internal magnetic coils.
6
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
A0008153
Endress+Hauser Page 137 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Proline Promag 50
Installation
2.2 Installation conditions
2.2.1 Dimensions
For the dimensions of the measuring device, see the associated Technical Information on the CD-ROM.
2.2.2 Mounting location
The accumulation of air or formation of gas bubbles in the measuring tube can result in an increase in measuring errors. For this reason avoid the following mounting locations in the pipe: · At the highest point of a pipeline. Risk of air accumulating! · Directly upstream from a free pipe outlet in a down pipe.
h ³ 2 x DN
A0008154
Installation of pumps Do not install the sensor on the intake side of a pump. This precaution is to avoid low pressure and the consequent risk of damage to the lining of the measuring tube. It might be necessary to use pulse dampers in systems incorporating piston pumps, piston diaphragm pumps or peristaltic pumps.
Information on the measuring system's pressure tightness and resistance to vibration and shock can be found in the Operating Instructions of the CD-ROM.
Endress+Hauser Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
A0003203
7
Page 138 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Installation
Proline Promag 50
Partially filled pipes
Partially filled pipes with gradients necessitate a drain-type configuration. The empty pipe detection (EPD) function offers additional protection by detecting empty or partially filled pipes.
" Caution! Risk of solids accumulating! Do not install the sensor at the lowest point in the drain. It is advisable to install a cleaning valve.
Installation in a partially filled pipe
³ 2 x DN
³ 5 x DN
A0008155
Down pipes
Install a siphon or a vent valve downstream of the sensor in down pipes longer than 5 meters (16 ft). This precaution is to avoid low pressure and the consequent risk of damage to the lining of the measuring tube. This measure also prevents the system losing prime, which could cause air pockets. For information on the pressure tightness of the measuring tube lining, see the Operating Instructions on the CD-ROM.
Measures for installation in a down pipe (h > 5 m/16 ft)
1
1. Vent valve
2. Siphon
2
h
A0008157
8
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Endress+Hauser Page 139 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Proline Promag 50
Installation
2.2.3 Orientation
An optimum orientation helps avoid gas and air accumulations and buildup in the measuring tube. The measuring device, nevertheless, supplies a range of functions and tools to measure problematic fluids correctly: · Electrode cleaning circuitry (ECC) to prevent electrically conductive deposits in the
measuring tube, e.g. for fluids causing buildup · Empty pipe detection (EPD) for detecting partially filled measuring tubes, e.g. in the case of
degassing fluids or varying process pressures · Exchangeable measuring electrodes for abrasive fluids (only Promag W)
Vertical orientation
This orientation is optimum for self-emptying piping systems and when using empty pipe detection (EPD) or open electrode detection (OED).
A0008158
Horizontal orientation
The measuring electrode plane should be horizontal. This prevents brief insulation of the two electrodes by entrained air bubbles.
" Caution! In the case of horizontal orientation, empty pipe detection only works correctly if the transmitter housing is facing upwards. Otherwise there is no guarantee that empty pipe detection will respond if the measuring tube is only partially filled or empty.
A
1
2
2
1. EPD electrode for empty pipe detection (not for Promag H, DN 2 to 15, 1/12" to ½").
2. Measuring electrodes for signal detection
3. Reference electrode for potential equalization (not for Promag H)
3
A
A0008159
Endress+Hauser Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
9
Page 140 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Installation
Proline Promag 50
Inlet and outlet runs If possible, install the sensor upstream from fittings such as valves, T-pieces, elbows, etc.
³ 5 x DN
³ 2 x DN
The following inlet and outlet runs must be observed in order to meet accuracy specifications: · Inlet run: 5 × DN · Outlet run: 2 × DN
A0008160
2.2.4 Vibrations Secure and fix both the piping and the sensor if vibrations are severe.
Measures to prevent device vibration
L
(L > 10 m/33 ft)
"
Caution!
It is advisable to install the sensor and transmitter
separately if vibration is excessively severe. For
information on the permitted shock and vibration
resistance, see the Operating Instructions on the
CD-ROM.
A0008161
10
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Endress+Hauser Page 141 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Proline Promag 50
Installation
2.2.5 Foundations, supports
If the nominal diameter is DN 350 ( 14"), mount the sensor on a foundation of adequate load-bearing strength.
" Caution! Risk of damage! Do not support the weight of the sensor on the metal casing. This would buckle the casing and damage the internal magnetic coils.
A0008163
2.2.6 Length of connecting cable
Comply with the following instructions in order to ensure correct measuring results: · Secure the cable run or route the cable in an armored conduit. Movement of the cable can
falsify the measuring signal, particularly if the fluid conductivity is low. · Route the cable well clear of electrical machines and switching elements. · Ensure potential equalization between the sensor and transmitter, if necessary. · The permissible cable length Lmax depends on the fluid conductivity.
[µS/cm] 200
100 L max
Gray shaded area = permissible range
Lmax = length of connecting cable in [m]/[ft]
Fluid conductivity in (S/cm]
5
10
100
0 200 400
200 600
[m] L max [ft]
A0008164
Endress+Hauser Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
11
Page 142 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Installation
Proline Promag 50
2.3 Installing the Promag L sensor
" Caution! · The protective covers mounted on the two sensor flanges (DN 50...300) are used to hold the lap joint flanges in place and to protect the PTFE liner during transportation. Consequently, do not remove these covers until immediately before the sensor is installed in the pipe. · The protective plates must always remain mounted while the device is in storage. · Make sure that the lining at the flange is not damaged or removed.
a0008165
! Note!
Screws, nuts, seals, etc. are not included in the scope of supply and must be supplied by the customer.
The sensor is installed between the two pipe flanges: · The requisite torques must be observed ä 13 · If grounding disks are used, follow the mounting
instructions which will be enclosed with the shipment. · To comply with the device specification, a concentrical installation in the measuring section is required
2.3.1 Seals
Comply with the following instructions when installing seals: · Hard rubber lining additional seals are always required! · Polyurethane lining no seals are required. · No seals are required for PFTE measuring tube lining. · For DIN flanges, only use seals to DIN EN 1514-1. · Make sure that the mounted seals do not protrude into the piping cross-section.
" Caution! Risk of short circuit! Do not use electrically conductive sealing compounds such as graphite! An electrically conductive layer could form on the inside of the measuring tube and short-circuit the measuring signal.
2.3.2 Ground cable If necessary, special ground cables can be ordered as accessories for potential equalization.
12
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Endress+Hauser Page 143 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Proline Promag 50
Installation
2.3.3 Screw tightening torques (Promag L)
Please note the following: · The tightening torques listed below are for lubricated threads only. · Always tighten the screws uniformly and in diagonally opposite sequence. · Overtightening the screws will deform the sealing faces or damage the seals. · The tightening torques listed below apply only to pipes not subjected to tensile stress.
Promag L tightening torques for EN (DIN)
Nominal diameter
EN (DIN)
[mm]
50 65* 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 350 400 400 450 450 500 500 600 600 700 700 800 800 900 900 1000 1000 1200 1200 1400
Pressure rating [bar] PN 10/16 PN 10/16 PN 10/16 PN 10/16 PN 10/16 PN 10/16
PN 10 PN 10 PN 10 PN 6 PN 10 PN 6 PN 10 PN 6 PN 10 PN 6 PN 10 PN 6 PN 10 PN 6 PN 10 PN 6 PN 10 PN 6 PN 10 PN 6 PN 10 PN 6 PN 10 PN 6
Threaded fasteners 4 × M 16 8 × M 16 8 × M 16 8 × M 16 8 × M 16 8 × M 20 8 × M 20 12 × M 20 12 × M 20 12 × M 20 16 × M 20 16 × M 20 16 × M 24 16 × M 20 20 × M 24 20 × M 20 20 × M 24 20 × M 24 20 × M 27 24 × M 24 24 × M 27 24 × M 27 24 × M 30 24 × M 27 28 × M 30 28 × M 27 28 × M 33 32 × M 30 32 × M 36 36 × M 33
Max. tightening torque
Hard rubber [Nm]
Polyurethane [Nm]
-
15
-
10
-
15
-
20
-
30
-
50
-
65
-
50
-
55
111
120
112
118
90
98
151
167
112
126
153
133
119
123
155
171
139
147
206
219
148
139
246
246
206
182
331
316
230
637
316
307
218
208
402
405
319
299
564
568
430
-
PTFE [Nm]
40 22 30 42 55 90 130 90 100 -
Endress+Hauser Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
13
Page 144 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Installation
Proline Promag 50
Nominal diameter
EN (DIN)
[mm]
Pressure rating [bar]
Threaded fasteners
1400
PN 10
36 × M 39
1400
PN 16
36 × M 45
1600
PN 6
40 × M 33
1600
PN 10
40 × M 45
1600
PN 16
40 × M 52
1800
PN 6
44 × M 36
1800
PN 10
44 × M 45
1800
PN 16
44 × M 52
2000
PN 6
48 × M 39
2000
PN 10
48 × M 45
2000
PN 16
48 × M 56
2200
PN 6
52 × M 39
2200
PN 10
52 × M 52
2400
PN 6
56 × M 39
2400
PN 10
56 × M 52
* Designed acc. to EN 1092-1 (not to DIN 2501)
Max. tightening torque
Hard rubber [Nm]
Polyurethane [Nm]
654 729 440 946 1007 547 961 1108 629 1047 1324 698 1217 768 1229
618 762 417 893 1100 521 895 1003 605 1092 1261
-
PTFE [Nm]
-
Promag L tightening torques for ANSI
Nominal diameter
[mm] 50 80 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600
[inch] 2" 3" 4" 6" 8" 10" 12" 14" 16" 18" 20" 24"
ANSI
Pressure rating [lbs]
Class 150 Class 150 Cla ss 150 Class 150 Class 150 Class 150 Class 150 Class 150 Class 150 Class 150 Class 150 Class 150
Threaded fasteners
4 × 5/8" 4 × 5/8" 8 × 5/8" 8 × ¾" 8 × ¾" 12 × 7/8" 12 × 7/8" 12 × 1" 16 × 1" 16 × 1 1/8" 20 × 1 1/8" 20 × 1 ¼"
Max. tightening torque
Hard rubber
[Nm] [lbf · ft]
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
135
100
128
94
204
150
183
135
268
198
Polyurethane
[Nm] [lbf · ft]
15
11
25
18
20
15
45
33
65
48
55
41
68
56
158
117
150
111
234
173
217
160
307
226
PTFE
[Nm] [lbf · ft]
40
29
65
48
44
32
90
66
125
92
100
74
115
85
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
14
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Endress+Hauser Page 145 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Proline Promag 50
Installation
Promag L tightening torques for AWWA
Nominal diameter
[mm] 700 750 800 900 1000 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800 2000 2150 2300
[inch] 28" 30" 32" 36" 40" 42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72" 78" 84" 90"
AWWA
Pressure rating
Class D Class D Class D Class D Class D Class D Class D Class D Class D Class D Class D Class D Class D Class D
Threaded fasteners
28 × 1 ¼" 28 × 1 ¼" 28 × 1 ½" 32 × 1 ½" 36 × 1 ½" 36 × 1 ½" 44 × 1 ½" 44 × 1 ¾" 52 × 1 ¾" 52 × 1 ¾" 60 × 1 ¾"
64 × 2" 64 × 2" 68 × 2 ¼"
Max. tightening torque
Hartgummi
[Nm] [lbf · ft]
247
182
287
212
394
291
419
309
420
310
528
389
552
407
730
538
758
559
946
698
975
719
853
629
931
687
1048
773
Polyurethane
[Nm] [lbf · ft]
292
215
302
223
422
311
430
317
477
352
518
382
531
392
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PTFE
[Nm] [lbf · ft]
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Promag L tightening torques for AS 2129
Nominal diameter
[mm] 350 400 450 500 600 700 750 800 900 1000 1200
AS 2129 Pressure rating
Threaded fasteners
Table E Table E Table E Table E Table E Table E Table E Table E Table E Table E Table E
12 × M 24 12 × M 24 16 × M 24 16 × M 24 16 × M 30 20 × M 30 20 × M 30 20 × M 30 24 × M 30 24 × M 30 32 × M 30
Max. tightening torque
Hard rubber [Nm] 203 226 226 271 439 355 559 631 627 634 727
Polyurethane [Nm] -
PTFE [Nm]
-
Endress+Hauser Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
15
Page 146 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Installation
Proline Promag 50
Promag L tightening torques for AS 4087
Nominal diameter
[mm] 350 375 400 450 500 600 700 750 800 900 1000 1200
AS 4087 Pressure rating
Threaded fasteners
PN 16 PN 16 PN 16 PN 16 PN 16 PN 16 PN 16 PN 16 PN 16 PN 16 PN 16 PN 16
12 × M 24 12 × M 24 12 × M 24 12 × M 24 16 × M 24 16 × M 27 20 × M 27 20 × M 30 20 × M 33 24 × M 33 24 × M 33 32 × M 33
Max. tightening torque
Hard rubber [Nm] 203 137 226 301 271 393 330 529 631 627 595 703
Polyurethane [Nm] -
PTFE [Nm]
-
16
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Endress+Hauser Page 147 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Proline Promag 50
Installation
2.4 Installing the W sensor
a0008165
! Note!
Screws, nuts, seals, etc. are not included in the scope of supply and must be supplied by the customer.
The sensor is installed between the two pipe flanges: · The requisite torques must be observed ä 18 · If grounding disks are used, follow the mounting
instructions which will be enclosed with the shipment. · To comply with the device specification, a concentrical installation in the measuring section is required
2.4.1 Seals
Comply with the following instructions when installing seals: · Hard rubber lining additional seals are always necessary. · Polyurethane lining no seals are required. · For DIN flanges, use only seals according to EN 1514-1. · Make sure that the seals do not protrude into the piping cross-section.
" Caution! Risk of short circuit! Do not use electrically conductive sealing compounds such as graphite! An electrically conductive layer could form on the inside of the measuring tube and short-circuit the measuring signal.
2.4.2 Ground cable If necessary, special ground cables can be ordered as accessories for potential equalization.
Endress+Hauser Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
17
Page 148 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Installation
Proline Promag 50
2.4.3 Screw tightening torques (Promag W)
Please note the following: · The tightening torques listed below are for lubricated threads only. · Always tighten the screws uniformly and in diagonally opposite sequence. · Overtightening the screws will deform the sealing faces or damage the seals. · The tightening torques listed below apply only to pipes not subjected to tensile stress.
Promag W tightening torques for EN (DIN)
Nominal diameter [mm] 25 32 40 50 65* 65 80 80 100 100 125 125 150 150 200 200 200 250 250 250 300 300 300 350 350 350 350 400 400 400 400 450 450
EN (DIN) Pressure rating [bar]
PN 40 PN 40 PN 40 PN 40 PN 16 PN 40 PN 16 PN 40 PN 16 PN 40 PN 16 PN 40 PN 16 PN 40 PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 6 PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 6 PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 6 PN 10
Threaded fasteners
4 × M 12 4 × M 16 4 × M 16 4 × M 16 8 × M 16 8 × M 16 8 × M 16 8 × M 16 8 × M 16 8 × M 20 8 × M 16 8 × M 24 8 × M 20 8 × M 24 8 × M 20 12 × M 20 12 × M 24 12 × M 20 12 × M 24 12 × M 27 12 × M 20 12 × M 24 16 × M 27 12 × M 20 16 × M 20 16 × M 24 16 × M 30 16 × M 20 16 × M 24 16 × M 27 16 × M 33 16 × M 20 20 × M 24
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
Hard rubber Polyurethane
-
15
-
24
-
31
48
40
32
27
32
27
40
34
40
34
43
36
59
50
56
48
83
71
74
63
104
88
106
91
70
61
104
92
82
71
98
85
150
134
94
81
134
118
153
138
111
120
112
118
152
165
227
252
90
98
151
167
193
215
289
326
112
126
153
133
18
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Endress+Hauser Page 149 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Proline Promag 50
Installation
Nominal diameter
EN (DIN)
[mm]
Pressure rating [bar]
450
PN 16
450
PN 25
500
PN 6
500
PN 10
500
PN 16
500
PN 25
600
PN 6
600
PN 10
600 *
PN 16
600
PN 25
700
PN 6
700
PN 10
700
PN 16
700
PN 25
800
PN 6
800
PN 10
800
PN 16
800
PN 25
900
PN 6
900
PN 10
900
PN 16
900
PN 25
1000
PN 6
1000
PN 10
1000
PN 16
1000
PN 25
1200
PN 6
1200
PN 10
1200
PN 16
1400
PN 6
1400
PN 10
1400
PN 16
1600
PN 6
1600
PN 10
1600
PN 16
1800
PN 6
1800
PN 10
1800
PN 16
2000
PN 6
2000
PN 10
2000
PN 16
* Designed acc. to EN 1092-1 (not to DIN 2501)
Threaded fasteners
20 × M 27 20 × M 33 20 × M 20 20 × M 24 20 × M 30 20 × M 33 20 × M 24 20 × M 27 20 × M 33 20 × M 36 24 × M 24 24 × M 27 24 × M 33 24 × M 39 24 × M 27 24 × M 30 24 × M 36 24 × M 45 24 × M 27 28 × M 30 28 × M 36 28 × M 45 28 × M 27 28 × M 33 28 × M 39 28 × M 52 32 × M 30 32 × M 36 32 × M 45 36 × M 33 36 × M 39 36 × M 45 40 × M 33 40 × M 45 40 × M 52 44 × M 36 44 × M 45 44 × M 52 48 × M 39 48 × M 45 48 × M 56
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
Hard rubber Polyurethane
198
196
256
253
119
123
155
171
275
300
317
360
139
147
206
219
415
443
431
516
148
139
246
246
278
318
449
507
206
182
331
316
369
385
664
721
230
637
316
307
353
398
690
716
218
208
402
405
502
518
970
971
319
299
564
568
701
753
430
398
654
618
729
762
440
417
946
893
1007
1100
547
521
961
895
1108
1003
629
605
1047
1092
1324
1261
Endress+Hauser Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
19
Page 150 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Installation
Proline Promag 50
Promag W tightening torques for ANSI
Nominal diameter
ANSI
[mm] 25 25 40 40 50 50 80 80 100 100 150 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600
[inch] 1" 1"
1 ½" 1 ½"
2" 2" 3" 3" 4" 4" 6" 6" 8" 10" 12" 14" 16" 18" 20" 24"
Pressure rating [lbs]
Class 150 Class 300 Class 150 Class 300 Class 150 Class 300 Class 150 Class 300 Class 150 Class 300 Class 150 Class 300 Class 150 Class 150 Class 150 Class 150 Class 150 Class 150 Class 150 Class 150
Threaded fasteners
4 × ½" 4 × 5/8" 4 × ½" 4 × ¾" 4 × 5/8" 8 × 5/8" 4 × 5/8" 8 × ¾" 8 × 5/8" 8 × ¾" 8 × ¾" 12 × ¾" 8 × ¾" 12 × 7/8" 12 × 7/8" 12 × 1" 16 × 1" 16 × 1 1/8" 20 × 1 1/8" 20 × 1 ¼"
Max. tightening torque
Hard rubber
Polyurethane
[Nm] [lbf · ft] [Nm] [lbf · ft]
-
-
7
5
-
-
8
6
-
-
10
7
-
-
15
11
35
26
22
16
18
13
11
8
60
44
43
32
38
28
26
19
42
31
31
23
58
43
40
30
79
58
59
44
70
52
51
38
107
79
80
59
101
74
75
55
133
98
103
76
135
100
158
117
128
94
150
111
204
150
234
173
183
135
217
160
268
198
307
226
Promag W tightening torques for JIS
Nominal diameter [mm] 25 25 32 32 40 40 50 50 65 65 80 80 100
JIS Pressure rating
10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K
Threaded fasteners
4 × M 16 4 × M 16 4 × M 16 4 × M 16 4 × M 16 4 × M 16 4 × M 16 8 × M 16 4 × M 16 8 × M 16 8 × M 16 8 × M 20 8 × M 16
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
Hard rubber
Polyurethane
-
19
-
19
-
22
-
22
-
24
-
24
40
33
20
17
55
45
28
23
29
23
42
35
35
29
20
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Endress+Hauser Page 151 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Proline Promag 50
Installation
Nominal diameter [mm] 100 125 125 150 150 200 200 250 250 300 300
JIS Pressure rating
20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K
Threaded fasteners
8 × M 20 8 × M 20 8 × M 22 8 × M 20 12 × M 22 12 × M 20 12 × M 22 12 × M 22 12 × M 24 16 × M 22 16 × M 24
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
Hard rubber
Polyurethane
56
48
60
51
91
79
75
63
81
72
61
52
91
80
100
87
159
144
74
63
138
124
Promag W tightening torques for AWWA
Nominal diameter
[mm] 700 750 800 900 1000 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800 2000
[inch] 28" 30" 32" 36" 40" 42" 48" 54" 60" 66" 72" 78"
AWWA
Pressure rating Class D Class D Class D Class D Class D Class D Class D Class D Class D Class D Class D Class D
Threaded fasteners 28 × 1 ¼" 28 × 1 ¼" 28 × 1 ½" 32 × 1 ½" 36 × 1 ½" 36 × 1 ½" 44 × 1 ½" 44 × 1 ¾" 52 × 1 ¾" 52 × 1 ¾" 60 × 1 ¾" 64 × 2"
Promag W tightening torques for AS 2129
Max. tightening torque
Hard rubber
[Nm]
[lbf · ft]
247
182
287
212
394
291
419
309
420
310
528
389
552
407
730
538
758
559
946
698
975
719
853
629
Polyurethane
[Nm]
[lbf · ft]
292
215
302
223
422
311
430
317
477
352
518
382
531
392
633
467
832
614
955
704
1087
802
786
580
Nominal diameter [mm] 50 80 100 150 200 250 300
AS 2129 Pressure rating
Table E Table E Table E Table E Table E Table E Table E
Threaded fasteners 4 × M 16 4 × M 16 8 × M 16 8 × M 20 8 × M 20 12 × M 20 12 × M 24
Max. tightening torque [Nm] Hard rubber 32 49 38 64 96 98 123
Endress+Hauser Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
21
Page 152 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Installation
Proline Promag 50
Nominal diameter [mm] 350 400 450 500 600 700 750 800 900 1000 1200
AS 2129 Pressure rating
Table E Table E Table E Table E Table E Table E Table E Table E Table E Table E Table E
Threaded fasteners 12 × M 24 12 × M 24 16 × M 24 16 × M 24 16 × M 30 20 × M 30 20 × M 30 20 × M 30 24 × M 30 24 × M 30 32 × M 30
Promag W tightening torques for AS 4087
Nominal diameter [mm] 50 80 100 150 200 250 300 350 375 400 450 500 600 700 750 800 900 1000 1200
AS 4087 Pressure rating
Table E PN 16 PN 16 PN 16 PN 16 PN 16 PN 16 PN 16 PN 16 PN 16 PN 16 PN 16 PN 16 PN 16 PN 16 PN 16 PN 16 PN 16 PN 16
Threaded fasteners 4 × M 16 4 × M 16 4 × M 16 8 × M 20 8 × M 20 8 × M 20 12 × M 24 12 × M 24 12 × M 24 12 × M 24 12 × M 24 16 × M 24 16 × M 27 20 × M 27 20 × M 30 20 × M 33 24 × M 33 24 × M 33 32 × M 33
Max. tightening torque [Nm] Hard rubber 203 226 226 271 439 355 559 631 627 634 727
Max. tightening torque [Nm] Hard rubber 32 49 76 52 77 147 103 203 137 226 301 271 393 330 529 631 627 595 703
22
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Endress+Hauser Page 153 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Proline Promag 50
Installation
2.5 Installing the Promag P sensor
" Caution! · The plates mounted on the two sensor flanges protect the PTFE which is turned over the flanges and, consequently, should not be removed until immediately prior to mounting the sensor. · The protective plates must always remain mounted while the device is in storage. · Make sure that the lining at the flange is not damaged or removed.
! Note!
Screws, nuts, seals, etc. are not included in the scope of supply and must be supplied by the customer.
The sensor is installed between the two pipe flanges: · The requisite torques must be observed ä 25 · If grounding disks are used, follow the mounting
instructions which will be enclosed with the shipment.
a0008165
2.5.1 Seals
Comply with the following instructions when installing seals: · No seals are required for PFA or PFTE measuring tube lining. · For DIN flanges, only use seals to DIN EN 1514-1. · Make sure that the mounted seals do not protrude into the piping cross-section.
" Caution! Risk of short circuit! Do not use electrically conductive sealing compounds such as graphite! An electrically conductive layer could form on the inside of the measuring tube and short-circuit the measuring signal.
2.5.2 Ground cable
If necessary, special ground cables can be ordered as accessories for potential equalization.
Endress+Hauser Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
23
Page 154 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Installation
Proline Promag 50
2.5.3 Installing the high-temperature version (with PFA lining)
The high-temperature version has a housing support for the thermal separation of sensor and transmitter. The high-temperature version is always used for applications in which high ambient temperatures are encountered in conjunction with high fluid temperatures. The high-temperature version is obligatory if the fluid temperature exceeds +150 °C.
! Note! You will find information on permissible temperature ranges in the Operating Instructions of the CD-ROM
Insulation
Pipes generally have to be insulated if they carry very hot fluids, in order to avoid energy losses and to prevent accidental contact with pipes at temperatures that could cause injury. Guidelines regulating the insulation of pipes have to be taken into account.
" Caution! Risk of measuring electronics overheating. The housing support dissipates heat and its entire surface area must remain uncovered. Make sure that the sensor insulation does not extend past the top of the two sensor shells.
Esc
-
+
E
max.
A0004300
24
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Endress+Hauser Page 155 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Proline Promag 50
Installation
2.5.4 Tightening torques for threaded fasteners (Promag P)
Please note the following: · The tightening torques listed below are for lubricated threads only. · Always tighten the screws uniformly and in diagonally opposite sequence. · Overtightening the screws will deform the sealing faces or damage the seals. · The tightening torques listed below apply only to pipes not subjected to tensile stress.
Promag P tightening torques for EN (DIN)
Nominal diameter [mm] 15 25 32 40 50 65 * 65 80 80 100 100 125 125 150 150 200 200 200 250 250 250 300 300 300 350 350 350 400 400 400 450 450
EN (DIN) Pressure rating [bar]
PN 40 PN 40 PN 40 PN 40 PN 40 PN 16 PN 40 PN 16 PN 40 PN 16 PN 40 PN 16 PN 40 PN 16 PN 40 PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 10 PN 16
Threaded fasteners
4 × M 12 4 × M 12 4 × M 16 4 × M 16 4 × M 16 8 × M 16 8 × M 16 8 × M 16 8 × M 16 8 × M 16 8 × M 20 8 × M 16 8 × M 24 8 × M 20 8 × M 24 8 × M 20 12 × M 20 12 × M 24 12 × M 20 12 × M 24 12 × M 27 12 × M 20 12 × M 24 16 × M 27 16 × M 20 16 × M 24 16 × M 30 16 × M 24 16 × M 27 16 × M 33 20 × M 24 20 × M 27
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
PTFE
PFA
11
26
20
41
35
52
47
65
59
43
40
43
40
53
48
53
48
57
51
78
70
75
67
111
99
99
85
136
120
141
101
94
67
138
105
110
131
200
125
179
204
188
254
380
260
330
488
235
300
Endress+Hauser Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
25
Page 156 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Installation
Proline Promag 50
Nominal diameter
EN (DIN)
[mm]
Pressure rating [bar]
450
PN 25
500
PN 10
500
PN 16
500
PN 25
600
PN 10
600 *
PN 16
600
PN 25
* Designed acc. to EN 1092-1 (not to DIN 2501)
Promag P tightening torques for ANSI
Threaded fasteners
20 × M 33 20 × M 24 20 × M 30 20 × M 33 20 × M 27 20 × M 33 20 × M 36
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
PTFE
PFA
385
265
448
533
345
658
731
Nominal diameter
[mm] 15 15 25 25 40 40 50 50 80 80 100 100 150 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600
[inch] ½" ½" 1" 1" 1 ½" 1 ½" 2" 2" 3" 3" 4" 4" 6" 6" 8" 10" 12" 14" 16" 18" 20" 24"
ANSI
Pressure rating [lbs]
Class 150 Class 300 Class 150 Class 300 Class 150 Class 300 Class 150 Class 300 Class 150 Class 300 Class 150 Class 300 Class 150 Class 300 Class 150 Class 150 Class 150 Class 150 Class 150 Class 150 Class 150 Class 150
Threaded fasteners
4 × ½" 4 × ½" 4 × ½" 4 × 5/8" 4 × ½" 4 × ¾" 4 × 5/8" 8 × 5/8" 4 × 5/8" 8 × ¾" 8 × 5/8" 8 × ¾" 8 × ¾" 12 × ¾" 8 × ¾" 12 × 7/8" 12 × 7/8" 12 × 1" 16 × 1" 16 × 1 1/8" 20 × 1 1/8" 20 × 1 ¼"
Max. tightening torque
PTFE
PFA
[Nm] [lbf · ft] [Nm] [lbf · ft]
6
4
6
4
11
8
10
7
14
10
12
9
24
18
21
15
34
25
31
23
47
35
44
32
23
17
22
16
79
58
67
49
47
35
42
31
56
41
50
37
67
49
59
44
106
78
86
63
73
54
67
49
143
105
109
80
135
100
178
131
260
192
246
181
371
274
341
252
477
352
26
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Endress+Hauser Page 157 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Proline Promag 50
Installation
Promag P tightening torques for JIS
Nominal diameter [mm] 25 25 32 32 40 40 50 50 65 65 80 80 100 100 125 125 150 150 200 200 250 250 300 300
JIS Pressure rating
10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K
Threaded fasteners 4 × M 16 4 × M 16 4 × M 16 4 × M 16 4 × M 16 4 × M 16 4 × M 16 8 × M 16 4 × M 16 8 × M 16 8 × M 16 8 × M 20 8 × M 16 8 × M 20 8 × M 20 8 × M 22 8 × M 20 12 × M 22 12 × M 20 12 × M 22 12 × M 22 12 × M 24 16 × M 22 16 × M 24
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
PTFE
PFA
32
27
32
27
38
38
41
37
41
37
54
46
27
23
74
63
37
31
38
32
57
46
47
38
75
58
80
66
121
103
99
81
108
72
82
54
121
88
133
212
99
183
Promag P tightening torques for AS 2129
Nominal diameter [mm]
25
50
AS 2129 Pressure rating
Table E
Table E
Threaded fasteners
4 × M 12 4 × M 16
Max. tightening torque [Nm] PTFE
21
42
Promag P tightening torques for AS 4087
Nominal diameter [mm]
50
AS 4087 Pressure rating
PN 16
Threaded fasteners
4 × M 16
Max. tightening torque [Nm] PTFE
42
Endress+Hauser Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
27
Page 158 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Installation
Proline Promag 50
2.6 Installing the Promag H sensor
Depending on the order specifications, the sensor is supplied with or without ready-mounted process connections. Mounted process connections are fixed to the sensor with 4 or 6 hexagonal-headed bolts.
" Caution! Depending on the application and length of the pipe, the sensor may have to be supported or additionally secured. The sensor must be secured if using plastic process connections. An appropriate wall mounting kit can be ordered separately from Endress+Hauser as an accessory.
2.6.1 Seals
When mounting the process connections, make sure that the seals in question are free from dirt and centered correctly.
" Caution! · The screws must be securely tightened in the case of metal process connections. Together with the sensor, the process connection forms a metal connection that ensures defined seal compression. · With regard to process connections made of plastic material, comply with the max. torques for lubricated threads (7 Nm / 5.2 lbf ft). A seal must always be used between the connection and counterflange for plastic flanges. · The seals should be replaced periodically depending on the application, particularly if molded seals are used (aseptic version)! The intervals between seal replacement depend on the frequency of the cleaning cycles and the fluid and cleaning temperatures. Replacement seals can be ordered as an accessory.
2.6.2 Using and mounting grounding rings (DN 2 to 25, 1/12" to 1")
In the case of process connections made of plastic (e.g. flange connections or adhesive couplings), potential equalization between the sensor and fluid must be ensured via additional grounding rings. If grounding rings are missing, this can affect accuracy or result in the destruction of the sensor due to electrochemical electrode reduction.
" Caution! · Depending on the order option, appropriate plastic disks are used instead of grounding rings for the process connections. These plastic disks only act as a kind of "place holder" and do not have any potential equalization function whatsoever. In addition, they also assume an important sealing function at the sensor/connection interface. Thus, these plastic disks/seals should never be removed and should always be mounted for process connections without metal grounding rings! · Grounding rings can be ordered separately from Endress+Hauser as an accessory. When ordering, make sure that the grounding rings are compatible with the electrode material. Otherwise there is the risk that electrodes can be damaged by electrochemical corrosion! For information on materials, see the Operating Instructions on the CD-ROM.
28
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Endress+Hauser Page 159 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Proline Promag 50
Installation
· Grounding rings, incl. seals, are mounted inside the process connections. The face-to-face length is not affected.
Installing the grounding rings
1 = Process connection hexagonal-headed bolts 2 = O-ring seals 4 = Sensor 3 = Grounding ring or plastic disk (place holder)
1
2 32 4
a0008168
a. Release the 4 or 6 hexagonal-headed bolts (1) and remove the process connection from the sensor (4). b. Remove the plastic disk (3) including the two O-ring seals (2) from the process connection. c. Insert one of the O-ring seals (2) back into the groove of the process connection. d. Place the metal grounding ring (3) into the process connection as illustrated. e. Now insert the second O-ring seal (2) into the groove of the grounding ring. f. Mount the process connection back onto the sensor. In doing so, make sure to observe the max. torques for
lubricated threads (7 Nm) (5.2 lbf ft).
2.6.3 Welding the sensor into the pipe (weld nipples)
" Caution! Risk of destroying the electronics! Make sure that the welding system is not grounded via the sensor or transmitter.
a. Secure the sensor with a few welding points in the pipe. A welding jig suitable for this purpose can be ordered separately as an accessory.
b. Release the screws on the process connection flange and remove the sensor, including the seal, from the pipe.
c. Weld the process connection into the pipe.
d. Mount the sensor back into the pipe. In doing so, make sure the seals are clean and correctly positioned.
! Note! · When welding is performed correctly with thin-walled pipes carrying food, the seal is not damaged by the heat even when it is mounted. It is recommended, however, to disassemble the sensor and seal. · For the disassembly work, it must be possible to open the pipe approx. 8 mm (0.31 in) in total.
Endress+Hauser Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
29
Page 160 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Installation
Proline Promag 50
2.7 Installing the transmitter housing
2.7.1 Turning the transmitter housing
Turning the aluminum field housing
Aluminum field housing for non-Ex area
b
£ 180°
d
£ 180°
e
a
c
Aluminum field housing for Zone 1 or Class I Div. 1
max. 360° b
c
a
Nicht unötfefnreSnpannung
Keeciprccouivtseratirgehtalivwehile
Keecpirccuoivtseratrieghatliwvehile
Nicht-eigensichere Stromkreise durch IP40-Abdeckung geschützt
Non-intrinsically safe circuits Ip40 protected
Boucles de courant sans sécurité intrinsèque
protégées par Ip40
Ne passoouusvtrier ln'siaopnpareil
Turning the stainless steel field housing
f
A0007540
d
A0008036
For Zone 1 or Class I Div. 1:
a. Release the setscrew.
b. Turn the transmitter housing gently clockwise until the stop (end of the thread).
c. Turn the transmitter counterclockwise (max. 360°) to the desired position.
d. Retighten the setscrew.
£ 180° c
£ 180°
a
b
30
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
d e
A0007661
Endress+Hauser Page 161 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Proline Promag 50
Installation
2.7.2 Turning the onsite display
4 x 45° b
a. Press in the side latches on the display module and remove the module from the cover plate of the electronics compartment.
b. Turn the display to the desired position (max. 4 × 45° in both directions) and reset it onto the cover plate of the electronics compartment.
a
A0007541
2.7.3 Installing the wall-mount housing
" Caution! · Make sure that the ambient temperature does not exceed the permitted range. · Always install the wall-mount housing in such a way that the cable entries point downwards.
Mounted directly on the wall
35 (1.38)
mm (inch) 1.
2.
3.
Connection compartment
Securing screws M6 (max. ø 6.5 mm (0.25"); screw head max. ø 10.5 mm (0.4")
Housing bores for securing screws
2
3
3
81.5 (3.2)
1 90 (3.54)
192 (7.56)
A0007542
Endress+Hauser Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
31
Page 162 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Installation
Proline Promag 50
Pipe mounting
Ø 20...70 (Ø 0.79...2.75)
mm (inch)
"
Caution!
Danger of overheating! If the device is mounted on a
warm pipe, make sure that the housing temperature
does not exceed +60 °C (+140 °F) which is the
maximum temperature permitted.
~155 (~ 6.1)
Panel mounting
A0007543
+0.5 (+0.019) 0.5 (0.019)
210 (8.27)
mm (inch)
+0.5 (+0.019) 0.5 (0.019)
245 (9.65)
~110 (~4.33)
A0007544
32
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Endress+Hauser Page 163 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Proline Promag 50
Installation
2.8 Post-installation check
· Is the measuring device damaged (visual inspection)? · Does the device correspond to specifications at the measuring point, including process
temperature and pressure, ambient temperature, minimum fluid conductivity, measuring range, etc.? · Does the arrow on the sensor nameplate match the actual direction of flow through the pipe? · Is the position of the measuring electrode plane correct? · Were all screws tightened to the specified torques when the sensor was installed? · Were the correct seals used (type, material, installation)? · Are the measuring point number and labeling correct (visual inspection)? · Were the inlet and outlet runs respected? Inlet run 5 × DN Outlet run 2 × DN · Is the measuring device protected against moisture and direct sunlight? · Is the sensor adequately protected against vibration (attachment, support)? Acceleration up to 2 g by analogy with IEC 600 68-2-8
Endress+Hauser Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
33
Page 164 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Wiring
Proline Promag 50
3 Wiring # Warning!
Risk of electric shock! Components carry dangerous voltages. · Never mount or wire the measuring device while it is connected to the power supply. · Before connecting the power supply, check the safety equipment. · Route the power supply and signal cables so they are securely seated. · Seal the cable entries and covers tight.
" Caution! Risk of damaging the electronic components! · Connect the power supply in accordance with the connection data on the nameplate. · Connect the signal cable in accordance with the connection data in the Operating Instructions or the Ex documentation on the CD-ROM.
In addition, for the remote version
" Caution! Risk of damaging the electronic components! · Only connect sensors and transmitters with the same serial number. · Observe the cable specifications of the connecting cable Operating Instructions on the CD-ROM.
! Note! Install the connecting cable securely to prevent movement.
In addition, for measuring devices with fieldbus communication
" Caution! Risk of damaging the electronic components! · Observe the cable specification of the fieldbus cable Operating Instructions on the CD-ROM. · Keep the stripped and twisted lengths of cable shield as short as possible. · Screen and ground the signal lines Operating Instructions on the CD-ROM. · When using in systems without potential equalization Operating Instructions on the CD-ROM.
In addition, for Ex-certified measuring devices
# Warning! When wiring Ex-certified measuring devices, all the safety instructions, wiring diagrams, technical information etc. of the related Ex documentation must be observed Ex documentation on the CD-ROM.
34
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Endress+Hauser Page 165 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Proline Promag 50
Wiring
3.1 Connecting the various housing types
Wire the unit using the terminal assignment diagram inside the cover. 3.1.1 Compact version
Transmitter connection:
1 Connection diagram inside the connection compartment
3
cover
4
2 Power supply cable
2
3 Signal cable or fieldbus cable
4 Optional
1
A0007545
3.1.2 Remote version (transmitter): non-Ex Zone, Ex Zone 2, Class I Div. 2
234 5 1
Transmitter connection:
1 Connection diagram inside the connection compartment cover
2 Power supply cable 3 Signal cable 4 Fieldbus cable
Connecting the connecting cable ( ä 36):
5
A0012690
Sensor/transmitter connecting cable
3.1.3 Remote version (transmitter): Ex Zone 1, Class I Div. 1
3 4 2
Keeciprccuoitvseratrieghatlivwehile
Ne psaosuso tuevrnirsil'oanppareil
Nicht uönftfenreSnpannung
Keecpirccuoitvserartieghatlivwehile
1
Transmitter connection:
1 Connection diagram inside the connection compartment cover
2 Power supply cable 3 Signal cable or fieldbus cable 4 Optional
5
1
Connecting the connecting cable ( ä 36): 5 Sensor/transmitter connecting cable
A0008218
3.1.4 Remote version (sensor)
Transmitter connection:
1 Connection diagram inside the connection compartment
5
1
cover
Connecting cable connection:
5 A0008037
Sensor/transmitter connecting cable
Endress+Hauser Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
35
Page 166 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Wiring
Proline Promag 50
3.2 Connecting the remote version connecting cable
3.2.1 Connecting cable for Promag W, P and L
Connecting cable termination
Terminate the signal and coil current cables as shown in the figure below (Detail A). Fit the fine-wire cores with cable end ferrules (Detail B).
Signal cable termination
Make sure that the cable end ferrules do not touch the wire shields on the sensor side! Minimum distance = 1 mm (0.04 in), exception "GND" = green cable.
Sensor
Transmitter
mm (inch) a* = 170 (6.69) b* = 20 (0.79) c = 80 (3.15) d = 17 (0.67) e = 8 (0.31) f = 50 (1.97) g = 1 ( 0.04)
a* b*
c d
e
f
m
B
n
g
n
GND
nm
a* b
cd
e
m
m
n
m
GND
n m
n
n
mm (inch) a* = 100 (3.94) b = 80 (3.15) c = 50 (1.97) d = 17 (0.67) e = 8 (0.31)
a0008171
m = Cable end ferrules, red, 1.0 mm (0.04"); n = Cable end ferrules, white, 0.5 mm (0.02") * = Stripping for armored cables only
A A
Coil current cable termination
Insulate one core of the three-core cable at the level of the core reinforcement; you only require two cores for the connection.
mm (inch) a* = 160 (6.3) b* = 20 (0.79) c = 70 (2.76) d = 50 (1.97) e = 8 (0.31) f = 10 (0.39)
Sensor
a* b* c
d ef
Transmitter
a* b
c de
mm (inch) a* = 90 (3.54) b = 70 (2.76) c = 50 (1.97) d = 10 (0.39) e = 8 (0.31)
m
B
m
m
m
m
m
a0008172
m = Cable end ferrules, red, 1.0 mm (0.04"); n = Cable end ferrules, white, 0.5 mm (0.02") * = Stripping for armored cables only
36
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Endress+Hauser Page 167 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Proline Promag 50
Wiring
A A
3.2.2 Promag H connecting cable
Connecting cable termination Terminate the signal and coil current cables as shown in the figure below (Detail A). Fit the fine-wire cores with cable end ferrules (Detail B).
Signal cable termination Make sure that the cable end ferrules do not touch the wire shields on the sensor side! Minimum distance = 1 mm (0.04 in), exception "GND" = green cable.
Sensor
Transmitter
mm (inch) a = 80 (3.15) b = 15 (0.59) c = 17 (0.67) d = 8 (0.31) e = 1 ( 0.04)
a
c d
b
a bc
mm (inch) a = 80 (3.15) b = 50 (1.97) c = 17 (0.67) d = 8 (0.31)
n
n
e
n GND
m
d
B
m m
n
m
GND
n m
n
n
a0008173
m = Cable end ferrules, red, 1.0 mm (0.04"); n = Cable end ferrules, white, 0.5 mm (0.02")
Coil current cable termination
Insulate one core of the three-core cable at the level of the core reinforcement; you only require two cores for the connection.
mm (inch) a = 70 (2.76) b = 40 (1.57) c = 15 (0.59) d = 8 (0.31)
Sensor
a
b
d
c
Transmitter
a b cd
mm (inch) a = 70 (2.76) b = 50 (1.97) c = 10 (0.39) d = 8 (0.31)
B
m
m
m
m
m
a0008175
m = Cable end ferrules, red, 1.0 mm (0.04"); n = Cable end ferrules, white, 0.5 mm (0.02")
Endress+Hauser Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
37
Page 168 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Wiring
Proline Promag 50
3.2.3 Connecting cable connection
A
B
S1 E1 E2 S2GND E S
Nicht uönftfenreSnpannung
Keecpirccuoivtserartieghatlivwehile
6 5 7 8 4 37 36
a
42 41
Keeciprccuoitvseratrieghatlivwehile
Ne psaosuso tuevrnirsil'oanppareil
b
c
bc
a
b
cb cb c
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
b
5 7 4 37
E1 E2 GNDE
C
D
E
42 41
A Transmitter housing on connection housing, remote version B Wall-mount housing on connection housing, remote version
C Sensor connection housing, remote version for Promag W, P, L D Sensor connection housing, remote version for Promag H, DN 25 E Sensor connection housing, remote version for Promag H, DN 40
a Ground terminals (are provided for potential equalization connection) b Coil circuit connecting cable c Signal circuit connecting cable (electrodes)
n.c. = not connected, isolated cable shields
Cable colors for terminal numbers: 5/6 = brown 7/8 = white 4 = green 36/37 = yellow
A0008180
38
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Endress+Hauser Page 169 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Proline Promag 50
Wiring
3.3 Potential equalization
Perfect measurement is only ensured when the medium and the sensor have the same electrical potential. Most sensors have a reference electrode installed as standard, which guarantees the required potential connection. This usually means that the use of ground disks or other measures are unnecessary.
· Promag L, Promag W and Promag P Reference electrode available as standard.
· Promag H No reference electrode available. There is always an electrical connection to the fluid via the metal process connection. In the case of plastic process connections, potential equalization must be ensured through the use of grounding rings.
Standard situation Potential equalization takes place via the ground terminal of the transmitter when using the device in metal, grounded pipes.
A0004375
! Note! Potential equalization for other areas of application Operating Instructions on the CD-ROM.
Endress+Hauser Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
39
Page 170 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Wiring
Proline Promag 50
3.4 Degree of protection
The devices meet all the requirements for IP 67.
After mounting in the field or service work, the following points have to be observed to ensure that IP 67 protection is retained: · Install the measuring device in such a way that the cable entries do not point upwards. · Do not remove the seal from the cable entry. · Remove all unused cable entries and plug them with suitable/certified drain plugs. · Use cable entries and drain plugs with a long-term operating temperature range in accordance
with the temperature specified on the nameplate.
Tighten the cable entries correctly.
A0007549
A0007550
The cables must loop down before they enter the cable entries ("water trap").
3.5 Post-connection check
· Are cables or the device damaged (visual inspection)? · Does the supply voltage match the information on the nameplate? · Do the cables used comply with the necessary specifications? · Do the mounted cables have adequate strain relief and are they routed securely? · Is the cable type route completely isolated? Without loops and crossovers? · Only remote version:
- Is the flow sensor connected to the matching transmitter electronics? - Is the connecting cable between sensor and transmitter connected correctly? · Are all screw terminals firmly tightened? · Have all the measures for grounding and potential equalization been correctly implemented? · Are all cable entries installed, firmly tightened and correctly sealed? · Cable routed as a "water trap" in loops? · Are all the housing covers installed and securely tightened?
In addition, for measuring devices with fieldbus communication: · Are all the connecting components (T-boxes, junction boxes, connectors, etc.) connected
with each other correctly? · Has each fieldbus segment been terminated at both ends with a bus terminator? · Has the max. length of the fieldbus cable been observed in accordance with the specifications? · Has the max. length of the spurs been observed in accordance with the specifications? · Is the fieldbus cable fully shielded and correctly grounded?
40
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Endress+Hauser Page 171 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Proline Promag 50
Hardware settings
4 Hardware settings
This section only deals with the hardware settings needed for commissioning. All other settings (e.g. output configuration, write protection, etc.) are described in the associated Operating Instructions on the CD-ROM.
! Note! No hardware settings are needed for measuring devices with HART or FOUNDATION Fieldbus-type communication.
4.1 Device address
Has to be set for measuring devices with the following communication methods: · PROFIBUS DP/PA
The device address can be configured via: · Miniature switches see description below · Local operation see Software settings section ä 48
Addressing via miniature switches
# Warning! Risk of electric shock! Risk of damaging the electronic components! · All the safety instructions for the measuring device must be observed and all the warnings heeded ä 34. · Use a workspace, working environment and tools purposely designed for electrostatically sensitive devices.
#
Warning!
Switch off the power supply before opening the device.
W E N O W E N O W E N O
W E N O W E N O W E N O
a. Loosen the cheese head screw of the securing
clamp with an Allen key (3 mm)
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1 2 3 4
b. Unscrew cover of the electronics compartment
from the transmitter housing.
c. Loosen the securing screws of the display module and remove the onsite display (if present).
c
a
b
d
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
A0007551
d. Set the position of the miniature switches on the I/O board using a sharp pointed object.
Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Endress+Hauser Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
41
Page 172 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Hardware settings
Proline Promag 50
PROFIBUS
OFF ON
1
1
2
2
3
4
4
8
a
1
16
2
32
3
64
4
b
1 2
c 3 4
OFF ON
OFF 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
OFF
A0007552
Device address range: 0 to 126 Factory setting: 126
a. Miniature switches for device address Example shown: 1+16+32 = device address 49
b. Miniature switches for the address mode (method of addressing): OFF (factory setting) = software addressing via local operation/operating program ON = hardware addressing via miniature switches
c. Miniature switches not assigned.
42
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Endress+Hauser Page 173 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Proline Promag 50
Hardware settings
4.2 Terminating resistors
! Note! If the measuring device is used at the end of a bus segment, termination is required. This can be performed in the measuring device by setting the terminating resistors on the I/O board. Generally, however, it is recommended to use an external bus terminator and not perform termination at the measuring device itself.
Has to be set for measuring devices with the following communication methods: · PROFIBUS DP
Baudrate 1.5 MBaud Termination can be performed at the measuring device, see graphic
Baudrate > 1.5 MBaud An external bus terminator must be used
# Warning! Risk of electric shock! Risk of damaging the electronic components! · All the safety instructions for the measuring device must be observed and all the warnings heeded ä 34. · Use a workspace, working environment and tools purposely designed for electrostatically sensitive devices.
Setting the terminating switch SW1 on the I/O board: ON - ON - ON - ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
W E N O W E N O W E N O
W E N O
W E N O W E N O W E N O
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
+5V SW 1 1 2 3 4
OFF ON
390 W 220 W 390 W
A0007556
Endress+Hauser Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
43
Page 174 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Commissioning
Proline Promag 50
5 Commissioning
5.1 Switching on the measuring device
On completion of the installation (successful post-installation check), wiring (successful post-connection check) and after making the necessary hardware settings, where applicable, the permitted power supply (see nameplate) can be switched on for the measuring device.
When the power supply is switched on, the measuring device performs a number of power-up checks and device self-checks. As this procedure progresses the following messages can appear on the onsite display:
Display examples: PROMAG 50 START-UP
Æ DEVICE SOFTWARE V XX.XX.XX
Æ SYSTEM OK OPERATION
Start-up message Displays the current software Beginning of operation
The measuring device starts operating as soon as the startup procedure is complete. Various measured values and/or status variables appear on the display.
! Note! If an error occurs during startup, this is indicated by an error message. The error messages that occur most frequently when a measuring device is commissioned are described in the Troubleshooting section ä 48.
44
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Endress+Hauser Page 175 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Proline Promag 50
Commissioning
5.2 Operation
5.2.1 Display elements
3
4
1
+48.25 xx/yy
2 +3702.6 x
Display lines/fields 1. Main line for primary measured values 2. Additional line for additional measured
variables/status variables 3. Current measured values 4. Engineering units/time units
A0007557
5.2.2 Operating elements
Esc
-+
1
2
Operating keys
E
1. () Minus key for entering, selecting
2. (+) Plus key for entering, selecting
3. Enter key for calling the function matrix, saving
3
When the +/ keys are pressed simultaneously (Esc):
A0007559 · Exit the function matrix step-by-step: · > 3 sec. = cancel data input and
return to the measured value display
5.2.3 Displaying error messages
1. Type of error:
1 P XXXXXXXXXX 5
P = Process error, S = System error
2. Error message type:
2
#000 00:00:05
$ = Fault message, ! = Notice message
3. Error number
3
4
4. Duration of the last error that occurred: Hours: Minutes: Seconds
A0007561
5. Error designation List of all error messages, see associated Operating Instructions on the CD-ROM
Endress+Hauser Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
45
Page 176 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Commissioning
Proline Promag 50
5.3 Navigating within the function matrix
Esc
-+
Esc
E q+
Esc
r+
>3s
mE
o
E +
q
EEEE
p
n
+
E E
A0007562
1. F Enter the function matrix (starting with measured value display) 2. P Select the group (e.g. OPERATION)
F Confirm selection 3. N Select function (e.g. LANGUAGE) 4. P Enter code 50 (only for the first time you access the function matrix)
F Confirm entry
P Change function/selection (e.g. ENGLISH) F Confirm selection 5. Q Return to measured value display step by step 6. Q > 3 s Return immediately to measured value display
46
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Endress+Hauser Page 177 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Proline Promag 50
Commissioning
5.4 Calling the Commissioning Quick Setup
All the functions needed for commissioning are called up automatically with the Quick Setup. The functions can be changed and adapted to the process in question.
1. F Enter the function matrix (starting with measured value display)
2. P Select the group QUICK SETUP F Confirm selection
3. QUICK SETUP COMMISSIONING function appears.
4. Intermediate step if configuration is blocked: P Enter the code 50 (confirm with F ) and thus enable configuration
5. P Go to Commissioning Quick Setup
6. P Select YES F Confirm selection
7. F Start Commissioning Quick Setup
8. Configure the individual functions/settings: Via P-key, select option or enter number Via F-key, confirm entry and go to next function Via Q-key, return to Setup Commissioning function (settings already made are retained)
! Note! Observe the following when performing the Quick Setup: · Configuration selection: Select the ACTUAL SETTING option · Unit selection: This is not offered again for selection after configuring a unit · Output selection: This is not offered again for selection after configuring an output · Automatic configuration of the display: select YES Main line = Mass flow Additional line = Totalizer 1 Information line = Operating/system conditions · If asked whether additional Quick Setups should be executed: select NO
All the available functions of the measuring device and their configuration options as well as additional Quick Setups, if available, are described in detail in the "Description of Device Functions" Operating Instructions. The related Operating Instructions can be found on the CD-ROM.
The measuring device is ready for operation on completion of the Quick Setup.
Endress+Hauser Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
47
Page 178 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Commissioning
Proline Promag 50
5.5 Software settings
5.5.1 Device address
Has to be set for measuring devices with the following communication methods: · PROFIBUS DP/PA device address range 0 to 126, factory setting 126
The device address can be configured via: · Miniature switches see Hardware settings ä 41 · Local operation see description below
! Note! The COMMISSIONING SETUP must be executed before setting the device address.
Calling the Communication Quick Setup
1. F Enter the function matrix (starting with measured value display) 2. P Select the group QUICK SETUP
F Confirm selection 3. N Select the QUICK SETUP COMMUNICATION function 4. Intermediate step if configuration is blocked: P Enter the code 50
(confirm with F ) and thus enable the configuration 5. P Go to Communication Quick Setup 6. P Select YES; F confirm selection 7. F Start Communication Quick Setup
8. Configure the individual functions/settings: Via P-key, select option or enter number Via F-key, confirm entry and go to next function Via Q-key, return to Setup Commissioning function (settings already made are retained)
All the available functions of the measuring device and their configuration options as well as additional Quick Setups, if available, are described in detail in the "Description of Device Functions" Operating Instructions. The related Operating Instructions can be found on the CD-ROM.
The measuring device is ready for operation on completion of the Quick Setup.
5.6 Troubleshooting
A complete description of all the error messages is provided in the Operating Instructions on the CD-ROM.
! Note! The output signals (e.g. pulse, frequency) of the measuring device must correspond to the higher-order controller.
48
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Endress+Hauser Page 179 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual J & P Richardson Industries Pty Ltd
4.5 PUSHBUTTONS & SELECTOR SWITCHES Sprecher & schuh D5P-MTS34-3LX025 Stop pushbutton Kraus & Naimer CAD11-A201-600-FT2 Local / Remote Switch Kraus & Naimer CAD11-A212 Engraved "FIRE-OFF-CONTROL" Selector Switch
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Revision 0
26/11/2012
Date: 2 July 2012
Page 180 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
D7P-MT64-PX01S D7M-MK44-MX01S
D7 Control and indication products 22.5 mm
Complete emergency stop operators - panel & enclosed type
Emergency stop operators
2
Choice of "Auto Break" or standard normally closed contacts
30, 40 or 60 mm mushroom head
Extra security key release
Pushbutton & Key operated types
Description
Contact
Twist To Reset/Standard contact blocks 30 mm Operator 40 mm Operator 60 mm Operator Key To Reset/Standard contact blocks 40 mm Operator Twist To Reset/"Auto Break" Safety contact blocks 30 mm Operator 40 mm Operator 60 mm Operator Key To Reset/"Auto Break" Safety contact blocks 40 mm Operator
Plastic body Cat. No. 1)
D7P-MT34-PX01 D7P-MT44-PX01 D7P-MT64-PX01
D7P-MK44-PX01
D7P-MT34-PX01S D7P-MT44-PX01S D7P-MT64-PX01S
D7P-MK44-PX01S
Metal body Price $ Cat. No. 1)
Price $
D7M-MT34-MX01 D7M-MT44-MX01 D7M-MT64-MX01
D7M-MK44-MX01
D7M-MT34-MX01S D7M-MT44-MX01S D7M-MT64-MX01S
D7M-MK44-MX01S
D71YM1 D71MM1
Enclosed emergency stop operators
Modern low profile enclosures Supplied complete Metric cable entry 20 mm Plastic or Metal enclosures
Dimensions in (mm)
Description
Contact
Plastic enclosures with emergency stop "Twist To Reset" operator
Yellow enclosure 40 mm plastic operator Plastic enclosures with emergency stop "Twist Key To Reset" operator
Yellow enclosure 40 mm plastic operator
Metal enclosures with emergency stop "Twist To Reset" operator
Grey enclosure 40 mm metal operator
Metal enclosures with emergency stop "Twist Key To Reset" operator
Grey enclosure 40 mm metal operator
Cat. No. D71YM1 D71YM4 D71MM1 D71MM4
Note: 1) Add suffix "bx" for special box/hang-sell packaging eg: D7P-MT34-PX01bx
Price $
Price Schedule `A2'
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
GST not included 26/11/2012
2 - 9 Page 181 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
D7 Control and indication products 22.5 mm
Industrial control switches emergency stop operators
2
D7P-MT44
D7M-MT64
Panel mounted front and rear elements
D7PMT Plastic, twist to release emergency stop Protection class IP 66
operators
Individually packaged
2
D7MMT Metal, twist to release emergency stop operators
2 part ordering
1
D7PLMT Plastic, twist to release illuminated
emergency stop operators
D7MLMT Metal, twist to release illuminated
emergency stop operators
1 Mushroom operators Description
Nonilluminated Plastic Cat. No.
Nonilluminated Metal Price $ Cat. No.
Illuminated Plastic Price $ Cat. No.
Illuminated Metal Price $ Cat. No.
30 mm Red operator
D7P-MT34
D7M-MT34
-
-
40 mm Red operator
D7P-MT44
D7M-MT44
D7P-LMT44
D7M-LMT44
60 mm Red operator
D7P-MT64
D7M-MT64
D7P-LMT64
D7M-LMT64
Price $
D7P-MK44
D7PMK D7MMK
Description
Plastic key-release emergency stop operators Metal key-release emergency stop operators
Nonilluminated Plastic Cat. No.
40 mm Red operator
D7P-MK44
Nonilluminated Metal Price $ Cat. No.
D7M-MK44
Price $
D7PX / D7PQ Pre-assembled clip-on rear elements with plastic coupling plate D7MX / D7MQ Pre-assembled clip-on rear elements with metal coupling plate
Contact/lamp blocks 3) 2
Description 1 N/O contact block 1 N/C contact block 1 N/O and 1 N/C contact block Safety "Auto Break" 1 N/C contact block 1 N/O and 1 N/C contact block and integrated LED lamp block
Screw Cat. No.
D7PX10 D7PX01 D7PX11
Spring clamp Price $ Cat. No.
D7PQ10
D7PQ01
D7PQ11
Metal screw Price $ Cat. No.
D7MX10
D7MX01
D7MX11
Metal spring clamp Price $ Cat. No.
D7MQ10
D7MQ01
D7MQ11
Price $
D7PX01S
-
D7MX01S
-
D7PN1) 2)X11
D7PQ1) 2)Q11
D7MN1) 2)X11
D7MQ 1) 2)Q11
Notes: 1) enter voltage 24V AC/DC = 3, 120V AC = 5, 240V AC = 7 2) enter lamp colour C = clear (incandescent), R = Red LED, G = Green LED, Y = Yellow LED, W = White LED, B = Blue LED - Example D7PN3RX11 = 24 V AC/DC RED integrated LED lamp block (Price shown is for 110/240 VAC) 3) Safety "Auto Break" and additional contact blocks available refer page 2-34
Price Schedule `A2'
2 - 10 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
GST not included 26/11/2012
Page 182 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
D7 Control and indication products 22.5 mm
Technical information
Front-of-Panel (Operators) 1)
Mechanical Ratings
Vibration (assembled to panel)
(G)
Shock
(G)
Degree of protection 2)
Mechanical durability per 10,000,000 Cycles
EN 60947 (Annex C)
1,000,000 Cycles
500,000 Cycles
300,000 Cycles
Operating forces
(N)
(typical with one contact block)
Operating torque (typical application with one contact block) Environmental Temperature range (operating) 3) Temperature range (short-term storage) Humidity
(N-m)
(°C) (°C) (%)
Plastic (D7P)
Metal (D7M)
Tested at 10...2000 Hz, 1.52 mm displacement (peak-to-peak) max./G max. for 3 hr duration, no damage
Tested at 1/2 cycle sine wave for 11 ms; no damage at 100 G UL Type 3/3R/4/4X/12/13 (IP 65/66) UL Type 3/3R/4/12/13 (IP 65/66)
Pushbuttons, momentary mushroom Multi-function
Push-pull mushroom E-stops, selector switches
Flush/extended = 5N E-stop = 36N
Mushroom = 9N
Selector switch = 0.25 N-m
-25...+70 °C (-13...+158 °F) -25...+85 °C (-13...+185 °F) 50...95% RH from 25...60 °C (77...140 °F) per: procedure IV of MIL-STD-810C, Method 507.1 cycling test
2
Back-of-Panel (Components) 1) Electrical Ratings Standard contact block rating
Low voltage contact block 4)
Thermal current Wire capacity
Insulation voltage
(A)
Screw terminal
(AWG)
Spring-clamp terminal (AWG)
(Ui)
Dielectric strength (minimum)
External
Standard
short
blocks
circuit
Low voltage
protection
contact blocks
Electrical shock protection
AC 15, DC 13 to EN 60947-5-1 and UL 508, 17 V, 5 mA min. A600,Q600 600 V AC
5 V, 1 mA DC min. C300, R150, AC 15, DC 13 to EN 60947-5-1 and UL 508 10 A max. enclosed (40 °C ambient) to UL 508, EN 60947-5-1
#18...12 AWG (0.75...2.5 mm 2) Max. (2) #14 AWG or (1) #12 AWG #18...14 AWG (0.75...1.5 mm 2)
Ui = 680 V (screw terminal) Ui = 300 V (screwless terminal)
(V) 2200 V for one minute 10 A type gL/gG cartridge fuse to EN 60269-2-1 or gN
(Class J to UL 248-8 or Class C to UL 348-4) 6 A type gL/gG cartridge fuse to EN 60269-2-1 or gN
(Class J to UL 248-8 or Class C to UL 348-4) Finger-safe conforming to IP2X
Notes: 1) Performance data given in this publication is provided only as a guide for the user in determining suitability and do not constitute a performance warranty of any kind. Such data may represent the results of accelerated testing at elevated stress levels, and the user is responsible for correlating the data to actual application requirements.
2) Momentary mushroom operators are IP 65, multi-function operators have no Type 13 rating. Plastic operators with keys have no Type 4X rating. 3) Operating temperatures below 0 °C (32 °F) are based on the absence of freezing moisture and liquids. 4) Low voltage contacts are recommended for applications below 17 V, 5 mA.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
2 - 49 Page 183 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
D7 Control and indication products 22.5 mm
Technical information
2
Back-of-Panel (Operators) 1), continued
Mechanical Ratings
Vibration (assembled to panel)
(G)
Shock
(G)
Contact durability per EN 60947-5-1 (Annex C)
Contact
N/O
operation
N/C
N/O E.M.
N/C L.B.
Opening forces (typical)
(N)
10...2000 Hz, 1.52 mm displacement (peak-to-peak) max./10 G max. 6 hr Tested at 1/2 cycle sine wave for 11 ms and no damage at 100 G max. 10,000,000 cycles Slow make, double break Slow make, double break (positive opening) Early make, double break Late break, double break (positive opening) 3.4 N: each single circuit contact block 5...6.6 N: each dual circuit contact block
Note: 1) Performance data given in this publication is provided only as a guide for the user in determining suitability and do not constitute a performance warranty of any kind. Such data may represent the results of accelerated testing at elevated stress levels, and the user is responsible for correlating the data to actual application requirements.
Rated operating current Ie
24 V 48 V 110 V 220 V 230/240 V
AC 1
10 A 10 A
AC 15
8A 8A 6A 3A 3A
380 V 400 V 415 V 500 V 690 V
AC 1
AC 15
2.5 A 2 A 2.2 A 1.5 A 0.75 A
Rated operating current Ie, continued
DC 13
24 V 48 V 110 V 125 V 220 V
-01, -10
3 A 1.5 A 0.2 A 0.6 A 0.1 A
-01, -E10 1.3 A 0.4 A 0.13 A 0.13 A 65 mA
DC 13
250 V 400 V 440 V 500 V 600 V
-01, -10
0.3 A 0.2 A 0.04 A 0.15 A 0.13 A
-01, -E10 65 mA 26 mA 26 mA
Short-circuit withstand
without welding
10 A slow (DT, gG)
Switching rate
6000 operations/hour
Fuse rating permissible rated current
fast (D, gF)
16 A
slow (DT, gG)
10 A
Versions
Panel mounting
-01
-10
O1L
10E
. 1 . 2 .3 .4
.5 .6
.7 .8
Snap-on to coupling plate
2 contact levels
up to 3 contact blocks per contact level
Base mounting
-01
-10
O1L
10E
. 1 . 2 .3 .4
.5 .6
.7 .8
Snap-on to the inside of the enclosure base or onto a DIN rail,
or secure with two screwed fixing straps
3 contact blocks in one contact level possible
Possibilities to combine (Panel mounting)
Maximum of 6 contact blocks can be combined
Electrical life
AC 11
0.1 A 1 A 2 A 3 A
No. of operations (millions) 10
3
1
0.5
Contact duty electronic circuit (H-type- bridges)
positive opening for: D7X01, D7BX01
Contact travel D7
Terminal marking according to DIN EN 50 013
Terminals 0.75...2.5 mm2 18...12 AWG
2 - 50 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
open closed
26/11/2012
Page 184 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
D7 Control and indication products 22.5 mm
Technical information
Back-of-Panel (Components) 1), continued
2
Lamp elements
D7-DOC
Versions D7-DOC
D7-N_ D7-Q_
X1
X2
Standard element Operating voltage max. 250 V
D7-BN_
D7-N D7-BN D7-Q
X1
Panel or base mount Small overall depth Easy to wire Screw or spring connection
X2
Technical information D7-DOC
Lamp socket Lamp rating max Insulation voltage Terminal marking Terminals
Ba9s 2 W (2.6 W for pilot lights) Ui 250 V according to DIN EN 50 013 Screw / spring 0.75...2.5 mm2
D7-N D7-BN D7-Q
LED Module Ratings
Nominal Voltage 24 V AC 24 V DC 120 V AC 240 V AC
Range 10...29 V AC 10...30 V DC 70...132 V AC 180...264 V AC
Current Draw 31 mA 24 mA 25 mA 22 mA
Frequency 50/60 Hz DC 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
2 - 51 Page 185 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
D7 Control and indication products 22.5 mm
Material listing
2
Component
For use with
Panel gasket
All operators
Diaphragm seal
Illuminated pushbutton, non-illuminated pushbutton
K-seal
Selector switch, key selector switch, push/twist-to-release
E-stop, key E-stop, push/pull mushroom
Diaphragm retainer, return spring I
Illuminated pushbutton, non-illuminated pushbutton,
momentary mushroom, push/twist-to-release E-stop,
key E-stop, push/pull mushroom
Return spring II
Reset, selector switch, key selector switch
Button cap/mushroom head
Non-illuminated pushbutton, momentary mushroom,
reset, push/twist-to-release E-stop, key E-stop,
push/pull mushroom, multi-function
2 colour moulded button insert
Non-illuminated pushbutton
Lens
Multi-function
Lens knob
Illuminated pushbutton, illuminated momentary
mushroom, illuminated selector switch
Plastic bezel/bushing I
Non-illuminated pushbutton, illuminated pushbutton,
momentary mushroom, selector switch, key selector switch,
push/twist-to-release E-stop, key E-stop, push/pull
mushroom, multi-function
Plastic bezel/bushing II, jam nut, knob Reset, non-illuminated selector switch, pilot light
Metal bezel/bushing
All metal operators
Diffuser
Illuminated pushbutton, pilot light
Legend frames
-
Plastic mounting ring
All plastic operators
Metal mounting ring
All metal operators
Plastic coupling plate
-
Metal coupling plate
-
Plastic enclosures
-
Metal enclosure
-
Terminal screws
LED module, incandescent module, contact blocks
Terminals
LED module, incandescent module, contact blocks
Screwless
LED module, incandescent module, contact blocks
Lamp socket
Incandescent module
Housing
Incandescent module, LED module
Low voltage terminals
Contact blocks
Low voltage spanner
Contact blocks
Spanner
Contact blocks
Material used Nitrile Automotive acceptable silicone Nitrile
Stainless steel
Zinc coated music wire PBT/polycarbonate blend
PBT/polycarbonate blend Acetal Polyamide
Glass-filled polyamide
Glass-filled polyamide Zinc Polycarbonate Glass-filled nylon Glass-filled polyamide Chromated zinc Glass-filled nylon Chromated zinc + stainless steel PBT/polycarbonate blend Aluminium Zinc-plated steel with chromate Brass with silver-nickel contacts Stainless steel Brass Glass-filled nylon Gold-plated brass with silver-nickel contacts Gold-plated brass with silver-nickel contacts Brass with silver-nickel contacts
2 - 52 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 186 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
D7 Control and indication products 22.5 mm
Technical information
Back-of-Panel (Components) 1), continued
Illumination
LED dominant wavelength Green Red Yellow Blue White
LED luminous intensity Green Red Yellow Blue White
Incandescent maximum wattage Environmental Temperature range (operating) 2) Temperature range (short-term storage) Humidity
(nm)
(mcd)
(W) (°C) (°C) (%)
Materials Springs Electrical contacts
Terminals
Standard Low voltage Screw Screwless
Plastic (D7P)
525 nm 629 nm 590 nm 470 nm
Metal (D7M)
890 mcd 890 mcd 690 mcd 193 mcd 412 mcd
1W
-25...+70 °C (-13...+158 °F) -25...+85 °C (-13...+185 °F) tested at 50...95 % relative humidity from 25...60 °C (77...140 °F) per: procedure IV of MIL-STD-810C, Method 507.1 cycling test
Stainless steel and zinc coated music wire Silver-nickel
Gold-plated over silver Brass
Silver-plated copper
Environmental approval note: Front elements UL Recognised; Complete assemblies UL Approved. See Table A2 (below) for your application.
This table is extracted from Sprecher + Schuh's UL 508A file and can be used to determine which D7 pilot device is approved for a particular enclosure type.
Enclosure type
2 3 3R 3S 4 4X 6 6P 11 12, 12K 13
TABLE A2 - Openings in enclosure
Openings may be closed by equipment marked...
2, 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 11, 12, 12K, 13 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 6, 6P 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 6, 6P 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 6, 6P 4, 4X, 6, 6P 4X 6, 6P 6P 11 12, 12K, 13 13
Product certification
Certifications Standards Terminal identification Shipping approvals
UL. UR, CSA, CCC, CE NEMA ICS-5; UL 508, EN 418, EN 60947-1, EN 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-5
IEC 60947-1 RINA, LR, ABS
Notes: 1) Performance data given in this publication is provided only as a guide for the user in determining suitability and do not constitute a performance warranty of any kind. Such data may represent the results of accelerated testing at elevated stress levels, and the user is responsible for correlating the data to actual application requirements.
2) Operating temperatures below 0 °C (32 °F) are based on the absence of freezing moisture and liquids.
2
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
2 - 53 Page 187 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 188 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 189 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 190 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 191 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 192 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 193 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 194 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 195 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 196 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual J & P Richardson Industries Pty Ltd
4.6 TERMINALS & LINKS Phoenix Contact UT4-HESI LED 24 (5x20) Fused Terminal with LED 24v Phoenix Contact M205 Fuse Cartridges Phoenix Contact UT4-MT P/P Disconnect Terminals Phoenix Contact UT4-MTD-PE/S Earth Terminals Phoenix Contact UBE Group Marker Carrier Phoenix Contact PS6 Test Plug Adapter Phoenix Contact SZS 0.6x3.5 Screw Driver Phoenix Contact FBS Plug-In Bridge Phoenix Contact MSTB 2.5/20-ST-2.08 Disconnect Plugs Phoenix Contact UMSTBVKZ 2.5/20-G-5.08 Disconnect Blocks Phoenix Contact KGS-MSTB 2.5/20 Cable Housing Phoenix Contact CP-MSTB + CR-MSTB Coding Pins D&L 2DLA18 18 Hole Neutral Link D&L 2DLAE18 18 Hole Earth Link D&L DLBE12 12 Hole Instrument Earth Link Clipsal L7 7 Hole Link
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Revision 0
26/11/2012
Date: 2 July 2012
Page 197 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
UT 4-HESI (5X20)
Order No.: 3046032
Extract from the online catalog
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3046032
Fuse modular terminal block, Connection method: Screw connection, Cross section: 0.14 mm²- 6 mm², AWG: 26 - 10, Nominal current: 6.3 A, Nominal voltage: 500 V, Width: 6.2 mm, Fuse type: G / 5 x 20, Fuse type: Glass, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15, Color: black
Commercial data EAN Pack Customs tariff Weight/Piece Catalog page information
4017918956578 50 pcs. 85369010 0.018103 KG Page 44 (CL-2009)
Technical data
General Number of levels Number of connections Color
1 2 black
Product notes WEEE/RoHS-compliant since: 01/01/2003
http:// www.download.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads.
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.de
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 1 / 5 May 6, 2009
Page 198 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
UT 4-HESI (5X20) Order No.: 3046032
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3046032
Insulating material
PA
Inflammability class acc. to UL 94
V0
Dimensions Width Length Height NS 35/7,5 Height NS 35/15
6.2 mm 57.8 mm 73 mm 80.5 mm
Technical data Fuse Fuse type Rated surge voltage Pollution degree Surge voltage category Insulating material group Connection in acc. with standard Nominal current IN Nominal voltage UN
G / 5 x 20 Glass 4 kV 3 III I IEC 60947-7-3 6.3 A 500 V (if used as fuse terminal block) 500 V (if used as disconnect terminal block)
Connection data Conductor cross section solid min.
Conductor cross section solid max.
Conductor cross section stranded min.
Conductor cross section stranded max.
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min.
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve min.
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve max.
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve min.
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve max.
2 conductors with same cross section, solid min.
2 conductors with same cross section, solid max.
0.14 mm² 6 mm² 0.14 mm² 6 mm² 26 10 0.14 mm²
4 mm²
0.14 mm²
4 mm²
0.14 mm² 1.5 mm²
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.de
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 2 / 5 May 6, 2009
Page 199 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
UT 4-HESI (5X20) Order No.: 3046032
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3046032
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded min.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded max.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, min.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, max.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, min.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, max.
Type of connection
Stripping length
Internal cylindrical gage
Screw thread
Tightening torque, min
Tightening torque max
0.14 mm²
1.5 mm²
0.14 mm²
1.5 mm²
0.5 mm²
2.5 mm²
Screw connection 9 mm A4 M3 0.6 Nm 0.8 Nm
Certificates / Approvals
Certification CSA Nominal voltage UN Nominal current IN AWG/kcmil
CUL Nominal voltage UN Nominal current IN AWG/kcmil
UL Nominal voltage UN Nominal current IN AWG/kcmil
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.de
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
CB, CSA, CUL, DNV, GL, KEMA, LR, UL
600 V 6.3 A 26-10
600 V 6.3 A 26-10
600 V 6.3 A 26-10
26/11/2012
Page 3 / 5 May 6, 2009
Page 200 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
UT 4-HESI (5X20) Order No.: 3046032
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3046032
Drawings Application drawing
Fuse terminal blocks in interconnected arrangement, block consisting of 5 fuse terminal blocks
Circuit diagram
Fuse terminal block in single arrangement, block consisting of one fuse terminal block and 4 feed-through terminal blocks
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.de
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 4 / 5 May 6, 2009
Page 201 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
ËÌ ìóÓÌ
д»¿-» ²±¬» ¬¸¿¬ ¬¸» ¼¿¬¿ ¹·ª»² ¸»®» ¸¿- ¾»»² ¬¿µ»² º®±³ ¬¸» ±²´·²» ½¿¬¿´±¹ò Ú±® ½±³°®»¸»²-·ª» ·²º±®³¿¬·±² ¿²¼ ¼¿¬¿ô °´»¿-» ®»º»® ¬± ¬¸» «-»® ¼±½«³»²¬¿¬·±² ¿¬ ¸¬¬°æññ©©©ò¼±©²´±¿¼ò°¸±»²·¨½±²¬¿½¬ò½±³ò ̸» Ù»²»®¿´ Ì»®³¿²¼ ݱ²¼·¬·±²- ±º Ë-» ¿°°´§ ¬± ײ¬»®²»¬ ¼±©²´±¿¼-ò
Û¨¬®¿½¬ º®±³ ¬¸» ±²´·²» ½¿¬¿´±¹
˲·ª»®-¿´ ¬»®³·²¿´ ¾´±½µ ©·¬¸ -½®»© ½±²²»½¬·±²ô ½®±--»½¬·±²æ ðòïì ó ì ³³n ô ßÉÙæ îê ó ïðô ©·¼¬¸æ êòî ³³ô ½±´±®æ Ù®¿§
Ñ®¼»® Ò±ò Ñ®¼ ¼»-·¹²¿¬·±²
ÛßÒ Ð¿½µ Ý«-¬±³- ¬¿®·ºº Ý¿¬¿´±¹ °¿¹» ·²º±®³¿¬·±²
Ì»½¸²·½¿´ ¼¿¬¿
Ù»²»®¿´ Ò«³¾»® ±º ´»ª»´Ò«³¾»® ±º ½±²²»½¬·±²Ý±´±® ײ-«´¿¬·²¹ ³¿¬»®·¿´ ײº´¿³³¿¾·´·¬§ ½´¿-- ¿½½ò ¬± ËÔ çì
íðìêïíç ËÌ ìóÓÌ ìðïéçïèçéëëêî ëð н-ò èëíêçðïð п¹» îð øÒÌÕóîððë÷
ï î ¹®¿§ Ðß Êð
ÐØÑÛÒ×È ÝÑÒÌßÝÌ Ù³¾Ø ú ݱò ÕÙ ¸¬¬°æññ©©©ò°¸±»²·¨½±²¬¿½¬ò½±³
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
п¹» ïñé ß«¹ ïîô îððë
Page 202 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
ËÌ ìóÓÌ
Ü·³»²-·±²É·¼¬¸ Ô»²¹¬¸ Ø»·¹¸¬ ÒÍ íëñéôë Ø»·¹¸¬ ÒÍ íëñïë
êòî ³³ ëêòè ³³ ìéòë ³³ ëë ³³
Ì»½¸²·½¿´ ¼¿¬¿ Ó¿¨·³«³ ´±¿¼ ½«®®»²¬ כּ¼ -«®¹» ª±´¬¿¹» ݱ²¬¿³·²¿¬·±² ½´¿-Í«®¹» ª±´¬¿¹» ½¿¬»¹±®§ ײ-«´¿¬·²¹ ³¿¬»®·¿´ ¹®±«° ݱ²²»½¬·±² ·² ¿½½ò ©·¬¸ -¬¿²¼¿®¼ Ò±³·²¿´ ½«®®»²¬ ×Ò Ò±³·²¿´ ª±´¬¿¹» ËÒ Ñ°»² -·¼» °¿²»´
ïê ß è µÊ í ××× × ×ÛÝñ Ü×Ò ÊÜÛ ïê ß ëðð Ê ²»·²
ݱ²²»½¬·±² ¼¿¬¿
ݱ²¼«½¬±® ½®±-- -»½¬·±²ô ®·¹·¼ ³·²ò
ðòïì ³³n
ݱ²¼«½¬±® ½®±-- -»½¬·±²ô ®·¹·¼ ³¿¨ò
ê ³³n
ݱ²¼«½¬±® ½®±-- -»½¬·±² º´»¨·¾´» ³·²ò
ðòïì ³³n
ݱ²¼«½¬±® ½®±-- -»½¬·±²ô º´»¨·¾´» ³¿¨ò
ì ³³n
ݱ²¼«½¬±® ½®±-- -»½¬·±² ßÉÙñµ½³·´ ³·²ò
îê
ݱ²¼«½¬±® ½®±-- -»½¬·±² ßÉÙñµ½³·´ ³¿¨
ïð
ݱ²¼«½¬±® ½®±-- -»½¬·±² º´»¨·¾´»ô ©·¬¸ º»®®«´» ©·¬¸±«¬ °´¿-¬·½ -´»»ª» ³·²ò
ðòîë ³³n
ݱ²¼«½¬±® ½®±-- -»½¬·±² º´»¨·¾´»ô ©·¬¸ º»®®«´» ©·¬¸±«¬ ì ³³n
°´¿-¬·½ -´»»ª» ³¿¨ò
ݱ²¼«½¬±® ½®±-- -»½¬·±² º´»¨·¾´»ô ©·¬¸ º»®®«´» ©·¬¸ °´¿-¬·½ ðòîë ³³n -´»»ª» ³·²ò
ݱ²¼«½¬±® ½®±-- -»½¬·±² º´»¨·¾´»ô ©·¬¸ º»®®«´» ©·¬¸ °´¿-¬·½ ì ³³n -´»»ª» ³¿¨ò
î ½±²¼«½¬±®- ©·¬¸ -¿³» ½®±-- -»½¬·±²ô -±´·¼ ³·²ò
ðòïì ³³n
î ½±²¼«½¬±®- ©·¬¸ -¿³» ½®±-- -»½¬·±²ô -±´·¼ ³¿¨ò
ïòë ³³n
î ½±²¼«½¬±®- ©·¬¸ -¿³» ½®±-- -»½¬·±²ô º´»¨·¾´»ô ³·²ò ðòïì ³³n
î ½±²¼«½¬±®- ©·¬¸ -¿³» ½®±-- -»½¬·±²ô º´»¨·¾´» ³¿¨ò ïòë ³³n
î ½±²¼«½¬±®- ©·¬¸ -¿³» ½®±-- -»½¬·±²ô º´»¨·¾´»ô ÌÉ×Ò ðòë ³³n º»®®«´»- ©·¬¸ °´¿-¬·½ -´»»ª»ô ³·²ò
î ½±²¼«½¬±®- ©·¬¸ ·¼»²¬·½¿´ ½®±-- -»½¬·±²ô º´»¨·¾´» ÌÉ×Ò îòë ³³n º»®®«´»- ©·¬¸ °´¿-¬·½ -´»»ª»ô ³¿¨ò
î ½±²¼«½¬±®- ©·¬¸ -¿³» ½®±-- -»½¬·±²ô º´»¨·¾´»ô º»®®«´»- ðòîë ³³n
©·¬¸±«¬ °´¿-¬·½ -´»»ª» ³·²ò
î ½±²¼«½¬±®- ©·¬¸ -¿³» ½®±-- -»½¬·±²ô º´»¨·¾´»ô º»®®«´»- ïòë ³³n ©·¬¸±«¬ °´¿-¬·½ -´»»ª»ô ³¿¨ò
̧°» ±º ½±²²»½¬·±²
ͽ®»© ½±²²»½¬·±²
ͬ®·°°·²¹ ´»²¹¬¸
ç ³³
ײ¬»®²¿´ ½§´·²¼®·½¿´ ¹¿¹»
ßì
ͽ®»© ¬¸®»¿¼
Óí
Ì·¹¸¬»²·²¹ ¬±®¯«»ô ³·²
ðòê Ò³
ÐØÑÛÒ×È ÝÑÒÌßÝÌ Ù³¾Ø ú ݱò ÕÙ ¸¬¬°æññ©©©ò°¸±»²·¨½±²¬¿½¬ò½±³
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
п¹» îñé ß«¹ ïîô îððë
Page 203 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
ËÌ ìóÓÌ
Ý»®¬·º·½¿¬»-
ÝËÔ Ò±³·²¿´ ª±´¬¿¹» ËÒ Ò±³·²¿´ ½«®®»²¬ ×Ò ßÉÙñµ½³·´ ËÔ Ò±³·²¿´ ª±´¬¿¹» ËÒ Ò±³·²¿´ ½«®®»²¬ ×Ò ßÉÙñµ½³·´
êðð Ê ïê ß îêóïð
êðð Ê ïê ß îêóïð
ÐØÑÛÒ×È ÝÑÒÌßÝÌ Ù³¾Ø ú ݱò ÕÙ ¸¬¬°æññ©©©ò°¸±»²·¨½±²¬¿½¬ò½±³
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
п¹» íñé ß«¹ ïîô îððë
Page 204 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
ËÌ ìóÓÌ
Ü®¿©·²¹-
Ý·®½«·¬ ¼·¿¹®¿³
ß°°®±ª¿´ ´±¹±
ÐØÑÛÒ×È ÝÑÒÌßÝÌ Ù³¾Ø ú ݱò ÕÙ ¸¬¬°æññ©©©ò°¸±»²·¨½±²¬¿½¬ò½±³
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
п¹» ìñé ß«¹ ïîô îððë
Page 205 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
ËÌ ìóÓÌ
ß½½»--±®·»-
׬»³ ß--»³¾´§ ðèðïéêî
ïîðéêìð ïîðéêëí ïîðéêêê ðèðïéíí
ðèðïêèï
ïîðïéëê
ïîðïèçë
ïîðéêéç ïîðéêèî ïîðéêçë ïîðïéíð
ïîðïéïì
ïîðïéçè
Þ®·¼¹»íðíðííê
íðíðîìî
íðíðîëë
íðíðíìç
íðíðîéï
íðíðíêë
íðìéðêð
Ü»-·¹²¿¬·±²
Ü»-½®·°¬·±²
ÒÍ íëñ éôë ÝË ËÒÐÛÎÚ îðððÓÓ ÒÍ íëñ éôë ÐÛÎÚ éëëÓÓ ÒÍ íëñ éôë ÐÛÎÚ çëëÓÓ ÒÍ íëñ éôë ÐÛÎÚ ïïëëÓÓ ÒÍ íëñ éôë ÐÛÎÚ îðððÓÓ
ÒÍ íëñ éôë ËÒÐÛÎÚ îðððÓÓ
ÒÍ íëñïë ßÔ ËÒÐÛÎÚ îðððÓÓ ÒÍ íëñïë ÝË ËÒÐÛÎÚ îðððÓÓ ÒÍ íëñïë ÐÛÎÚ éëëÓÓ ÒÍ íëñïë ÐÛÎÚ çëëÓÓ ÒÍ íëñïë ÐÛÎÚ ïïëëÓÓ ÒÍ íëñïë ÐÛÎÚ îðððÓÓ
ÒÍ íëñïë ËÒÐÛÎÚ îðððÓÓ
ÒÍ íëñïëóîôí ËÒÐÛÎÚ îðððÓÓ
Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ³¿¬»®·¿´æ ݱ°°»®ô «²°»®º±®¿¬»¼ô ¸»·¹¸¬ éòë ³³ô ©·¼¬¸ íë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸æ î ³ ÒÍ íë Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ¸»·¹¸¬ éòë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸ éëë ³³ ÒÍíë Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ¸»·¹¸¬ éòë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸ çëë ³³ ÒÍ íë Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ¸»·¹¸¬ éòë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸ ïïëë ³³ Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ³¿¬»®·¿´æ ͬ»»´ô °»®º±®¿¬»¼ô ¸»·¹¸¬ éòë ³³ô ©·¼¬¸ íë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸æ î ³ Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ³¿¬»®·¿´æ ͬ»»´ô «²°»®º±®¿¬»¼ô ¸»·¹¸¬ éòë ³³ô ©·¼¬¸ íë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸æ î ³ Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ¼»»°ó¼®¿©²ô ¸·¹¸ °®±º·´»ô «²°»®º±®¿¬»¼ô ïòë ³³ ¬¸·½µô ³¿¬»®·¿´æ ß´«³·²«³ô ¸»·¹¸¬ ïë ³³ô ©·¼¬¸ íë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸ î ³ Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ³¿¬»®·¿´æ ݱ°°»®ô «²°»®º±®¿¬»¼ô ïòë ³³ ¬¸·½µô ¸»·¹¸¬ ïë ³³ô ©·¼¬¸ íë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸æ î ³ ÒÍ íë Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ¸»·¹¸¬ ïë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸ éëë ³³ ÒÍ íë Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ¸»·¹¸¬ ïë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸ çëë ³³ ÒÍ íë Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ¸»·¹¸¬ ïë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸ ïïëë ³³ Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ³¿¬»®·¿´æ ͬ»»´ô °»®º±®¿¬»¼ô ¸»·¹¸¬ ïë ³³ô ©·¼¬¸ íë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸æ î ³ Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ³¿¬»®·¿´æ ͬ»»´ô «²°»®º±®¿¬»¼ô ¸»·¹¸¬ ïë ³³ô ©·¼¬¸ íë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸æ î ³ Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ³¿¬»®·¿´æ ͬ»»´ô «²°»®º±®¿¬»¼ô îòí ³³ ¬¸·½µô ¸»·¹¸¬ ïë ³³ô ©·¼¬¸ íë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸æ î ³
ÚÞÍ îóê ÚÞÍ íóê ÚÞÍ ìóê ÚÞÍ ëóê ÚÞÍ ïðóê ÚÞÍ îðóê ÎÞ ËÌ ïðóøîôëñì÷
д«¹ó·² ¾®·¼¹» º±® ½®±--ó½±²²»½¬·±²- ·² ¬¸» ¬»®³·²¿´ ½»²¬»®ô îó °±-òô ½±´±®æ λ¼ д«¹ó·² ¾®·¼¹» º±® ½®±--ó½±²²»½¬·±²- ·² ¬¸» ¬»®³·²¿´ ½»²¬»®ô íó °±-òô ½±´±®æ λ¼ д«¹ó·² ¾®·¼¹» º±® ½®±--ó½±²²»½¬·±²- ·² ¬¸» ¬»®³·²¿´ ½»²¬»®ô ìó °±-òô ½±´±®æ λ¼ д«¹ó·² ¾®·¼¹» º±® ½®±--ó½±²²»½¬·±²- ·² ¬¸» ¬»®³·²¿´ ½»²¬»®ô ëó °±-òô ½±´±®æ λ¼ д«¹ó·² ¾®·¼¹» º±® ½®±--ó½±²²»½¬·±²- ·² ¬¸» ¬»®³·²¿´ ½»²¬»®ô ïðó °±-òô ½±´±®æ λ¼ д«¹ó·² ¾®·¼¹» º±® ½®±--ó½±²²»½¬·±²- ·² ¬¸» ¬»®³·²¿´ ½»²¬»®ô îðó °±-òô ½±´±®æ λ¼ λ¼«½·²¹ ¾®·¼¹»ô º±® ½±²²»½¬·±² º®±³ ËÌ ï𠬱 ËÌ ì ±® ËÌ îôë
ÐØÑÛÒ×È ÝÑÒÌßÝÌ Ù³¾Ø ú ݱò ÕÙ ¸¬¬°æññ©©©ò°¸±»²·¨½±²¬¿½¬ò½±³
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
п¹» ëñé ß«¹ ïîô îððë
Page 206 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
ËÌ ìóÓÌ
Ó¿®µ·²¹ ðèïïîîè ïðëïðïê ëðêðçíë
ïðëðìçç
ÈóÐÛÒ ðôíë ÆÞ êôÔÙÍæÚÑÎÌÔòÆßØÔÛÒ ÆÞ êñÉØóïððæËÒÞÛÜÎËÝÕÌ
ÆÞ êæÍÑñÝÓÍ
Ó¿®µ»® °»² ©·¬¸±«¬ ·²µ ½¿®¬®·¼¹»ô º±® ³¿²«¿´ ´¿¾»´·²¹ ±º ³¿®µ»®-ô ´¿¾»´·²¹ »¨¬®»³»´§ ©·°»ó°®±±ºô ´·²» ¬¸·½µ²»-- ðòíë ³³ Æ¿½µ -¬®·°ô ïðó-»½¬·±²ô °®·²¬»¼ ¸±®·¦±²¬¿´´§æ ©·¬¸ ¬¸» ²«³¾»®-ô ïó ïðô ïïóî𠻬½ò «° ¬± ççïóïðððô ½±´±®æ ©¸·¬» Æ¿½µ -¬®·°ô «²°®·²¬»¼æ Ú±® ·²¼·ª·¼«¿´ ´¿¾»´·²¹ ©·¬¸ ÓóÐÛÒô ÆÞóÌ ±® ÝÓÍ -§-¬»³ô ´¿®¹» ¾¿¬½¸ô -«ºº·½·»²¬ º±® ´¿¾»´·²¹ ïðð𠬻®³·²¿´ ¾´±½µ-ô º±® ¿ ¬»®³·²¿´ ©·¼¬¸ ±º êòî ³³ô ½±´±®æ ɸ·¬» Æ¿½µ -¬®·°ô ïðó-»½¬·±²ô ¼·ª·-·¾´»ô -°»½·¿´ °®·²¬·²¹ô ³¿®µ·²¹ ¿½½±®¼·²¹ ¬± ½«-¬±³»® ®»¯«·®»³»²¬-
д«¹ñß¼¿°¬»®
ðîðïêèç
ÓÐÍó×Ø ÞË
ðîðïêéê
ÓÐÍó×Ø ÎÜ
ðîðïêêí
ÓÐÍó×Ø ÉØ
ðîðïéìì
ÓÐÍóÓÌ
íðíðçîë
Ðß×óì
íðíðççê
ÐÍóê
Ì»-¬ °´«¹ô ½±²-·-¬·²¹ ±ºæ Ó»¬¿´ °¿®¬ º±® îòí ³³ ¼·¿³»¬»® -±½µ»¬ ¸±´» Ì»-¬ ¿¼¿°¬»®ô º±® ì ³³ ¼·¿³»¬»® ¬»-¬ °´«¹ ÐÍ ¿²¼ -¿º»¬§ ¬»-¬ °´«¹ô ³¿µ»- ½±²¬¿½¬ ·² ¬¸» ¾®·¼¹» -¸¿º¬ Ó±¼«´¿® ¬»-¬ °´«¹ô º±® ·²¼·ª·¼«¿´ ¿--»³¾´§ ±º ¬»-¬ °´«¹ -¬®·°-ô º±® ËÌô ÍÌô ÜÌ ¿²¼ ÏÌ ¬»®³·²¿´ ¾´±½µ-ô ½¿² ¾» ´¿¾»´»¼ ©·¬¸ ÆÞÚ êô ½±´±®æ λ¼
̱±´ïîðëðëí
ÍÆÍ ðôêÈíôë
ͽ®»©¼®·ª»®ô ¾´¿¼»¼ô ³¿¬½¸»- ¿´´ -½®»© ¬»®³·²¿´ ¾´±½µ- «° ¬± ìòð ³³n ½±²²»½¬·±² ½®±-- -»½¬·±²ô ¾´¿¼»æ ðòê ¨ íòë ³³ô ©·¬¸±«¬ ÊÜÛ ¿°°®±ª¿´
ÐØÑÛÒ×È ÝÑÒÌßÝÌ Ù³¾Ø ú ݱò ÕÙ ¸¬¬°æññ©©©ò°¸±»²·¨½±²¬¿½¬ò½±³
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
п¹» êñé ß«¹ ïîô îððë
Page 207 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
MSTB 2,5/10-ST-5,08
Order No.: 1757093 The figure shows a 10-position version of the product
Extract from the online catalog
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=1757093
Plug component, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn
Commercial data GTIN (EAN) sales group Pack Customs tariff Weight/Piece Catalog page information
4017918029623 E111 50 pcs. 85366990 0.01727 KG Page 198 (CC-2009)
Technical data
Dimensions / positions Pitch Dimension a Number of positions Screw thread Tightening torque, min
5.08 mm 45.72 mm 10 M3 0.5 Nm
Product notes WEEE/RoHS-compliant since: 01/01/2003
http:// www.download.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads.
PHOENIX CONTACT Inc., USA http://www.phoenixcon.com
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 1 / 8 Jun 30, 2010
Page 208 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
MSTB 2,5/10-ST-5,08 Order No.: 1757093
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=1757093
Tightening torque max
Technical data Insulating material group Rated surge voltage (III/3) Rated surge voltage (III/2) Rated surge voltage (II/2) Rated voltage (III/2) Rated voltage (II/2) Connection in acc. with standard Nominal current IN Nominal voltage UN Nominal cross section Maximum load current Insulating material Inflammability class acc. to UL 94 Internal cylindrical gage Stripping length Nominal voltage, UL/CUL Use Group B Nominal current, UL/CUL Use Group B Nominal voltage, UL/CUL Use Group D Nominal current, UL/CUL Use Group D
Connection data Conductor cross section solid min. Conductor cross section solid max. Conductor cross section stranded min. Conductor cross section stranded max. Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve min. Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve max. Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve min. Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve max. Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min. Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max
0.6 Nm
I 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 320 V 630 V EN-VDE 12 A 250 V 2.5 mm² 12 A (with 2.5 mm2 conductor cross section) PA V0 A3 7 mm 250 V 12 A 300 V 10 A
0.2 mm² 2.5 mm² 0.2 mm² 2.5 mm² 0.25 mm²
2.5 mm²
0.25 mm²
2.5 mm²
24 12
PHOENIX CONTACT Inc., USA http://www.phoenixcon.com
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 2 / 8 Jun 30, 2010
Page 209 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
MSTB 2,5/10-ST-5,08 Order No.: 1757093
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=1757093
2 conductors with same cross section, solid min.
2 conductors with same cross section, solid max.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded min.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded max.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, min.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, max.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, min.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, max.
Minimum AWG according to UL/CUL
Maximum AWG according to UL/CUL
0.2 mm² 1 mm² 0.2 mm² 1.5 mm² 0.25 mm² 1 mm² 0.5 mm² 1.5 mm² 30 12
Certificates / Approvals
Certification
CSA Nominal voltage UN Nominal current IN AWG/kcmil
CUL Nominal voltage UN Nominal current IN AWG/kcmil
UL Nominal voltage UN Nominal current IN AWG/kcmil
CB, CSA, CUL, GOST, UL, VDE-PZI
300 V 10 A 28-12
300 V 10 A 30-12
300 V 10 A 30-12
PHOENIX CONTACT Inc., USA http://www.phoenixcon.com
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 3 / 8 Jun 30, 2010
Page 210 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
MSTB 2,5/10-ST-5,08 Order No.: 1757093
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=1757093
Accessories
Item
Designation
Bridges 1733172
EBP 3- 5
1733185
EBP 4- 5
1733198
EBP 5- 5
1733208
EBP 6- 5
General 1733169
1783740
EBP 2- 5 KGS-MSTB 2,5/10
Marking 1051993
0805108
B-STIFT SK 5,08/2,8:SO
0804293
SK 5,08/3,8:FORTL.ZAHLEN
0803883
SK U/2,8 WH:UNBEDRUCKT
Plug/Adapter
1734634
CP-MSTB
Tools 1205053
SZS 0,6X3,5
Description
Insertion bridge, fully insulated, for plug connectors with 5.0 or 5.08 mm pitch, no. of positions: 3 Insertion bridge, fully insulated, for plug connectors with 5.0 or 5.08 mm pitch, no. of positions: 4 Insertion bridge, fully insulated, for plug connectors with 5.0 or 5.08 mm pitch, no. of positions: 5 Insertion bridge, fully insulated, for plug connectors with 5.0 or 5.08 mm pitch, no. of positions: 6
Insertion bridge, fully insulated, for plug connectors with 5.0 or 5.08 mm pitch, no. of positions: 2 Cable housing, Number of positions: 10, Dimension a: 50 mm, Color: green
Marker pen, for manual labeling of unprinted Zack strips, smearproof and waterproof, line thickness 0.5 mm Marker card, special printing, self-adhesive, labeled acc. to customer requirements, 14 identical marker strips per card, max. 25-position labeling per strip, color: White Marker card, printed horizontally, self-adhesive, 12 identical decades marked 1-10, 11-20 etc. up to 91-(99)100, sufficient for 120 terminal blocks Unprinted marker cards, DIN A4 format, pitch as desired, selfadhesive, with 50 stamped marker strips, 185 mm strip length, can be labeled with the CMS system or manually with the M-PEN
Keying profile, is inserted into the slot on the plug or inverted header, red insulating material
Screwdriver, bladed, matches all screw terminal blocks up to 4.0 mm² connection cross section, blade: 0.6 x 3.5 mm, without VDE approval
PHOENIX CONTACT Inc., USA http://www.phoenixcon.com
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 4 / 8 Jun 30, 2010
Page 211 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
MSTB 2,5/10-ST-5,08 Order No.: 1757093
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=1757093
Additional products
Item
Designation
General 1823927
ICC 2,5/10-STZ-5,08
1762457
MDSTB 2,5/10-G1-5,08
1762583
MDSTBV 2,5/10-G1-5,08
1770795 1757323 1768024 1765030
MSTB 2,5/10-G-5,08-LA MSTBA 2,5/10-G-5,08 MSTBA 2,5/10-G-5,08-LA MSTBHK 2,5/10-G-5,08
1788800
MSTBVK 2,5/10-G-5,08
1788619
MVSTBU 2,5/10-GB-5,08
1769544 1767452 3002034
SMSTB 2,5/10-G-5,08 SMSTBA 2,5/10-G-5,08 UK 3-MSTB-5,08
Description
Plug component, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Corresponding male crimp contacts with current [A] and conductor cross section range [mm²] data: 10A/ICC-MT 0,5-1,0 (3190577); 10A/ICC-MT 0,5-1,0 BA (3190603); 12A/ICC-MT 1,5-2,5 (3190580); 12A/ICCMT 1,5-2,5 BA (3190593). BA = Bandkontakte
Header, Nominal current: 10 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: Soldering, In combination with MVSTB or FKCV plug components, both an MVSTBW (or FKCVW) and an MVSTBR plug (or FKCVR) must be used. Combination with TMSTBP plug components is not possible!
Header, Nominal current: 10 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: Soldering, In combination with MVSTB or FKCV plug components, both an MVSTBW (or FKCVW) and an MVSTBR plug (or FKCVR) must be used. Combination with TMSTBP plug components is not possible!
Header, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Assembly: Soldering
Header, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: Soldering
Header, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Assembly: Soldering
Plug component, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: DIN rail
Plug component, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: DIN rail
Plug component, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: Direct mounting
Header, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: Soldering
Header, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: Soldering
Feed-through modular terminal block, Type of connection: Special and hybrid connection, Screw connection, Cross section: 0.2 mm² - 4 mm², AWG 24 - 12, Width: 5.08 mm, Color: gray, Mounting type: NS 32, NS 35/15, NS 35/7,5
PHOENIX CONTACT Inc., USA http://www.phoenixcon.com
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 5 / 8 Jun 30, 2010
Page 212 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
MSTB 2,5/10-ST-5,08 Order No.: 1757093
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=1757093
3002076 3002102 3002063 3002131 3002144 3002173 2770888 1876615 2770846 1788198 1873016
UK 3-MVSTB-5,08 UK 3-MVSTB-5,08-LA 24RD UK 3-MVSTB-5,08/EK UK 3D-MSTBV-5,08 UK 3D-MSTBV-5,08-LA 24RD UK 3D-MSTBV-5,08/EK UKK 3-MSTB-5,08 UKK 3-MSTB-5,08-PE UKK 3-MSTBVH-5,08 UMSTBVK 2,5/10-G-5,08 ZFKK 1,5-MSTBV-5,08
Feed-through modular terminal block, Nominal current: 12 A, Nominal voltage: 250 V, Cross section: 0.2 mm² - 4 mm², AWG: 24 - 12, Mounting type: NS 32, NS 35/15, NS 35/7,5, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Width: 5.1, Color: gray
Feed-through modular terminal block, Nominal current: 12 A, Nominal voltage: 250 V, Cross section: 0.2 mm² - 4 mm², AWG: 24 - 12, Mounting type: NS 32, NS 35/15, NS 35/7,5, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Width: 5.08, Color: gray
Feed-through modular terminal block, Nominal current: 12 A, Nominal voltage: 250 V, Cross section: 0.2 mm² - 4 mm², AWG: 24 - 12, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15, NS 32, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Width: 5.1, Color: blue
Feed-through modular terminal block, Type of connection: Special and hybrid connection, Screw connection, Cross section: 0.2 mm² - 4 mm², AWG 24 - 12, Width: 5.08 mm, Color: gray, Mounting type: NS 32, NS 35/15, NS 35/7,5
Feed-through modular terminal block, Type of connection: Screw connection, Screw connection, Number of positions: 1, Cross section: 0.2 mm² - 4 mm², AWG 24 - 12, Width: 5.1 mm, Color: gray, Mounting type: NS 32, NS 35/15, NS 35/7,5
Feed-through modular terminal block, Type of connection: Screw connection, Screw connection, Cross section: 0.2 mm² - 4 mm², AWG 24 - 12, Width: 5.1 mm, Color: blue, Mounting type: NS 32, NS 35/15, NS 35/7,5
End cover, Nominal current: 12 A, Nominal voltage: 250 V, Cross section: 0.2 mm² - 4 mm², AWG: 24 - 12, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15, NS 32, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Width: 5.08, Color: gray
Feed-through modular terminal block, Nominal current: 12 A, Nominal voltage: 320 V, Cross section: 0.2 mm² - 4 mm², AWG: 24 - 12, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15, NS 32, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Width: 5.08, Color: green-yellow
Feed-through modular terminal block, Nominal current: 12 A, Nominal voltage: 250 V, Cross section: 0.2 mm² - 4 mm², AWG: 24 - 12, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15, NS 32, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Width: 5.08, Color: gray
Plug component, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: DIN rail
Feed-through modular terminal block, Connection method: Special and hybrid connection, MSTB plug entry, Cross section: 0.2 mm² - 2.5 mm², Width: 5.1 mm, Color: gray
PHOENIX CONTACT Inc., USA http://www.phoenixcon.com
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 6 / 8 Jun 30, 2010
Page 213 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
MSTB 2,5/10-ST-5,08 Order No.: 1757093
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=1757093
Diagrams/Drawings Dimensioned drawing
PHOENIX CONTACT Inc., USA http://www.phoenixcon.com
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 7 / 8 Jun 30, 2010
Page 214 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
FBS 10-8
Order No.: 3030323
Extract from the online catalog
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3030323
Cross connector/jumper for modular terminal block, Number of positions: 10, Color: red
Commercial data EAN Pack Customs tariff Weight/Piece Catalog page information
4017918188634 10 pcs. 85389099 0.01955 KG Page 330 (CL-2009)
Product notes WEEE/RoHS-compliant since: 01/01/2003
http:// www.download.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads.
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.de
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 1 / 2 Oct 23, 2009
Page 215 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
SZF 1-0,6X3,5
Order No.: 1204517
Extract from the online catalog
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=1204517 Screwdriver, blade: 0.6 x 3.5 x 100 mm, length 180 mm
Commercial data GTIN (EAN) sales group Pack Customs tariff Weight/Piece Catalog page information
Technical data General Length (b) Width (a) Design
4017918018948 C200 10 pcs. 82054000 0.0368 KG Page 8 (NTK-2010)
Product notes WEEE/RoHS-compliant since: 11/01/2008
http:// www.download.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads.
181 mm 26 mm Phillips
PHOENIX CONTACT Inc., USA http://www.phoenixcon.com
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 1 / 3 Jun 30, 2010
Page 216 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
SZF 1-0,6X3,5 Order No.: 1204517
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=1204517
Blade thickness Blade width Blade height Weight Test standard
Certificates / Approvals
0.6 mm 3.5 mm 100 mm 34 g DIN 5264
Certification Diagrams/Drawings Dimensioned drawing
GOST
PHOENIX CONTACT Inc., USA http://www.phoenixcon.com
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 2 / 3 Jun 30, 2010
Page 217 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
PS-6/2,3MM RD
Order No.: 3038736 The illustration shows the version PS-5/2,3 MM RD
Extract from the online catalog
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3038736 Test plugs, Color: red
Commercial data GTIN (EAN) sales group Pack Customs tariff Weight/Piece Catalog page information
4017918904166 A691 10 pcs. 85369010 0.00143 KG Page 449 (CL-2009)
Product notes WEEE/RoHS-compliant since: 01/01/2003
http:// www.download.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads.
PHOENIX CONTACT Inc., USA http://www.phoenixcon.com
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 1 / 2 Jun 30, 2010
Page 218 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
UBE/D + ES/KMK 3
Order No.: 1004076
Extract from the online catalog
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=1004076
Terminal strip marker carriers for marking terminal group, for mounting on the terminal strip NS 32 or NS 35/7.5, lettering field size: 40 x 17 mm
Commercial data EAN Pack Customs tariff Weight/Piece
4017918011888 10 pcs. 85369010 0.0105 KG
Product notes WEEE/RoHS-compliant since: 03/18/2004
http:// www.download.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads.
Technical data
General Color Base element material Inflammability class acc. to UL 94 Ambient temperature (operation) Components
gray PA V2 -40 °C ... 100 °C free from silicone and halogen
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.de
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 1 / 2 May 7, 2009
Page 219 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
UT 4-MTD
Order No.: 3046184
Extract from the online catalog
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3046184
Feed-through modular terminal block, Type of connection: Screw connection, Cross section: 0.14 mm² - 6 mm², AWG 26 - 10, Width: 6.2 mm, Color: gray, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15
Commercial data EAN Pack Customs tariff Weight/Piece Catalog page information
Technical data General Number of levels Number of connections Color
4017918956592 50 pcs. 85369010 0.011431 KG Page 56 (CL-2009)
1 2 gray
Product notes WEEE/RoHS-compliant since: 01/01/2003
http:// www.download.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads.
PHOENIX CONTACT Deutschland GmbH http://www.phoenixcontact.de
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 1 / 7 Mar 24, 2010
Page 220 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
UT 4-MTD Order No.: 3046184
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3046184
Insulating material
PA
Inflammability class acc. to UL 94
V0
Dimensions Width Length Height NS 35/7,5 Height NS 35/15
6.2 mm 57.8 mm 47.5 mm 55 mm
Technical data Maximum load current Rated surge voltage Pollution degree Surge voltage category Insulating material group Connection in acc. with standard Nominal current IN Nominal voltage UN Open side panel
41 A (with 6 mm2 conductor cross section) 8 kV 3 III I IEC 60947-7-1 32 A 800 V ja
Connection data Conductor cross section solid min.
Conductor cross section solid max.
Conductor cross section stranded min.
Conductor cross section stranded max.
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min.
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve min.
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve max.
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve min.
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve max.
2 conductors with same cross section, solid min.
2 conductors with same cross section, solid max.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded min.
0.14 mm² 6 mm² 0.14 mm² 6 mm² 26 10 0.14 mm²
4 mm²
0.14 mm²
4 mm²
0.14 mm² 1.5 mm² 0.14 mm²
PHOENIX CONTACT Deutschland GmbH http://www.phoenixcontact.de
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 2 / 7 Mar 24, 2010
Page 221 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
UT 4-MTD Order No.: 3046184
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3046184
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded max.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, min.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, max.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, min.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, max.
Type of connection
Stripping length
Internal cylindrical gage
Screw thread
Tightening torque, min
Tightening torque max
1.5 mm²
0.5 mm²
2.5 mm²
0.14 mm²
1.5 mm²
Screw connection 9 mm A4 M3 0.6 Nm 0.8 Nm
Certificates / Approvals
Certification Certification Ex: CSA Nominal voltage UN Nominal current IN AWG/kcmil CUL Nominal voltage UN Nominal current IN AWG/kcmil UL Nominal voltage UN Nominal current IN AWG/kcmil
PHOENIX CONTACT Deutschland GmbH http://www.phoenixcontact.de
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
CB, CSA, CUL, DNV, GL, LR, UL, VDE-PZI IECEx, KEMA-EX
600 V 30 A 26-10
600 V 30 A 26-10
600 V 30 A 26-10
26/11/2012
Page 3 / 7 Mar 24, 2010
Page 222 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
UT 4-MTD Order No.: 3046184
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3046184
Accessories
Item
Designation
Description
Assembly 3022276
3047141 0801762
1207640 1207653 1207666 0801733
0801681
1201756
1201895
1207679 1207682 1207695 1201730
1201714
1201798
CLIPFIX 35-5
Snap-on end bracket, for NS 35/7.5 or NS 35/15 DIN rail, can be fitted with Zack strip ZB 5 and ZBF 5, terminal strip marker KLM 2 and KLM, parking facility for FBS...5, FBS...6, KSS 5, KSS 6, width: 5,15 mm, color: gray
D-UT 2,5/4-TWIN
End cover, Width: 2.2 mm, Color: gray
NS 35/ 7,5 CU UNPERF 2000MM
DIN rail, material: Copper, unperforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 755MM
NS 35 DIN rail, height 7.5 mm, length 755 mm
NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 955MM
NS35 DIN rail, height 7.5 mm, length 955 mm
NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 1155MM
NS 35 DIN rail, height 7.5 mm, length 1155 mm
NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 2000MM
DIN rail, material: Steel, galvanized and passivated with a thick layer, perforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
NS 35/ 7,5 UNPERF 2000MM
DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
NS 35/15 AL UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, deep-drawn, high profile, unperforated, 1.5 mm thick, material: Aluminum, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length 2 m
NS 35/15 CU UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Copper, unperforated, 1.5 mm thick, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
NS 35/15 PERF 755MM
NS 35 DIN rail, perforated, height 15 mm, length 755 mm
NS 35/15 PERF 955MM
NS 35 DIN rail, perforated, height 15 mm, length 955 mm
NS 35/15 PERF 1155MM
NS 35 DIN rail, perforated, height 15 mm, length 1155 mm
NS 35/15 PERF 2000MM
DIN rail, material: Steel, perforated, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
NS 35/15 UNPERF 2000MM
DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
NS 35/15-2,3 UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, 2.3 mm thick, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
Bridges 3030336 3030242 3030255 3030349 3030271 3030365 3032224
FBS 2-6 FBS 3-6 FBS 4-6 FBS 5-6 FBS 10-6 FBS 20-6 FBS 50-6
Cross connector/bridge, Number of positions: 2, Color: red Cross connector/bridge, Number of positions: 3, Color: red Cross connector/bridge, Number of positions: 4, Color: red Cross connector/bridge, Number of positions: 5, Color: red Cross connector/bridge, Number of positions: 10, Color: red Cross connector/bridge, Number of positions: 20, Color: red Cross connector/bridge, Number of positions: 50, Color: red
PHOENIX CONTACT Deutschland GmbH http://www.phoenixcontact.de
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 4 / 7 Mar 24, 2010
Page 223 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
UT 4-MTD Order No.: 3046184
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3046184
3047060 Marking 1051993 0811228 1051016 1051032 1051029 1051045 1050499 1051003
RB UT 10-(2,5/4)
B-STIFT X-PEN 0,35 ZB 6,LGS:FORTL.ZAHLEN ZB 6,LGS:GLEICHE ZAHLEN ZB 6,QR:FORTL.ZAHLEN ZB 6,QR:GLEICHE ZAHLEN ZB 6:SO/CMS ZB 6:UNBEDRUCKT
Plug/Adapter
0201731
MPS-IH BK
0201702
MPS-IH GN
0201676
MPS-IH RD
0201663
MPS-IH WH
0201744
MPS-MT
3030925
PAI-4
3030996
PS-6
Tools 1205053
SZS 0,6X3,5
Diagrams/Drawings Circuit diagram
Cross connector/bridge, Number of positions: 2, Color: red
Marker pen, for manual labeling of unprinted Zack strips, smearproof and waterproof, line thickness 0.5 mm Marker pen without ink cartridge, for manual labeling of markers, labeling extremely wipe-proof, line thickness 0.35 mm Zack strip, 10-section, printed horizontally: with the numbers, 1-10, 11-20 etc. up to 991-1000, color: white Zack marker strip, labeled horizontally: 10-section, with identical numbers, 1/1/1, 2/2/2 etc. up to 1000/1000/1000, color: white Zack strip, 10-section, printed vertically: with consecutive numbers, 1-10, 11-20 a.s.o. up to 991-1000, color: white Zack marker, labeled vertically: 10-section, with identical numbers, 1/1/1, 2/2/2 etc. up to 1000/1000/1000, color: White Zack strip, 10-section, divisible, special printing, marking according to customer requirements Zack strip, unprinted, strips with 10 labels for individual labeling with M-PEN or CMS system, for terminal block width: 6.2 mm, color: white
Insulating sleeve, for MPS metal part, Color: black Insulating sleeve, for MPS metal part, Color: green Insulating sleeve, Color: red Insulating sleeve, for MPS metal part, Color: white Metal part Test adapter, Color: gray Test adapter, Color: red
Screwdriver, bladed, matches all screw terminal blocks up to 4.0 mm² connection cross section, blade: 0.6 x 3.5 mm, without VDE approval
PHOENIX CONTACT Deutschland GmbH http://www.phoenixcontact.de
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 5 / 7 Mar 24, 2010
Page 224 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Module no:0921011 LabelId:0921011 Operator:Phoenix
15:22:45, Donnerstag, 28. Juni 2001
ST-SI-UK 4
HCAE
Description
Light indicator: Voltage [V AC/DC]
Current [mA]
Fuse plug, for cartridge fuse inserts 5 x 20 mm, 26.5 mm high, color: black
Fuse plug, as above, however with light indicator:
5 - 15 2 - 7.5 15 - 30 3.5 - 7.5
30 - 60 2.5 - 5.5
110 - 250 0.5 - 1
Technical data
Insulation material Inflammability class acc. to UL 94 Temperature indices RTI / Ti Approval data (UL and CSA) Nom. voltage / nom. current
1) With single arrangements. 2) Max. power dissipation see info.
Type
Pcs. Order No. Pkt.
ST-SI-UK 4
ST-SILED 12-UK 4 ST-SILED 24-UK 4 ST-SILED 60-UK 4 ST-SILA 250-UK 4
Imax.: 6.3 A 1) 2) 09 21 01 1
50
Imax.: 6.3 A 1) 2) 09 21 02 4
50
6.3 A 1) 2) 09 21 03 7 50
6.3 A 1) 2) 09 21 04 0 50
6.3 A 1) 2) 09 21 05 3 50
UL: [V] / [A]
CSA: [V] / [A]
PA V2 130 / 120
300 / 6.3 300 / 10
Phoenix Contact Elektronischer Katalog
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 1 / 1 Page 225 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
SZF 1-0,6X3,5
Order No.: 1204517
Extract from the online catalog
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=1204517 Screwdriver, blade: 0.6 x 3.5 x 100 mm, length 180 mm
Commercial data GTIN (EAN) sales group Pack Customs tariff Weight/Piece Catalog page information
Technical data General Length (b) Width (a) Design
4017918018948 C200 10 pcs. 82054000 0.0368 KG Page 8 (NTK-2010)
Product notes WEEE/RoHS-compliant since: 11/01/2008
http:// www.download.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads.
181 mm 26 mm Phillips
PHOENIX CONTACT Inc., USA http://www.phoenixcon.com
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 1 / 3 Jun 30, 2010
Page 226 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
SZF 1-0,6X3,5 Order No.: 1204517
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=1204517
Blade thickness Blade width Blade height Weight Test standard
Certificates / Approvals
0.6 mm 3.5 mm 100 mm 34 g DIN 5264
Certification Diagrams/Drawings Dimensioned drawing
GOST
PHOENIX CONTACT Inc., USA http://www.phoenixcon.com
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 2 / 3 Jun 30, 2010
Page 227 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
MSTB 2,5/10-ST-5,08
Order No.: 1757093 The figure shows a 10-position version of the product
Extract from the online catalog
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=1757093
Plug component, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn
Commercial data GTIN (EAN) sales group Pack Customs tariff Weight/Piece Catalog page information
4017918029623 E111 50 pcs. 85366990 0.01727 KG Page 198 (CC-2009)
Technical data
Dimensions / positions Pitch Dimension a Number of positions Screw thread Tightening torque, min
5.08 mm 45.72 mm 10 M3 0.5 Nm
Product notes WEEE/RoHS-compliant since: 01/01/2003
http:// www.download.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads.
PHOENIX CONTACT Inc., USA http://www.phoenixcon.com
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 1 / 8 Jun 30, 2010
Page 228 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
MSTB 2,5/10-ST-5,08 Order No.: 1757093
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=1757093
Tightening torque max
Technical data Insulating material group Rated surge voltage (III/3) Rated surge voltage (III/2) Rated surge voltage (II/2) Rated voltage (III/2) Rated voltage (II/2) Connection in acc. with standard Nominal current IN Nominal voltage UN Nominal cross section Maximum load current Insulating material Inflammability class acc. to UL 94 Internal cylindrical gage Stripping length Nominal voltage, UL/CUL Use Group B Nominal current, UL/CUL Use Group B Nominal voltage, UL/CUL Use Group D Nominal current, UL/CUL Use Group D
Connection data Conductor cross section solid min. Conductor cross section solid max. Conductor cross section stranded min. Conductor cross section stranded max. Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve min. Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve max. Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve min. Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve max. Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min. Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max
0.6 Nm
I 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 320 V 630 V EN-VDE 12 A 250 V 2.5 mm² 12 A (with 2.5 mm2 conductor cross section) PA V0 A3 7 mm 250 V 12 A 300 V 10 A
0.2 mm² 2.5 mm² 0.2 mm² 2.5 mm² 0.25 mm²
2.5 mm²
0.25 mm²
2.5 mm²
24 12
PHOENIX CONTACT Inc., USA http://www.phoenixcon.com
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 2 / 8 Jun 30, 2010
Page 229 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
MSTB 2,5/10-ST-5,08 Order No.: 1757093
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=1757093
2 conductors with same cross section, solid min.
2 conductors with same cross section, solid max.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded min.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded max.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, min.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, max.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, min.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, max.
Minimum AWG according to UL/CUL
Maximum AWG according to UL/CUL
0.2 mm² 1 mm² 0.2 mm² 1.5 mm² 0.25 mm² 1 mm² 0.5 mm² 1.5 mm² 30 12
Certificates / Approvals
Certification
CSA Nominal voltage UN Nominal current IN AWG/kcmil
CUL Nominal voltage UN Nominal current IN AWG/kcmil
UL Nominal voltage UN Nominal current IN AWG/kcmil
CB, CSA, CUL, GOST, UL, VDE-PZI
300 V 10 A 28-12
300 V 10 A 30-12
300 V 10 A 30-12
PHOENIX CONTACT Inc., USA http://www.phoenixcon.com
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 3 / 8 Jun 30, 2010
Page 230 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
MSTB 2,5/10-ST-5,08 Order No.: 1757093
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=1757093
Accessories
Item
Designation
Bridges 1733172
EBP 3- 5
1733185
EBP 4- 5
1733198
EBP 5- 5
1733208
EBP 6- 5
General 1733169
1783740
EBP 2- 5 KGS-MSTB 2,5/10
Marking 1051993
0805108
B-STIFT SK 5,08/2,8:SO
0804293
SK 5,08/3,8:FORTL.ZAHLEN
0803883
SK U/2,8 WH:UNBEDRUCKT
Plug/Adapter
1734634
CP-MSTB
Tools 1205053
SZS 0,6X3,5
Description
Insertion bridge, fully insulated, for plug connectors with 5.0 or 5.08 mm pitch, no. of positions: 3 Insertion bridge, fully insulated, for plug connectors with 5.0 or 5.08 mm pitch, no. of positions: 4 Insertion bridge, fully insulated, for plug connectors with 5.0 or 5.08 mm pitch, no. of positions: 5 Insertion bridge, fully insulated, for plug connectors with 5.0 or 5.08 mm pitch, no. of positions: 6
Insertion bridge, fully insulated, for plug connectors with 5.0 or 5.08 mm pitch, no. of positions: 2 Cable housing, Number of positions: 10, Dimension a: 50 mm, Color: green
Marker pen, for manual labeling of unprinted Zack strips, smearproof and waterproof, line thickness 0.5 mm Marker card, special printing, self-adhesive, labeled acc. to customer requirements, 14 identical marker strips per card, max. 25-position labeling per strip, color: White Marker card, printed horizontally, self-adhesive, 12 identical decades marked 1-10, 11-20 etc. up to 91-(99)100, sufficient for 120 terminal blocks Unprinted marker cards, DIN A4 format, pitch as desired, selfadhesive, with 50 stamped marker strips, 185 mm strip length, can be labeled with the CMS system or manually with the M-PEN
Keying profile, is inserted into the slot on the plug or inverted header, red insulating material
Screwdriver, bladed, matches all screw terminal blocks up to 4.0 mm² connection cross section, blade: 0.6 x 3.5 mm, without VDE approval
PHOENIX CONTACT Inc., USA http://www.phoenixcon.com
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 4 / 8 Jun 30, 2010
Page 231 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
MSTB 2,5/10-ST-5,08 Order No.: 1757093
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=1757093
Additional products
Item
Designation
General 1823927
ICC 2,5/10-STZ-5,08
1762457
MDSTB 2,5/10-G1-5,08
1762583
MDSTBV 2,5/10-G1-5,08
1770795 1757323 1768024 1765030
MSTB 2,5/10-G-5,08-LA MSTBA 2,5/10-G-5,08 MSTBA 2,5/10-G-5,08-LA MSTBHK 2,5/10-G-5,08
1788800
MSTBVK 2,5/10-G-5,08
1788619
MVSTBU 2,5/10-GB-5,08
1769544 1767452 3002034
SMSTB 2,5/10-G-5,08 SMSTBA 2,5/10-G-5,08 UK 3-MSTB-5,08
Description
Plug component, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Corresponding male crimp contacts with current [A] and conductor cross section range [mm²] data: 10A/ICC-MT 0,5-1,0 (3190577); 10A/ICC-MT 0,5-1,0 BA (3190603); 12A/ICC-MT 1,5-2,5 (3190580); 12A/ICCMT 1,5-2,5 BA (3190593). BA = Bandkontakte
Header, Nominal current: 10 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: Soldering, In combination with MVSTB or FKCV plug components, both an MVSTBW (or FKCVW) and an MVSTBR plug (or FKCVR) must be used. Combination with TMSTBP plug components is not possible!
Header, Nominal current: 10 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: Soldering, In combination with MVSTB or FKCV plug components, both an MVSTBW (or FKCVW) and an MVSTBR plug (or FKCVR) must be used. Combination with TMSTBP plug components is not possible!
Header, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Assembly: Soldering
Header, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: Soldering
Header, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Assembly: Soldering
Plug component, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: DIN rail
Plug component, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: DIN rail
Plug component, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: Direct mounting
Header, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: Soldering
Header, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: Soldering
Feed-through modular terminal block, Type of connection: Special and hybrid connection, Screw connection, Cross section: 0.2 mm² - 4 mm², AWG 24 - 12, Width: 5.08 mm, Color: gray, Mounting type: NS 32, NS 35/15, NS 35/7,5
PHOENIX CONTACT Inc., USA http://www.phoenixcon.com
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 5 / 8 Jun 30, 2010
Page 232 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
MSTB 2,5/10-ST-5,08 Order No.: 1757093
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=1757093
3002076 3002102 3002063 3002131 3002144 3002173 2770888 1876615 2770846 1788198 1873016
UK 3-MVSTB-5,08 UK 3-MVSTB-5,08-LA 24RD UK 3-MVSTB-5,08/EK UK 3D-MSTBV-5,08 UK 3D-MSTBV-5,08-LA 24RD UK 3D-MSTBV-5,08/EK UKK 3-MSTB-5,08 UKK 3-MSTB-5,08-PE UKK 3-MSTBVH-5,08 UMSTBVK 2,5/10-G-5,08 ZFKK 1,5-MSTBV-5,08
Feed-through modular terminal block, Nominal current: 12 A, Nominal voltage: 250 V, Cross section: 0.2 mm² - 4 mm², AWG: 24 - 12, Mounting type: NS 32, NS 35/15, NS 35/7,5, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Width: 5.1, Color: gray
Feed-through modular terminal block, Nominal current: 12 A, Nominal voltage: 250 V, Cross section: 0.2 mm² - 4 mm², AWG: 24 - 12, Mounting type: NS 32, NS 35/15, NS 35/7,5, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Width: 5.08, Color: gray
Feed-through modular terminal block, Nominal current: 12 A, Nominal voltage: 250 V, Cross section: 0.2 mm² - 4 mm², AWG: 24 - 12, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15, NS 32, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Width: 5.1, Color: blue
Feed-through modular terminal block, Type of connection: Special and hybrid connection, Screw connection, Cross section: 0.2 mm² - 4 mm², AWG 24 - 12, Width: 5.08 mm, Color: gray, Mounting type: NS 32, NS 35/15, NS 35/7,5
Feed-through modular terminal block, Type of connection: Screw connection, Screw connection, Number of positions: 1, Cross section: 0.2 mm² - 4 mm², AWG 24 - 12, Width: 5.1 mm, Color: gray, Mounting type: NS 32, NS 35/15, NS 35/7,5
Feed-through modular terminal block, Type of connection: Screw connection, Screw connection, Cross section: 0.2 mm² - 4 mm², AWG 24 - 12, Width: 5.1 mm, Color: blue, Mounting type: NS 32, NS 35/15, NS 35/7,5
End cover, Nominal current: 12 A, Nominal voltage: 250 V, Cross section: 0.2 mm² - 4 mm², AWG: 24 - 12, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15, NS 32, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Width: 5.08, Color: gray
Feed-through modular terminal block, Nominal current: 12 A, Nominal voltage: 320 V, Cross section: 0.2 mm² - 4 mm², AWG: 24 - 12, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15, NS 32, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Width: 5.08, Color: green-yellow
Feed-through modular terminal block, Nominal current: 12 A, Nominal voltage: 250 V, Cross section: 0.2 mm² - 4 mm², AWG: 24 - 12, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15, NS 32, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Width: 5.08, Color: gray
Plug component, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (III/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: DIN rail
Feed-through modular terminal block, Connection method: Special and hybrid connection, MSTB plug entry, Cross section: 0.2 mm² - 2.5 mm², Width: 5.1 mm, Color: gray
PHOENIX CONTACT Inc., USA http://www.phoenixcon.com
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 6 / 8 Jun 30, 2010
Page 233 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
MSTB 2,5/10-ST-5,08 Order No.: 1757093
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=1757093
Diagrams/Drawings Dimensioned drawing
PHOENIX CONTACT Inc., USA http://www.phoenixcon.com
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 7 / 8 Jun 30, 2010
Page 234 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
FBS 10-8
Order No.: 3030323
Extract from the online catalog
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3030323
Cross connector/jumper for modular terminal block, Number of positions: 10, Color: red
Commercial data EAN Pack Customs tariff Weight/Piece Catalog page information
4017918188634 10 pcs. 85389099 0.01955 KG Page 330 (CL-2009)
Product notes WEEE/RoHS-compliant since: 01/01/2003
http:// www.download.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads.
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.de
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 1 / 2 Oct 23, 2009
Page 235 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
PS-6/2,3MM RD
Order No.: 3038736 The illustration shows the version PS-5/2,3 MM RD
Extract from the online catalog
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3038736 Test plugs, Color: red
Commercial data GTIN (EAN) sales group Pack Customs tariff Weight/Piece Catalog page information
4017918904166 A691 10 pcs. 85369010 0.00143 KG Page 449 (CL-2009)
Product notes WEEE/RoHS-compliant since: 01/01/2003
http:// www.download.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads.
PHOENIX CONTACT Inc., USA http://www.phoenixcon.com
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 1 / 2 Jun 30, 2010
Page 236 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
ËÌ ìóÓÌ
д»¿-» ²±¬» ¬¸¿¬ ¬¸» ¼¿¬¿ ¹·ª»² ¸»®» ¸¿- ¾»»² ¬¿µ»² º®±³ ¬¸» ±²´·²» ½¿¬¿´±¹ò Ú±® ½±³°®»¸»²-·ª» ·²º±®³¿¬·±² ¿²¼ ¼¿¬¿ô °´»¿-» ®»º»® ¬± ¬¸» «-»® ¼±½«³»²¬¿¬·±² ¿¬ ¸¬¬°æññ©©©ò¼±©²´±¿¼ò°¸±»²·¨½±²¬¿½¬ò½±³ò ̸» Ù»²»®¿´ Ì»®³¿²¼ ݱ²¼·¬·±²- ±º Ë-» ¿°°´§ ¬± ײ¬»®²»¬ ¼±©²´±¿¼-ò
Û¨¬®¿½¬ º®±³ ¬¸» ±²´·²» ½¿¬¿´±¹
˲·ª»®-¿´ ¬»®³·²¿´ ¾´±½µ ©·¬¸ -½®»© ½±²²»½¬·±²ô ½®±--»½¬·±²æ ðòïì ó ì ³³n ô ßÉÙæ îê ó ïðô ©·¼¬¸æ êòî ³³ô ½±´±®æ Ù®¿§
Ñ®¼»® Ò±ò Ñ®¼ ¼»-·¹²¿¬·±²
ÛßÒ Ð¿½µ Ý«-¬±³- ¬¿®·ºº Ý¿¬¿´±¹ °¿¹» ·²º±®³¿¬·±²
Ì»½¸²·½¿´ ¼¿¬¿
Ù»²»®¿´ Ò«³¾»® ±º ´»ª»´Ò«³¾»® ±º ½±²²»½¬·±²Ý±´±® ײ-«´¿¬·²¹ ³¿¬»®·¿´ ײº´¿³³¿¾·´·¬§ ½´¿-- ¿½½ò ¬± ËÔ çì
íðìêïíç ËÌ ìóÓÌ ìðïéçïèçéëëêî ëð н-ò èëíêçðïð п¹» îð øÒÌÕóîððë÷
ï î ¹®¿§ Ðß Êð
ÐØÑÛÒ×È ÝÑÒÌßÝÌ Ù³¾Ø ú ݱò ÕÙ ¸¬¬°æññ©©©ò°¸±»²·¨½±²¬¿½¬ò½±³
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
п¹» ïñé ß«¹ ïîô îððë
Page 237 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
ËÌ ìóÓÌ
Ü·³»²-·±²É·¼¬¸ Ô»²¹¬¸ Ø»·¹¸¬ ÒÍ íëñéôë Ø»·¹¸¬ ÒÍ íëñïë
êòî ³³ ëêòè ³³ ìéòë ³³ ëë ³³
Ì»½¸²·½¿´ ¼¿¬¿ Ó¿¨·³«³ ´±¿¼ ½«®®»²¬ כּ¼ -«®¹» ª±´¬¿¹» ݱ²¬¿³·²¿¬·±² ½´¿-Í«®¹» ª±´¬¿¹» ½¿¬»¹±®§ ײ-«´¿¬·²¹ ³¿¬»®·¿´ ¹®±«° ݱ²²»½¬·±² ·² ¿½½ò ©·¬¸ -¬¿²¼¿®¼ Ò±³·²¿´ ½«®®»²¬ ×Ò Ò±³·²¿´ ª±´¬¿¹» ËÒ Ñ°»² -·¼» °¿²»´
ïê ß è µÊ í ××× × ×ÛÝñ Ü×Ò ÊÜÛ ïê ß ëðð Ê ²»·²
ݱ²²»½¬·±² ¼¿¬¿
ݱ²¼«½¬±® ½®±-- -»½¬·±²ô ®·¹·¼ ³·²ò
ðòïì ³³n
ݱ²¼«½¬±® ½®±-- -»½¬·±²ô ®·¹·¼ ³¿¨ò
ê ³³n
ݱ²¼«½¬±® ½®±-- -»½¬·±² º´»¨·¾´» ³·²ò
ðòïì ³³n
ݱ²¼«½¬±® ½®±-- -»½¬·±²ô º´»¨·¾´» ³¿¨ò
ì ³³n
ݱ²¼«½¬±® ½®±-- -»½¬·±² ßÉÙñµ½³·´ ³·²ò
îê
ݱ²¼«½¬±® ½®±-- -»½¬·±² ßÉÙñµ½³·´ ³¿¨
ïð
ݱ²¼«½¬±® ½®±-- -»½¬·±² º´»¨·¾´»ô ©·¬¸ º»®®«´» ©·¬¸±«¬ °´¿-¬·½ -´»»ª» ³·²ò
ðòîë ³³n
ݱ²¼«½¬±® ½®±-- -»½¬·±² º´»¨·¾´»ô ©·¬¸ º»®®«´» ©·¬¸±«¬ ì ³³n
°´¿-¬·½ -´»»ª» ³¿¨ò
ݱ²¼«½¬±® ½®±-- -»½¬·±² º´»¨·¾´»ô ©·¬¸ º»®®«´» ©·¬¸ °´¿-¬·½ ðòîë ³³n -´»»ª» ³·²ò
ݱ²¼«½¬±® ½®±-- -»½¬·±² º´»¨·¾´»ô ©·¬¸ º»®®«´» ©·¬¸ °´¿-¬·½ ì ³³n -´»»ª» ³¿¨ò
î ½±²¼«½¬±®- ©·¬¸ -¿³» ½®±-- -»½¬·±²ô -±´·¼ ³·²ò
ðòïì ³³n
î ½±²¼«½¬±®- ©·¬¸ -¿³» ½®±-- -»½¬·±²ô -±´·¼ ³¿¨ò
ïòë ³³n
î ½±²¼«½¬±®- ©·¬¸ -¿³» ½®±-- -»½¬·±²ô º´»¨·¾´»ô ³·²ò ðòïì ³³n
î ½±²¼«½¬±®- ©·¬¸ -¿³» ½®±-- -»½¬·±²ô º´»¨·¾´» ³¿¨ò ïòë ³³n
î ½±²¼«½¬±®- ©·¬¸ -¿³» ½®±-- -»½¬·±²ô º´»¨·¾´»ô ÌÉ×Ò ðòë ³³n º»®®«´»- ©·¬¸ °´¿-¬·½ -´»»ª»ô ³·²ò
î ½±²¼«½¬±®- ©·¬¸ ·¼»²¬·½¿´ ½®±-- -»½¬·±²ô º´»¨·¾´» ÌÉ×Ò îòë ³³n º»®®«´»- ©·¬¸ °´¿-¬·½ -´»»ª»ô ³¿¨ò
î ½±²¼«½¬±®- ©·¬¸ -¿³» ½®±-- -»½¬·±²ô º´»¨·¾´»ô º»®®«´»- ðòîë ³³n
©·¬¸±«¬ °´¿-¬·½ -´»»ª» ³·²ò
î ½±²¼«½¬±®- ©·¬¸ -¿³» ½®±-- -»½¬·±²ô º´»¨·¾´»ô º»®®«´»- ïòë ³³n ©·¬¸±«¬ °´¿-¬·½ -´»»ª»ô ³¿¨ò
̧°» ±º ½±²²»½¬·±²
ͽ®»© ½±²²»½¬·±²
ͬ®·°°·²¹ ´»²¹¬¸
ç ³³
ײ¬»®²¿´ ½§´·²¼®·½¿´ ¹¿¹»
ßì
ͽ®»© ¬¸®»¿¼
Óí
Ì·¹¸¬»²·²¹ ¬±®¯«»ô ³·²
ðòê Ò³
ÐØÑÛÒ×È ÝÑÒÌßÝÌ Ù³¾Ø ú ݱò ÕÙ ¸¬¬°æññ©©©ò°¸±»²·¨½±²¬¿½¬ò½±³
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
п¹» îñé ß«¹ ïîô îððë
Page 238 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
ËÌ ìóÓÌ
Ý»®¬·º·½¿¬»-
ÝËÔ Ò±³·²¿´ ª±´¬¿¹» ËÒ Ò±³·²¿´ ½«®®»²¬ ×Ò ßÉÙñµ½³·´ ËÔ Ò±³·²¿´ ª±´¬¿¹» ËÒ Ò±³·²¿´ ½«®®»²¬ ×Ò ßÉÙñµ½³·´
êðð Ê ïê ß îêóïð
êðð Ê ïê ß îêóïð
ÐØÑÛÒ×È ÝÑÒÌßÝÌ Ù³¾Ø ú ݱò ÕÙ ¸¬¬°æññ©©©ò°¸±»²·¨½±²¬¿½¬ò½±³
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
п¹» íñé ß«¹ ïîô îððë
Page 239 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
ËÌ ìóÓÌ
Ü®¿©·²¹-
Ý·®½«·¬ ¼·¿¹®¿³
ß°°®±ª¿´ ´±¹±
ÐØÑÛÒ×È ÝÑÒÌßÝÌ Ù³¾Ø ú ݱò ÕÙ ¸¬¬°æññ©©©ò°¸±»²·¨½±²¬¿½¬ò½±³
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
п¹» ìñé ß«¹ ïîô îððë
Page 240 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
ËÌ ìóÓÌ
ß½½»--±®·»-
׬»³ ß--»³¾´§ ðèðïéêî
ïîðéêìð ïîðéêëí ïîðéêêê ðèðïéíí
ðèðïêèï
ïîðïéëê
ïîðïèçë
ïîðéêéç ïîðéêèî ïîðéêçë ïîðïéíð
ïîðïéïì
ïîðïéçè
Þ®·¼¹»íðíðííê
íðíðîìî
íðíðîëë
íðíðíìç
íðíðîéï
íðíðíêë
íðìéðêð
Ü»-·¹²¿¬·±²
Ü»-½®·°¬·±²
ÒÍ íëñ éôë ÝË ËÒÐÛÎÚ îðððÓÓ ÒÍ íëñ éôë ÐÛÎÚ éëëÓÓ ÒÍ íëñ éôë ÐÛÎÚ çëëÓÓ ÒÍ íëñ éôë ÐÛÎÚ ïïëëÓÓ ÒÍ íëñ éôë ÐÛÎÚ îðððÓÓ
ÒÍ íëñ éôë ËÒÐÛÎÚ îðððÓÓ
ÒÍ íëñïë ßÔ ËÒÐÛÎÚ îðððÓÓ ÒÍ íëñïë ÝË ËÒÐÛÎÚ îðððÓÓ ÒÍ íëñïë ÐÛÎÚ éëëÓÓ ÒÍ íëñïë ÐÛÎÚ çëëÓÓ ÒÍ íëñïë ÐÛÎÚ ïïëëÓÓ ÒÍ íëñïë ÐÛÎÚ îðððÓÓ
ÒÍ íëñïë ËÒÐÛÎÚ îðððÓÓ
ÒÍ íëñïëóîôí ËÒÐÛÎÚ îðððÓÓ
Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ³¿¬»®·¿´æ ݱ°°»®ô «²°»®º±®¿¬»¼ô ¸»·¹¸¬ éòë ³³ô ©·¼¬¸ íë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸æ î ³ ÒÍ íë Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ¸»·¹¸¬ éòë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸ éëë ³³ ÒÍíë Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ¸»·¹¸¬ éòë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸ çëë ³³ ÒÍ íë Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ¸»·¹¸¬ éòë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸ ïïëë ³³ Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ³¿¬»®·¿´æ ͬ»»´ô °»®º±®¿¬»¼ô ¸»·¹¸¬ éòë ³³ô ©·¼¬¸ íë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸æ î ³ Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ³¿¬»®·¿´æ ͬ»»´ô «²°»®º±®¿¬»¼ô ¸»·¹¸¬ éòë ³³ô ©·¼¬¸ íë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸æ î ³ Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ¼»»°ó¼®¿©²ô ¸·¹¸ °®±º·´»ô «²°»®º±®¿¬»¼ô ïòë ³³ ¬¸·½µô ³¿¬»®·¿´æ ß´«³·²«³ô ¸»·¹¸¬ ïë ³³ô ©·¼¬¸ íë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸ î ³ Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ³¿¬»®·¿´æ ݱ°°»®ô «²°»®º±®¿¬»¼ô ïòë ³³ ¬¸·½µô ¸»·¹¸¬ ïë ³³ô ©·¼¬¸ íë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸æ î ³ ÒÍ íë Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ¸»·¹¸¬ ïë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸ éëë ³³ ÒÍ íë Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ¸»·¹¸¬ ïë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸ çëë ³³ ÒÍ íë Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ¸»·¹¸¬ ïë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸ ïïëë ³³ Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ³¿¬»®·¿´æ ͬ»»´ô °»®º±®¿¬»¼ô ¸»·¹¸¬ ïë ³³ô ©·¼¬¸ íë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸æ î ³ Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ³¿¬»®·¿´æ ͬ»»´ô «²°»®º±®¿¬»¼ô ¸»·¹¸¬ ïë ³³ô ©·¼¬¸ íë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸æ î ³ Ü×Ò ®¿·´ô ³¿¬»®·¿´æ ͬ»»´ô «²°»®º±®¿¬»¼ô îòí ³³ ¬¸·½µô ¸»·¹¸¬ ïë ³³ô ©·¼¬¸ íë ³³ô ´»²¹¬¸æ î ³
ÚÞÍ îóê ÚÞÍ íóê ÚÞÍ ìóê ÚÞÍ ëóê ÚÞÍ ïðóê ÚÞÍ îðóê ÎÞ ËÌ ïðóøîôëñì÷
д«¹ó·² ¾®·¼¹» º±® ½®±--ó½±²²»½¬·±²- ·² ¬¸» ¬»®³·²¿´ ½»²¬»®ô îó °±-òô ½±´±®æ λ¼ д«¹ó·² ¾®·¼¹» º±® ½®±--ó½±²²»½¬·±²- ·² ¬¸» ¬»®³·²¿´ ½»²¬»®ô íó °±-òô ½±´±®æ λ¼ д«¹ó·² ¾®·¼¹» º±® ½®±--ó½±²²»½¬·±²- ·² ¬¸» ¬»®³·²¿´ ½»²¬»®ô ìó °±-òô ½±´±®æ λ¼ д«¹ó·² ¾®·¼¹» º±® ½®±--ó½±²²»½¬·±²- ·² ¬¸» ¬»®³·²¿´ ½»²¬»®ô ëó °±-òô ½±´±®æ λ¼ д«¹ó·² ¾®·¼¹» º±® ½®±--ó½±²²»½¬·±²- ·² ¬¸» ¬»®³·²¿´ ½»²¬»®ô ïðó °±-òô ½±´±®æ λ¼ д«¹ó·² ¾®·¼¹» º±® ½®±--ó½±²²»½¬·±²- ·² ¬¸» ¬»®³·²¿´ ½»²¬»®ô îðó °±-òô ½±´±®æ λ¼ λ¼«½·²¹ ¾®·¼¹»ô º±® ½±²²»½¬·±² º®±³ ËÌ ï𠬱 ËÌ ì ±® ËÌ îôë
ÐØÑÛÒ×È ÝÑÒÌßÝÌ Ù³¾Ø ú ݱò ÕÙ ¸¬¬°æññ©©©ò°¸±»²·¨½±²¬¿½¬ò½±³
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
п¹» ëñé ß«¹ ïîô îððë
Page 241 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
ËÌ ìóÓÌ
Ó¿®µ·²¹ ðèïïîîè ïðëïðïê ëðêðçíë
ïðëðìçç
ÈóÐÛÒ ðôíë ÆÞ êôÔÙÍæÚÑÎÌÔòÆßØÔÛÒ ÆÞ êñÉØóïððæËÒÞÛÜÎËÝÕÌ
ÆÞ êæÍÑñÝÓÍ
Ó¿®µ»® °»² ©·¬¸±«¬ ·²µ ½¿®¬®·¼¹»ô º±® ³¿²«¿´ ´¿¾»´·²¹ ±º ³¿®µ»®-ô ´¿¾»´·²¹ »¨¬®»³»´§ ©·°»ó°®±±ºô ´·²» ¬¸·½µ²»-- ðòíë ³³ Æ¿½µ -¬®·°ô ïðó-»½¬·±²ô °®·²¬»¼ ¸±®·¦±²¬¿´´§æ ©·¬¸ ¬¸» ²«³¾»®-ô ïó ïðô ïïóî𠻬½ò «° ¬± ççïóïðððô ½±´±®æ ©¸·¬» Æ¿½µ -¬®·°ô «²°®·²¬»¼æ Ú±® ·²¼·ª·¼«¿´ ´¿¾»´·²¹ ©·¬¸ ÓóÐÛÒô ÆÞóÌ ±® ÝÓÍ -§-¬»³ô ´¿®¹» ¾¿¬½¸ô -«ºº·½·»²¬ º±® ´¿¾»´·²¹ ïðð𠬻®³·²¿´ ¾´±½µ-ô º±® ¿ ¬»®³·²¿´ ©·¼¬¸ ±º êòî ³³ô ½±´±®æ ɸ·¬» Æ¿½µ -¬®·°ô ïðó-»½¬·±²ô ¼·ª·-·¾´»ô -°»½·¿´ °®·²¬·²¹ô ³¿®µ·²¹ ¿½½±®¼·²¹ ¬± ½«-¬±³»® ®»¯«·®»³»²¬-
д«¹ñß¼¿°¬»®
ðîðïêèç
ÓÐÍó×Ø ÞË
ðîðïêéê
ÓÐÍó×Ø ÎÜ
ðîðïêêí
ÓÐÍó×Ø ÉØ
ðîðïéìì
ÓÐÍóÓÌ
íðíðçîë
Ðß×óì
íðíðççê
ÐÍóê
Ì»-¬ °´«¹ô ½±²-·-¬·²¹ ±ºæ Ó»¬¿´ °¿®¬ º±® îòí ³³ ¼·¿³»¬»® -±½µ»¬ ¸±´» Ì»-¬ ¿¼¿°¬»®ô º±® ì ³³ ¼·¿³»¬»® ¬»-¬ °´«¹ ÐÍ ¿²¼ -¿º»¬§ ¬»-¬ °´«¹ô ³¿µ»- ½±²¬¿½¬ ·² ¬¸» ¾®·¼¹» -¸¿º¬ Ó±¼«´¿® ¬»-¬ °´«¹ô º±® ·²¼·ª·¼«¿´ ¿--»³¾´§ ±º ¬»-¬ °´«¹ -¬®·°-ô º±® ËÌô ÍÌô ÜÌ ¿²¼ ÏÌ ¬»®³·²¿´ ¾´±½µ-ô ½¿² ¾» ´¿¾»´»¼ ©·¬¸ ÆÞÚ êô ½±´±®æ λ¼
̱±´ïîðëðëí
ÍÆÍ ðôêÈíôë
ͽ®»©¼®·ª»®ô ¾´¿¼»¼ô ³¿¬½¸»- ¿´´ -½®»© ¬»®³·²¿´ ¾´±½µ- «° ¬± ìòð ³³n ½±²²»½¬·±² ½®±-- -»½¬·±²ô ¾´¿¼»æ ðòê ¨ íòë ³³ô ©·¬¸±«¬ ÊÜÛ ¿°°®±ª¿´
ÐØÑÛÒ×È ÝÑÒÌßÝÌ Ù³¾Ø ú ݱò ÕÙ ¸¬¬°æññ©©©ò°¸±»²·¨½±²¬¿½¬ò½±³
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
п¹» êñé ß«¹ ïîô îððë
Page 242 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
UT 4-MTD
Order No.: 3046184
Extract from the online catalog
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3046184
Feed-through modular terminal block, Type of connection: Screw connection, Cross section: 0.14 mm² - 6 mm², AWG 26 - 10, Width: 6.2 mm, Color: gray, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15
Commercial data EAN Pack Customs tariff Weight/Piece Catalog page information
Technical data General Number of levels Number of connections Color
4017918956592 50 pcs. 85369010 0.011431 KG Page 56 (CL-2009)
1 2 gray
Product notes WEEE/RoHS-compliant since: 01/01/2003
http:// www.download.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads.
PHOENIX CONTACT Deutschland GmbH http://www.phoenixcontact.de
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 1 / 7 Mar 24, 2010
Page 243 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
UT 4-MTD Order No.: 3046184
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3046184
Insulating material
PA
Inflammability class acc. to UL 94
V0
Dimensions Width Length Height NS 35/7,5 Height NS 35/15
6.2 mm 57.8 mm 47.5 mm 55 mm
Technical data Maximum load current Rated surge voltage Pollution degree Surge voltage category Insulating material group Connection in acc. with standard Nominal current IN Nominal voltage UN Open side panel
41 A (with 6 mm2 conductor cross section) 8 kV 3 III I IEC 60947-7-1 32 A 800 V ja
Connection data Conductor cross section solid min.
Conductor cross section solid max.
Conductor cross section stranded min.
Conductor cross section stranded max.
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min.
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve min.
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve max.
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve min.
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve max.
2 conductors with same cross section, solid min.
2 conductors with same cross section, solid max.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded min.
0.14 mm² 6 mm² 0.14 mm² 6 mm² 26 10 0.14 mm²
4 mm²
0.14 mm²
4 mm²
0.14 mm² 1.5 mm² 0.14 mm²
PHOENIX CONTACT Deutschland GmbH http://www.phoenixcontact.de
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 2 / 7 Mar 24, 2010
Page 244 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
UT 4-MTD Order No.: 3046184
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3046184
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded max.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, min.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, max.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, min.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, max.
Type of connection
Stripping length
Internal cylindrical gage
Screw thread
Tightening torque, min
Tightening torque max
1.5 mm²
0.5 mm²
2.5 mm²
0.14 mm²
1.5 mm²
Screw connection 9 mm A4 M3 0.6 Nm 0.8 Nm
Certificates / Approvals
Certification Certification Ex: CSA Nominal voltage UN Nominal current IN AWG/kcmil CUL Nominal voltage UN Nominal current IN AWG/kcmil UL Nominal voltage UN Nominal current IN AWG/kcmil
PHOENIX CONTACT Deutschland GmbH http://www.phoenixcontact.de
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
CB, CSA, CUL, DNV, GL, LR, UL, VDE-PZI IECEx, KEMA-EX
600 V 30 A 26-10
600 V 30 A 26-10
600 V 30 A 26-10
26/11/2012
Page 3 / 7 Mar 24, 2010
Page 245 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
UT 4-MTD Order No.: 3046184
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3046184
Accessories
Item
Designation
Description
Assembly 3022276
3047141 0801762
1207640 1207653 1207666 0801733
0801681
1201756
1201895
1207679 1207682 1207695 1201730
1201714
1201798
CLIPFIX 35-5
Snap-on end bracket, for NS 35/7.5 or NS 35/15 DIN rail, can be fitted with Zack strip ZB 5 and ZBF 5, terminal strip marker KLM 2 and KLM, parking facility for FBS...5, FBS...6, KSS 5, KSS 6, width: 5,15 mm, color: gray
D-UT 2,5/4-TWIN
End cover, Width: 2.2 mm, Color: gray
NS 35/ 7,5 CU UNPERF 2000MM
DIN rail, material: Copper, unperforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 755MM
NS 35 DIN rail, height 7.5 mm, length 755 mm
NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 955MM
NS35 DIN rail, height 7.5 mm, length 955 mm
NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 1155MM
NS 35 DIN rail, height 7.5 mm, length 1155 mm
NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 2000MM
DIN rail, material: Steel, galvanized and passivated with a thick layer, perforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
NS 35/ 7,5 UNPERF 2000MM
DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
NS 35/15 AL UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, deep-drawn, high profile, unperforated, 1.5 mm thick, material: Aluminum, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length 2 m
NS 35/15 CU UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Copper, unperforated, 1.5 mm thick, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
NS 35/15 PERF 755MM
NS 35 DIN rail, perforated, height 15 mm, length 755 mm
NS 35/15 PERF 955MM
NS 35 DIN rail, perforated, height 15 mm, length 955 mm
NS 35/15 PERF 1155MM
NS 35 DIN rail, perforated, height 15 mm, length 1155 mm
NS 35/15 PERF 2000MM
DIN rail, material: Steel, perforated, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
NS 35/15 UNPERF 2000MM
DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
NS 35/15-2,3 UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, 2.3 mm thick, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
Bridges 3030336 3030242 3030255 3030349 3030271 3030365 3032224
FBS 2-6 FBS 3-6 FBS 4-6 FBS 5-6 FBS 10-6 FBS 20-6 FBS 50-6
Cross connector/bridge, Number of positions: 2, Color: red Cross connector/bridge, Number of positions: 3, Color: red Cross connector/bridge, Number of positions: 4, Color: red Cross connector/bridge, Number of positions: 5, Color: red Cross connector/bridge, Number of positions: 10, Color: red Cross connector/bridge, Number of positions: 20, Color: red Cross connector/bridge, Number of positions: 50, Color: red
PHOENIX CONTACT Deutschland GmbH http://www.phoenixcontact.de
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 4 / 7 Mar 24, 2010
Page 246 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
UT 4-MTD Order No.: 3046184
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3046184
3047060 Marking 1051993 0811228 1051016 1051032 1051029 1051045 1050499 1051003
RB UT 10-(2,5/4)
B-STIFT X-PEN 0,35 ZB 6,LGS:FORTL.ZAHLEN ZB 6,LGS:GLEICHE ZAHLEN ZB 6,QR:FORTL.ZAHLEN ZB 6,QR:GLEICHE ZAHLEN ZB 6:SO/CMS ZB 6:UNBEDRUCKT
Plug/Adapter
0201731
MPS-IH BK
0201702
MPS-IH GN
0201676
MPS-IH RD
0201663
MPS-IH WH
0201744
MPS-MT
3030925
PAI-4
3030996
PS-6
Tools 1205053
SZS 0,6X3,5
Diagrams/Drawings Circuit diagram
Cross connector/bridge, Number of positions: 2, Color: red
Marker pen, for manual labeling of unprinted Zack strips, smearproof and waterproof, line thickness 0.5 mm Marker pen without ink cartridge, for manual labeling of markers, labeling extremely wipe-proof, line thickness 0.35 mm Zack strip, 10-section, printed horizontally: with the numbers, 1-10, 11-20 etc. up to 991-1000, color: white Zack marker strip, labeled horizontally: 10-section, with identical numbers, 1/1/1, 2/2/2 etc. up to 1000/1000/1000, color: white Zack strip, 10-section, printed vertically: with consecutive numbers, 1-10, 11-20 a.s.o. up to 991-1000, color: white Zack marker, labeled vertically: 10-section, with identical numbers, 1/1/1, 2/2/2 etc. up to 1000/1000/1000, color: White Zack strip, 10-section, divisible, special printing, marking according to customer requirements Zack strip, unprinted, strips with 10 labels for individual labeling with M-PEN or CMS system, for terminal block width: 6.2 mm, color: white
Insulating sleeve, for MPS metal part, Color: black Insulating sleeve, for MPS metal part, Color: green Insulating sleeve, Color: red Insulating sleeve, for MPS metal part, Color: white Metal part Test adapter, Color: gray Test adapter, Color: red
Screwdriver, bladed, matches all screw terminal blocks up to 4.0 mm² connection cross section, blade: 0.6 x 3.5 mm, without VDE approval
PHOENIX CONTACT Deutschland GmbH http://www.phoenixcontact.de
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 5 / 7 Mar 24, 2010
Page 247 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
UBE/D + ES/KMK 3
Order No.: 1004076
Extract from the online catalog
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=1004076
Terminal strip marker carriers for marking terminal group, for mounting on the terminal strip NS 32 or NS 35/7.5, lettering field size: 40 x 17 mm
Commercial data EAN Pack Customs tariff Weight/Piece
4017918011888 10 pcs. 85369010 0.0105 KG
Product notes WEEE/RoHS-compliant since: 03/18/2004
http:// www.download.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads.
Technical data
General Color Base element material Inflammability class acc. to UL 94 Ambient temperature (operation) Components
gray PA V2 -40 °C ... 100 °C free from silicone and halogen
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.de
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 1 / 2 May 7, 2009
Page 248 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
UT 4-HESI (5X20)
Order No.: 3046032
Extract from the online catalog
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3046032
Fuse modular terminal block, Connection method: Screw connection, Cross section: 0.14 mm²- 6 mm², AWG: 26 - 10, Nominal current: 6.3 A, Nominal voltage: 500 V, Width: 6.2 mm, Fuse type: G / 5 x 20, Fuse type: Glass, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15, Color: black
Commercial data EAN Pack Customs tariff Weight/Piece Catalog page information
4017918956578 50 pcs. 85369010 0.018103 KG Page 44 (CL-2009)
Technical data
General Number of levels Number of connections Color
1 2 black
Product notes WEEE/RoHS-compliant since: 01/01/2003
http:// www.download.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads.
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.de
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 1 / 5 May 6, 2009
Page 249 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
UT 4-HESI (5X20) Order No.: 3046032
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3046032
Insulating material
PA
Inflammability class acc. to UL 94
V0
Dimensions Width Length Height NS 35/7,5 Height NS 35/15
6.2 mm 57.8 mm 73 mm 80.5 mm
Technical data Fuse Fuse type Rated surge voltage Pollution degree Surge voltage category Insulating material group Connection in acc. with standard Nominal current IN Nominal voltage UN
G / 5 x 20 Glass 4 kV 3 III I IEC 60947-7-3 6.3 A 500 V (if used as fuse terminal block) 500 V (if used as disconnect terminal block)
Connection data Conductor cross section solid min.
Conductor cross section solid max.
Conductor cross section stranded min.
Conductor cross section stranded max.
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min.
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve min.
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve max.
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve min.
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve max.
2 conductors with same cross section, solid min.
2 conductors with same cross section, solid max.
0.14 mm² 6 mm² 0.14 mm² 6 mm² 26 10 0.14 mm²
4 mm²
0.14 mm²
4 mm²
0.14 mm² 1.5 mm²
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.de
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 2 / 5 May 6, 2009
Page 250 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
UT 4-HESI (5X20) Order No.: 3046032
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3046032
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded min.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded max.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, min.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, max.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, min.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, max.
Type of connection
Stripping length
Internal cylindrical gage
Screw thread
Tightening torque, min
Tightening torque max
0.14 mm²
1.5 mm²
0.14 mm²
1.5 mm²
0.5 mm²
2.5 mm²
Screw connection 9 mm A4 M3 0.6 Nm 0.8 Nm
Certificates / Approvals
Certification CSA Nominal voltage UN Nominal current IN AWG/kcmil
CUL Nominal voltage UN Nominal current IN AWG/kcmil
UL Nominal voltage UN Nominal current IN AWG/kcmil
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.de
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
CB, CSA, CUL, DNV, GL, KEMA, LR, UL
600 V 6.3 A 26-10
600 V 6.3 A 26-10
600 V 6.3 A 26-10
26/11/2012
Page 3 / 5 May 6, 2009
Page 251 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
UT 4-HESI (5X20) Order No.: 3046032
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3046032
Drawings Application drawing
Fuse terminal blocks in interconnected arrangement, block consisting of 5 fuse terminal blocks
Circuit diagram
Fuse terminal block in single arrangement, block consisting of one fuse terminal block and 4 feed-through terminal blocks
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.de
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 4 / 5 May 6, 2009
Page 252 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
CLIPSAL NEUTRAL-ACTIVE-METER LINKS
CLIPSAL NEUTRAL / ACTIVE / METER LINKS
Clipsal Links are produced from Impact Resistant materials to prevent cracking in transit or during installation.
The transparent covers enable you to check wiring and locate the sealing screw at a glance. The sealing screw (nylon with brass insert) resists stripping. Voltage and amperage ratings are clearly marked on both the cover and brass bar.
All links are available with black or red covers and bases for neutral, active or meter applications as required by local authorities.
T-Type - 500 Volt 140 Ampere L4T35
500V 140A 4 Hole Neutral Link with two screws per tunnel. Black base and cover.
L4T35R 500V 140A 4 Hole Active Link. Red base and cover. Dimensions: 65 x 46 x 43mm. Mounting centres: 28mm. 1 tunnel 8.7mm diameter accommodate 1 x 25mm2 cable. 3 tunnels 7.7mm diameter accommodate 1 x 25mm2 cable. Certificate of Suitability No. CS2252N.
L4T35R
Mini Links with Cover
500V 100A 2 screws per tunnel.
L5 500V 100A 5 Hole Neutral Link with two screws per tunnel. Black base and cover.
L5R 500V 100A 5 Hole Active Link. Red base and cover.
Dimensions: 65 x 46 x 43mm. Mounting centres: 46mm. 3 tunnels, 6.3mm diameter accommodate 1 x 16mm2. 2 tunnels, 5.8mm diameter accommodate 1 x 16mm2.
L5BW 500V 110A 5 Hole Back Wiring Neutral Link with two screws per tunnel. Black base and cover.
L5BWR 500V 110A 5 Hole Back Wiring Active Link. Red base and cover.
Dimensions: 65 x 46 x 43mm. Mounting centres: 46mm. 5 tunnels, 7mm diameter accommodate 1 x 25mm2. Transparent black cover, with cut outs.
L6R 500V 100A 6 Hole Active Link. Red base and cover.
Dimensions: 65 x 46 x 43mm. Mounting centres: 46mm. 3 tunnels, 6.3mm diameter accommodate 1 x 16mm2 cable. 3 tunnels, 5.8mm diameter accommodate 1 x 16mm2 cable.
L6/25 500V 110A 6 Hole Neutral Link with 2 screws per tunnel. Black base and cover.
L6/25R 500V 110A 6 Hole Active Link. Red base and cover.
Dimensions: 65 x 46 x 43mm. Mounting centres: 46mm. 2 tunnels, 7.5mm diameter accommodate 2 x 25mm2 cable. 1 tunnel, 5.5mm diameter accommodates 1 x 16mm2 cable. 3 tunnels, 4.7mm diameter accommodate 3 x 10mm2 cable. Transparent black cover with cut-outs.
L7 500V 100A 7 Hole Neutral Link with two screws per tunnel. Black base and cover.
L6
500V 100A 6 Hole Neutral Link with
21
two screws per tunnel. Black base
and cover.
L7
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 253 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual J & P Richardson Industries Pty Ltd
4.7 TELEMETRY & POWER Schneider SCADAPACK ES Telemetry Unit Clipsal 2015/15 + 90B 1Phase 15A Outlet Mennekes 3658 3Phase +N+E Inlet Powerbox PB251-24CM - 24VDC 10A Power Supply Yuasa NP7-12FR 12v 7Ah Battery
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Revision 0
26/11/2012
Date: 2 July 2012
Page 254 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
SCADAPack 330E | 334E
Smart RTU
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 255 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual 1
Built on a native DNP3 architecture, the SCADAPack 330E and 334E feature high-performance 32-bit processing, highspeed LAN, serial and USB communications, integrated power supply, advanced power-management, and a wide range of digital and analog I/O in a cost-effective, compact Smart RTU. The level 4 compliant DNP3 protocol comes with optional AGA12 encryption to improve message security for critical operations, and support for the open protocols of Modbus and IEC60870-5 is also offered. The SCADAPack 330E / 334E can be programmed locally or remotely using the IEC61131-3 programming language and is optionally configurable directly from ClearSCADA host software.
This product offers a small footprint, enabling compact mounting enclosures for applications where space is at a premium. The SCADAPack 330E is well suited for applications that require a communications hub but no I/O, while the SCADAPack 334E adds a variety of integrated I/O. Note that the SCADAPack 334E has the same I/O offering as the SCADAPack 314E but includes an Ethernet port and a third serial port.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 256 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual 2
Product Data Sheet SCADAPack 330E | 334E Specifications
P330E: 5210 controller board only
Controller
Processors
· CPU: 32-bit ARM7 microcontroller, 32 MHz clock, integrated watchdog timer · Microcontroller co-processor, 20 MHz clock
Memory
16MB FLASH ROM, 4MB CMOS RAM, 4kB EEPROM
Non-Volatile RAM
CMOS SRAM with lithium battery retains contents for 2 years with no power
Event Logging Capacity
20,000 events
Maximum Database Points
1,000 typical
I/O
Counter Inputs
· 1, 0-10Hz or 0-5kHz (dry contact) · 2, 0-10kHz (turbine or dry contact)
Communications
Serial Ports COM1, COM2
· RS-232 port, 8-pin modular RJ45 jack, full or half duplex, or · RS-485 port, 2-wire, half duplex
Serial Port COM3
· RS-232 port, 8-pin modular RJ45 jack, full or half duplex with RTS/CTS control and operator interface power control
Baud Rates
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200
Serial Protocols
DNP3 Slave, DNP3 Master, IEC60870-5-101 Slave, IEC60870-5-103 Master, Modbus RTU Master, Modbus RTU Slave, DF1
Ethernet Port
RJ45, 10/100BaseT
Ethernet Protocols
DNP3 in TCP Master/Slave, DNP3 in UDP Master/Slave, Modbus/TCP Client and Server, IEC60870-5-104 Slave, NTP Server, Telnet Server, FTP Server, BOOTP Server
USB Peripheral Port
USB 2.0 compliant "B"-type receptacle, DNP3 protocol
Wireless1
Spread spectrum radio at 900MHz2 and 2.4GHz2
General
I/O Terminations
6-pole removable terminal block, 12 to 22AWG, 15A contacts
Dimensions
5.65 inch (144mm) wide, 5.00 inch (127mm) high, 1.80 inch (45mm) deep
Packaging
Corrosion resistant zinc-plated steel with black enamel paint
Environment
5% RH to 95%, non-condensing, 40°C (40°F) to 70°C (158°F)
Power Input
· 11 - 30VDC, 3.5W typical · Add 25 to 100mW when enabling the LEDs · 12W at 24V maximum, 5V supply fully loaded
Warranty
3 years on parts and labor
Certifications
Hazardous Locations North America
Suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D Hazardous Locations. Temperature Code T4 CSA certified to the requirements of: · CSA Std. C22.2 No. 213-M1987 - Hazardous Locations. · UL Std. No. 1604 - Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
Hazardous Locations - Europe ATEX II 3G, Ex nA IIC T4 per EN 60079-15, protection type n (Zone 2). Does not include Wireless versions.
Hazardous Locations
IECEx, Ex nA IIC T4 per IEC 60079-15, protection type n (Zone 2) Does not include Wireless versions.
1 Available only with optional integrated wireless modules or with stand-alone wireless modules. 2 Not applicable in all countries.
Disclaimer: Schneider Electric reserves the right to change product specifications. For more information visit www.controlmicrosystems.com.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 257 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual 3
Product Data Sheet SCADAPack 330E | 334E Specifications
P334E: 5210 controller board and integrated 5607 I/O board
Controller
Processors
· CPU: 32-bit ARM7 microcontroller, 32 MHz clock, integrated watchdog timer · Microcontroller co-processor, 20 MHz clock
Memory
16MB FLASH ROM, 4MB CMOS RAM, 4kB EEPROM
Non-Volalite RAM
CMOS SRAM with lithium battery retains contents for 2 years with no power
Event Logging Capacity
20,000 events
Maximum Database Points
1,000 typical
I/O
Analog Inputs
8, 0-20/4-20mA / 0-5/0-10V (15-bit) software configurable
Analog Outputs
· Standard: None · 2, 0-20/4-20mA (12-bit) with optional 5305 on 5607 I/O board
Digital I/O
· 16, 12/24V, 48V, 115/125V, 240V digital inputs · 10 relay outputs: dry contact or DC solid state, dry contact rating: 3A, 30VDC or 240VAC (resistive),
DC solid state rating: 3A, 60 VDC
Counter Inputs
1, 0-10Hz or 0-5kHz (dry contact); 2, 0-10kHz (turbine or dry contact)
Communications
Serial Ports COM1, COM2
· RS-232 port, 8-pin modular RJ45 jack, full or half duplex, or · RS-485 port, 2-wire, half duplex
Serial Port COM3
RS-232 port, 8-pin modular RJ45 jack, full or half duplex with RTS/CTS control and operator interface power control
Baud Rates
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200
Serial Protocols
DNP3 Slave, DNP3 Master, IEC60870-5-101 Slave, IEC60870-5-103 Master, Modbus RTU Master, Modbus RTU Slave, DF1
Ethernet Port
RJ45, 10/100BaseT
Ethernet Protocols
DNP3 in TCP Master/Slave, DNP3 in UDP Master/Slave, Modbus/TCP Client and Server, IEC60870-5-104 Slave, NTP Server, Telnet Server, FTP Server, BOOTP Server
USB Peripheral Port
USB 2.0 compliant "B"-type receptacle, DNP3 protocol
Wireless1
Spread spectrum radio at 900MHz2 and 2.4GHz2
General
I/O Terminations
5, 6 and 9-pole removable terminal blocks, 12 to 22AWG, 15A contacts
Dimensions
5.65 inch (144mm) wide, 6.50 inch (165mm) high, 2.80 inch (72mm) deep
Packaging
Corrosion resistant zinc-plated steel with black enamel paint
Environment Power 5210 Controller Board
5% RH to 95%, non-condensing, 40°C (40°F) to 70°C (158°F)
· 11 - 30VDC, 8.5W typical · Add 25 to 100mW when enabling the LEDs · 12W at 24V maximum, 5V supply fully loaded
5607 I/O Module
· 11 - 30VDC, 10.3mA plus analog outputs · 325mA (max.) at 5V required from 5210 controller board
Warranty
3 years on parts and labor
Certifications
Hazardous Locations North America
Suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D Hazardous Locations. Temperature Code T4 CSA certified to the requirements of: · CSA Std. C22.2 No. 213-M1987 - Hazardous Locations. · UL Std. No. 1604 - Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
Hazardous Locations - Europe ATEX II 3G, Ex nA IIC T4 per EN 60079-15, protection type n (Zone 2). Does not include Wireless versions.
Hazardous Locations
IECEx, Ex nA IIC T4 per IEC 60079-15, protection type n (Zone 2) Does not include Wireless versions.
1 Available only with optional integrated wireless modules or with stand-alone wireless modules. 2 Not applicable in all countries.
Disclaimer: Schneider Electric reserves the right to change product specifications. For more information visit www.controlmicrosystems.com.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 258 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual 4
Product Data Sheet SCADAPack 330E | 334E Model Code
Model
P330 P334
Code
E
Code
A B
Code
5 6
Code
5
Code
A
Code
A B C D E F G H I
Code
0 1
Code
0
1 2 A
B C D E
J K L
P334-EA55-AB00 represents a sample code for a SCADAPack 334E with 12V dry contact relay outputs
Select: Controller
SCADAPack 330E , 32 Bit controller, 3 Accumulators SCADAPack 334E, with Model 5607 I/O board, comes with above I/O plus 8 Analog I/P, 16 Digital I/P and 10 Digital O/P
Select: Platform
E Firmware platform (Configuration Software included), executes two IEC61131-3 kernels, Workbench required
Select: SCADA Security
None AGA-12 SCADA Encryption Security
Select: Protocol Option
Modbus, DNP3, DF1, Modbus/TCP, TCP/IP, IEC 60870-5-101/104 Slave (included in all controllers) Adds IEC 60870-5-103 Master, Protection Relay Protocol (for data transmission with IEDs)
Select: License Option
DNP3 Data Concentrator License (limit of 500 points from 10 IEDs), supports multiple DNP3 Masters (up to 3 Masters)
Select: Analog Inputs
P330 : None P334 : adds 8 selectable as 0-20mA, 4-20mA, 0-5V or 0-10V
Select: Digital Inputs/Outputs
P330 : None P334 : 16 Digital Inputs (12/24V) and 10 Dry Contact Relay outputs P334 : 16 Digital Inputs (48V) and 10 Dry Contact Relay outputs P334 : 16 Digital Inputs (120V) and 10 Dry Contact Relay outputs P334 : 16 Digital Inputs (240V) and 10 Dry Contact Relay outputs P334 : 16 Digital Inputs (12/24V) and 10 Solid State Relay outputs, ATEX Certified (with no Integrated radio) P334 : 16 Digital Inputs (48V) and 10 Solid State Relay outputs P334 : 16 Digital Inputs (120V) and 10 Solid State Relay outputs P334 : 16 Digital Inputs (240V) and 10 Solid State Relay outputs
Select: Analog Outputs
None P334 only : 2 channel Analog Output option, 0-20 mA
Select: Integrated Communication Interfaces
None FreeWave & MDS Radios (requires one RS232 port) 900Mhz FreeWave Spread Spectrum Radio 2.4GHz FreeWave Spread Spectrum Radio 900MHz MDS Spread Spectrum Radio Trio Radios - 900MHz (requires one RS232 port) 900MHz Trio Spread Spectrum Radio with encryption, 902-928MHz (FCC / IC) 900MHz Trio Spread Spectrum Radio with encryption, 915-928MHz (AUS) 900MHz Trio Spread Spectrum Radio, 915-928MHz (BRAZIL) 900MHz Trio Spread Spectrum Radio, 921-928MHz (NZ) Trio Radios - 2.4GHz (requires one RS232 port) 2.4GHz Trio Spread Spectrum Radio, ETSI/100mW, ATEX (EUROPE) 2.4GHz Trio Spread Spectrum Radio with Encryption, 500mW (CANADA, USA & AUSTRALIA) 2.4GHz Trio Spread Spectrum Radio, 500mW (OUTSIDE OF EUROPE, CANADA, USA & AUSTRALIA)
© 2011 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved - August 2011
Telemetry & Remote SCADA Solutions | www.controlmicrosystems.com
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Document Number M01018
Page 259 of 382
HOW TO ORDER SWITCHED SOCKET OUTLETS
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
HOW TO ORDER SWITCHED SOCKET OUTLETS
Switched Socket Outlets are often referred to as GPOs (General Purpose Outlets), Powerpoints or Power Outlets. So that there is no confusion, the description `Switched Socket Outlets' will be used throughout this brochure. Single and Twin Socket Outlets are available in 2000 Series in horizontal and vertical formats.
Catalogue Numbers will vary depending on the number of sockets and whether the product is horizontally or vertically mounted.
This number indicates the number of switched sockets included in the product. The plate size remains the same for both single and twin switched socket outlets, only the number of switches and sockets vary.
2015V
The letter `V' indicates that the product is vertically mounted. Where there is no letter `V', the product is horizontally mounted.
Single Horizontal
Single Vertical
Twin Horizontal
Twin Vertical
2015
2015V
Please note: Single Automatically Switched Socket Outlets are also available (Catalogue Number 2010 - Page 28).
Special Features and Options
2000 Series Switched Socket Outlets may also be ordered with special features, including an extra switch mechanism, safety shutters, neons, double pole switched versions, deep plate format products and more. Please see the main part of the brochure for Combination (Page 30) and Automatic (Page 28) versions with special features.
Ordering Colours
When ordering Switched Socket Outlets, colour variations also have to be taken into consideration, as the Catalogue Number will change depending on the colour of the product. Each colour has its own `code', for example, the code for White Electric is `WE' and the code for Cream is `CM'. The Catalogue Number for a 2000 Series Twin Switched Socket Outlet in White Electric is 2025,WE.
Refer to `2000 Series Colours' on page 12 for colour options and their corresponding codes.
2025
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
2025V
11 Page 260 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
COMBINATION SWITCHED SOCKET OUTLETS
STANDARD SIZE TWIN SWITCHED SOCKET OUTLETS - HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED
Cat. No.
Length
Width
Depth
Mounting Centres
2025, 2025S, 2025N,
2025L, 2025XA,
116mm
76mm
28mm
84mm apart
A
2025XAN, 2025FO
2025QC
116mm
76mm
31mm
84mm apart
2025SM
116mm
76mm
30mm
84mm apart
B
2025V3/30PF 290mm
116mm
13mm
See template
2025
A Twin Switched Socket Outlet, 250V/10A.
C
2025S
A Twin Switched Socket Outlet, 250V/10A, with safety shutters.
2025N
B Twin Switched Socket Outlet, 250V/10A, with safety shutters and neons.
D
2025L
C Twin Switched Socket Outlet, 250V/10A, with round earth pin.
2025QC 2025FO 2025V3/30PF
A Twin Switched Socket Outlet, 250V/10A, Quick Connect.
D
Twin Switched Socket Outlet, 250V/10A, printed with `NOT PROTECTED BY SAFETY SWITCH. FRIDGE/FREEZER ONLY'.
E
"PowertainmentTM" Six Socket Outlets, F-Type Pay TV Outlet in 2000/4 Surround, 250V/10A.
E F
2025XA
F Twin Switched Socket Outlet, 250V/10A, with removable extra switch.
2025XAN
G
Twin Switched Socket Outlet, 250V/10A with safety shutters, neons and removable extra switch.
G
2025SM
H Twin Switched Socket Outlet, 250V/10A, with surface mounting kit.
33
2025XAS
F
Twin Switched Socket Outlet, 250V/10A, with removable extra switch and safety shutters.
H
All models accommodate 4 x 2.5mm² cables. 30 Series Switch Terminals accommodate 3 x 2.5mm² on the 2025XA and 2025XAN. All models have a base projection of 13mm, except for 2025QC which has a base projection of 14mm.
* Refer to Page 62 for more information on "PowertainmentTM".
* Refer to Page 53 for mounting templates. Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 261 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
SCHEMATIC WIRING DIAGRAMS
Standard Pattern Mounting Twin Combination
2025
2025V
SCHEMATIC WIRING DIAGRAMS
Twin Switched Sockets with Extra Switch
Earth Leakage Protected Twin Switched Sockets
2025XA
2025VXA
2025RC
52 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 262 of 382
SECURITY
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
PB251 Series
220-330 WATTS DC UPS
Features
· Ultra-low noise output · Independent battery charging output · DC output OK & battery OK alarms & LEDs · Battery-LVD and alarm · Over-temperature protection · Battery fuse fail LED
Specifications
INPUT Voltage: Line regulation: Current: Inrush current: Frequency: OUTPUT Voltage Current Load regulation Current limit type - load cct Current limit type - batt. cct Short circuit protection Over-voltage protection
Ripple & noise 100 MHz bandwidth ENVIRONMENTAL Operating temperature
Over-temperature protection Cooling requirement Efficiency
190 to 264 vac, or 190 to 400VDC 0.2%typical 1.4A maximum 10A maximum 45 to 65 Hz
See table See table 0.5%typical Constant current Constant current Indefi nite, auto-resetting 17.5 to 20V latching (13.8Vdc output) 31.5 to 39V latching (27.6Vdc output) 28mVp-p (13.8Vdc output) 55mVp-p (27.6Vdc output)
0 to 70oC ambient with derating, 5...90% relative humidity (non-condensing) Automatic & auto-resetting Natural convection 80% minimum
Selection Table
STANDARDS & APPROVALS
Safety EMC
Complies with AS/NZS 60950, class 1, NSW Office of Fair Trading Approval N20602
Emissions comply with AS/NZS CISPR11, Group 1, Class B. Complies with ACA EMC Scheme, Safety & EMC Regulatory Compliance Marked
Isolation i/p-o/p i/p-ground o/p-ground
4242VDC for 1 minute 2121VDC for 1 minute 707VDC for 1 minute
ALARMS & BATTERY FUNCTIONS
Converter ON/OK alarm
Indicated by voltage-free changeover relay contacts &
green LED
ON=PSU OK
Battery low (& fuse) alarm
10.2 to 12.6V for 12V battery, adjustable 20.4 to 25.2V for 24V battery, adjustable Indicated by voltage-free changeover relay contacts & green LED: ON=BATT OK
Low voltage disconnect Charger over-load protection
9.6 to 12V for 12V battery, adjustable 19.2 to 24V2 for 4V battery, adjustable
Auto-resetting electronic circuit breaker
Reverse polarity protection
Internal battery fuse
Battery to load voltage drop MECHANICAL
0.2 to. 0.25V typical
Case size
264 L x 172 W x 67 H mm
Case size with heatsink
264 L x 186 W x 67 H mm
Rack size
232 D x 19" W x 2RU H
Weight
1.9 kg
Weight with heatsink
2.1 kg
Weight (rack mounted version) 5.5 kg
MODEL NUMBER PB251-12CM PB251-12CM-H PB251-24CM PB251-24CM-H PB251-12RML PB251-12B PB251-24RML
322
VDC 13.8V 13.8V 27.6V 27.6V 13.8V 13.8V 27.6V
OUTPUT ILOAD 16A 20A 11A 12A 20A 20A 12A
IBATT 2A 2A 2A 2A 4A 4A 2A
OUTPUT POWER
220W 275W 300W 330W 275W 275W 330W
Note: Non standard battery charging current available on request. ie PB251-12CM-H-10 for 10A.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 263 of 382
SECURITY
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
PB251 Series
275-330 WATTS DC UPS
Technical Illustrations
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Your dependable power partner www.powerbox.com.au 26/11/2012
323 Page 264 of 382
Data Sheet WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
NP SERIES - NP7-12
Reliability is your Security
Utilizing the latest advance design Oxygen Recombination Technology, Yuasa have applied their 80 years of experience in the lead acid battery field to produce the optimum design of Sealed Lead Acid batteries.
FEATURES
Superb recovery from deep discharge. Electrolyte suspension system. Gas Recombination. Multipurpose: Float or Cyclic use. Usable in any orientation Superior energy density. Lead calcium grids for extended life. Manufactured World wide. Application specific designs.
Technical Features
Sealed Construction
Yuasa's unique construction and sealing technique ensures no electrolyte leakage from case or terminals.
Electrolyte Suspension System
All NP batteries utilize Yuasa's unique electrolyte suspension system incorporating a microfine glass mat to retain the maximum amount of electrolyte in the cells. The electrolyte is retained in the separator material and there is no free electrolyte to escape from the cells. No gels or other contaminants are added.
Control of Gas Generation
The design of Yuasa's NP batteries incorporates the very latest oxygen recombination technology to effectively control the generation of gas during normal use.
Low Maintenance Operation
Due to the perfectly sealed construction and the recombination of gasses within the cell, the battery is almost maintenance free.
Terminals
Terminals
NP batteries are manufactured using a range of terminals which vary in size and type. Please refer to details as shown.
Operation in any Orientation
The combination of sealed construction and Yuasa's unique electrolyte suspension system allows operation in any orientation, with no loss of performance or fear of electrolyte leakage.
Valve Regulated Design
The batteries are equipped with a simple, safe low pressure venting system which releases excess gas and automatically reseals should there be a build up of gas within the battery due to severe overcharge. Note. On no account should the battery be charged in a sealed container.
General Specifications
Layout
Nominal Capacity (Ah)
20hr to 1 .75vpc 30ºC 1 0hr to 1 .75vpc 20ºC 5hr to 1.70vpc 20ºC 1 hr to 1 .60vpc 20ºC Voltage Energy Density (Wh.L.20hr) Specific Energy (Wh.kg.20hr) Int. Resistance (m.Ohms) Maximum discharge (A) Short Circuit current (A) Dimensions (mm) Length Width Height overall Weight (Kg) Terminal Layout Terminal Torque Nm
NP7-12
7 6.4 5.9 4.2 12 91 32 25 40/75 210
151 65 97.5 2.65 A/D 4 -
Q-Pulse Idw: TMwS1w96 .yuasabatteries.com 26/11/2012
NP
Page 265 of 382
Data Sheet WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
NP SERIES - NP7-12
Lead Calcium Grids
The heavy duty lead calcium alloy grids provide an extra margin of performance and life in both cyclic and float applications and give unparalleled recovery from deep discharge.
Long Cycle Service Life
Depending upon the average depth of discharge, over a thousand discharge/charge cycles can be expected.
Float Service Life
The expected service life is five years in float standby applications.
Separators
The use of the special separator material provides a very efficient insulation between plates preventing inter-plate short circuits and prohibiting the shedding of active materials.
Long shelf Life
The extremely low self discharge rate allows the battery to be stored for extended periods up to one year at normal ambient temperatures with no permanent loss of capacity.
Operating Temperature Range
The batteries can be used over a broad temperature range permitting considerable flexibility in system design and location.
Charge 15°C to 50°C Discharge 20°C to 60°C Storage 20°C to 50°C (fully charged battery)
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Yuasa Battery Inc.
2901 Montrose Ave Laureldale, PA 19605 www.yuasabatteries.com
Registered number 1548820
Cat. No. NP7-12 January 0286/11/2012
Distributed by
Page 266 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual J & P Richardson Industries Pty Ltd
4.8 ACCESSORIES Wavecom GSM - Modem Trio Datacom DR900-06A02-D0 - Radio Powerbox VTA12SC24 24v/13.8VDC Converter (Radio) Innovative Energies IE XR/MV-8 24v/9VDC Converter (GSM) RF Industries TLA2000 - Antenna Trio Datacom Yagi Ant13al - Antenna
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Revision 0
26/11/2012
Date: 2 July 2012
Page 267 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Plug and Play Wireless CPU®
FASTRACK Supreme User Guide
Reference: WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001 Revision: 001e Date: 5 june, 2007
Supports Open AT® embedded ANSI C applications
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 1 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 268 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Document History
Revision 001 001a 001b 001c 001d 001e
Date 9 February, 07 23 February, 2007
21 May, 07 1 Jun, 07 4 Jun, 07 5 Jun, 07
List of revisions First Issue Update DC cable GPIO mapping, add AutoShutDown Add detail of IES, RTC and serial port autoshutdown Change to Quad Band Update label/packaging photo Comment
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 2 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 269 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Overview
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
The FASTRACK Supreme 10 and FASTRACK Supreme 20 are discrete, rugged cellular Plug & Play Wireless CPU® offering state-of-the-art GSM/GPRS (and EGPRS for FASTRACK Supreme 20) connectivity for machine to machine applications.
Proven for reliable, stable performance on wireless networks worldwide, Wavecom's latest generation of FASTRACK Supreme continues to deliver rapid time to market and painless integration.
Having comparable size with the previous M1306B generation, and updated with new features, the FASTRACK Supreme offers an Internal Expansion Socket (IES) interface accessible for customer use. Expanding application features is easy without voiding the warrantee of the FASTRACK Supreme by simply plugging in of an Internal Expansion Socket Module (IESM) board.
Fully certified, the quad band 850/900/1800/1900 MHz FASTRACK Supreme 10 offers GPRS Class 10 capability and FASTRACK Supreme 20 offers GPRS/EGPRS Class 10 capability. Both support a powerful open software platform (Open AT®). Open AT® is the world's most comprehensive cellular development environment, which allows embedded standard ANSI C applications to be natively executed directly on the Wireless CPU®.
FASTRACK Supreme is controlled by firmware through a set of AT commands.
This document describes the FASTRACK Supreme and gives information on the following topics:
· general presentation,
· functional description,
· basic services available,
· technical characteristics,
· installing and using the FASTRACK Supreme,
· user-level troubleshooting.
· recommended accessories to be used with the product.
Note:
This document covers the FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play alone and does not include The programmable capabilities provided via the use of Open AT® Software Suites. The development guide for IESM for expanding the application feature through the IES interface.
For detailed, please refer to the documents shown in the "Reference documents" section.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 3 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 270 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
RoHS Directive
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
The FASTRACK Supreme is now compliant with RoHS Directive 2002/95/EC, which sets limits for the use of certain restricted hazardous substances. This directive states that "from 1st July 2006, new electrical and electronic equipment put on the market does not contain lead, mercury, cadmium, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls (PBB), and polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDE)".
Plug & Plays which are compliant with this directive are identified by the RoHS logo on their label.
Disposing of the product
This electronic product is subject to the EU Directive 2002/96/EC for Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE). As such, this product must not be disposed off at a municipal waste collection point. Please refer to local regulations for directions on how to dispose off this product in an environmental friendly manner.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 4 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 271 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Cautions
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Information furnished herein by WAVECOM is accurate and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for its use. Please read carefully the safety recommendations given in Section 9 for an application based on FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play.
Trademarks
®, WAVECOM®, Wireless CPU®, Open AT® and certain other trademarks and logos appearing on this document, are filed or registered trademarks of Wavecom S.A. in France or in other countries. All other company and/or product names mentioned may be filed or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Copyright
This manual is copyrighted by WAVECOM with all rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the prior written permission of WAVECOM. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of their respective owners.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 5 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 272 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Web Site Support
General information about Wavecom and its range of products:
Specific support is available for the FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play Wireless CPU®: Open AT® Introduction:
Developer community for software and hardware:
www.wavecom.com TBD www.wavecom.com/OpenAT www.wavecom.com/forum
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 6 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 273 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Contents
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
DOCUMENT HISTORY ......................................................................................................................................2
OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................................................3
CAUTIONS .........................................................................................................................................................5
TRADEMARKS ..................................................................................................................................................5
COPYRIGHT ......................................................................................................................................................5
WEB SITE SUPPORT ........................................................................................................................................6
CONTENTS ........................................................................................................................................................7
LIST OF FIGURES ...........................................................................................................................................11
LIST OF TABLES.............................................................................................................................................12
1 REFERENCES .........................................................................................................................................13
1.1 Reference Documents.........................................................................................................................13
1.1.1
Open AT® Software Documentation ..........................................................................................13
1.1.2
AT Software Documentation......................................................................................................13
1.1.3
Firmware Upgrade Documents..................................................................................................13
1.1.4
Delta between M1306B Documents..........................................................................................13
1.1.5
IESM Related Documents .........................................................................................................13
1.2 Abbreviations .......................................................................................................................................14
2 PACKAGING ............................................................................................................................................17
2.1 Contents ..............................................................................................................................................17 2.2 Packaging Box.....................................................................................................................................18 2.3 Production Labelling ............................................................................................................................19
3 GENERAL PRESENTATION ...................................................................................................................20
3.1 Description...........................................................................................................................................20
3.2 External Connections ..........................................................................................................................22
3.2.1
Connectors ................................................................................................................................22
3.2.1.1
Antenna Connector ............................................................................................................22
3.2.1.2
Power Supply Connector ...................................................................................................22
3.2.1.3
Sub HD 15-pin Connector..................................................................................................23
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 7 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 274 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
3.2.1.4
IES Connector....................................................................................................................25
3.2.2
Power supply cable ...................................................................................................................29
4 FEATURES AND SERVICES...................................................................................................................31
4.1 Basic Features and Services...............................................................................................................31
4.2 Additional NEW Features ....................................................................................................................34
4.2.1
Support Additional GSM850/PCS1900 Bands ..........................................................................34
4.2.2
IES Interface for Easy Expansion of Application Features........................................................34
4.2.3
Serial Port Auto Shut Down or Improving Power Consumption ................................................34
4.2.4
Real Time Clock (RTC) for Saving Date and Time ...................................................................34
4.2.5
SIM Card Lock Feature .............................................................................................................35
5 USING THE FASTRACK SUPREME PLUG & PLAY .............................................................................36
5.1 Getting Started.....................................................................................................................................36
5.1.1
Mount the FASTRACK Supreme...............................................................................................36
5.1.2
Set up the FASTRACK Supreme ..............................................................................................36
5.1.3
Check the communication with the FASTRACK Supreme........................................................37
5.1.4
Reset the FASTRACK Supreme ...............................................................................................37
5.2 Specific Recommendations when Using the FASTRACK Supreme on Trucks ..................................38
5.2.1
Recommended Power Supply Connection on Trucks...............................................................38
5.2.2
Technical Constraints on Trucks ...............................................................................................38
5.3 FASTRACK Supreme Operational Status...........................................................................................39
5.4 Echo Function Disabled.......................................................................................................................40
5.5 Verify the Received Signal Strength....................................................................................................41
5.6 Check the Pin Code Status .................................................................................................................41
5.7 Switch between EU/US Band(s)..........................................................................................................41
5.8 Check the Band(s) Selection ...............................................................................................................42
5.9 Verify the FASTRACK Supreme Network Registration .......................................................................43
5.10 Main AT Commands for the Plug & Play .............................................................................................44
5.11 Firmware Upgrade Procedure .............................................................................................................45
6 TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................................................................................................46
6.1 No Communication with the FASTRACK Supreme through the Serial Link .......................................46 6.2 Receiving "ERROR" Message.............................................................................................................46 6.3 Receiving "NO CARRIER" Message ...................................................................................................47
7 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................50
7.1 Architecture..........................................................................................................................................50
7.2 EU and US Bands................................................................................................................................51
7.2.1
General Presentation.................................................................................................................51
7.2.2
AT COMMAND for Bands Switch ..............................................................................................51
7.3 Power Supply.......................................................................................................................................51
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 8 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 275 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
7.3.1 7.3.2
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001 General Presentation.................................................................................................................51 Protections.................................................................................................................................51
7.4 RS232 Serial Link ................................................................................................................................51
7.4.1
General Presentation.................................................................................................................51
7.4.2
Autobauding Mode ....................................................................................................................52
7.4.3
Pin Description...........................................................................................................................53
7.4.4
Serial Port Auto shut down Feature ..........................................................................................53
7.5 General Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) ................................................................................................54
7.6 BOOT...................................................................................................................................................54
7.7 RESET.................................................................................................................................................54
7.7.1
General presentation .................................................................................................................54
7.7.2
Reset Sequence ........................................................................................................................55
7.8 Audio....................................................................................................................................................56
7.8.1
Microphone Inputs .....................................................................................................................56
7.8.2
Speaker Outputs........................................................................................................................57
7.9 Real Time Clock (RTC) .......................................................................................................................58
7.10 FLASH LED 58
8 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS..........................................................................................................59
8.1 Mechanical Characteristics..................................................................................................................59
8.2 Electrical Characteristics .....................................................................................................................61
8.2.1
Power Supply.............................................................................................................................61
8.2.2
Power Consumption ..................................................................................................................62
8.2.3
Audio Interface ..........................................................................................................................65
8.2.4
General Purpose Input/Output...................................................................................................66
8.2.5
SIM Interface .............................................................................................................................66
8.2.6
RESET Signal............................................................................................................................66
8.2.7
RF Characteristics .....................................................................................................................67
8.2.7.1
Frequency Ranges.............................................................................................................67
8.2.7.2
RF Performances...............................................................................................................68
8.2.7.3
External Antenna ...............................................................................................................69
8.3 Environmental Characteristics.............................................................................................................69
8.4 Conformity ...........................................................................................................................................72
8.5 Protections...........................................................................................................................................72
8.5.1
Power Supply.............................................................................................................................72
8.5.2
Overvoltage ...............................................................................................................................73
8.5.3
Electrostatic Discharge..............................................................................................................73
8.5.4
Miscellaneous ............................................................................................................................73
9 SAFETY RECOMMENDATIONS .............................................................................................................74
9.1 General Safety.....................................................................................................................................74 9.2 Vehicle Safety......................................................................................................................................74 9.3 Care and Maintenance ........................................................................................................................75 9.4 Your Responsibility ..............................................................................................................................75
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 9 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 276 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001 10 RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES..........................................................................................................76 11 ONLINE SUPPORT ..................................................................................................................................77
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 10 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 277 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
List of Figures
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Figure 1: Complete package contents..............................................................................................................17 Figure 2: Packaging box...................................................................................................................................18 Figure 3: Production Label ...............................................................................................................................19 Figure 4: FASTRACK Supreme general description ........................................................................................20 Figure 5: FASTRACK Supreme holding bridles ...............................................................................................21 Figure 6: SMA connector for antenna connection ............................................................................................22 Figure 7: Power supply connector ....................................................................................................................23 Figure 8: Sub HD 15-pin connector ..................................................................................................................24 Figure 9: IES connector for feature expansion.................................................................................................26 Figure 10: Power supply cable .........................................................................................................................29 Figure 11: SIM card lock feature ......................................................................................................................35 Figure 12: FASTRACK Supreme mounting......................................................................................................36 Figure 13: Recommended power supply connection on trucks........................................................................38 Figure 14: Example of electrical connection which may dramatically damage the FASTRACK Supreme ......39 Figure 15: Functional architecture ....................................................................................................................50 Figure 16: RS232 Serial Link signals ...............................................................................................................52 Figure 17: Reset sequence diagram ................................................................................................................56 Figure 18: Dimensioning diagram.....................................................................................................................60
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 11 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 278 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
List of Tables
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
.
Table 1: Power supply connector pin description.............................................................................................23 Table 2: Sub HD 15-pin connector description.................................................................................................24 Table 3: IES Connector Description .................................................................................................................27 Table 4: Basic features of the FASTRACK Supreme.......................................................................................31 Table 5: FASTRACK Supreme operational status ...........................................................................................40 Table 6: Values of received signal strength .....................................................................................................41 Table 7: AT+CPIN Responses .........................................................................................................................41 Table 8: AT+WMBS Band Selection ................................................................................................................42 Table 9: AT+WMBS Responses.......................................................................................................................42 Table 10: Values of network registration ..........................................................................................................43 Table 11: Main usual AT commands for the Plug & Play .................................................................................44 Table 12: Solutions for no connection with FASTRACK Supreme through serial link .....................................46 Table 13: Solutions for "NO CARRIER" message............................................................................................48 Table 14: Interpretation of extended error code ...............................................................................................49 Table 15: Mechanical characteristics ...............................................................................................................59 Table 16: Electrical characteristics ...................................................................................................................61 Table 17: Effects of power supply defect..........................................................................................................61 Table 18: Power consumption (1*) ...................................................................................................................62 Table 19: Audio parameters caracteristics .......................................................................................................65 Table 20: Microphone inputs internal audio filter characteristics .....................................................................65 Table 21: Recommended characteristics for the microphone: .........................................................................65 Table 22: Recommended characteristics for the speaker: ...............................................................................66 Table 23: Operating conditions.........................................................................................................................66 Table 24: SIM card characteristics ...................................................................................................................66 Table 25: Electrical characteristics ...................................................................................................................66 Table 26: Operating conditions.........................................................................................................................67 Table 27: Frequency ranges.............................................................................................................................67 Table 28: Receiver and transmitter RF performances .....................................................................................68 Table 29: External antenna characteristics ......................................................................................................69 Table 30: Ranges of temperature.....................................................................................................................69 Table 31: Environmental standard constraints .................................................................................................70 Table 32: List of recommended accessories....................................................................................................76
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 12 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 279 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
1 References
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
References
1.1 Reference Documents
For more details, several reference documents may be consulted. The Wavecom reference documents are provided in the Wavecom documents package contrary to the general reference documents, which are not Wavecom owned.
1.1.1 Open AT® Software Documentation [1] Getting started with Open AT® (Ref.WM_ASW_OAT_CTI_001) [2] Open AT® Tutorial (Ref.WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_001) [3] Tools Manual (Ref. WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_003) [4] Open AT® Programming Guide (Ref. TBD) [5] Open AT® Customer Release Note (Ref. WM_ASW_OAT_DVD_00062) Remark: The document above is for Open AT3.12 and FASTRACK Supreme will use new release of Open AT4.21. Reference document not yet available and TBC.
1.1.2 AT Software Documentation [6] AT commands interface Guide for X51 (Ref. WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_00016) [7] Customer Release Note X51 (Ref. WM_ASW_OAT_DVD_00120) Remark: The document above is for X51 and FASTRACK Supreme will use new release of FW6.63. Reference document not yet available and TBC.
1.1.3 Firmware Upgrade Documents [8] Firmware upgrade procedure (Ref. WM_SW_GEN_UGD_001)
1.1.4 Delta between M1306B Documents [9] Delta between M1306B and FASTRACK Supreme (Ref. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_004)
1.1.5 IESM Related Documents [10] IESM Product Technical Specification (Ref. WA_DEV_Fastrk_PTS_001) [11] IESM-GPS+USB User Guide (Ref. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_002) [12] IESM-GPS+USB Installation Guide (Ref. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_003) [13] IESM-IO+USB Installation Guide (Ref. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_005) [14] IESM-IO+USB User Guide (Ref. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_006)
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 13 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 280 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
References Note: New versions of software may be available. Wavecom recommends customers to check the web site for the latest documentation.
1.2 Abbreviations
Abbreviation AC ACM AMR AT CLK CMOS CS CTS dB dBc dBi dBm DC DCD DCE DCS DSR DTE DTMF DTR EEPROM EFR E-GSM EMC EMI ESD ETSI FIT FR
Definition Alternating Current Accumulated Call Meter Adaptive Multi-Rate ATtention (prefix for Wireless CPU® commands) CLocK Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor Coding Scheme Clear To Send Decibel Decibel relative to the Carrier power Decibel relative to an Isotropic radiator Decibel relative to one milliwatt Direct Current Data Carrier Detect Data Communication Equipment Digital Cellular System Data Set Ready Data Terminal Equipment Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Data Terminal Ready Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory Enhanced Full Rate Extended GSM ElectroMagnetic Compatibility ElectroMagnetic Interference ElectroStatic Discharges European Telecommunications Standards Institute Series of connectors (micro-FIT) Full Rate
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 14 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 281 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Abbreviation FTA GCF GND GPIO GPRS GSM HR I IEC IES IESM IMEI I/O LED MAX ME MIC Micro-Fit MIN MNP MO MS MT NOM O Pa PBCCH PC PCL PDP PIN PLMN PUK RF
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
References Definition Full Type Approval Global Certification Forum GrouND General Purpose Input Output General Packet Radio Service Global System for Mobile communications Half Rate Input International Electrotechnical Commission Internal Expansion Socket Internal Expansion Socket Module International Mobile Equipment Identification Input / Output Light Emitting Diode MAXimum Mobile Equipment MICrophone Family of connectors from Molex MINimum Microcom Networking Protocol Mobile Originated Mobile Station Mobile Terminated NOMinal Output Pascal (for speaker sound pressure measurements) Packet Broadcast Control CHannel Personal Computer Power Control Level Packet Data Protocol Personal Identity Number Public Land Mobile Network Personal Unblocking Key Radio Frequency
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 15 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 282 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Abbreviation RFI RI RMS RTS RX SIM SMA SMS SNR SPL SPK SRAM TCP/IP TDMA TU TUHigh TX TYP VSWR
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
References Definition Radio Frequency Interference Ring Indicator Root Mean Square Request To Send Receive Subscriber Identification Module SubMiniature version A RF connector Short Message Service Signal-to-Noise Ratio Sound Pressure Level SpeaKer Static RAM Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol Time Division Multiple Access Typical Urban fading profile Typical Urban, High speed fading profile Transmit TYPical Voltage Stationary Wave Ratio
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 16 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 283 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
2 Packaging
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Packaging
2.1 Contents
The complete package content of the FASTRACK Supreme consists of (see): · one packaging box (A), · one FASTRACK Supreme (B), · two holding bridles (C), · one power supply cable with fuse integrated (D) · a mini notice (E) with: a summary of the main technical features, safety recommendations, EC declaration of conformity.
Figure 1: Complete package contents
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 17 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 284 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
2.2 Packaging Box
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Packaging
The packaging box is a carton box (see) with the following external dimensions: · width: 54.5 mm, · height: 68 mm, · length: 108 mm.
A packaging label is slicked on the packaging box cover and supports the: · WAVECOM logo, · Product reference (Supreme), · CE marking · 15-digit IMEI code · Open AT® Logo · RoHS logo · WEEE logo
The packaging label dimensions are: · height: 40 mm, · length: 65 mm.
Figure 2: Packaging box
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 18 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 285 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Packaging
2.3 Production Labelling
A production label (see Figure 3) located at the FASTRACK Supreme back side gives the following information:
· product reference (FASTRACK Supreme 10 or FASTRACK Supreme 20), · part number (WM19183), · CE marking, · 15-digit IMEI code, · OpenAT® logo
Figure 3: Production Label
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 19 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 286 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
3 General Presentation
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
General Presentation
3.1 Description
The FASTRACK Supreme description is given in the Figure 4 below.
Micro-Fit connector
Screw for Back Plate Back Plate
SIM card inside SIM connector Lock switch of SIM
connector
IES connector for expanding feature, like GPS, USB, I/O expander... Refer to Section 3.2.1.4
Removed Screw for Back Plate
Sub HD connector
SMA connector
Back Cap GSM LED Indicator
Back Cap with 5 screws
Removed Back Plate
Figure 4: FASTRACK Supreme general description
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 20 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 287 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
General Presentation CAUTION: Users are free to remove the back plate for IESM board plug in/unplug without voiding the warrantee of the FASTRACK Supreme. However, the warrantee will be voided if unscrewing any screw of the back cap. In addition, two holding bridles are provided to tighten the FASTRACK Supreme on a support.
Holding bridles Figure 5: FASTRACK Supreme holding bridles
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 21 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 288 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
3.2 External Connections
3.2.1 Connectors
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
General Presentation
3.2.1.1 Antenna Connector The antenna connector is a SMA type connector for a 50 RF connection.
SMA connector for antenna connection
Figure 6: SMA connector for antenna connection
3.2.1.2 Power Supply Connector The power supply connector is a 4-pin Micro FIT connector for:
· external DC Power Supply connection, · GPIOs connection (two General Purpose Input/Output signals available).
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 22 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 289 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
1
2
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
General Presentation
3
4
Figure 7: Power supply connector
Table 1: Power supply connector pin description
Pin # Signal I/O 1 V+BATTERY I
I/O type
Power supply
Description
Battery voltage input: 5.5 V Min. 13.2 V Typ. 32 V Max.
Reset State
Comment High current
2
GND
Power supply
Ground
3
GPIO21 I/O
2V8
General Purpose Input/output Undefined
Not mux
4
GPIO25 I/O
2V8
General Purpose Input/output
Z
Multiplex with INT1
Warning:
Both pin 3 and pin 4 are used by GPIO interface. It is strictly prohibited to connect them to any power supply at the risk of damage to the FASTRACK Supreme.
3.2.1.3 Sub HD 15-pin Connector
The Sub D high density 15-pin connector is used for: · RS232 serial link connection, · Audio lines (microphone and speaker) connection, · BOOT and RESET signal connection.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 23 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 290 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
General Presentation
54321 10 9 8 7 6 15 14 13 12 11
Figure 8: Sub HD 15-pin connector
Pin # 1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8 9
Table 2: Sub HD 15-pin connector description
Signal (CCITT / EIA) CDCD/CT109
CTXD/CT103
BOOT
I/O
I/O type
O STANDARD
RS232
I STANDARD
RS232
I
CMOS
Description
RS232 Data Carrier Detect
RS232 Transmit serial data
Boot
CMIC2P CMIC2N CRXD/CT104 CDSR/CT107 CDTR/CT108-2
GND
I
Analog
I
Analog
O STANDARD
RS232
O STANDARD
RS232
I STANDARD
RS232
-
GND
Microphone positive line Microphone negative line
RS232 Receive serial data
RS232 Data Set Ready
RS232 Data Terminal Ready
Ground
Comment
This signal must not be connected. Its use is strictly reserved to Wavecom or competent retailers.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 24 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 291 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Pin # 10 11 12 13 14 15
Signal (CCITT / EIA)
CSPK2P CCTS/CT106
CRTS/CT105
CRI/CT125
RESET CSPK2N
I/O
I/O type
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
General Presentation
Description
Comment
O
Analog
Speaker positive line
O STANDARD RS232
RS232 Clear To Send
I STANDARD RS232
RS232 Request To Send
O STANDARD RS232
RS232 Ring Indicator
I/O
Schmitt
Supreme Plug & Play reset Active low
O
Analog
Speaker negative line
3.2.1.4 IES Connector
The IES connector is a 50 pins board-to-board connector for expanding application features like GPS, USB, I/O expander... Currently there are already 3 IESM boards available for customer to expand the FASTRACK Supreme features immediately. They are:
IESM-GPS+USB+I/O IESM-GPS+USB IESM-USB+I/O
For detail, please refer to Document in Section 1.1.5.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 25 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 292 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
General Presentation For sales and support, please contact Wavecom sales/FAE or your distributor.
Pin 2 Pin 1
Pin 50 Pin 49
Figure 9: IES connector for feature expansion
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 26 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 293 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
General Presentation
Pin Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal Name
Nominal
Mux
GND
GND
GPIO4
COL0
GPIO5
COL1
GPIO6
COL2
GPIO7
COL3
VPAD-USB
USB-DP
USB-DM
10
GSM-1V8*
11
GSM-2V8*
12
BOOT
13
~RESET
14
AUX-ADC
15
~SPI1-CS GPIO31
16
SPI1-CLK GPIO32
17
SPI1-I
GPIO30
18
SPI1-IO
GPIO29
19
SPI2-CLK GPIO32
20
SPI2-IO
GPIO33
21
~SPI2-CS GPIO35
22
SPI2-I
GPIO34
23
CT104RXD2
GPIO15
24
CT103-TXD2 GPIO14
25
~CT106CTS2
GPIO16
26
~CT105RTS2
GPIO17
Table 3: IES Connector Description
I/O type
Voltage
I/O*
Reset State
Description
Dealing with unused pins
Ground
Ground
C8
GSM-1V8
I/O
Pull-up
Keypad column 0
NC
C8
GSM-1V8
I/O
Pull-up
Keypad column 1
NC
C8
GSM-1V8
I/O
Pull-up
Keypad column 2
NC
C8
GSM-1V8
I/O
Pull-up
Keypad column 3
NC
VPAD-USB
I
USB Power supply input
NC
VPAD-USB I/O
USB Data
NC
VPAD-USB I/O
GSM-1V8
O
GSM-1V8
O
GSM-1V8
I
C4
GSM-1V8
I/O
A2
Analog
I
C1
GSM-2V8
O
C1
GSM-2V8
O
C1
GSM-2V8
I
C1
GSM-2V8
I/O
C1
GSM-2V8
O
C1
GSM-2V8
I/O
C1
GSM-2V8
O
C1
GSM-2V8
I
C1
GSM-1V8
O
C1
GSM-1V8
I
C1
GSM-1V8
O
C1
GSM-1V8
I
USB Data
NC
1.8V Supply Output (for GPIO pull-up only)
2.8V Supply Output (for GPIO pull-up only)
Not Used
NC
NC
Add a test point / a jumper/ a switch to VCC_1V8 (Pin 10) in case Download Specific mode is used (See product specification for details)
RESET Input
NC or add a test point
Analog to Digital Input
Pull to GND
Z
SPI1 Chip Select
NC
Z
SPI1 Clock
NC
Z
SPI1 Data Input
NC
Z
SPI1 Data Input / Output
NC
Z
SPI2 Clock
NC
Z
SPI2 Data Input / Output
NC
Z
SPI2 Chip Select
NC
Z
SPI2 Data Input
NC
Z
Auxiliary RS232 Receive
Add a test point for firmware upgrade
(TXD2) Pull-up to
Z
Auxiliary RS232 Transmit
VCC_1V8 with 100k and add a test point for
firmware update
Z
Auxiliary RS232 Clear To (CTS2) Add a test point
Send
for firmware update
Z
Auxiliary RS232 Request
(RTS2) Pull-up to
To Send
VCC_1V8 with 100k and
add a test point for
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 27 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 294 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Pin Number
Signal Name
Nominal
Mux
27
GPIO8
COL4
28
GPIO26
SCL
29
GPIO19
30
GPIO27
SDA
31
GPIO20
32
INT0
GPIO3
33
GPIO23
**
34
GPIO22
**
35
~CT108-2DTR1
GPIO41
36
PCM-SYNC
37
PCM-IN
38
PCM-CLK
39
PCM-OUT
40
AUX-DAC
41
VCC-2V8
42
GND
43
DC-IN
44
DC-IN
45
GND
46
4V
47
4V
48
GND
49
GND
50
GND
I/O type
C8 A1 C1 A1 C1 C1
C1 C1 C1
C5
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
General Presentation
Voltage
I/O*
Reset State
Description
Dealing with unused pins
GSM-1V8
I/O
Pull-up
Keypad column 4
firmware update NC
Open Drain
O
Z
I²C Clock
NC
GSM-2V8
I/O
Z
NC
Open Drain I/O
Z
I²C Data
NC
GSM-2V8
I/O Undefined
GSM-1V8
I
Z
Interruption 0 Input
GSM-2V8
I/O
Z
NC
If INT0 is not used, it should be configured as
GPIO
NC
GSM-2V8 GSM-2V8 GSM-1V8
I/O
Z
I
Z
O Pull-down
Main RS232 Data Terminal Ready
PCM Frame Synchro
NC
(DTR1) Pull-up to VCC_2V8 with 100k
NC
GSM-1V8
I
Pull-up
PCM Data Input
NC
GSM-1V8
O Pull-down
PCM Clock
NC
GSM-1V8
O
Pull-up
PCM Data Output
NC
Analog
O
Digital to Analog Output
NC
VCC_2V8
O
LDO 2.8V Supply Output
NC
DC-IN from 5.5V~32VDC
O
DC-IN from 5.5V~32VDC
O
Ground
DC voltage input through Micro-Fit connector
NC
DC voltage input through Micro-Fit connector
NC
Ground
4V
O
4V
O
4V DC/DC converter Output
NC
4V DC/DC converter Output
NC
Ground
Ground
Ground
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 28 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 295 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
3.2.2 Power supply cable
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
General Presentation
Figure 10: Power supply cable
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 29 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 296 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Component Micro-Fit connector 4-pin
Cable
Wire
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
General Presentation
Characteristics Part number: MOLEX 43025-0400
Cable length: 1.5 m Core: tinned copper 24 x 0.2 mm Section: 0.75 mm2
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 30 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 297 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
4 Features and Services
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Features and Services
4.1 Basic Features and Services
Basic features of the FASTRACK Supreme and available services are summarized in the table below.
Table 4: Basic features of the FASTRACK Supreme
Features Open AT®
GSM850 / GSM900
DCS1800 / PCS1900
Open AT® programmable:
Native execution of embedded standard ANSI C applications,
Custom AT command creation,
Custom application library creation, Standalone operation.
Standard
850MHz / 900 MHz.
1800 MHz / 1900MHz
E-GSM compliant.
Output power: class 4 (2W).
Output power: class 1 (1W).
Fully compliant with ETSI GSM phase 2 + Fully compliant with ETSI GSM phase 2 +
small MS.
small MS.
GPRS
Class 10.
PBCCH support.
Coding schemes: CS1 to CS4.
Compliant with SMG31bis.
Embedded TCP/IP stack.
EGPRS
Output power: 0.5W
Output power: 0.4W
(for
Class 10.
FASTRACK Supreme 20
PBCCH support.
only)
Coding schemes: MCS1 to MCS9.
Compliant with SMG31bis.
Embedded TCP/IP stack.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 31 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 298 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Features Interfaces
SMS Data
Fax Audio
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Features and Services
GSM850 / GSM900
DCS1800 / PCS1900
RS232 (V.24/V.28) Serial interface supporting:
Baud rate (bits/s): 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, 230400, 460800 and 921600.
Autobauding (bits/s): from 1200 to 921600.
2 General Purpose Input/Output gates (GPIOs) available.
1.8 V / 3 V SIM interface.
AT command set based on V.25ter and GSM 07.05 & 07.07. Open AT® interface for embedded application. Open AT® Plug-In Compatible.
Text & PDU.
Point to point (MT/MO).
Cell broadcast.
Data circuit asynchronous.
Transparent and Non Transparent modes.
Up to 14.400 bits/s.
MNP Class 2 error correction.
V42.bis data compression.
Automatic fax group 3 (class 1 and Class 2).
Echo cancellation
Noise reduction
Telephony.
Emergency calls.
Full Rate, Enhanced Full Rate, Half Rate operation and Adaptive Multi-Rate (FR/EFR/HR/AMR).
Dual Tone Multi Frequency function (DTMF).
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 32 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 299 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Features
GSM850 / GSM900
GSM supplement services
Call forwarding. Call barring. Multiparty.
Call waiting and call hold.
Calling line identity.
Advice of charge.
USSD
Other
DC power supply
Real Time Clock with calendar
Complete shielding For other detailed technical characteristics, refer to Section 8.
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Features and Services DCS1800 / PCS1900
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 33 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 300 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
4.2 Additional NEW Features
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Features and Services
4.2.1 Support Additional GSM850/PCS1900 Bands Apart from GSM900/DCS1800, the FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play now supports also the GSM850/PCS1900 bands. FASTRACK Supreme is fully compliant to PTCRB and FCC also.
4.2.2 IES Interface for Easy Expansion of Application Features The FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play offers a 50 pin Internal Expansion Socket (IES) Interface accessible for customer use. It is the additional interface which is easy for customers to expand their application features without voiding the warrantee of the FASTRACK Supreme, by simply plugging in an Internal Expansion Socket Module (IESM) board through the matting connector of the IES interface. Thanks to the flexible IES interface, customers are ready to expand the application features by plugging in the corresponding Internal Expansion Socket Module (IESM) of GPS, I/O expander..., etc. For brief description of the interface, please refer to Section 3.2.1.4. For technical detail, please refer to Document [11] or contact your Wavecom distributor or Wavecom FAE.
4.2.3 Serial Port Auto Shut Down or Improving Power Consumption In order to save power consumption when there is no data communication between the Plug & Play and the DTE, FASTRACK Supreme has now implement the Serial Port Auto Shut Down feature. User can activate or deactivate the Serial Port Auto Shut Down mode by simple AT-command. For detail, please refer to Section 7.3.4.
4.2.4 Real Time Clock (RTC) for Saving Date and Time The FASTRACK Supreme has now implemented the Real Time Clock for saving date and time when the Plug & Play is unplugged from the DC power supply through the DC power cable. For detail, please refer to Section 7.8.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 34 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 301 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Features and Services 4.2.5 SIM Card Lock Feature The FASTRACK Supreme has now implemented a SIM connector having a carrier with lock. This helps ensuring the user to have proper SIM card insertion and locked before proper use of GSM network.
SIM card is inserted but not locked. GSM network is SIM card is inserted and being locked properly. not ready for use. Only emergency call 112 is GSM network is ready for use. possible.
Figure 11: SIM card lock feature
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 35 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 302 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Using the FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play
5 Using the FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play
5.1 Getting Started
5.1.1 Mount the FASTRACK Supreme To mount the FASTRACK Supreme on its support, bind it using the holding bridles as shown in the Figure 12 below.
Figure 12: FASTRACK Supreme mounting
For the drill template, refer to Figure 18.
5.1.2 Set up the FASTRACK Supreme To set up the FASTRACK Supreme, perform the following operations:
· Insert the SIM card into the SIM card holder of the FASTRACK Supreme. · Lock the SIM card by sliding the lever towards the SIM card. · Connect the antenna to the SMA connector. · Connect both sides of the serial and control cable (15-pin Sub HD connector on the FASTRACK
Supreme side). · Connect the power supply cable to the external power supply source. Note: For automotive application, it is recommended to connect the V+BATTERY line of the FASTRACK Supreme directly to the battery positive terminal. · Plug the power supply cable into the FASTRACK Supreme and switch on the external power supply
source. · The FASTRACK Supreme is ready to work. Refer to Section 5.10 for the description of AT
commands used to configure the FASTRACK Supreme.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 36 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 303 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Using the FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play 5.1.3 Check the communication with the FASTRACK Supreme To check the communication with the FASTRACK Supreme, do the following operations:
· Connect the RS232 link between the DTE (port COM) and the FASTRACK Supreme (DCE). · Configure the RS232 port of the DTE as follows:
Bits per second: 115.200 bps, Data bits: 8, Parity: None, Stop bits: 1, Flow control: hardware.
· Using a communication software such as a HyperTerminal, enter the AT command. The response of the FASTRACK Supreme must be OK displayed in the HyperTerminal window.
· If the communication cannot be established with the FASTRACK Supreme, do the following: Check the RS232 connection between the DTE and the FASTRACK Supreme (DCE), Check the configuration of the port COM used on the DTE.
· Example of AT commands which can be used after getting started the FASTRACK Supreme:
AT+CGMI: FASTRACK Supreme answer is "WAVECOM MODEM" when serial
link is OK.
AT+CPIN=xxxx: to enter a PIN code xxxx (if activated). AT+CSQ: to verify the received signal strength. AT+CREG?: to verify the registration of the FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play on
the network.
ATD<phone number>;: to initiate a voice call. ATH: to hang up (end of call).
For further information on these AT commands and their associated parameters, refer to "AT Commands Interface Guide" [6].
5.1.4 Reset the FASTRACK Supreme
To reset the FASTRACK Supreme, a hardware reset signal is available on pin 14 of the Sub HD 15-pin connector (RESET).
The FASTRACK Supreme reset is carried out when this pin is low for at least 200 s.
Warning This signal has to be considered as an emergency reset only. For further details on the FASTRACK Supreme reset, refer to Section 7.7.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 37 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 304 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Using the FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play
5.2 Specific Recommendations when Using the FASTRACK Supreme on Trucks
Warning: The power supply connection of the FASTRACK Supreme must NEVER be directly connected to the truck battery. 5.2.1 Recommended Power Supply Connection on Trucks All trucks have a circuit breaker on the exterior of the cabin. The circuit breaker is used for safety reasons: if a fire blazes in the trucks, (for example, on the wiring trunk) the driver may cut the current source to avoid any damage (explosion). The circuit breaker is connected to the truck ground, most often associated with the fuse box. Most of truck circuit breakers do not cut the Positive Supply line of the battery, but cut the ground line of the later.
FASTRACK Suprem e
Figure 13: Recommended power supply connection on trucks
Figure 13 gives the recommended power supply connection where the ground connection of the FASTRACK Supreme is not directly connected to the battery but is connected after the Circuit Breaker (on the truck ground or the fuse box).
5.2.2 Technical Constraints on Trucks
It is highly not recommended to connect directly the power supply on the battery rather than on the circuit breaker. The FASTRACK Supreme may be damaged when starting the truck if the circuit breaker is switched OFF (in this case, the truck ground and the battery ground will be connected through the FASTRACK Supreme as shown in the figure below).
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 38 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 305 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Using the FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play
FASTRACK Supreme
Figure 14: Example of electrical connection which may dramatically damage the FASTRACK Supreme
Figure 14 gives an example of electrical connection which may dramatically damage the FASTRACK Supreme when its ground connection is directly connected to the battery ground. In this example, when the circuit breaker is switched OFF, the current flows through the FASTRACK Supreme and powers the electrical circuit of the truck (for example, dashboard). Furthermore, when the Starter Engine command will be used, it will destroy the cables or the FASTRACK Supreme. Since the internal tracks are not designed to support high current (up to 60 A when starting the truck), they will be destroyed.
5.3 FASTRACK Supreme Operational Status
The FASTRACK Supreme operational status is given by the red LED status located next to the SIM connector on the FASTRACK Supreme panel. The Table 5 below gives the meaning of the various statuses available.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 39 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 306 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Using the FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play Table 5: FASTRACK Supreme operational status
LED Status
LED light activity
FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play status
ON
LED ON permanent
FASTRACK Supreme is switched ON but
not registered on the network
LED Flashing slowly
FASTRACK Supreme is switched ON and registered on the network, but no communication is in progress (Idle mode)
LED Flashing rapidly
FASTRACK Supreme is switched ON and registered on the network, and a communication is in progress
OFF
LED OFF
FASTRACK Supreme is switched OFF, or Flash LED is disabled* by the user.
* : Flash LED can be disabled by user when in Slow Standby mode in order to save power consumption. For detail, please refer to Section 7.9.
5.4 Echo Function Disabled
If no echo is displayed when entering an AT command, that means: · The "local echo" parameter of your communication software (such as HyperTerminal) is disabled. · The FASTRACK Supreme echo function is disabled.
To enable the FASTRACK Supreme echo function, enter the ATE1.
When sending AT commands to the FASTRACK Supreme by using a communication software, it is recommended:
· to disable the "local echo" parameter of your communication software (such as HyperTerminal),
· to enable the FASTRACK Supreme echo function (ATE1 command).
In a Machine To Machine communication with the FASTRACK Supreme, it is recommended to disable the
FASTRACK Supreme echo function (ATE0 command) in order to avoid useless CPU processing. For further information on ATE0 and ATE1 commands, refer to "AT Commands Interface Guide" [6].
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 40 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 307 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
5.5 Verify the Received Signal Strength
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Using the FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play
The FASTRACK Supreme establishes a call only if the received signal is sufficiently strong. To verify the received signal strength, do the following operations:
· Using a communication software such as HyperTerminal, enter the AT command AT+CSQ.
The response returned has the following format:
+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber> with:
· <rssi> = received signal strength indication,
· <ber> = channel bit error rate.
· Verify the <rssi> value returned using the Table 6 below.
Table 6: Values of received signal strength
Value of received signal strength indication (<rssi>)
0 - 10
Interpretation of the received signal strength
Insufficient(*)
11 - 31
Sufficient(*)
32 - 98 99
(*) Based on general observations.
Not defined No measure available
For further information on AT commands, refer to "AT Commands Interface Guide" [6].
5.6 Check the Pin Code Status
To check that the pin code has been entered, use a communication software such as a HyperTerminal, then
enter AT+CPIN? command.
The table below gives the main responses returned:
Table 7: AT+CPIN Responses
AT+CPIN response (*)
+CPIN: READY
Interpretation Code PIN has been entered
+CPIN: SIM PIN
Code PIN has not been entered
(*)For further information on the other possible responses and their meaning, refer to "AT Commands Interface Guide" [6].
5.7 Switch between EU/US Band(s)
To switch between EU/US band(s) for the FASTRACK Supreme, use a communication software such as a
HyperTerminal, then enter AT+WMBS=<band>[,<param>] command.
The table below gives the commands for various band(s) selection:
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 41 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 308 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Using the FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play Table 8: AT+WMBS Band Selection
AT+WMBS response (*)
AT+WMBS=0,x
Interpretation Select mono band mode 850MHz.
AT+WMBS=1,x AT+WMBS=2,x AT+WMBS=3,x AT+WMBS=4,x AT+WMBS=5,x
Select mono band mode extended 900MHz Select mono band mode 1800MHz Select mono band mode 1900MHz Select dual band mode 850/1900MHz Select dual band mode extended 900MHz/1800MHz
AT+WMBS=6,x
Select dual band mode extended 900MHz/1900MHz
(*)For further information on the other possible responses and their meaning, refer to "AT Commands Interface Guide" [6].
Remark:
x=0 : The Plug & Play will have to be reset to start on specified band(s).
x=1 : The change is effective immediately. This mode is forbidden while in communication and during
Plug & Play initialization. Refer to "AT Commands Interface Guide" [6] for further information on AT commands.
5.8 Check the Band(s) Selection
To check the band selection for the FASTRACK Supreme, use a communication software such as a
HyperTerminal, then enter AT+WMBS? command.
The table below gives the main responses returned:
Table 9: AT+WMBS Responses
AT+WMBS response (*)
+WMBS: 0,x
Interpretation Mono band mode 850MHz is selected
+WMBS: 1,x
Mono band mode extended 900MHz is selected
+WMBS: 2,x
Mono band mode 1800MHz is selected
+WMBS: 3,x
Mono band mode 1900MHz is selected
+WMBS: 4,x
Dual band mode 850/1900MHz are selected
+WMBS: 5,x
Dual band mode extended 900MHz/1800MHz are selected
+WMBS: 6,x
Dual band mode extended 900MHz/1900MHz are selected
(*)For further information on the other possible responses and their meaning, refer to "AT Commands Interface Guide" [6].
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 42 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 309 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Using the FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play
5.9 Verify the FASTRACK Supreme Network Registration
1. Make sure a valid SIM card has been previously inserted and locked in the FASTRACK Supreme SIM card holder.
2. Using a communication software such as a HyperTerminal, enter the following AT commands:
a. AT+CPIN=xxxx to enter PIN code xxxx.
b. AT+WMBS? To check the current band setting in the Plug & Play
c. AT+WMBS=<Band>[,<param>] To switch band/mode when needed
d. AT+CREG?. To ascertain the registration status.
The format of the returned response is as follows:
+CREG: <mode>,<stat> with:
· <mode> = unsolicited registration message configuration, · <stat> = registration state.
3. Verify the state of registration according the returned value given in the table below.
Table 10: Values of network registration
Returned Value (*)
Network registration
<mode>,<stat>
+CREG: 0,0
No (not registered)
+CREG: 0,1
Yes (registered, home network)
+CREG: 0,5
Yes (registered, roaming)
(*)For further information on the other returned values and their meaning, refer to "AT Commands Interface Guide" [6].
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 43 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 310 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Using the FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play
If the FASTRACK Supreme is not registered, perform the following procedure: · Check the connection between the FASTRACK Supreme and the antenna. · Verify the signal strength to determine the received signal strength (refer to Section 5.5).
Note: For information on AT command relating to the network registration in GPRS mode, and in particular: CGREG, CGCLASS, CGATT, refer to "AT Commands Interface Guide" [6].
5.10 Main AT Commands for the Plug & Play
The table below lists the main AT commands required for starting the Plug & Play.
For other AT commands available or further information on the AT commands, refer to "AT Commands Interface Guide" [6].
Table 11: Main usual AT commands for the Plug & Play
Description
AT commands
Check for selected AT+WMBS? band(s)
Band(s) switch
AT+WMBS=<Band>
AT+WMBS=<Band>,0
AT+WMBS=<Band>,1
Enter PIN Code
AT+WMBS=<Band> AT+CPIN=xxxx
(xxxx = PIN code)
Network registration checking
AT+CREG?
FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play response
Comment
+WMBS:<Band>,<ResetFlag> Current selected band
OK
mode is return
OK
Band switch is accepted,
Plug & Play has to be reset
for change to be effective
OK
Band switch is accepted,
Plug & Play has to be reset
for change to be effective
OK
Band switch is accepted
and GSMS stack restarted
+CME ERROR: 3
Band not allowed
OK
PIN Code accepted.
+CME ERROR: 16
Incorrect PIN Code (with +CMEE = 1 mode) (1*)
+CME ERROR: 3
PIN code already entered (with +CMEE = 1 mode) (1*)
+CREG: 0,1
FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play registered on the network.
+CREG: 0,2
FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play not registered on the network, registration attempt.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 44 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 311 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Description
Receiving an incoming call Initiate a call
Initiate an emergency call Communication loss Hang up
AT commands ATA
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Using the FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play
FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play response
Comment
+CREG: 0,0
FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play not registered on the network, no registration attempt.
OK
Answer the call.
ATD<phone number>;
OK
(Don't forget the « ; » at the
end for « voice » call)
+CME ERROR: 11
+CME ERROR: 3
ATD112;
OK
(Don't forget the « ; » at the end for « voice » call)
NO CARRIER
Communication established.
PIN code not entered (with +CMEE = 1 mode).
AOC credit exceeded or a communication is already established.
Communication established.
ATH
OK
Store the
AT&W
OK
parameters in
EEPROM
The configuration settings are stored in EEPROM.
(1*) The command "AT+CMEE=1" switch to a mode enabling more complete error diagnostics.
5.11 Firmware Upgrade Procedure
The firmware upgrade procedure is used to update the firmware embedded into the FASTRACK Supreme. That procedure consists in downloading the firmware into internal memories through the RS232 serial link available on the SUB-D 15-pin connector. Refer to "Firmware upgrade procedure" [8] for a detailed description of this procedure.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 45 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 312 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
6 Troubleshooting
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Troubleshooting
This section of the document describes possible problems encountered when using the FASTRACK Supreme and their solutions.
To review other troubleshooting information, refer the `FAQs' (Frequently Asked Questions) page at www.wavecom.com or use the following link: http://www.wavecom.com/support/faqs.php
6.1 No Communication with the FASTRACK Supreme through the Serial Link
If the FASTRACK Supreme does not answer to AT commands through the serial link, refer to the table below for possible causes and solutions.
Table 12: Solutions for no connection with FASTRACK Supreme through serial link
If the Supreme returns
Nothing
then ask
Is the FASTRACK Supreme powered correctly?
Is the serial cable connected at both sides?
Does the serial cable follow correctly pin assignment shown in paragraph 3.2.1.2.
Nothing or non- Is the communication program significant characters properly configured on PC?
Is there another program interfering with the communication program (i.e. Conflict on communication port access)
Action
Make sure the external power supply is connected to the FASTRACK Supreme and provides a voltage in the range of 5.5 V to 32 V. Check the serial cable connection
Connect the cable by following pin assignment given in paragraph 3.2.1.1.
Ensure the setting of the communication program is fit to setting of FASTRACK Supreme. FASTRACK Supreme factory setting is:
Data bits = 8 Parity = none Stop bits = 1 Baud = 115 200 bps. Flow control = hardware Close the interfering program.
6.2 Receiving "ERROR" Message
The FASTRACK Supreme returns an "ERROR" message (in reply to an AT command) in the following cases:
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 46 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 313 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Troubleshooting · AT command syntax is incorrect: check the command syntax (refer to "AT Commands Interface
Guide" [6]), · AT command syntax is correct, but transmitted with wrong parameters:
· Enter the AT+CMEE=1 command in order to change the error report method to the verbose
method, which includes the error codes. · Enter again the AT command which previously caused the reception of "ERROR" message in
order to get the Mobile Equipment error code. When the verbose error report method is enabled, the response of the FASTRACK Supreme in case of error is as follows:
· Either +CME ERROR: <error result code>, · Or +CMS ERROR: <error result code>.
Refer to "AT Commands Interface Guide" [6] for error result code description and further details on the AT +CMEE command.
Note: It is strongly recommended to always enable the verbose error report method to get the Mobile
Equipment error code (enter AT +CMEE=1 command).
6.3 Receiving "NO CARRIER" Message
If the FASTRACK Supreme returns a "NO CARRIER" message upon an attempted call (voice or data), then refer to the table below for possible causes and solutions.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 47 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 314 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Troubleshooting
Table 13: Solutions for "NO CARRIER" message
If the Supreme returns...
"NO CARRIER"
Then ask... Is the received signal strong enough?
Is the FASTRACK Supreme registered on the network?
Is the antenna properly connected?
Is the band selection correction?
"NO CARRIER" (when Is the semicolon (;) entered immediately
trying to issue a voice after the phone number in the AT
communication)
command?
Action...
Refer to section 5.5 to verify the strength of the received signal.
Refer to section 5.9 to verify the registration.
Refer to section 8.2.7.3 for antenna requirements. Refer to Section 7.2 for band switch
Ensure that the semicolon (;) is entered immediately after the phone number in the AT command.
e.g. ATD######;
"NO CARRIER" (when Is the SIM card configured for data / fax trying to issue a data calls? communication)
Configure the SIM card for data / fax calls (Ask your network provider if necessary).
Is the selected bearer type supported by the Ensure that the selected bearer type
called party?
is supported by the called party.
Is the selected bearer type supported by the Ensure that the selected bearer type
network?
is supported by the network.
If no success, try bearer selection type by AT command: AT+CBST=0,0,3
If the FASTRACK Supreme returns a "NO CARRIER" message, you may have the extended error code by
using AT command AT+CEER. Refer to the table below for interpretation of extended error code.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 48 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 315 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Troubleshooting
Table 14: Interpretation of extended error code
Error Code 1 16 17 18 19 21 22 31 50
Diagnostic Unallocated phone number Normal call clearing User busy No user responding User alerting, no answer Call rejected Number changed Normal, unspecified Requested facility not subscribed
68
ACM equal or greater than ACMmax
252
Call barring on outgoing calls
253
Call barring on incoming calls
3, 6, 8, 29, 34, 38, 41, 42, 43, 44, 47, 49, 57, 58, 63, 65,
69, 70, 79, 254
Network causes
Hint
Check your subscription (data subscription available?). Credit of your pre-paid SIM card expired. See "AT Commands Interface Guide" [6] for further details or call network provider.
Note: For all other codes, and/or details, see AT commands documentation [6].
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 49 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 316 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
7 Functional Description
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Functional Description
7.1 Architecture
FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play
BOOT RESET
Microphone
Speaker
SUB HD 15 pins
GPIO-21 GPIO-25
V+BATT
GROUND Micro-FIT
4 pins
RS232 Interface
VCC
Audio Interface
VCC
SMA
Microphone
Internal Quik Wireless CPU®
Q2687
Speaker
Operating Status
DC / DC
VCC
Power
Supply
50 pin IES Interface
SIM card Holder
Figure 15: Functional architecture
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 50 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 317 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
7.2 EU and US Bands
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Functional Description
7.2.1 General Presentation The FASTRACK Supreme is a quad band Plug & Play. It supports either EU bands (EGSM900/DCS1800) or US bands (GSM850/ PCS1900), depending on the band setting within the Plug & Play. Users are free to switch between EU bands and US bands by simple AT commands when the selected bands are supported.
7.2.2 AT COMMAND for Bands Switch
EU/US band is easily switched/checked by AT command AT+WMBS.
For detail, please refer to Section 5.7 and 5.8.
7.3 Power Supply
7.3.1 General Presentation The FASTRACK Supreme is supplied by an external DC voltage (V+BATTERY) from +5.5 V to +32 V at 2.2 A. Main regulation is made with an internal DC/DC converter in order to supply all the internal functions with a DC voltage. Correct operation of the FASTRACK Supreme in communication mode is not guaranteed if input voltage (V+BATTERY) falls below 5.5 V. Note: The minimum input voltage specified here is at the FASTRACK Supreme input. Be careful of the input voltage decrease caused by the power cable. See paragraph 8.2.1 for more information.
7.3.2 Protections
The FASTRACK Supreme is protected by a 800 mA / 250 V fuse directly bonded on the power supply cable.
The FASTRACK Supreme is also protected against voltage over +32 V. Filtering guarantees:
· EMI/RFI protection in input and output, · Signal smoothing.
7.4 RS232 Serial Link
7.4.1 General Presentation
The RS232 interface performs the voltage level adaptation (V24/CMOS V24/V28) between the internal FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play (DCE) and the external world (DTE).
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 51 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 318 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Functional Description The RS232 interface is internally protected (by ESD protection) against electrostatic surges on the RS232 lines. Filtering guarantees:
· EMI/RFI protection in input and output, · Signal smoothing. Signals available on the RS232 serial link are: · TX data (CT103/TX), · RX data (CT104/RX), · Request To Send (CT105/RTS), · Clear To Send (CT106/CTS), · Data Terminal Ready (CT108-2/DTR), · Data Set Ready (CT107/DSR), · Data Carrier Detect (CT109/DCD), · Ring Indicator (CT125/RI).
FASTRACK Supreme
(DCE)
CT103 / TX CT104 / RX CT105 / RTS CT106 / CTS CT107 / DSR CT108-2 / DTR CT109 / DCD CT125 / RI
DTE
Figure 16: RS232 Serial Link signals
RS232 interface has been designed to allow flexibility in the use of the serial interface signals. However, the use of TX, RX, CTS and RTS signals is mandatory, which is not the case for DTR, DSR, DCD and RI signals which can be not used.
7.4.2 Autobauding Mode The autobauding mode allows the FASTRACK Supreme to detect the baud rate used by the DTE connected to the RS232 serial link. Autobauding mode is controlled by AT commands. See "AT Commands Interface Guide" [6] for details on this function.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 52 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 319 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
7.4.3 Pin Description
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Functional Description
Signal
CTXD/CT103 CRXD/CT104 CRTS/CT105 CCTS/CT106 CDSR/CT107 CDTR/CT108-2 CDCD/CT109
CRI/CT125 CT102/GND
Sub HD connector
I/O
I/O type
Pin number
RS232
STANDARD
Description
2
I
TX
Transmit serial data
6
O
RX
Receive serial data
12
I
RTS
Request To Send
11
O
CTS
Clear To Send
7
O
DSR
Data Set Ready
8
I
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
1
O
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
13
O
RI
Ring Indicator
9
GND
Ground
7.4.4 Serial Port Auto shut down Feature
The UART1 can be shut down when there is no activity between the DTE and the FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play. This can help for improving power consumption performance.
Serial Port Auto shut down feature is easily controlled by AT command AT+WASR.
AT+WASR=1 for entering the serial port auto shut down mode
AT+WASR=0 for exiting the serial port auto shut down mode
Refer to "AT Commands Interface Guide" [6] for further information on AT commands. CAUTION: GPIO24 is reserved for serial port auto shut down feature. It is prohibited for customer use. Improper access to GPIO24 by customer may lead to unexpected behavior on UART1 performance.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 53 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 320 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
7.5 General Purpose Input/Output (GPIO)
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Functional Description
The FASTRACK Supreme provides two General Purpose Input / Output lines available for external use: GPIO21 and GPIO25.
These GPIOs may be controlled by AT commands:
· AT+WIOW for a write access to the GPIO value, when the GPIO is used as an output, · AT+WIOR for a read access to the GPIO value, when the GPIO is used as an input.
Refer to "AT Commands Interface Guide" [6] for further information on AT commands.
After reset, both GPIOs are configured as inputs. The AT+WIOM command has to be used to change this
configuration (refer to "AT Commands Interface Guide" [6] for further details).
Signal
GPIO21 GPIO25
Power Supply connector
(4-pin Micro-Fit)
3
4
Pin description
I/O
I/O Voltage
Reset state
Description
Mulitplex with
I/O
2V8
Undefined General Purpose I/O
No mux
I/O
2V8
Z
General Purpose I/O
INT1
Notes:
· The power supply cable may need to be modified due to the GPIO signals (GPIO21 & GPIO25) available on the 4-pin Micro-FIT connector of the FASTRACK Supreme.
· The previous generation M1306B have GPIO4 and GPIO5 being replaced by GPIO21 and GPIO25 respectively, for which both are of LOW level at reset state.
7.6 BOOT
This signal must not be connected. Its use is strictly reserved to Wavecom or competent retailers. Caution: Previous generation M1306B has BOOT signal of HIGH level at 2.8V. But the FASTRACK Supreme now of 1.8V BOOT instead.
7.7 RESET
7.7.1 General presentation
This signal is used to force a reset procedure by providing low level during at least 200 µs.
This signal must be considered as an emergency reset only. A reset procedure is automatically driven by an internal hardware during the power-up sequence.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 54 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 321 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Functional Description
This signal may also be used to provide a reset to an external device. It then behaves as an output. If no external reset is necessary, this input may be left open, if used (emergency reset), it has to be driven either by an open collector or an open drain output:
· RESET pin 14 = 0, for FASTRACK Supreme Reset,
· RESET pin 14 = 1, for normal mode.
Signal RESET
Sub HD 15-Pin connector Pin number
14
Pin description
I/O
I/O type
I/O Open Drain
Voltage 1V8
Description
FASTRACK Supreme Reset
Caution: Previous generation M1306B has RESET signal of HIGH level at 2.8V. But the FASTRACK Supreme now of 1.8V RESET instead.
Additional comments on RESET:
The RESET process is activated either by the external RESET signal or by an internal signal (coming from a RESET generator). This automatic reset is activated at Power-up.
The FASTRACK Supreme remains in RESET mode as long as the RESET signal is held low.
Caution: This signal should be used only for "emergency" reset.
A software reset is always preferred to a hardware reset. Note: See "AT Commands Interface Guide" [6] for further information on software reset.
7.7.2 Reset Sequence
To activate the "emergency" reset sequence, the RESET signal has to be set to low for 200 s minimum.
As soon as the reset is done, the AT interface answers "OK" to the application. For this, the application must
send AT.
If the application manages hardware flow control, the AT command may be sent during the initialization
phase. Another solution is to use the AT+WIND command to get an unsolicited status from the FASTRACK
Supreme.
For further details, refer to AT commands "AT Commands Interface Guide" [6].
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 55 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 322 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
~ RESET
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Functional Description
STA TE OF TH E W ireless
W ireless CPU
CPU
REA D Y
RESET m od e
IBB+ RF= 2 0 t o 40m A
Rt = M in 1 :2 0 0 s or Typ2 = 40m s
Ct = Typ :34 m s
W ireless CPU
ON
IBB+ RF< 1 2 0 m A w it h ou t loc u p d at e
AT an sw ers " OK"
W ireless CPU REA D Y
SIM an d n etw ork d ep en d en t
Figure 17: Reset sequence diagram
7.8 Audio
Audio interface is a standard one for connecting a phone handset.
Echo cancellation and noise reduction features are also available to improve the audio quality in case of hand-free application.
7.8.1 Microphone Inputs
The microphone inputs are differential ones in order to reject common mode noise and TDMA noise.
They already include the convenient biasing for an electret microphone (0.5 mA and 2 Volts) and are ESD protected.
This electret microphone may be directly connected to these inputs allowing an easy connection to a handset.
The microphone impedance must be around 2 k. AC coupling is already embedded in the Wireless CPU®.
The gain of the microphone inputs is internally adjusted and may be tuned from 30 dB to 51 dB using an AT +VGT command (refer to AT commands documentation [6]).
Signal
CMIC2P CMIC2N
Pin description
Sub D 15-pin Pin #
4
5
I/O I/O type
I
Analog
I
Analog
Description
Microphone positive input Microphone negative input
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 56 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 323 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Functional Description
7.8.2 Speaker Outputs
This connection is differential to reject common mode noise and TDMA noise.
Speaker outputs are connected to internal push-pull amplifiers and may be loaded down between 32 to 150 Ohms and up to 1 nF (see details in table Speaker gain vs Max output voltage, in "AT Commands Interface Guide" [6]). These outputs may be directly connected to a speaker.
The output power may be adjusted by step of 2 dB. The gain of the speaker outputs is internally adjusted
and may be tuned using an AT +VGR command (refer to AT commands documentation [6]).
Pin description
Signal
Sub D 15-pin Pin #
I/O
I/O type
Description
CSPK2P CSPK2N
10
O
Analog
Speaker positive output
15
O
Analog
Speaker negative output
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 57 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 324 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Functional Description
7.9 Real Time Clock (RTC)
The FASTRACK Supreme has now implemented the Real Time Clock for saving date and time when the Plug & Play is unplugged from the DC power supply through the DC power cable.
Item
Min
Typical
Max
Charging Time start from fully discharged to fully charged
940 min
RTC Time Period*
Guarantee Non-guarantee
2475 min 5225 min
Remark: The RTC time period is measured from the RTC battery is fully charged before being unplugged from the DC power source.
7.10 FLASH LED
The FASTRACK Supreme has a red LED indicator to show the status of the GSM network. For detail description of the various status, please refer to Section 5.3.
However, during operation mode of Slow Standby, there will be no network registration and so the red LED indicator will always be ON. It is possible for user to deactivate the LED indication during Slow Standby mode, in order to reduce power consumption.
The Flash LED can be deactivated by AT command at+whcnf=1,0 The Flash LED can be activated by AT command at+whcnf=1,1
However, the new setting will be taken into account only after a restart. For detail, please refer to Document[6].
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 58 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 325 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
8 Technical Characteristics
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Technical Characteristics
8.1 Mechanical Characteristics
Dimensions Overall Dimension
Weight
Volume Housing
Table 15: Mechanical characteristics
73 x 54.5 x 25.5 mm (excluding connectors) 88 x 54.5 x 25.5 mm 80 grams (FASTRACK Supreme only) < 120 grams (FASTRACK Supreme + bridles + power supply cable) 101.5 cm3 Aluminum profiled
The next page gives the dimensioning diagram of the FASTRACK Supreme including the clearance areas to take into account for the FASTRACK Supreme installation.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 59 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 326 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Technical Characteristics
Figure 18: Dimensioning diagram
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 60 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 327 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
8.2 Electrical Characteristics
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Technical Characteristics
8.2.1 Power Supply
Table 16: Electrical characteristics
Operating Voltage ranges 5.5 V to 32 V DC.
Maximum current
480 mA Average at 5.5V. 2.1 A Peak at 5.5 V. (TBC)
Note:
The FASTRACK Supreme is permanently powered once the power supply is connected. The following table describes the consequences of over-voltage and under-voltage with the FASTRACK Supreme.
Warning:
All the input voltages specification described in this Section are at the FASTRACK Supreme input. While powering the FASTRACK Supreme, take into account the input drop caused by the power cable. With the delivered cable, this input drop is around 700 mV at 5.5 V and 220 mV at 32V.
Table 17: Effects of power supply defect
If the voltage
falls below 5.5 V,
is over 32 V (Transient peaks),
Is over 32 V (continuous overvoltage)
then the GSM communication is not guaranteed. the FASTRACK Supreme guarantees its own protection.
the protection of the FASTRACK Supreme is done by the fuse (the supply voltage is disconnected).
The fuse is a 800 mA / 250 V FAST-ACTING 5*20mm. See Section 10 for recommended references.
The following table provides information on power consumption of the FASTRACK Supreme, assuming an operating temperature of +25 °C and using a 3 V SIM card.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 61 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 328 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Technical Characteristics
8.2.2 Power Consumption The following table provides information on power consumption of the FASTRACK Supreme, assuming an operating temperature of +25 °C and using a 3 V SIM card.
GSM
GPRS Class 2
I peak I avg I peak I avg I peak I avg I peak I avg
Table 18: Power consumption (1*)
Power Consumption in E-GSM 900/DCS 1800 MHz - GPRS class 10
E-GSM 900
GSM900: During TX bursts @ PCL5 DCS1800 : During TX bursts @ PCL0
@ 5.5V @ 13.2V @ 32V
TBC TBC TBC
GSM900 : Average @ PCL5 DCS1800 : Average @ PCL0
@ 5.5V @ 13.2V @ 32V
TBC TBC TBC
GSM900: During 1TX bursts @ PCL5 DCS1800 : During 1TX bursts @ PCL0
@ 5.5V @ 13.2V @ 32V
TBC TBC TBC
GSM900 : Average 1TX/1RX @PCL5 DCS1800 : Average 1TX/1RX @PCL0
@ 5.5V @ 13.2V @ 32V
TBC TBC TBC
GSM900: During 2TX bursts @ PCL5 (Gamma 3) DCS1800 : During 2TX bursts @ PCL0 (Gamma 2)
@ 5.5V @ 13.2V @ 32V
TBC TBC TBC
GSM900 : Average 2TX/3RX @ PCL5 (Gamma 3) DCS1800 : Average 2TX/3RX @ PCL0 (Gamma 2)
@ 5.5V @ 13.2V @ 32V
TBC TBC TBC
GSM900: During 1TX bursts @ PCL8 (Gamma 6) DCS1800 : During 1TX bursts @ PCL2 (Gamma 5)
@ 5.5V @ 13.2V @ 32V
TBC TBC TBC
GSM900 : Average 1TX/1RX @ PCL8 (Gamma 6) DCS1800 : Average 1TX/1RX @ PCL2 (Gamma 5)
@ 5.5V @ 13.2V @ 32V
TBC TBC TBC
DCS 1800
TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC
GPRS Class 10
EGPRS Class 2
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 62 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 329 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Technical Characteristics
Power Consumption in E-GSM 900/DCS 1800 MHz - GPRS class 10
E-GSM 900
EGPRS Class 10
I peak
GSM900: During 2TX bursts @ PCL8 (Gamma 6) DCS1800 : During 2TX bursts @ PCL2 (Gamma 5)
@ 5.5V @ 13.2V @ 32V
GSM900 : Average 2TX/3RX @ PCL8 (Gamma 6)
I avg DCS1800 : Average 2TX/3RX @ PCL2 (Gamma 5)
@ 5.5V @ 13.2V @ 32V
I avg in Fast Idle mode Page 9
(2*)
Serial port auto shut down deactivated
@ 5.5V @ 13.2V @ 32V @ 5.5V
Serial port auto shut down activated @ 13.2V
@ 32V
I avg in Slow Idle mode Page 9
(3*)
Serial port auto shut down deactivated
@ 5.5V @ 13.2V @ 32V @ 5.5V
Serial port auto shut down activated @ 13.2V
@ 32V
I avg in Fast Standby mode
(4*)
Serial port auto shut down deactivated
@ 5.5V @ 13.2V @ 32V @ 5.5V
Serial port auto shut down activated @ 13.2V
@ 32V
TBC TBC TBC
TBC TBC TBC
33 TBC TBC
17 TBC TBC
23 TBC TBC
5 TBC TBC
52 TBC TBC
35 TBC TBC
DCS 1800
TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 63 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 330 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Technical Characteristics
Power Consumption in E-GSM 900/DCS 1800 MHz - GPRS class 10
E-GSM 900
I avg in Slow Standby mode
(with FLASH LED activated) (4*)
Serial port auto shut down deactivated
@ 5.5V @ 13.2V @ 32V
@ 5.5V
Serial port auto shut down activated @ 13.2V
@ 32V
24 TBC TBC
8 TBC TBC
I avg in Slow Standby mode
(with FLASH LED deactivated) (4*)
Serial port auto shut down deactivated
@ 5.5V @ 13.2V @ 32V
@ 5.5V
Serial port auto shut down activated @ 13.2V
@ 32V
TBC TBC TBC
4 TBC TBC
DCS 1800
TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC
(1*):The power consumption might vary by 5 % over the whole operating temperature range (-20 °C to +55 °C). (2*): In this Mode, the RF function is active and the FASTRACK Supreme synchronized with the network, but there is no communication. (3*): In this Mode, the RF function is disabled, but regularly activated to keep the synchronization with the network. This Mode works only when the DTE send AT command to shut down the serial link by software approach (DTE turns DTR in inactive state). (4*): In this Mode, the RF function is disabled, and there is no synchronization with the network.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 64 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 331 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Technical Characteristics
8.2.3 Audio Interface The audio interface is available through the Sub HD 15-pin connector.
Table 19: Audio parameters caracteristics
Audio parameters
Min Typ Max
Microphone input current @2 V/2 k
0.5
Absolute microphone input voltage
100
Speaker output current 150 //1 nF
16
Absolute speaker impedance
32
50
Impedance of the speaker amplifier output in
1
differential mode
Unit
Comments
mA
mVpp AC voltage
mA
+/-10 %
Table 20: Microphone inputs internal audio filter characteristics
Frequency 0-150 Hz 150-180 Hz 180-200 Hz 200-3700 Hz >4000 Hz
< -22 dB < -11 dB < -3 dB 0 dB < -60 dB
Gain
Table 21: Recommended characteristics for the microphone:
Feature
Value
Type
Electret 2 V / 0.5 mA
Impedance
Z = 2 k
Sensitivity
-40 dB to 50 dB
SNR
> 50 dB
Frequency response
compatible with the GSM specifications
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 65 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 332 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Technical Characteristics
Table 22: Recommended characteristics for the speaker:
Feature
Value
Type
10 mW, electro-magnetic
Impedance
Z = 32 to 50
Sensitivity
110 dB SPL min. (0 dB = 20 µPa)
Frequency response
compatible with the GSM specifications
8.2.4 General Purpose Input/Output Both GPIO21 and GPIO25 may be interfaced with a component that comply with 3 Volts CMOS levels.
Table 23: Operating conditions
Parameter
I/O type
Min
Typ
Max
VIL
CMOS
VIH
CMOS
VOL
CMOS
VOH
CMOS
IOH
IOL Clamping diodes are present on I/O pads.
1.96 V 2.4 V
0.84 V
0.4 V
4mA -4mA
Condition
IOL = -4 mA IOH = 4 mA
8.2.5 SIM Interface SIM card
Table 24: SIM card characteristics 1.8V / 3 V
8.2.6 RESET Signal
Table 25: Electrical characteristics
Parameter
Input Impedance ( R )* Input Impedance ( C ) *Internal pull-up
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
330K
k
10n
nF
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 66 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 333 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Technical Characteristics
Table 26: Operating conditions
Parameter
Minimum
Typ
Maximum Unit
~RESET time (Rt) 1
200
µs
~RESET time (Rt) 2 at power up only
20
40
100
ms
Cancellation time (Ct)
34
ms
VH VIL VIH
* VH: Hysterisis Voltage
0.57 0
1.33
V
0.57
V
V
1 This reset time is the minimum to be carried out on the ~RESET signal when the power supply is already stabilized.
2 This reset time is internally carried out by the Wireless CPU power supply supervisor only when the Wireless CPU power supplies are powered ON.
8.2.7 RF Characteristics
8.2.7.1 Frequency Ranges
Table 27: Frequency ranges
Characteristic Frequency TX Frequency RX
GSM 850 824 to 849 MHz 869 to 894 MHz
E-GSM 900 880 to 915 MHz 925 to 960 MHz
DCS 1800 1710 to 1785 MHz 1805 to 1880 MHz
PCS 1900 1850 to 1910 MHz 1930 to 1990 MHz
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 67 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 334 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Technical Characteristics 8.2.7.2 RF Performances RF performances are compliant with the ETSI recommendation GSM 05.05. The RF performances for receiver and transmitter are given in the table below.
Table 28: Receiver and transmitter RF performances
Receiver
E-GSM900/GSM850 Reference Sensitivity
-104 dBm Static & TUHigh
DCS1800/PCS1900 Reference Sensitivity
-102 dBm Static & TUHigh
Selectivity @ 200 kHz
> +9 dBc
Selectivity @ 400 kHz
> +41 dBc
Linear dynamic range
63 dB
Co-channel rejection
>= 9 dBc
Transmitter
Maximum output power (E-GSM 900/GSM850) at ambient temperature
33 dBm +/- 2 dB
Maximum output power (DCS1800/PCS1900) at ambient temperature
30 dBm +/- 2 dB
Minimum output power (E-GSM 900/GSM850) at ambient temperature
5 dBm +/- 5 dB
Minimum output power (DCS1800/PCS1900) at ambient temperature
0 dBm +/- 5 dB
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 68 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 335 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Technical Characteristics
8.2.7.3 External Antenna The external antenna is connected to the FASTRACK Supreme via the SMA connector. The external antenna must fulfill the characteristics listed in the table below.
Table 29: External antenna characteristics
Antenna frequency range
Quad-band GSM 850/GSM900/DCS1800/PCS1900 MHz
Impedance
50 Ohms nominal
DC impedance
0 Ohm
Gain (antenna + cable)
0 dBi
VSWR (antenna + cable)
2
Note: Refer to Section 10 for recommended antenna.
8.3 Environmental Characteristics
The FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play is compliant with the following operating class. To ensure the proper operation of the FASTRACK Supreme, the temperature of the environment must be within a specific range as described in the table below.
Table 30: Ranges of temperature
Conditions Operating / Class A Operating / Class B
Storage
Temperature range -20 °C to +55°C -30 °C to +85°C -40 °C to +85°C
Function Status Classification:
Class A:
The FASTRACK Supreme remains fully functional, meeting GSM performance criteria in accordance with ETSI requirements, across the specified temperature range.
Class B:
The FASTRACK Supreme remains fully functional, across the specified temperature range. Some GSM parameters may occasionally deviate from the ETSI/PTCRB specified requirements and this deviation does not affect the ability of the FASTRACK Supreme to connect to the cellular network and function fully, as it does within the Class A range.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 69 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 336 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Technical Characteristics
The detailed climatic and mechanics standard environmental constraints applicable to the FASTRACK Supreme are listed in the table below:
Environmental Tests
Table 31: Environmental standard constraints
Environmental Classes
(IEC TR 60721-4)
(IEC 60721-3)
Tests
Standards
Storage (IEC 60721-3-1)
Class IE13
Transportation (IEC 60721-3-2)
Class IE23
Operation
Stationary (IEC 60721-3-3)
Class IE35
Non-Stationary (IEC 60721-3-7)
Class IE73
Cold
Dry heat
Change of temperature
IEC 60068-2-1 : Ab/Ad
IEC 60068-2-2 : Bb/Bd
IEC 60068-2-14 : Na/Nb
Damp heat
IEC 60068-2-56 : Cb
Damp heat, cyclic
60068-2-30 : Db Variant 1 or 2
Vibration (sinusoidal)
IEC 60068-2-6 : Fc
Vibration (random)
IEC 60068-2-64 : Fh
Shock (half-sine)
IEC 60068-2-27 : Ea
Bump Free fall
IEC 60068-2-29 : Eb ISO 4180-2
Drop and topple IEC 60068-2-31 : Ec
-25°C, 16 h
+70°C, 16 h
-33°C to ambient 2 cycles, t1=3 h
1 °C.min-1 +30°C, 93% RH
96 h +40°C, 90% to
100% RH One cycle Variant 2 1-200 Hz
2 m.s-2 0,75 mm 3 axes 10 sweep cycles
-
-
-
-
-
-40°C, 16 h
-5°C, 16 h
+70°C, 16 h
+55°C, 16 h
-40°C to ambient 5 cycles, t1=3 h
t2<3 min
+40°C, 93% RH 96 h minimum
+55°C, 90% to 100% RH Two cycles Variant 2
1-500 Hz 10 m.s-2 3,5 mm 3 axes 10 sweep cycles 10-100 Hz / 1,0 m2.s-3 100-200 Hz / -3 dB.octave-1 200-2000 Hz / 0,5 m2.s-3 3 axes 30 min
-
250 m.s-2 6 ms
50 bumps vertical direction
Two falls in each specified attitude
-5°C to ambient 2 cycles, t1=3 h
0,5 °C.min-1 +30°C, 93% RH, 96
h +30°C, 90% to 100%
RH Two cycles Variant 2 1-150 Hz
2 m.s-2 0,75 mm 3 axes 5 sweep cycles
50 m.s-2
6 ms 3 shocks 6 directions
-
-
One drop on relevant corner
One topple about each bottom
edge
-
-5°C, 16 h
+55°C, 16 h
-5°C to ambient 5 cycles, t1=3 h
t2<3 min +30°C, 93% RH, 96 h
+40°C, 90% to 100% RH Two cycles Variant 1
1-500 Hz 10 m.s-2 3,5 mm 3 axes 10 sweep cycles
150 m.s-2
11 ms 3 shocks 6 directions
-
2 falls in each specified attitude
0,025 m (<1kg) One drop on each relevant
corner One topple on each of 4
bottom edges
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 70 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 337 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Technical Characteristics
Notes:
Short description of Class IE13 (For more information see standard IEC 60721-3-1)
"Locations without controlled temperature and humidity, where heating may be used to raise low temperatures, locations in buildings providing minimal protection against daily variations of external climate, prone to receiving rainfall from carrying wind". Short description of Class IE23 (For more information, see standard IEC 60721-3-2)
"Transportation in unventilated compartments and in conditions without protection against bad weather, in all sorts of trucks and trailers in areas of well developed road network, in trains equipped with buffers specially designed to reduce shocks and by boat". Short description of Class IE35 (For more information see standard IEC 60721-3-3)
"Locations with no control on heat or humidity where heating may be used to raise low temperatures, to places inside a building to avoid extremely high temperatures, to places such as hallways, building staircases, cellars, certain workshops, equipment stations without surveillance". Short description of Class IE73 (For more information see standard IEC 60721-3-7)
"Transfer to places where neither temperature nor humidity are controlled but where heating may be used to raise low temperatures, to places exposed to water droplets, products can be subjected to ice formation, these conditions are found in hallways and building staircases, garages, certain workshops, factory building and places for industrial processes and hardware stations without surveillance".
Warning: The specification in the above table applies to the FASTRACK Supreme product only. Customers are advised to verify that the environmental specification of the SIM Card used is compliant with the FASTRACK Supreme environmental specifications. Any application must be qualified by the customer with the SIM Card in storage, transportation and operation.
The use of standard SIM cards may drastically reduce the environmental conditions in which the Product can be used. These cards are particularly sensible to humidity and temperature changes. These conditions may produce oxidation of the SIM card metallic layers and cause, in the long term, electrical discontinuities. This is particularly true in left alone applications, where no frequent extraction/insertion of the SIM card is performed.
In case of mobility when the application is moved through different environments with temperature variations, some condensation may appear. These events have a negative impact on the SIM and may favor oxidation.
If the use of standard SIM card, with exposition to the environmental conditions described above, can not be avoided, special care must be taken in the integration of the final application in order to minimize the impact of these conditions. The solutions that may be proposed are:
· Lubrication of the SIM card to protect the SIM Contact from oxidation. · Putting the FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play in a waterproof enclosure with desiccant bags.
Lubrication of the SIM card had been tested by Wavecom (using Tutela Fluid 43EM from MOLYDUVAL) and gives very good results. If waterproof enclosure with a desiccant solution is used, check with your desiccant retailer the quantity that must be used according to the enclosure dimensions. Ensure humidity has been removed before sealing the enclosure. Any solution selected must be qualified by the customer on the final application. To minimize oxidation problem on the SIM card, its manipulation must be done with the greatest precautions. In particular, the metallic contacts of the card must never be touched with bare fingers or any matter which
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 71 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 338 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Technical Characteristics
may contain polluted materials liable to produce oxidation (such as, e.g. substances including chlorine). In case a cleaning of the Card is necessary, a dry cloth must be used (never use any chemical substance).
8.4 Conformity
The complete product complies with the essential requirements of article 3 of R&TTE 1999/5/EC Directive and satisfied the following standards:
Domain Safety standard Efficient use of the radio frequency spectrum
EMC
Global Certification Forum Certification Criteria PTCRB FCC IC
Applicable standard EN 60950 (ed.1999) EN 301 419-(v 4.1.1) EN 301 511 (V 7.0.1) EN 301 4891 (edition 2002) EN 301 489-7 (edition 2002) GCF-CC V3.13.0
8.5 Protections
8.5.1 Power Supply
The FASTRACK Supreme is protected by a 800 mA / 250 V fuse directly bonded on the power supply cable. The model of fuse used is: FSD 800 mA / 250 V FAST-ACTING.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 72 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 339 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Technical Characteristics
8.5.2 Overvoltage The FASTRACK Supreme is protected against voltage over +32 V. When input voltages exceed +32 V, the supply voltage is disconnected in order to protect the internal electronic components from an overvoltage.
8.5.3 Electrostatic Discharge The FASTRACK Supreme withstands ESD according to IEC 1000-4-2 requirements for all accessible parts of the FASTRACK Supreme except the RF part:
· 8 kV of air discharge, · 4 kV of contact discharge.
8.5.4 Miscellaneous Filtering guarantees:
· EMI/RFI protection in input and output, · Signal smoothing.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 73 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 340 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
9 Safety recommendations
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Safety recommendations
9.1 General Safety
It is important to follow any special regulations regarding the use of radio equipment due in particular to the possibility of radio frequency (RF) interference. Please follow the safety advice given below carefully. Switch OFF your Wireless CPU®:
· When in an aircraft. The use of cellular telephones in an aircraft may endanger the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the cellular network and is illegal. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular telephone services to the offender, or legal action or both,
· When at a refueling point,
· When in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere which could cause an explosion or fire,
· In hospitals and any other place where medical equipment may be in use.
Respect restrictions on the use of radio equipment in:
· Fuel depots,
· Chemical plants,
· Places where blasting operations are in progress,
· Any other area where signalization reminds that the use of cellular telephone is forbidden or dangerous.
· Any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine.
There may be a hazard associated with the operation of your FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play close to inadequately protected personal medical devices such as hearing aids and pacemakers. Consult the manufacturers of the medical device to determine if it is adequately protected.
Operation of your FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play close to other electronic equipment may also cause interference if the equipment is inadequately protected. Observe any warning signs and manufacturers' recommendations.
The FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play is designed for and intended to be used in "fixed" and "mobile" applications: "Fixed" means that the device is physically secured at one location and is not able to be easily moved
to another location. "Mobile" means that the device is designed to be used in other than fixed locations and generally in
such a way that a separation distance of at least 20 cm (8 inches) is normally maintained between the transmitter's antenna and the body of the user or nearby persons.
The FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play is not designed for and intended to be used in portable applications (within 20 cm or 8 inches of the body of the user) and such uses are strictly prohibited.
9.2 Vehicle Safety
Do not use your FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play while driving, unless equipped with a correctly installed vehicle kit allowing 'Hands-Free' Operation.
Respect national regulations on the use of cellular telephones in vehicles. Road safety always comes first.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 74 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 341 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Safety recommendations If incorrectly installed in a vehicle, the operation of FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play telephone could interfere with the correct functioning of vehicle electronics. To avoid such problems, make sure that the installation has been performed by a qualified personnel. Verification of the protection of vehicle electronics should form part of the installation. The use of an alert device to operate a vehicle's lights or horn on public roads is not permitted.
9.3 Care and Maintenance
Your FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play is the product of advanced engineering, design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestion below will help you to enjoy this product for many years. Do not expose the FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play to any extreme environment where the temperature or humidity is high. Do not use or store the FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play in dusty or dirty areas. Its moving parts (SIM holder for example) can be damaged. Do not attempt to disassemble the Wireless CPU®. There are no user serviceable parts inside. Do not expose the FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play to water, rain or spilt beverages. It is not waterproof. Do not abuse your FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play by dropping, knocking, or violently shaking it. Rough handling can damage it. Do not place the FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play alongside computer discs, credit or travel cards or other magnetic media. The information contained on discs or cards may be affected by the Wireless CPU®. The use of third party equipment or accessories, not made or authorized by Wavecom may invalidate the warranty of the Wireless CPU®. Do contact an authorized Service Center in the unlikely event of a fault in the Wireless CPU®.
9.4 Your Responsibility
This FASTRACK Supreme Plug & Play is under your responsibility. Please treat it with care respecting all local regulations. It is not a toy. Therefore, keep it in a safe place at all times and out of the reach of children. Try to remember your Unlock and PIN codes. Become familiar with and use the security features to block unauthorized use and theft.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 75 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 342 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
10 Recommended Accessories
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Recommended Accessories
Accessories recommended by Wavecom for the FASTRACK Supreme are given in the table below.
Table 32: List of recommended accessories
Designation
Part number
1140.26
Quad-band antenna
MA112VX00
MCA1890 MH/PB/SMA m
SMA/FME adaptor
Antenna
Power adaptor (Europe) EGSTDW P2 EF9W3 24W
Out:12 V - 2A
In: 100 to 240 V 50/60 Hz 550 mA
Mounted with micro-fit connector
Fuse
F800L250V
Supplier ALLGON MAT Equipement HIRSCHMANN PROCOM
EGSTDW (for power adaptor) MOLEX (for micro-fit connector)*
Shanghai Fullness
IESM GPS + USB
M13SUE01
WAVECOM
IESM IO + USB
M13SUE02
WAVECOM
IESM IO + USB + GPS M13SUE03 * Information not available for this preliminary version.
WAVECOM
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 76 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 343 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
11 Online Support
Fastrack Supreme User Guide
Online Support
Wavecom provides an extensive range on online support which includes the following areas of Wavecom's wireless expertise:
· the latest version of this document · new versions of our Operating System user guides · comprehensive support for Open AT® · regulatory certifications · carrier certifications · application notes To gain access to this support, simply visit our web site at www.wavecom.com or click on the desire link in Page. Privileged access via user login is provided to Wavecom authorized distributors.
confidential © This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged without prior written agreement. WA_DEV_Fastrk_UGD_001
Page: 77 / 77
5 june, 2007
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 344 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 345 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 346 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
DC/DC SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY DC INPUT 12,24,48, 110 SINGLE OUTPUT 25WATTS
VTA-SCx/VTA-SD SERIES
General Description
Dimension: 85W × 135L × 31H
DC INPUT: 12V
Input Characteristics Unit
Input Voltage Input Voltage Range Input Current(typ) Inrush Current *1
Efficiency (typical) *2
MTBF Switching Frequency
DC INPUT: 24V
Input Characteristics
Vdc Vdc
A A % H kHz
Unit
Input Voltage Input Voltage Range Input Current(typ)
Inrush Current *1
Efficiency (typical) *2
MTBF Switching Frequency
DC INPUT: 48V
Input Characteristics
Vdc Vdc
A A % H kHz
Unit
Input Voltage
Vdc
Input Voltage Range
Vdc
Input Current(typ)
A
Inrush Current *1
A
Efficiency (typical) *2
%
MTBF
H
Switching Frequency
kHz
DC INPUT: 110V
Input Characteristics Unit
Input Voltage Input Voltage Range Input Current(typ)
Inrush Current *1
Efficiency (typical) *2
MTBF Switching Frequency
Vdc Vdc
A A % H kHz
VTA05SC12
2.9 72 60 Fix. VTA05SC24
1.34 75
60 Fix. VTA05SC48
0.68 78
60 Fix. VTA05SD
0.30 76
80 Fix.
Features
1. Variety of Models 2. Chassis mount type 3. Compact and High Efficiency
VTA12SC12
2.92 72
60 Fix.
VTA15SC15
DC 12V DC 9.2V-16V
2.87 Not Specified
74 880'000 60 Fix.
VTA24SC12
3.0 73 60 Fix.
VTA48SC12
2.63 76
60 Fix.
VTA12SC24
1.33 78
60 Fix.
VTA15SC24
DC 24V
DC 19-32V 1.36
Not Specified 79
880'000 60 Fix.
VTA24SC24
1.34 78
60 Fix.
VTA48SC24
1.28 82
60 Fix.
VTA12SC48
0.66 80
60 Fix.
VTA15SC48
DC 48V
DC 38-63V 0.65
Not Specified 82
860'000 60 Fix.
VTA24SC48
0.67 82
60 Fix.
VTA48SC48
0.6 84 60 Fix.
VTA12SD
0.29 78
80 Fix.
VTA15SD
DC 110V
DC 85-140V 0.30
Not Specified 78
790'000 80 Fix.
VTA24SD
0.31 78
80 Fix.
VTA48SD
0.28 78
80 Fix.
ETA USA 16170 Vineyard Blvd. Suite 180, Morgan Hill, CA 95037 Phone: 1-800-ETA-POWER, (408) 778-2793 Fax: (408) 779-2753
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Visit us at: www.eta-usa.com email at: sales@eta-usa.com
Page 347 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
VTA-SC / VTA-SD
Output
Models
Characteristic Unit VTA05SCx / SD VTA12SCx / SD VTA15SCx / SD VTA24SCx / SD VTA48SCx / SD
Output Voltage
V
Output Current
A
Voltage Adjust Range
V
5
12
15
24
48
5.0
2.1
1.7
1.1
0.5
+/-10% of Rated Output Voltage(at no load within input range)
Ripple Noise(max) *3
mVpp
100
170
200
290
530
Rise up time
mS
100mS(maximum) at 25 and rated input/output
Hold up time
mS
10mS
Regulation
a. Line Regulation (max) mV
40
96
120
192
384
b. Load Regulation (max) mV
45
108
135
216
432
c. Temperature
°C
Coefficient *4
d. Drift(maximum) *5
mV
40
0.03%/
75
90
135
255
e. Dynamic Load
mV
150
Regulation (typ.) *6
f. Recovery Time
*6 mS
360
450
720
0.5mS
1440
Conditions:
*1 at cold start
*2 at rated input/output
*3 measured by a bayonet probe at the output connector at a 0 to 100MHz bandwidth
*4 at 0 to +50
*5 for 7hour period after 1hour warm-up at 25 and rated input/output
*6 when output current changed between 25% and 75% of rated output current rapidly at rated input
Environmental Specification
Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity Withstanding Voltage
Isolation Resistance
Vibration
Shock Cooling
Functions
Over current Protection Over voltage Protection Remote Sense Remote On/Off Reverse Voltage Protection Line Conduction Noise Weight [g](typical) Dimension [mm]
0 to +50
85%RH(non-condensing)
-20 to +85°C
-
Primary-Secondary
AC1,500Vfor 1minute (Vin=110 2000)
Primary-Frame Ground AC1,500V for 1minute (Vin=110 2000)
Secondary-Frame Ground AC500V for 1minute
Primary-Secondary-Frame Ground 50M(minimum) by DC500V insulation tester
5-10Hz:10mm double amplitude,10-55Hz:19.6m/s2,20minutes'
period for 60minutes each along X,Y,Z axes(non-operating)
294m/s2
Convection
Current Limiting with automatic recovery Output shutdown not available not available by internal fuse Not specified 380 G 85W × 135L × 31H
ETA USA 16170 Vineyard Blvd. Suite 180, Morgan Hill, CA 95037 Phone: 1-800-ETA-POWER, (408) 778-2793 Fax: (408) 779-2753
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Visit us at: www.eta-usa.com email at: sales@eta-usa.com
Page 348 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
BLOCK DIAGRAM
DIMENSION DIAGRAM (mm)
EFFICIENCY CURVE
OCP CURVE
ETA USA 16170 Vineyard Blvd. Suite 180, Morgan Hill, CA 95037 Phone: 1-800-ETA-POWER, (408) 778-2793 Fax: (408) 779-2753
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Visit us at: www.eta-usa.com email at: sales@eta-usa.com
Page 349 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Cellular Transit Antenna
The TLA2000 is an ideal antenna solution for GSM data applications in both fixed and mobile situations. Designed to offer true dual band performance the TLA2000 is ready for use with the latest GSM (GPRS) modems. With a high impact resistant vacuum formed ABS radome and neoprene mounting gasket, the TLA2000 can be used for indoor or outdoor applications.
· Applications include public vending machines, ATM kiosks and industrial automotive use
· Designed for use on conductive or nonconductive surfaces
· TLA3000 model incorporates integrated GPS antenna
Typical VSWR response GSM900
2.5
2.4
2.3
2.2
2.1
2.0
1.9
1.8
1.7
1.6
1.5
-35
+35
Typical VSWR response GSM1800
-85
+85
890-960 MHz 1710-1880 MHz
TLA2000 TLA3000
TLA2000/3000
Typical E-Plane response @ 890MHz
Electrical
Model No. Gain dBi Frequency MHz Power W Tuned Bandwidth Tuning
Mechanical
Model No. Construction Diameter mm Height mm Mounting
Cable and Connector
TLA2000/3000 2
890 - 960 / 1710 - 1880 10
Entire specified band @<2.5:1 VSWR Pre-tuned
TLA2000
TLA3000
White Geloy ASA radome
135 61 (including gasket)
M4 hardware (not included)
500mm low loss 9014 RG58 type
Cellular: 5m 9014 RG58 type - FME connector GPS: 5m low loss RG174 type - MCX connector
GPS Specifications
Fo Operation Temperature Storage Temperature System Gain at Fo Impedance Polarization VSWR at Fo Noise Figure at Fo Power Input Power Consumption Power Input Over-Current
1575.42 MHz -40 to +85°C -40 to +100°C 28dBi including cable and filter losses
50 Ohm RHCP 1.5:1 <1.8 dB max. +2.5Vdc to +12Vdc input, Auto Switching 11mA to 13mA (max) Reverse Polarity Short Circuit Shutdown Thermal over-current shutdown >+150°C
www.rfi.com.au
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
109
Page 350 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
UHF Directional Yagi Antennas
300-600 MHz
YB Series
YB6
YB16
The YB Series are high gain yagi antennas which will provide excellent point to point communication in RF control, short or long haul link and other applications calling for highly directional antennas. YB Series antennas exhibit narrow beamwidths and high front to back ratios to help minimise potential interference to and from other systems.
The feed element of each antenna is of full folded dipole construction thus offering maximum bandwidth and reliability. The dipole element is welded to the boom to ensure low intermodulation performance and maximum durability. The passive elements are through mounted to the circular boom section and welded at each side to further minimise the potential for both corrosion and generation of intermodulation products. The alodined protective finish provides a conductive surface to ensure effective earthing of the antenna when mounting.
Constructed with 2 to 16 elements, YB Series yagi antennas offer a choice of gain and beamwidth characteristics and can be configured in stacks or bays for higher gain applications in either horizontally or vertically polarised systems. Application details on phasing and mounting yagi antennas are included in the technical notes section of this catalogue.
Yagi antennas rest at ground potential to provide excellent lightning protection and reduced precipitation static noise.
Termination is via an 'N' female coaxial connector fitted to a short Durathene cable tail. Durathene polyethylene jacketed cable provides superior resistance to weathering and abrasion and is less susceptible to bird attack than standard PVC sheathed cables.
For extreme climatic or corrosive applications, the stainless steel YBSS Series or black ruggedised RDA Series yagis should be considered.
· All welded construction for maximum and reliable performance
· Narrow beamwidths & high front to back ratios effective in reducing interference
· Alodine finish provides an excellent conductive surface for earthing
· Can be configured in stacks or bays for higher gain applications using PH and PHE series phasing harnesses
Bracing kit available Part No. M-4528
54 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
www.rfi.com.au
Page 351 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
UHF Directional Yagi Antennas
Typical VSWR response (YB03-99)
YB03-99 - E Plane
300-600 MHz
YB Series
YB03-99 - H Plane
Typical VSWR response (YB6-61)
YB6-61 - E Plane
YB6-61 - H Plane
Electrical
Model Number Nominal Gain dBi (dBd) Frequency MHz Tuned Bandwidth VSWR (Return Loss) Nominal Impedance Vertical Beamwidth Horizontal Beamwidth Front / Back Ratio dB Input Power W
YB02-99
YB03-99
5 (3)
8 (6)
300 - 600 350 - 600
5%
77°
63°
161°
98°
9
13
YB6-65 400 - 420
YB6-61
YB6-62
11 (9 )
450 - 480 480 - 520
Full band
<1.5 :1 (14dB)
50
47°
56°
18 (Typical)
100
YB6-75 580 - 600
Mechanical
Model Number Construction Length m Weight kg Termination Mounting Area Suggested Clamps Projected No ice Area cm² With ice Wind Load (Thrust) @ 160km/h N Wind Gust Rating km/h Torque @160 km/h Nm
YB02-99 0.6 0.4
283 676 33
6
YB03-99 0.7 0.5
337 811 40
10
YB6-65
YB6-61
YB6-62
All welded aluminium with alodined finish
0.9
1.0
0.8
0.7
0.7
0.6
N female with short 9008 cable tail
100mm x 25mm diam. alodined aluminium
1 X UNV
485
477
394
1169
1099
967
57
56
47
>240
22
24
16
YB6-75 0.8 0.6
349 857 41
13
YB6-99 350 - 600
5%
YB6-99 1.3 0.8
600 1367
71 42
www.rfi.com.au
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
55
Page 352 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
UHF Directional Yagi Antennas
300-600 MHz
YB Series
Typical VSWR response (YB9-61)
YB9-61 - E Plane
YB9-61 - H Plane
Typical VSWR response (YB16-70)
YB16-70 - E Plane
YB16-70 - H Plane
Electrical
Model Number Nominal Gain dBi (dBd) Frequency MHz Tuned Bandwidth VSWR (Return Loss) Nominal Impedance Vertical Beamwidth Horizontal Beamwidth Front / Back Ratio dB Input Power W
YB9-65 YB9-61 YB9-62 YB9-99 YB16-65 YB16-70 YB16-71 YB16-63 YB16-72 YB16-99
13 (11)
14 (12)
400 - 420 450 - 480 480 - 520 400 - 600 400 - 420 450 - 470 470 - 490 480 - 500 500 - 520 400 - 600
Full band
5.0%
Full band
5.0%
<1.5 :1 (14dB)
50
46°
42°
34°
54°
48°
36°
18 (Typical)
100
Mechanical
Model Number Construction Length m Weight kg Termination Mounting Area Suggested Clamps Projected No ice Area cm² With ice
Wind Load (Thrust) @ 160km/h N
Wind Gust Rating km/h Torque @160 km/h Nm
YB9-65
2.0 1.2
859 2078 102 207
92
YB9-61 YB9-62 YB9-99 YB16-65 YB16-70 YB16-71 YB16-63 YB16-72
All welded aluminium with alodined finish
1.8
1.6
2.0
2.5
2.3
2.3
2.2
2.2
1.0
1.0
1.2
1.7
1.5
1.5
1.4
1.4
N female with short 9008 cable tail
100mm x 25mm diam. alodined aluminium
1 X UCR1
1 X UCR1 + 1 x M-4528 bracing kit
771
694
859
1186 1048 1030
989
981
1842 1640 2078 2983 2666 2617 2530 2507
YB16-99 2.5 1.7
1186 2983
91
82
102
141
124
122
117
116
141
220
240
207
147
165
165
173
173
147
75
60
92
165
130
128
117
116
165
56 Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
www.rfi.com.au
Page 353 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual J & P Richardson Industries Pty Ltd
5 SWITCHBOARD WORKS TEST RESULTS
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Revision 0
26/11/2012
Date: 2 July 2012
Page 354 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 355 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 356 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 357 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 358 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 359 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 360 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 361 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 362 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual J & P Richardson Industries Pty Ltd
6 "AS CONSTRUCTED" DRAWINGS
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Revision 0
26/11/2012
Date: 2 July 2012
Page 363 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 364 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 365 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 366 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 367 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 368 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 369 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 370 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 371 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 372 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 373 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 374 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 375 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 376 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 377 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 378 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 379 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 380 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
26/11/2012
Page 381 of 382
WB002 Water Booster Pump Station - Electrical Switchboard - Operation and Maintenance Manual
J & P Richardson Industries Pty Ltd
7 SERVICE & MAINTENANCE
This product is designed to operate under specific environmental, supply and load conditions. Should these conditions change, consult a licenced electrician or electrical engineer before operating this product.
These procedures are to be performed only by a licenced electrician as they may expose live equipment.
The Switchgear and Controlgear Assembly is essentially maintenance free, however the following safety measures and routine maintenance is recommended.
Where fitted, ensure cabinet vents and filters are clear and clean. During operation, ensure all doors and covers are secure and closed. All faults are to be investigated and repaired by an appropriately licenced electrician. All components to be operated in accordance with manufacturers data. The protective devices within switchboards are designed to operate in the event of a short circuit or overload condition. In the event of these devices operating under such conditions the device or devices must be inspected and tested by a suitably trained person to ascertain its condition prior to reconnecting the protective device to the supply.
Periodic checks should ensure
The switchboard is clean and free of any contaminants, which could reduce the insulation properties of the switchboard. All entries are sealed to ensure no vermin can enter. There is no evidence of overheating, arcing or moisture. The earthing system is maintained and is adequate to allow correct operation of protective devices. Insulation resistance is maintained to appropriate levels. Check terminations for correct tension. Test operation of protective devices. Re-calibrate instrument loops as required.
Refer to AS-CONSTRUCTED electrical drawings for details of protection equipment settings.
No special tools or equipment are required to perform routine maintenance.
Q-Pulse Id: TMS196
Revision 0
26/11/2012
Date: 2 July 2012
Page 382 of 382
ScanSoft PDF Create! 6